Home

Roland E-60 User's Manual

1. Here you can listen to the selected tracks specify which excerpt should be extracted and set the pat terns that should contain the selected data The most logical order for proceeding is as follows Press the RECORDER button followed by to start song playback and are also available for rewinding and fast forwarding While listening to the song press the field at the beginning of first measure to be con verted and when the E 60 E 50 reaches the last measure you need Alternatively you can stop playback press the FROM or B display field and enter the measure num ber with the dial or the DEC INC buttons Stop playback by pressing PLAY STOP m s 10 Switch on the button icon This function allows you to listen to the selected excerpt between A and B repeatedly That way you can check whether the last notes of your pattern to be allow for a smooth transition to other Music Style patterns or sound natural when the pattern is repeated Sometimes quantizing the last few notes of an excerpt may be helpful to avoid including notes that were played a little ahead of the beat and therefore sound on the last beat you con vert See page 130 for details 11 Press the RECORDER button to start playback The selected passage is repeated over and over until you stop playback 12 If necessary use the and fields to temporarily switch off or isolate certain tracks This is only for c
2. There are 4 groups DJ GEAR SOUND EFX INSTRUM and CONTROLS 2 Press the field that corresponds to the desired function see below 3 Use the DJ GEAR SOUND EFX and fields to select the remaining groups and assign the desired function as well The assignments of all four groups DJ GEAR SOUND EFX INSTRUM CONTROLS will be written to a User Program one per group so that you can also alter nate between these groups while playing and still use your favorite settings DJ Gear Vinyl RPM Allows you to simulate the sound you hear when manually turning a vinyl record to locate cue the position where you wish to start playback Cutting This is a very powerful filter effect that allows you to suppress the high frequencies in a rhythmic way like a DJ does sometimes TT Motor Simulates the effect you hear when you sud denly stop a turntable the playback speed decreases while the pitch drops and the sound becomes muffled Scratching The D Beam Controller can be used for add ing scratch noises You know what that is don t you Tape Rewind Allows you add the sound you hear when you rewind a cassette tape without stopping playback the music plays backwards and at high speed o Sound EFX Here you can select various noises to be added to your music simply by moving your hand over the D Beam We will not try to describe them Just try them out D BEAM ET
3. 51 Using optional footswitches 54 Sustain Footswitch HOLD aa 54 FOO MEE seeks EER tae eee ES 55 Expression Foot Peddie SS N N 56 oe led de MA AE EE EO EN 57 WMCTIONOMG 2 tau che suse wade AD DE ek Se EE 59 Additional Arranger Style functions 60 Playback functions Style Control 60 Sarung a MUSIC SE es RE ESE ES ER EER EED RE 60 Stopping Style 01 C11 0 ses AA a 60 About Sync Start amp Stop 61 Selecting other Style divisions 61 Other ways of selecting Arranger patterns 61 Bass IG hhaha BAL DODE sos Ah 61 Melody MIJEN E os a nawala aka mat DR adat 62 Linking MELODY INTELL type selection to the Styles Style Melody Intell Link ii 63 Using the Style Cover function siese mhay Ga 63 eee DO SA PAA 64 Saving a Style with a COVER alteration 64 One POUCH occa ia wee seh NE HANGA ees eases KA 65 Ignoring certain One Touch settings Hold 65 Programming your own One Touch settings WRITE 65 More refined Arranger settings 66 Chord rec gnition area ZONE 2 sa as ede se 66 Arranger Type chord mode EKSEGESE 67 ales n es N EE EE a 67 Intro amp Ending Alteration EE ee eae 67 Dynamic Aang Es SEE WEE EG SG GE RE 67 Tempo related settings Arranger Options 68 SC Ve en EESE REEL HE EL AA SE SG DADE se 68 TEMPO CHANGE RITARD and ACCELER 69 Working w
4. 1 0 CC 121 Reset All Ctrl 1 0 CC 10 Pan mVIEW 102 037 CC 91 Reverb Press this button icon if the list has become so long 1 02 00 GE volume E that finding the events you wish to edit takes too a SEE BE long or to ensure that only the event types you need 1802115 Not es z s io can be selected 13 04 010 Note 9 A 4 SB 65 3 Modify the value e Rotate the dial or e Set the value using the DEC INC buttons or e Press the dial and enter the value using the numeric pad that appears in the display The following pop up appears If you choose to work with the numeric pad proceed as follows e Switch on the button icons of events you want to see in the list the icons in question must light 144 e Press the numeric button icons to enter the desired value Use to delete the last figure you entered ii de p E NUHERIC PAD G R EIE aa a e Press the Or field to increase or decrease the current value by 10 e Press to confirm the value or Press to close the numeric pad window with out changing the value 4 Press the DATA ENTRY gt button to select the next value and change it 5 When you re done press the field to return to the main Sequencer page and save your song BUKKE The parameters you can change are Note and velocity messages These messages always come in pairs see the illustration of step 2 above The first value
5. 108 More refined song functions 109 Programming MARK amp JUMP locations 109 Working with the Song Finder 110 Locating files with the Song Finder 110 Editing the Song Finder information 111 Editing an NUE AE aaa EN 113 Play LISETUNGTION 22 2 cits Bak GARA ALA WE ANG KA 115 Programming Play LISIS aaa aa aaa SERE SS EE EER EES 115 Editing Play Lists sees DnE n en n BG BG 116 Using Play LISTS sees se DS ES N de Ed die 118 Managing Play Lists 118 Edit rd RIES a paaa GEE Wi DR NA KANA NA 120 Adding Lyrics to a song EE eee 120 Exporting Lyrics data as text file 122 13 14 15 16 17 E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Roland Using the 16 track sequencer 123 About the sequencer s main page 123 General considerations 123 Example 1 Recording a song from scratch 124 Pre dale sees se bei AA 125 Example 2 Adding tracks 000 ee eee 127 SAVING YOU SONG si ee ee ee ee ee AA 128 Editing 16 track SONGS Ee ee 129 Easy editing and useful functions 129 Editing one or several tracks TRACK EDIT 129 Editing song data using Microscope Edit 143 General notes about MICRO EDIT 2 ii ee ee ee ee 144 Editing events See eee eee eens 145 Other edit operations ie oe n eed 146 SIS CONG AE ON AA a E R 147 General consideratio
6. TULA There are four One Touch memories per Music Style selected for the 136 factory Styles and 80 CUSTOM memo ries Press the field to switch on all HOLD options Press to switch all options off Note The One Touch function is switched off whenever you select a User Program 3 Press the button to return to the main page 2 Select a Style page 25 and start Arranger play back see p 60 3 Play a melody to the accompaniment You will notice that the sound of the UP1 or any other Keyboard part matches the style and mood of the selected Style 4 Select a different Style and again play a solo line the active Keyboard parts now use different sounds 5 Press another ONE TOUCH button 6 Press the same button again if you no longer need the One Touch setting As you see the One Touch memories apply to all Key board parts Note If a One Touch memory is active while you recall a User Program the One Touch function is switched off Wif you select a One Touch memory while another Programming your own One Touch settings WRITE The E 60 E 50 allows you to save your own ONE TOUCH settings for the selected Style This may come in handy for CUSTOM Styles see page 70 for which there are no presets These customized One Touch settings are stored within the Styles themselves 1 Press and hold a ONE TOUCH 1 4 button One Is already active In that case the E 60 E 50 immedi
7. 4 OVERDRIVE GT 2 ACCS F E Pa na Accs ORCHESTRAHIT 3 ACCE 4 CLEA STYLE dl a Back Cool Band 13 Now select the destination pattern i e specify whether the selected excerpt should become a MAIN pattern an Intro etc 14 Press the available display fields and use the dial or the DEC INC buttons to enter the desired value The parameters discussed below can be set for each track and pattern individually Though flexible this system also means that you need to be careful so as to achieve usable results 149 E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Using the 16 track sequencer Key C C D Eb F F G Ab A Bb B Use this parame ter to tell your E 60 E 50 what key the track or tracks is or are in Specifying the right key before converting the data is crucial for realtime use of a pattern The chord recognition system of the Arranger is indeed based on the assumption that all patterns are in the key of C Thus whenever you play a C in INTELLIGENT mode or a C chord in the chord recognition area the E 60 E 50 uses the original notes of the pattern no realtime trans position If that pattern is in F and if you forgot to tell the E 60 E 50 that it is Ff is what you will hear when you play a C or C chord Note There is no need to specify the key for ADR tracks Tempo 20 250 Allows you to specify the default tempo of the Music Style Track ADrum ABass ACC1 6
8. 7 E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Roland Working with external Styles If necessary use the PAGE fields or the dial the DEC INC buttons to select another group of 5 Styles Note If you can t seem to find the Style you wish to assign and if you know it exists in the selected memory area check the FOUND value It should indicate the same figure as the GLOBAL entry You can also use the Finder for locating the desired Style See p 73 for details Note It is perfectly possible to use older Styles with the E 60 E 50 They are automatically converted to the new VARI ATION 1 4 system Press the field The E 60 E 50 returns to the STYLE page The name of the selected Style appears in the field you selected before pressing the button You could now program other assignments if you wanted to Note CUSTOM assignments are stored internally but they are not part of the User Programs Thus you can only program 80 links in all rather than 80 per User Program Note CUSTOM settings reside in a global memory whose con tents are saved together with all User Program Set data Use Save User Program Set on p 177 for saving the settings Selecting CUSTOM Style memories 1 The Style names are important for locating the Styles If you change the name of a Music Style that Is refer enced by one of the CUSTOM memories the E 60 E 50 no longer finds it Conversely if you have two memory cards th
9. 04 060 Tempo Change COPY 02 000 Tempo Change 52 EVENT 02 060 Tempo Change 46 03 000 Tempo Change 140 PLACE 3 EVENT amp Dea This page lists all events already present on the MAS TER track It allows you to modify the existing data to delete data you do not need and to add informa tion that is missing To avoid unpleasant surprises be sure to save your song before editing the MASTER track Note To leave this page either press the field return to the seguencer s main page or the button return to the E 60 E 50 s main page Editing existing events The MASTER track of each Standard MIDI File con tains at least the following information Tempo This is the Tempo Change value located at 1 01 000 It cannot be erased Time signature This is the Beat Change value located at 1 01 000 It cannot be erased SysEx The SysEx string located close to the beginning of the song It tells the sound source what format is being used how the effects processors should be set types parameter settings etc Song length The End of Data value refers to the posi tion of the last event which can be located on any track and thus to the end of the song This value cannot be edited manually You can however extend the song by recording additional data or by inserting blank measures page 134 To change information already available on the MAS TER track proceed as follows 1
10. Arr M Bass Allows you to set the Arranger Chord parameter to Off chord recognition plus ABS recogni tion off see p 66 and at the same time activate the KBD MODE button and the MBS part and vice versa Piano Standard You can alternate between Standard and Piano Style Arranger Chord modes When the former is selected the chord recognition area page 67 is automatically set to LEFT When you switch to Piano Style the chord recognition area is automatically set to WHOLE Furthermore the KBD MODE button is switched on and the Upper 1 part is activated if it was off Half Bar on Fill In The footswitch allows you to switch the Half Bar function on and off Certain pop songs in 4 4 contain bars that only last two beats The usual place for such a bar is between the first and the second verse This does not change Style playback right away Pressing the footswitch does not change Style playback right away Only when a Fill In or another MAIN division starts will the Half Bar function be activated and play half the number of beats of the accompaniment pattern you selected Arranger Hold Allows you to switch the Arranger Hold function on and off See p 67 Dynamic Arranger Allows you to switch the Dynamic Arranger function on and off See page 67 for details Rotary Slow Fast Allows you to select the slow or fast speed of the Rotary effect This only works if the Rotary effect is currently assigne
11. 2 Arranger Style section Left hand Right hand melody Arranger control Keyboard parts Left hand Right hand melody Arranger control Keyboard parts The Arranger is your backing band It plays an accom paniment called Music Style In a way the Arranger works like a drum machine because it uses accompa niment patterns Unlike a drum machine however you can easily select the desired pattern while playing So you do not need to program the order in which you intend to use the patterns Furthermore the Arranger not only provides a rhythm section but also chords gui tar and synthesizer riffs and so on The accompani ment can be transposed in realtime All you have to do is play a different chord usually with your left hand That s how it s called on the front panel so we ll stick to it This section actually encompasses a 16 track sequencer a Straightforward MIDI recording function and a very sophisticated Standard MIDI File player with a host of all realtime control functions Playing to an automatic accompa niment Let us begin with the automatic accompaniment func tion which is called Arranger and often referred to as Style in the display and on the front panel The Arranger is an interactive playback sequencer that provides the accompaniments These accompaniments are called Music Styles because the musical phrases patterns they play concentrate on a given
12. TUNING Gim Ger GLOBAL TRANSPOSE ai Clee 3 Use the and fields to transpose the E 60 E 50 s pitch The setting range is 6 0 5 semitones This setting applies to all sections and all User Programs Octave The Octave function is another useful parameter that allows you to change the pitch of the selected part in octave steps 12 semitones at a time You could take advantage of this function for solo parts where you need the UP1 and UP2 parts to trigger the same Tone while UP2 plays one octave above or below UP1 Another use for this function is to provide access to the noises of the E 60 E 50 s new Tones so as to be able to trigger the scraping knocking etc This probably only works when you use a Keyboard part MBS LWR UP2 UP1 if the keyboard is not split page 47 Working in SPLIT mode indeed means that you can only play the notes up to a certain point the split point For the noises you need to select the set ting 3 Note that this also means that you need to play the real notes at the right end of the keyboard because the entire part Tone is transposed down TI OAVE 0 EE Ss C2 C3 OCTAVE 1 EE oe C2 This parameter also comes in handy when you wish to trigger Drum Set sounds that are not accessible via the keyboard in its normal state Remember that there are 61 E 50 or 76 keys E 60 while some Drum Sets provide drum percussion sounds for all
13. The division type also determines how the respective tracks are played back Any track of a looped pattern that is shorter than another track is repeated until the longest track is finished Then a new cycle begins Here s how you can take advantage of that if the drums play the same notes during four measures while the rhythm guitar or piano needs four mea sures to complete a cycle recording only one drum measure is enough because it is automatically repeated until the longest track is finished 1 DI E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Programming Styles Style Composer Recording Styles from scratch Important remark Style recording and editing is carried out in the E 60 E 50 s Style RAM memory When you leave Style Composer mode after recording or editing a Style by pressing EXIT the display warns you that you need to save your Style If you haven t yet done so you Should take advantage of this security system SHALES OUWZAYTER Press the field to save your Style see page 157 for details or if you think that is not necessary Starting the Style Composer 1 Press the button 2 Press the STYLE COMPOSER field STYLE COMPOSER ADRUMS 4 POFt SON HERET BE 152 Clearing the RAM memory Initialize Style The first thing we need to do is clear the E 60 E 50 s Style RAM memory because it is not empty when you select the STYLE COMPOSER 3 Press the field in the right col u
14. Chorus Pre Delay 0 0 100 0ms Adjusts the delay between the incoming direct signal and the moment when the chorus starts working Chorus Rate 0 05 10 0Hz Modulation frequency of the chorus effect Chorus Depth 0 127 Modulation intensity of the cho rus effect Chorus Balance D100 0W D50 50W DO 100W Vol ume balance between the direct sound D and the chorus sound W Flanger Pre Delay 0 0 100 0ms Adjusts the delay time from when the direct sound begins until the flanger sound is heard Flanger Rate 0 05 10 0Hz Modulation frequency of the flanger effect Flanger Depth 0 127 Modulation intensity of the flanger effect Flanger Feedback 98 0 98 Adjusts the propor tion of the flanger sound that is fed back into the effect Negative settings will invert the phase Flanger Balance D100 0W D50 50W DO 100W Volume balance between the direct sound D and the flanger sound W Level 0 127 Output level E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Roland Appendix 207 E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Appendix 21 MIDI Implementation Chart Music Workstation Date May 2006 Model E 60 E 50 Version 1 00 Basic Default ede lede lee Parts Basic Channel Channel Changed 1 16 Off 1 16 Off NTAT NTA2 Mode 3 Mode 3 Mode 3 4 M 1 Mode 3 4 M 1 Default Message Altered KKKKK Note 0 127 0 127 Number True Voice Aa 0 127 Note ON VeIGGIy Note OFF After Key s
15. ENG dd Are you sure 3 If you want the E 60 E 50 to set most parameters for you press one of the TEMPLATES fields Here is what the options mean ORCHESTR Selects orchestral sounds suitable for classi cal music and film scores BAROQUE Selects instrument sounds suitable for chamber music ROCK Selects sounds suitable for rock music FOLK Selects sounds suitable for folk music COUNTRY Selects sounds suitable for country music ELECTRONIC Selects sounds suitable for dance music POP Selects sounds often used in pop arrange ments JAZZ Selects sounds suitable for jazz combos ETHNIC Selects sounds suitable for world music 4 Press the following three fields and enter the desired values using the dial or the DECJ INC buttons Tempo Allows you to specify the initial tempo of the new song J 20 250 Choose a tempo that is comfort able for recording You can set the final tempo by editing the MASTER track see p 139 or by recording it after activating the TEMPO REC SW parameter see p 126 Time Signature BEAT If your new song uses the 4 4 time signature there is no need to change this value Otherwise enter the desired time signature 1 2 32 16 The warning alerts you to the fact that pressing may have disastrous consequences See Saving your song on p 128 if you still need to save your previous song Mi Using two drum tracks The E 60 E 50 allows you to use as many drum tracks as y
16. General note about the E 50 s menu When you press the E 60 s button the display looks as follows MENU GUITAR EE SETTING FUNCTION Ee HAND lt USB DATA CONTROLLERS STORAGE M D BEAM The E 50 on the other hand doesn t have a D Beam controller which is why its MENU page looks as fol lows MENU GUITAR FUNCTION 4 of eeuse DATA a aa STORAGE E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Quick Start Quick Start In this chapter we will scratch the surface and walk you through the major functions 3 Recorder section The general idea Your E 60 E 50 is several instruments in one There are three main sections you can use for playing live 1 Keyboard parts This section consists of parts you need to play via the keyboard hence the name Keyboard The E 60 E 50 provides five Keyboard parts four of which can be used simultaneously UP1 UP2 LWR and MBS UP stands for Upper and refers to the right half if there is a split LWR refers to Lower and thus to the left half MBS is short for Manual Bass i e a monophonic bass part whose notes depend on the chords you play There is no Manual Drum part because any of the parts just mentioned can be used to play a Drum Set The fifth part MELODY INT is what computer buffs would call a cross platform part it belongs to the Keyboard section but it is in part controlled by the Arranger See Melody Intelligence on page 62
17. Before using floppy disks handling the floppy disk drive e Install the E 60 E 50 on a solid level surface in an area free from vibration If the unit must be installed at an angle be sure the installation does not exceed the permissible range upward 2 downward 18 e Avoid using the E 60 E 50 immediately after it has been moved to a location with a level of humidity that is greatly different than its former location Rapid changes in the environment can cause con densation to form inside the drive which will adversely affect the operation of the drive and or damage floppy disks When the unit has been moved allow it to become accustomed to the new envi ronment allow a few hours before operating it e To insert a disk push it gently but firmly into the drive it will click into place To remove a disk press the EJECT button firmly Do not use excessive force to remove a disk which is lodged in the drive e Never attempt to remove a floppy disk from the drive while the drive is operating the indicator is lit damage could result to both the disk and the drive e Remove any disk from the drive before powering up or down e To prevent damage to the disk drive s heads always try to hold the floppy disk in a level position not tilted in any direction while inserting it into the drive Push it in firmly but gently Never use excessive force e To avoid the risk of malfunction and or damage insert only floppy disks
18. Factory data The E 60 E 50 s factory data User Programs MIDI Sets Styles can be found on the supplied CD ROM Please see the instructions in the document called Recovery PC htmI or Recovery_Mac html on that CD ROM depending on the computer system you are using for how to proceed Always make a backup copy of the E 60 E 50 s inter nal memory before transferring data from the CD ROM because the contents of the E 60 E 50 s internal memory is erased System updates The supplied CD ROM also contains two files called SystemUpdate_PC html and SystemUpdate Mac html that explain how to install a new system version you may have down loaded from www rolandkeyboardclub com E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Roland The how to s MIDI MIDI is short for Musical Instrument Digital Interface The acronym refers to many things the most obvious being a connector type that is used by musical instruments and other devices to exchange messages relating to the act of making music When you play on the E 60 E 50 s keyboard or start song or Style playback your instrument transmits MIDI data to its MIDI OUT socket or to the USB port If you connect that socket to the MIDI IN socket of another instrument the external instrument may play the same notes as one of the E 60 E 50 s parts select sounds etc MIDI is a universal standard which means that musical data can be sent to and received by instruments of different types and manu
19. N About V LINK V LINK KAFAES is a function that provides for the integration of music and visual material By using V LINK compatible video devices i e an Edirol DV 7PR visual effects can be easily linked to and made part of the expressive elements of a perfor mance By using the E 60 E 50 with an Edirol DV 7PR you can Use the E 60 E 50 s keyboard highest octave to switch images clips Press and hold a key for longer transitions fades Briefly press a key for fast tran sitions Use the BENDER axis of the BENDER MODULATION lever to change the playback speed of the picture material or to select a different color Use the D Beam controller E 60 to control several effects this depends on the function you assign to the D Beam see below V Link signals are transmitted via MIDI OUT 1 Connect the E 60 E 50 s MIDI OUT socket to the USB port of the video processor via an optional UM 1 interface PUSIO 20m asd mana a Ca ea No oO cee Gag WANT wut gj MIDI OUT i hi Edirol UM 1 Edirol DV 7PR Projector Monitor E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Roland Using V LINK 2 Press the button it lights 3 The keys in the highest octave now act as controllers and no longer play notes If you prefer to work with the following display page press and hold the button VALI INIT ALL VALUES Di Yo
20. Roland Scandinavia As Filial Finland Elannontie 5 FIN 01510 Vantaa FINLAND TEL 0 9 68 24 020 GERMANY Roland Elektronische Musikinstrumente HmbH Oststrasse 96 22844 Norderstedt GERMANY TEL 040 52 60090 GREECE CYPRUS STOLLAS S A Music Sound Light 155 New National Road Patras 26442 GREECE TEL 2610 435400 HUNGARY Roland East Europe Ltd Warehouse Area DEPO Pf 83 H 2046 Torokbalint HUNGARY TEL 23 511011 IRELAND Roland Ireland G2 Calmount Park Calmount Avenue Dublin 12 Republic of IRELAND TEL 01 4294444 ITALY Roland Italy S p A Viale delle Industrie 8 20020 Arese Milano ITALY TEL 02 937 78300 NORWAY Roland Scandinavia Avd Kontor Norge Lilleakerveien 2 Postboks 95 Lilleaker N 0216 Oslo NORWAY TEL 2273 0074 POLAND MX MUSIC SP Z O O UL Gibraltarska 4 PL 03664 Warszawa POLAND TEL 022 679 44 19 PORTUGAL Roland Iberia S L Portugal Office Cais das Pedras 8 9 1 Dto 4050 465 Porto PORTUGAL TEL 22 608 00 60 ROMANIA FBS LINES Piata Libertatii 1 535500 Gheorgheni ROMANIA TEL 266 364 609 RUSSIA MuTek Dorozhnaya ul 3 korp 6 117 545 Moscow RUSSIA TEL 095 981 4967 SPAIN Roland Iberia S L Paseo Garcia Faria 33 35 08005 Barcelona SPAIN TEL 93 493 91 00 SWEDEN Roland Scandinavia A S SWEDISH SALES OFFICE Danvik Center 28 2 tr S 131 30 Nacka SWEDEN TEL 0 8 702 00 20 SWITZERLAND Roland Switzerland A
21. This explanation applies to the Auto setting You can also specify whether or not the Melody Intelli gence function MELODY INTELL should respond to Hold messages Note Do not forget to connect an optional DP 2 DP 6 or BOSS FS 5U footswitch to the HOLD socket 1 Press the button AA ARRANGER 7 SETTING EF FUNCTION a lee svsenaraf EE EES STORAGE nosh nosh 2 Press the field followed by the HOLD FOOTSW field f Auto 3 Use the PART fields to select the Keyboard part whose HOLD setting you want to change 4 Use the dial or the DEC INC but tons to select the function HOLD ASSIGN Auto means that the part in question only responds to Hold messages if it is assigned to the right half or the entire keyboard On means that the part in question always responds to Hold messages even if it is assigned to the left half of the keyboard Off finally means that the part does not respond to Hold messages 5 If necessary press another PART field and change the HOLD ASSIGN setting for the selected part 6 Press the button to return to the main page Foot Switch gt Important remark The settings below are only used if you connect an optional DP 2 DP 6 or BOSS FS 5U footswitch to the FOOTSWITCH EXPRESSION socket If you choose to connect an expression pedal instead see Expression Foot Pedal on p 56 A second footswitch in addition
22. i BEAT CPT do 0019 A 19 03 030 Note 95 78 91 19 04 010 Note 69 A 4 65 EVENT amp e Specify the position to which the first event in chro nological order of the selected group should be shifted by pressing the BAR and fields and entering the desired value for each unit using the dial or the DEC INC buttons e Press the field to confirm your settings and move the event Press to close the pop up window without applying your changes Mi COPY EVENT This function allows you to copy one or several events Use PLACE EVENT to insert a copy of those events at the desired position h 1 0 CC 121 Reset All Ctrl 1 02 035 CC 10 Pan 1 02 036 CC 93 Chorus 20 1 02 037 CC 391 Reverb 74 1 02 038 CC 11 Expression 127 1 02 040 CC 7 Volume 1 02 041 Pitch Bend 0 1 02 042 CC 0 Bank Select MSB 0 1 02 043 Program Change 74 19 02 077 Note 65F4 100 11 19 02 115 Note 83 18 19 03 030 Note 67 G 4 95 79 19 04 010 Note 69 A 4 91 65 PLACE Note For this function you could take advantage of the VIEW filter to avoid selecting event types that should not be included in the copy See VIEW on p 141 e To select several consecutive events press the dial while turning it towards the left upward direction or the right downward direction All events selected in this way appear on a dark back ground e Press the COPY EVENT button Icon
23. table replaces the old notes Press one of the note icons to specify the duration of the note s shown in the table This is possible both before and after playing the required note s on the keyboard Press the field to confirm your settings and add the new note or chord W ERASE EVENT Use the dial or the a buttons to select the event you want to delete To select several consecutive events press the dial while turning it towards the left upward direction or the right downward direction Press the button icon to remove the event you selected N MOVE EVENT This function allows you to move one or several events Note If the position to which you move the selected event already contains other events the moved event is added at the end of that group Select the event you want to move Note For this function you could take advantage of the VIEW filter to avoid selecting event types that should remain where they are See VIEW on p 144 Note Events located at 1 01 00 cannot be moved further to the left To select several consecutive events press the dial while turning it towards the left upward direction or the right downward direction All events selected in this way appear on a dark back ground e Press the button icon The following pop up appears MINERO Shy N5 Note Number 1 02 033 CC 121 Reset All Ctrl 0 CREATE i MOVE EVENT JJ TO
24. 14 Specify how long the count in should be before recording starts press the CO UNT IN field and use the DATA ENTRY dial or the DECJ INC buttons to select one of the following options Off No count in Recording starts as soon as you press the button while flashes 1 Meas Recording starts after a 1 bar count in 2 Meas Recording starts after a 2 bar count in Wait Note Recording starts as soon as you play a note on the keyboard There will be no count in 15 If you want to record tempo changes press the field and use the DEC INC but tons to select On 126 This option allows you to use the TEMPO buttons and or to vary the tempo while recording Those changes are recorded to the MASTER track 16 Press the field and set the desired resolution Quantize corrects the timing of your notes by shift ing them to the nearest grid mark Use the dial or the DEC INC buttons to spec ify the number of steps per measure i e the resolu tion Here is an example 1 2 3 4 1 This is how you played it 1 2 3 4 1 1 2 3 4 1 The setting range is Off 1 4 1 8 1 8T 1 16 1 16T 1 32 1 32T and 1 64 As this Quantize function changes the way in which your notes are recorded you may want to select Off here The 16 track sequencer has a second Quantize function that you can use more selectively i e for notes that are defi nitely late early See p 130 17 Specify what should be rec
25. 2 Turn the lever to the left to temporarily lower the pitch of the notes you are playing Turn it to the right to raise the pitch of your notes The Pitch Bend interval Range is preset to 2 semi tones 3 Release the lever if you no longer need the effect Transposition If you are used to playing a song in a particular key the Transpose function will help you go on playing in that key while sounding in another one That way you can accompany a singer or instrument without changing your fingering 1 Press the button or press the field on the main page MASTER TUNE 2 In the display press the key that corresponds to the note you would like to hear each time you play a C Note Selecting 0 means that the transposition is off Your setting can however be written to a User Program page 88 3 Press the and or field to switch it on These fields allow you to specify which parts should be affected by the Transpose setting KEYBOARD The Keyboard parts are transposed Since the Arranger s key depends on the notes you play on the keyboard the Arranger parts are also transposed Note Transposition never applies to a part that uses a Drum Set or the drum part of a song SONG During Recorder playback only the song parts during Recorder playback are transposed Though it is perfectly possible to switch on both options at least one of them must be on KEY BOARD could be useful for transp
26. ARTIST or field and enter the desired characters See page 177 for how to enter characters Note The E 60 E 50 supports both upper and lower case let ters for file names So choose whichever is more convenient or clear Note The E 60 E 50 allows you to use long file names but some windows are relatively short so that only part of the names can be displayed We therefore suggest using short file names maximum 18 characters whenever possible Press the field to confirm your settings and rename the file Note Never remove the floppy disk or memory card while the operation is in progress Wait for the confirmation to appear before returning to business as usual 10 Press the button to return to the main page AMIDISET USER 5 The display changes to its field Jae sj ron S i att ries Datars SONG INT MEM From EA NT FERGET IFROM UBD rory osk CO MO femmes MEMORY E MISREAD MISRERD MID A Ay KSLROCK2 Cool Live Band MORY p d i 64 ige 100 i101 ERT MEI op New Song iNEWSONG MID Ei UDA H Groovy Rock se For User Program Set and MIDI Set files the display looks as follows Deters Mle sey e mi 2 J i Vel ape Use HOS Sel FLO Factory Live 2004 My User Program 5 Select the media INTERNAL MEMORY FLOPPY disk or memory card 6 If available and necessary use the sorting func tions and or the Fi
27. BI CHANNEL 1 16 Allows you to assign a MIDI receive channel to the selected part The default settings usually work best but you are most welcome to change them Note Unless you have a very good reason to do otherwise we suggest using the same TX and RX channel numbers for a part Note Assigning the same channel to two or more parts is usu ally not a very good idea BISHIFT 48 48 This parameter allows you to transpose the received note messages before sending them to the E 60 E 50 s tone generator The maximum possible transposition is four octaves up 48 or down 48 Each step represents a semi tone LIMIT HIGH LIMIT LOW C G9 LIMIT HIGH and LIMIT LOW allow you to set the note range to be received If not all note messages received on a given MIDI channel should be played by the selected E 60 E 50 part narrow down the range Note The LOW LIMIT value cannot be higher value than HIGH LIMIT and vice versa RX EVENT The data filters of the RX section allow you to specify whether ON or not OFF the messages in question should be received Press the field to open the following pop up window MUG Seay f VENDADON f erir i I cane i f evere mM i RX EVENTS f f 7 EI PANPOT HOLD RPN EIE G G a DER PRESS SOST NRPN f f SOFT SYSER G G CAF cots cLose Gi rr O The RX events are the same as the IX events except for the CAF parameter reception of Channel After
28. Editing events W Editing Pitch Bend messages Pitch Bend messages can be positive or negative the range is 128 128 The value O means that the pitch of notes being played in that area Is not altered If a Pitch Bend occurrence is not reset to 0 at some stage all notes will keep sounding flat when you no longer want them to Mi Editing control changes and aftertouch messages These messages CC Poly Aftertouch and Channel Aftertouch can be set to the desired value 0 127 when the corresponding effect is needed but they also need to be reset to O to avoid unpleasant sur prises The E 60 E 50 s keyboard does not generate Poly or Channel Aftertouch messages but its sound source understands them Poly Aftertouch messages are always related to a given note which Is why you first need to tell the sequencer which note the event applies to O C 127 G9 Next specify the desired Aftertouch value 0 127 N About the Note messages As stated above note messages comprise a note number a velocity value and a Gate Time value The range for note numbers is O C 127 G9 Velocity messages can be set anywhere between 1 extremely soft and 127 The value O cannot be entered because it would effectively switch off the note After selecting the Gate Time entry pressing the dial calls up the following pop up SERS Shy GATE TINE EDIT Here you can either set the required length as a CPT v
29. Note Number 127 G9 refers to the note itself and the second On Velocity 127 to the velocity playing dynamics The MICRO EDIT page adds a third message to that pair 65535 It describes the duration of the note in ques tion You may remember this value from the TRACK EDIT environment where it is called Gate Time Control Change These messages usually add some thing to the notes being played like modulation a dif ferent volume a new stereo position The E 60 E 50 recognizes all available control change numbers CCOO 127 and displays their official name wherever possible not all control change numbers have universally accepted functions The value can be set between O and 127 Program Change These messages are used for select ing sounds within the current bank 1 128 Pitch Bend These messages are used for temporary changes to the pitch of the notes being played at that time Pitch Bend messages can be positive higher or negative lower Setting range 128 128 Poly Aftertouch This refers to aftertouch messages the E 60 E 50 does not generate Its sound source recog nizes them however The difference between polyphonic aftertouch and channel aftertouch is that the former is related to a single note while the latter applies to all the notes the track is currently playing Channel Aftertouch See above E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Roland Editing song data using Microscope Edit
30. Stereo signals like certain piano sounds are thus not combined to a mono signal before being processed FO Low Frequency 200 400Hz Frequency of the low range you wish to boost or cut FO Low Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the low range Negative values reduce the level FO High Frequency 2000 4000 8000Hz Frequency of the high range you wish to boost or cut FO High Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the high range Negative values reduce the level FO Mid 1 Frequency 200 8000Hz Frequency of the middle range 1 you wish to boost or cut This is a paramet ric EQ band FO Mid 1 Q 0 5 1 0 2 0 4 0 8 0 Width of the middle range 1 Set a higher value for Q to narrow the range to be boosted or cut FO Mid 2 Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of middle range 1 FO Mid 2 Frequency 200 8000Hz Frequency of the middle range 2 you wish to boost or cut This is a paramet ric EQ band FO Mid 2 Q 0 5 1 0 2 0 4 0 8 0 Width of the middle range 2 Set a higher value for Q to narrow the range to be boosted or cut FO Mid 2 Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the middle range 2 Level 0 127 Output level Use this parameter to com pensate for exaggerated level differences resulting from the settings you made 3 Overdrive Creates a soft distortion similar to that produced by vacuum tube amplifiers Drive 0 127 Degree of distortion Also changes the vol ume Panpot L64 0 63R Stereo loc
31. TRANSPOSE is also useful for the AccDrums track It allows you to select another snare or kick sound for exam ple N MODE Allows you to select the Mode to be edited Major minor or 7th EI DIVISION Use this parameter to select the Division you want to edit Intro 14 Main 1 4 Fill Dwn 1 3 Fill Up 153 End 154 BVALUE 127 127 This is where you can set the transposition interval in semi tone steps Select 2 for example to transpose pattern in ToD Note Be careful when applying Transpose to the AccDrums track Transposing all notes of this track leads to dramatic changes MFROM NOTE 0 C 127 G9 This parameter allows you to set the note or lower limit of the note range to be modified within the specified FROM TO time range It is not displayed when you select EQUAL UNEQUAL HIGHER or LOWER See also Fine tuning the note range on p 164 WTO NOTE O C 127 G9 This parameter allows you to set the upper limit of the note range to be modified within the specified FROM TO time range WE EXECUTE Press this field to confirm your settings and edit the data CHANGE VELO N NE TE EN LESSE AE IE Tne CHANGE VELO function allows you to modify the dynamics called velocity of a track or excerpt See p 135 for details Only note events can be changed MTRACK ADrums Acc6 ALL Allows you to select the track you wish to edit You can also select ALL here in which case the opera
32. by the way means that the simulated plectrum or thumb fin ger moves from the upper part of the guitar the low E string towards the floor Strum down slow 4 strings Eb4 This is similar to the above except that only four notes are played Fifth of the chord Ab4 This key plays the fifth of the last chord you specified the G of a C chord for exam ple Consider combining it with the next function for popular guitar licks based on the alternation between the root and the fifth You can also play them together of course Root of the chord Bb4 Unlike the B3 or the F 4 this key always sounds the root note of the last chord you specified i e a C for a C chord an E for an E chord etc Leaving the E 60 E 50 s Guitar mode To leave the Guitar mode press any EASY SETTING ARR or PIANO button or the switch icon on the GUITAR MODE page to select OFF Alternatively you can select a User Program that doesn t use the Guitar mode see p 89 Selecting guitar sounds Now that you know how to use some of the Guitar functions lets try these technigues with different sounds Additional playing technigues are discussed under Using the available STRUMM techniques on p 31 1 Press the EASY SETTING button Note You can also select this page by pressing button GUITAR MODE In that case you may need to switch the Guitar mode on using the switch icon see below The indicators of t
33. 0 127 Output level Use this parameter to com pensate for exaggerated level differences resulting from the settings you made 6 Spectrum Spectrum is a type of filter that modifies the timbre by boost ing or cutting the level at specific frequencies Spectrum 250Hz Gain 15dB 0 15aB Spectrum 500Hz Gain 15dB 0 15dB Spectrum 1000Hz Gain 15dB 0 15dB Spectrum 1250Hz Gain 15dB 0 15dB Spectrum 2000Hz Gain 15dB 0 15dB Spectrum 3150Hz Gain 15dB 0 15dB Spectrum 4000Hz Gain 15dB 0 15dB Spectrum 8000Hz Gain 15dB 0 15dB frequency band Spectrum Band Width Q 0 5 1 0 2 0 4 0 8 0 Simulta neously adjusts the width of the adjusted ranges for all the frequency bands Panpot L64 0 63R Stereo location of the output sound This is a mono effect that combines incoming sig nals You can however place the processed signal any where between the left and right channels Level 0 127 Output level Use this parameter to com pensate for exaggerated level differences resulting from the settings you made et ee N N ee A ryd Gain of each 7 Enhancer This effect controls the overtone structure of the high fre quencies adding sparkle and tightness to the sound Enhancer Sens 0 127 Sensitivity of the enhancer Mix Level 0 127 Level of the overtones generated by the enhancer FO Low Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the low range FO High Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of
34. 0001 00 000 0001 00 000 E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Roland Style Track Edit functions CPT This field allows you to fine tune the length In most cases you will probably work with multiples of J notes i e 120CPT because 120CPT represent one beat of an X 4 bar 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 etc Note To change the CPT length of all three Modes switch on all three CPT fields then set the value N MODE Use these button icons to choose the Modes to which the new length setting should apply You can also switch on two or all three button icons Note If you set TRACK to ALL all three Modes are selected automatically and that cannot be changed WE EXECUTE Press this field to confirm your settings and edit the data TIME SIGNAT me fm fees karaang femman AN ESE ESE SSE SIE N TIME SIGNATURE INTRO aang O 44 6 44 amp 44 Dan MAIN O 44 Bus BUL OM FILL DOWN LL O 44 Bus amp 44 FILL UP ms O O 44 Bas Bas j F B B ENDING O44 B 44 B 44 O 4 The TIME SIGNAT page allows you to check and set the time signature of the patterns The major minor and seventh Modes of a pattern must always use the same time signature which is why you cannot edit them separately Use this parameter to specify the time signature of the selected pattern DIVISION see below The MAIN INTRO and ENDING instances comprise four varia tions which is why there are four TIME SIGN values you can select using
35. Adjusts the delay between the incoming direct signal and the moment when the chorus starts working Chorus Rate 0 05 10 0Hz Frequency i e modulation speed Chorus Depth 0 127 Modulation intensity Chorus Balance D100 0W D50 50W DO 100W Vol ume balance between the direct sound D and the chorus sound W Level 0 127 Output level 31 DST Hanger This effect connects distortion and a flanger effect in series Distortion Drive 0 127 Degree of distortion Also changes the volume Distortion Panpot L64 0 63R Stereo location of the distortion sound Flanger Pre Delay 0 0 100 0ms Adjusts the delay time from when the direct sound begins until the flanger sound is heard Flanger Rate 0 05 10 0Hz Frequency i e modulation speed Flanger Depth 0 127 Modulation intensity Flanger Feedback 98 0 98 Adjusts the propor tion of the flanger sound that is fed back into the effect Negative settings will invert the phase Flanger Balance D100 0W D50 50W DO 100W Volume balance between the direct sound D and the flanger sound W Level 0 127 Output level E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Roland Appendix 32 DST Delay This effect connects distortion and a delay effect in series Distortion Drive 0 127 Degree of distortion Also changes the volume Distortion Panpot L64 0 63R Stereo location of the distortion sound Delay Time 0 0 500
36. Chorus Pre Delay 0 0 100 0ms Adjusts the delay between the incoming direct signal and the moment when the chorus starts working Chorus Rate 0 05 10 0Hz Frequency i e modulation speed Chorus Depth 0 127 Modulation intensity Chorus Pre Delay Deviation 0 20 Adjusts the differ ences in Pre Delay between each chorus line there are six of them Chorus Depth Deviation 20 0 20 Adjusts the differ ence in modulation depth between each chorus sound Chorus Pan Deviation 0 20 Adjusts the distribution of the various chorus lines in the stereo image 0 All chorus sounds are in the center 20 Each chorus sound will be spaced at 60 degree intervals relative to the center Balance D100 0W D50 50W DO 100W Volume bal ance between the direct D and the effect sound W Level 0 127 Output level 13 Trem Chorus This is a chorus effect with added Tremolo cyclic modulation of volume Chorus Pre Delay 0 0 100 0ms Adjusts the delay between the incoming direct signal and the moment when the chorus starts working Chorus Rate 0 05 10 0Hz Frequency i e modulation speed Chorus Depth 0 127 Modulation intensity Tremolo Rate 0 05 10 0Hz Modulation frequency of the tremolo effect Tremolo Separation 0 127 Allows you to set the level of the tremolo effect with respect to the chorus modula tion Tremolo Phase 0 180 deg Spread of the tremolo effect O
37. Each new selection will replace the previous one BI PLACE EVENT This function is only available if the sequencer s clip board already contains events that you copied using COPY EVENT For safety reasons it would be a good idea to use this function immediately after copying events E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Roland Style Converter Press the button icon The following pop up appears MINERO Spy Note Number 1 02 033 CC 121 Reset All Ctrl 0 PLACE EVENT TO amo D oe 19 03 030 Note 67 G 4 95 79 19 04 010 Note 69 4 4 31 65 e Specify the position where the first event you copied should be inserted by pressing the BAR and fields and entering the desired value for each unit using the dial or the DEC INC buttons Press the field to confirm your settings and add the new event s Press to close the pop up window without applying your changes Note Events inserted with PLACE EVENT are added to any events that may already exist in that area Existing events are thus not pushed towards the end of the song 2j o PLACE EVENT amp Style Converter The E 60 E 50 s Style Converter is an easy and intuitive tool for creating your own Music Styles based on one of your own songs or a Standard MIDI File created by someone else In either case it is enough to play back the Standard MIDI File once to transfer its data to the E 60 E 50 s song RAM memory where you can use the Style C
38. GAI KU Ce BTRACK AL 1 16 Allows you to select the track you wish to edit You can also select ALL here in which case the operation applies to all tracks EB FROM BAR 1 last measure of the track or song Refers to the first measure to be edited By default the FROM value is set to the beginning of the selected track s BEAT 1 number of beats per bar Specifies the beat position The number of available beats depends on the time signature in the selected area CPT 1 119 Refers to the starting CPT position CPT is short for Clock Pulse Time the smallest unit used by the E 60 E 50 There are 120 CPTs to every beat of a 4 4 bar Change this setting only if your edit operation should start after the selected beat WTO By default the TO position is set to the last event of the selected track or the last event of the longest track when you select ALL BAR 1 last measure of the track or song This is where you specify the bar position of the last measure to be edited BEAT 1 number of beats per bar Specifies the beat position The number of available beats depends on the time signature in the selected area CPT 1 119 Refers to the last clock that should be affected by the edit operation Change this setting only if your edit operation should not end exactly on the selected beat W EXECUTE Press this field to confirm your settings
39. If ALTERATION is off the Arranger only switches to the special chord once the Intro Ending is finished 1 Select the ARRANGER CHORD page see step 1 of Chord recognition area ZONE on p 66 2 Press the button icon to switch that function off dark or on lights 3 Press the button to return to the main page or continue with the next step Dynamic Arranger The DYNAMIC ARRANGER function allows you to con trol the volume and timbre of the Arranger parts via the way you Strike the keys in the chord recognition area velocity sensitivity 1 Select the ARRANGER CHORD page see step 1 of Chord recognition area ZONE on p 66 ARRANGER SETTING RANGER ARRANGER MELODY ONE ORC Q OPTIONS La INTEL TYPE TOUCH ZONE TYPE HODE LEFT M _ od RIGHT EBM ses 2 Press the button icon to switch the Arranger s velocity sensitivity off dark or on lights G 7 E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Additional Arranger Style functions 3 4 5 6 7 This function only becomes meaningful if you also specify how the various Arranger parts should respond to your velocity Press the field The display changes to Ge Aas BT Co Ed Ed kaa 4 ea Press the field of the Arranger part whose velocity sensitivity you wish to change There are eight Arranger parts ADRUMS the drums A BASS the bass and ACCOMP 1 6 the melodic accompaniment parts Set the desired value with the
40. LATIN The Grand X COUNTRY GUITAR Jazz Gt Nylon StrGt COUNTRY BALLAD The Grand X WALTZ ORGAN Theater Org Trem Organ G 2 4 5 6 7 8 Type UP1 sound MEL INT sound OCTAVE TYPE 1 The Grand X OCTAVE TYPE 2 The Grand X If a second sound is available this depends on the selected TYPE the display looks as follows Ca Ca Gam Cr INTELLIGENCE TYPE THRE RESHOLD NG Big Band St Tenor Sax es eg es If the desired option is not displayed use the PAGE 1 PAGE 3 fields to select another page Note For Traditional Latin CntryBallad Octavelype1 and Octavelype2 only the UP1 part is used All other Melody Intelligence types use both the UP1 and the MELODY INTELL part however As shown in the table above selecting a different TYPE also means that the sound assigned to the UP1 part changes Most TYPES add a second sound to it called 2ND TONE Press the field and use the E 60 E 50 s standard procedure to select a different sound for the additional harmony notes Note This function is not available for TYPEs that provide no MELODY INTELL sound Note While the MELODY INTELL button on the front panel is off the 2ND TONE name appears on a gray back ground if available In this state you cannot select a different sound Switch on the MELODY INTELL button and the function of the same name if you need to select anot
41. MOUS LE ASSIA rr NA This File will be DELETED from Memory Card Name MuAss Another Paradise Artist None Genre Pop deletes the Music Assistant entry leaves the entry intact and takes you back to the Air On G _ Alex Ragtime Alfie Song ml at One Time All But Myself Al My Lowe ml Of Myself AI Shaken Up __ Almost Like Love _ Aloha Hawaii i __Alone Once Again Als Sterrenhemel GED EED vone one N ARE YOU SURE UG GA EE EE Ee ee Se SEE see enn Sis isis itis ie ie ie i i i gt ICISISISISISISISIS is O lo lo lo 2 Select the Music Assistant entry you want to edit list page 3 Continue with Renaming Music Assistant registra leaves the file intact and takes you back to the tions or Deleting Music Assistant entries MUSIC ASSISTANT LIST page Saving a Music Assistant entry ai LE EE SE The SAVE function on the MUSIC ASSISTANT LIST page e Press the field followed by the does two things at once field if it does not yet light MOUSE ASSIS Orley E e t gathers the settings of all parameters that make up the E 60 E 50 s current registration and saves them e t creates a new User Program and gives it the same name or modifies the existing User Program to which the Music Assistant entry is referring This depends on the name you enter Even though the display page is very similar to the RENAME page see above it thus serves an
42. OUTPUT R L MONO I Il TE EE WU gt ULIEIOH TETE IE HAO Ce AA Cee ii f ff RECORDER se EES OULODEEE ER g aao iat DBOO o Heos Stereo headphones RH 25 RH 50 RH 200 or RH 300 Stereo headphones RH 25 RH 50 RH 200 or RH 300 Note Except for the adapter all other items shown above are optional See your Roland dealer for details 713 E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Roland Front panel Switching the E 60 E 50 on off After connecting the E 60 E 50 to the other devices proceed as follows Internal Memory Protect After unpacking your E 60 E 50 and before switching it on you need to defeat the protection of its internal memory a solid state hard disk if you intend to save data in the internal b 9 a a memory e Slide the switch to the ig position to unlock the memory To once again lock the internal memory slide the switch back to the position Switching on the E 60 E 50 1 Insert the included power cable into the AC inlet and then plug it into an electrical outlet 2 Press the E 60 E 50 s button located to the left of the keyboard to switch it on 3 If you connected the E 60 E 50 to a mixing console switch it on now 4 Switch on the amplifier your active speakers or the keyboard amplifier s 5 Use the MASTER knob to set the E 60 E 50 s output volume Setting the display contrast The information in the LCD display may
43. PI E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Quick Start 6 Press the button to return to the main page Next time you select this TONE family the E 60 E 50 automatically jumps to the page that contains the last sound you selected and activates it About the E 60 E 50 s sounds Try playing the Tones you select at different velocities strengths to discover the rich nuances that can be obtained See page 50 for details about how to set the velocity sensitivity There is a JazzScat sound VOCAL family for exam ple with three dynamic levels that allow you to sound Doo Bub or Daow simply by hitting the keys softer or harder Various guitar Tones provide hammering on bending sounds when you strike the keys as hard as you can Transposing the keyboard to the lowest octave using the OCTAVE parameter sometimes allows you to play some typical noises scraping over the strings hitting the body of an acoustic guitar etc Choosing the sound selection system Sound Set 1 Mode The Roland engineers figured that you might feel overwhelmed by the number of Tones available in each TONE family That is why the E 60 E 50 does not display all the sounds it contains when you switch it on for the first time This restricted display mode is called BEST SELECTION In this mode only the new sounds can be selected You may have grown fond of older sounds from the G and VA series and wish to select
44. Room 2 Stage 1 Stage 2 Hall 1 Hall 2 Type of reverb Room 1 Dense reverb with short decay Room2 Sparse reverb with short decay Stage1 Reverb with greater late reverberation Stage2 Reverb with strong early reflections Hall1 Reverb with clear reverberance Hall2 Reverb with rich reverberance Reverb Pre Delay 0 0 100 0ms Adjusts the delay time from the direct sound until the reverb sound is heard Reverb Time 0 127 Time length of reverberation Reverb HF Damp 200 8000Hz Bypass Adjusts the fre quency above which sound fed back to the effect is filtered out If you don t want to filter out any high frequencies set this parameter to BYPASS FO Low Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the low range FO High Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the high range AO Balance D100 0W D50 50W DO 100W Volume bal ance between the direct D and the effect sound W Level 0 127 Output level 26 Gate Reverb This is a special type of reverb in which the reverberant sound is cut off before its natural length Reverb Type Normal Reverse Sweep 1 Sweep 2 Type of reverb NORMAL Conventional gated reverb REVERSE Backwards reverb SWEEP1 The reverberant sound moves from right to left SWEEP2 The reverberant sound moves from left to right Reverb Pre Delay 0 0 100 0ms Adjusts the delay time from the direct sound until the reverb sound is heard Reverb Gate Time 5 500ms Adjusts the tim
45. Style Link 3 4 Boston i ie Genre Ballroom Song Link No Link User Prg 3_4 Boston ARE YOU SURE deletes the User Program file leaves the file intact and takes you back to the initial User Program Finder page with the list leaves the file intact and takes you back to the USER PROGRAM LIST page Note If a User Program you delete here is assigned to a Set List the memory in question no longer works Note Deleting a User Program that doubles as Music Assistant registration also discards the Music Assistant entry For safety reasons an error message is displayed in that case W Music Assistant Mark Note This function is not available for User Programs that reside on floppy disk or on a memory card This option allows you to add an MA label to the selected User Program which means that its registra tion settings appear in the Music Assistant list see p 33 e f necessary copy the User Program to the internal memory e Press the MUSIC ASSIST MARK field Ofte Qr 8 ME 3_4 Boston Mj Use the familiar Finder functions to locate the User Programs you want to appear in the Music Assistant list then press their fields to add and again to remove the MA label Music Assistant registrations are in fact a virtual concept because they only exist if there is a User Program file they can refer to That explains why deleting a User Program file see above also discards the associated Mus
46. Style is gone there is indeed no way to restore it e Press the field The following question is dis played SIVLE OPTIONS 4 This File will be DELETED from Memory Card COPY Style Name SHUFFLE International Country el Genre Standard Tempo 159 ARE YOU SURE i deletes the Style file leaves the file intact and takes you back to the initial Style Finder page with the Style list leaves the file intact and takes you back to the STYLE LIST page N Copy This function allows you to copy the selected Style to another memory area Note It is perfectly possible to use older Styles with the E 60 E 50 They are automatically converted to the new VARI ATION 1 x 4 system Even though you can already select the files you wish to copy on this page there is no need to select a Style prior to pressing the field on the STYLE LIST page Be aware however that the COPY page only lists the Music Styles that match the last search criteria you used for the STYLE FINDER On the other hand if you only need to copy certain Styles on memory card or in the internal memory area using the FINDER would be a good idea it helps you to avoid too many presses of the PAGE or field You can also use the dial and the DECJ INC buttons E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Roland Style Finder quickly locating Styles e On the STYLE OPTIONS page press the field FROM fj To MA CONT MEMORY F 7 77 EF
47. Touch Ch s X Pitch Bend Bank Select Modulation Portamento Time Data Entry Volume Panpot Expression C1 Hold 1 Portamento Sostenuto Soft Hold 2 Resonance Realease Time Attack Time Cutoff Decay Time Vibrato Rate Vibrato Depth Vibrato Delay Portamento Control Effect 1 Depth Effect 3 Depth 98 99 NRPN LSB MSB 100 101 RPN LSB MSB 1 1 Program 1 4 System Exclusive 9 MO aai aay Song Position Pointer 1 Song Sel Control Change 84 91 93 1 1 1 Reverb Chorus 1 1 OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO O O O O System Common lt x XO T Tune System Clock O 1 Real Time Commands O 1 All Sounds Off X O 120 126 127 Reset All Controllers X O 121 Aux Local On Off O 1 O Messages All Notes Off X O 123 125 Active Sensing O O Reset X X 2 Recognized as M 1 even if Mz 1 Mode 1 OMNI ON POLY Mode 2 OMNI ON MONO O Yes Mode 3 OMNI OFF POLY Mode 4 OMNI OFF MONO X No 2 0O83 E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Roland Appendix 22 Chord Intelligence RY EE E ree Mo N E TE HIN TE Pma Man en O ME TT ER HERE GET Cm7 b5 C m7 b5 Dm7 b5 Eb m7 b5 Em7 b5 Fm7 b5 Caug C aug Daug Eb aug Eaug Faug Csus4 C sus4 Dsus4 Eb sus4 Esus4 Fsus4 C7sus4 C 7sus4 D7sus4 Eb 7sus4 E7sus4 F7sus4 C7 13 C 7 13 D7 13 Eb 7 13 E7 13 F7 13 AEE CET ST LEETE EE EPEAT LA AA ERA OD E 60 E 50
48. are forbidden The specific thing that must not be done is indicated by the design contained A CAUTION within the circle In the case of the symbol at left it Material damage refers to damage or means that the unit must never be disassembled other adverse effects caused with The symbol alerts the user to things that must be respect to the home and all its carried out The specific thing that must be done is furnishings as well to domestic indicated by the design contained within the circle In animals or pets v the case of the symbol at left it means that the power cord plug must be unplugged from the outlet a ALWAYS OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING e Before using this instrument be sure to read the instruc e Do not excessively twist or bend the adapter cord nor tions below and the Owner s Manual N place heavy objects on it Doing so can damage the cord S producing severed elements and short circuits Damaged EE EE AE AE cords are fire and shock hazards Donotopen of berform any internal modifications on EN aaa Ge EG gee N Gee Ee deed ee Ee DEd ske eN the unit SN e This instrument either alone or in combination with an amplifier and headphones or speakers may be capable of S ET EE E E AA EE producing sound levels that could cause permanent e Do not attempt to repair the E 60 E 50 or replace parts hearing loss Do not operate for a long period of time at a within it except when thi
49. cm cos EED EED Back men En If necessary use the PAGE 1 PAGE 3 fields to go to another page Instrum In this case the D Beam will play musical notes The pitch and chords of those patterns depend on the notes you play on the keyboard Please try out the options on offer It s the quickest way to find out how they sound and work D HEAWI ED ED Ve Hm om En If necessary use the and fields to switch pages Controls The options on this page allow you to control one of the E 60 s functions D HE AYY D Modulation Ca oe Chord 1 Octv Chord 2 Octy J 3020c If necessary use the PAGE 1 PAGE 4 fields to go to another page Note If you plan to use the D Beam Controller while control ling the Arranger it is probably a good idea to activate its Hold function page 67 Start Stop Style Depending on the current condition of the Arranger running or stopped one move inside the D Beam s range stops or starts it A second move ment will start or stop it again Start Stop Song Depending on the current condition of the Recorder running or stopped one move inside the D Beam s range stops or starts it A second move ment will start or stop it again Fade In Fade In is a function you may want to use occasionally Fading in means that the volume of both the Arranger Style and Keyboard parts gradually increases giving the impression that you have been
50. has been selected 4 To display the next 5 Styles press the PAGE field in the lower right corner You can press this field as many times as necessary or until it is no longer displayed To return to a previous group of 5 Styles press e You can also select the dial and the DECJ INC buttons to switch pages Quick location of the Style you need There are several ways of quickly locating the Style you are after W Sorting files Press the COUNTRY or field to sort the Music Style files according to country kind of music Genre or tempo value The right column now contains the selected entry only one of them can be displayed along with the Style name Continue with step 3 to select the Style you want to use E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Roland Style Finder quickly locating Styles If you pressed the field these options are not available and the display looks as follows STYLE LIST l GENRE l TEMPO Al STYLE ZY NAME IDANCETO IBLUES2 IBLUES3 IREB2 ad y D xi FOUND 16 GLOBAL 16 The information in these columns are supplied by a special file in the internal memory or on a memory card called Database You can also supply the above information for your own Styles Note Music Styles you load from floppy disk and then save to a card or the internal memory are not automatically modified to include this Database information You need to program it yourself See Rename on pa
51. playing for a long time before what you play becomes audible The volume is automatically set to zero and then gradually increased to the value specified with the MAS TER knob Fade OUT Fade Outs are extremely popular in pop music and the E 60 allows you to end a song just like the original To do so move your hand inside the D Beam s range The volume then gradually decreases until it reaches zero Auto Fill Allows you to switch the but ton and function on and off Fill Up Triggers the Fill In that takes you to the next Variation i e from MAIN 1 to 2 You can use this function up to three times to jump to the most complex level Variation 4 If you then use the D Beam again however nothing happens You thus cannot cycle back to the lowest level Variation 1 Fill Down Triggers the Fill In that takes you to the pre vious Variation i e from MAIN 2 to 1 You can use this function up to three times to jump to the simplest level Variation 1 If you then use the D Beam again however nothing happens You thus cannot cycle back to the highest level Variation 4 ADrum On Off This setting allows you to switch the Arranger s ADrums part on and off using the D Beam Controller There are also combined on off options see below ABass On Off This setting allows you to switch the ABass part on and off using the D Beam Controller Accomp On Off This setting allows you to switch the Acco
52. range to be modified within the specified FROM TO time range W Fine tuning the note range Before setting FROM NOTE and possibly TO NOTE it might be a good idea to decide how you want to use the note indications Depending on the option you choose FROM NOTE may not even be available so that setting It beforehand would be a waste of time EQUAL Only the selected note note name note num ber will change The note can be set using the TO NOTE field NOTE will change OUTSID Only the notes below FROM NOTE and above TO NOTE will change All notes except the one you select will change The note can be set using the TO NOTE field Only notes above the selected one will change The note can be set using the THAN NOTE field Only notes below the selected one will change The note can be set using the THAN NOTE field Only the notes between FROM NOTE and TO TO NOTE 69 A4 besar gt bo a FF Original phrase a oe EE TO NOTE 69 A4 oo ap N FROM NOTE 72 C5 THAN NOTE 72 c5 HIGHER ag igos EER AE GEE FROM NOTE 72 C5 TO NOTE 76 E5 Ge F TR bes l THAN NOTE 72 C5 W RESOLUTION 1 4 1 8 1 8T 1 16 1 16T 1 32 1 32T 1 64 This parameter sets the resolution of the Quantize func tion Be sure to al
53. step that contains an erroneous reference To do so press the field of the step that needs correcting press and continue with step 5 above N Deleting steps On the PLAY LIST EDIT page see left select the step you wish to delete and press the field All subsequent steps now move up one entry Exam ple if you delete step 04 of a list that contains 10 Steps step 05 becomes 04 step 06 becomes 05 etc E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Roland Play List function 8 Press the field to save your edited list PEERI C E E3 ms TTE EE If the new Play List has the same name as an existing one the following message appears PLAY LIST SAVE Saturday Live EE ET a Same file on disk an Erika r Press to replace the old file with your new ver sion Press if you want to rename your new Play List before saving it Note By pressing the field you return to the EDIT page Note When you press the button the following mes sage appears Poe LIST EY EX RTERNA AL See OE N Ta ae Play List 5 3 hat not been saved og Exit anyway O O Press to return to the main page and discard any changes you have made up to that point Press to return to the EDIT page without deleting your changes M Clear ALL The PLAY LIST EDIT page contains a field you can use to remove a steps from the currently selected Play List In effect this means that only the nam
54. the remaining instruments are Note See Mixing Song or Style parts on p 102 for details Press the field and set the desired value with the dial or the DEC INC buttons This parameter sets the amount of chorus sound that is sent to the Reverb processor The value 127 effectively allows you to connect the Chorus and Reverb effects in series Chorus before Reverb If you do not want the chorus signal to be processed by the reverb effect set this value to 0 Press to return to the display page with the modules or Press the button to return to the main page Digital Bass Enhancer function If you like a powerful bass response you can switch on the E 60 E 50 s Digital Bass Enhancer function It boosts the low frequencies which you may appreciate for pop and dance music 1 2 3 4 Press the button Press the EFFECTS field Cae pe ENA EAC See KEYBOARD STYLE SONG REVERB CHORUS EE TE EEE aw 4 KEYBOARD j SPEAKERS Digital Bass ENHANCER MFX PART ASSIGN UPPER UPPER2Z LOWER M BASS M IMTEL Press the DIGITAL BASS ENHANCER button icon The icon lights Press it again to switch off the Digi tal Bass Enhancer function if you no longer need it This setting is memorized by the E 60 E 50 It cannot be saved to a User Program Press the button to return to the main page Note You may hear some slight noise from the internal speakers when the E 60 E 50 is turned on
55. time signature changes anywhere within the song After pressing gt for the first time you can specify the numerator the number of beats per bar Press it again to specify the denominator the note value of each beat P PLA EVENT E Y CE 3 4 WE SysEx After selecting a SysEx line and pressing gt the dis play looks more or less as follows MAGSTERIKAGKEDIN SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE EDIT fail 41 10 42 12 40 01 00 20 28 63 29 20 4D 49 44 49 20 53 4F 4E 47 53 20 5E F7 Use the buttons to select a byte a pair of num bers in the current line and 4 v to change lines SysEx refers to messages only the E 60 E 50 or another GS compatible sound source understands Changing these values requires a thorough under Standing of the purpose and structure of SysEx mes sages Here are some guidelines however e SysEx messages are usually found in the fine print of an owner s manual If not the distributor or dealer can supply a copy of that information e SysEx messages need to be entered in hexadecimal format hence the A F fields that are considered numbers Hexadecimal means that each group contains 16 different numbers rather than 10 41 in hexadecimal notation actually represents the number 65 in decimal notation 4 x 16 1 x 1 e SysEx messages always start with FO to signal the beginning of such a message and end with F7 end of exclusive message e Some
56. 110 GEOES eens 137 168 193 GEE EES EER ELDORADO DS 189 LO NANANA RE ee RE 137 168 193 oi AE EL OE Ed 115 Change Gate ME san G EENDE DS 136 167 Mel os ER RE EE EE EE 135 167 Bld SR EE EER EE kama 189 190 Eh APP PA ED PDE PPT 191 8 ies SEA EE 23 PUD ss seke bbbee E 33 BEE N ae EE PP PP PP PPNTA 39 OC RA ED EE EEN 54 67 Off Muting 0000 32 Chord TECOQMIUGN sees ees SE 66 CHOFUS iie oo eis sees se RR ee n 82 105 Drum Instrument 0 106 Keyboard parts 84 level ME EE EE 107 Song Style 86 102 107 STV IE COMPOSE so 161 Style Song 00 eee 84 86 6 dIE EE EE ia 117 CLIP cece eee eee eee 195 OOREEN 192 EIE ESE ee eee eee ee 190 CIONES AR RE EE PRPRR PE 154 Coarse it AE EI 77 Vi OE ETE 77 Color Control ann naan AR EE 192 Index COMMON SR RR RR GR 107 Rede ale ed AE Ee 136 LOMPOSE s4 0s0s00eeeeceenccccseees 41 COCO NANA AA AAA 18 GA AA 190 COM nananahanan DER EE Re RE bk 14 19 Controls BE ee EER EE EN 52 Style COMPOSED soes EES ERK 153 Converter SIE os EE EE EE 147 Converting User Programs 182 Copy Disk amp Media 000 eee 180 EVEN ee oe EE 142 147 174 Existing Styles 0 0004 ER RE 158 Wine EE SERS RR 98 114 Mode aa ak kk coke ees 133 159 SERE EER nss ae ee 55s 133 SIE RE EE Ee ee 159 SIES AAP 75 112 TIERE ese BI DAD EDE DO 160 ser biol AA 97 Bola MEE Ee 59 Ee GER AA 126 Style COMPOSE EE EER EE ER 156 COUNTY iS AG kaa 73 Cover DONG PP GE D
57. 128 notes supported by the MIDI standard 45 E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Using the performance functions 1 Use the TONE ASSIGN buttons to select of the Key board part you wish to transpose in octave steps KEYBOARD PART PART ON OFF 2 If the main page is not displayed press the button several times until it appears 3 Use the OCTAVE ally fields to set the desired interval up to 4 octaves higher or lower 4 If necessary repeat this with the remaining Key board parts Key Touch velocity sensitivity The E 60 E 50 s keyboard is also velocity sensitive This allows you to control the timbre and volume of the Keyboard parts by varying the force with which you strike the keys 1 Press the button The display changes to a MENU oe eed ESE IE ESSELEN Pr EE 2 Press the field followed by the field SPLIT POINT 10 PARTS CURVE VALUE im je EN EET 3 Press a field in the PARTS column to select the Keyboard part whose velocity sensitivity you wish to change DO 4 Press a field in the CURVE column to set the desired velocity sensitivity LOW Select this setting if you are used to playing on an electronic organ or if you do not want velocity changes to bring about major volume changes MID Medium velocity sensitivity The keyboard responds to velocity changes but the maximum vol ume can be obtained more easily than with RIGHT This is
58. 22 60 ACOUSUC dana ee SEED REDDER RS 29 sa oues 31 Acoustic guitar 29 ACV 2 cc cee 172 Adapt Chord 00 00 ee 33 Adaptive Chord Voicing 172 ADR N DEE DOE errad 60 ADrum On Off a 53 IR N ER NN 38 FILES EE N apa 180 Alphabetic Order 34 74 91 111 Alteration 0 ccc aa eee ees 67 Intro Ending 0005 67 Mode 0 0 00000 168 172 WAV oe ERROR ER EER OR nines 59 see ie N De 30 53 OCU EES RE SE ES ES ES Ee 67 Arr MM BaSS EE EE EE EE 55 BUON ie iste ict art at cert aes tc 22 DEL oe EE eae 22 60 CHON EE seu 67 KOO ER se 61 Bye EE OE OE EE EE EE LN 55 67 Oana EE F 68 mi ENGEN EN 60 N TENPO EE EE N ee 53 56 VEE EE NN 22 ALLOW SE eee eee ees 27 do DE AE 33 35 Asterisk a na anaana 90 188 E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Roland PAC ee a ig a tg ve ee Ana oo 8 79 105 PUNO AO EO N 110 RU o ED DE EED ee 69 EED oe AA 24 53 92 sik AA 33 ING AA Ba 190 B Backup ss EE ADAN EE 186 BEE SE EE EE eee 26 Keyboard parts Ee ee 81 Song Makeup Tools 102 Bank Select mawa EE ES ER EE EE DERE 193 ES RE AE OE EE OE ERG 191 Dia N N a 38 60 INVErSION ee eee 55 61 92 Bass response snxacncacackancxeces 87 Best Selection EE Ee 28 Be SR GO GEE EE EE EN 167 Break MUE sees n ee Re ee ee 53 56 5 ER N 37 C RE EE EE PEPPER EE es 79 VND EE RE EL 189 Cancel User Program ssscssessseoaes 89 Ed lei sore aa 197 Category SESSE SEE 35
59. 3 Now do one of the following W Rename This function allows you to change or supply infor mation for the selected song e Press the SONG NAME ARTIST or field and enter the desired characters You can also rename all four of them e The field allows you to switch between upper case and lowercase characters Note If you select a song on floppy disk only the SONG NAME and FILE NAME can be edited e Press the field The Operation Successful message appears to confirm this operation N Delete This function allows you to delete the selected song from the internal memory area memory card or floppy disk You should use this as sparsely as possi ble Once a song is gone there is indeed no way to restore it e Press the field Deleting a song cannot be undone which is why the following question is now displayed This File will be DELETED from Memory Card a Song Name FIRSTDAY Artist Manek RY te Genre Rock File Name FIRST DAY MI D ARE YOU SURE deletes the song file leaves the file intact and takes you back to the initial Song Finder page with the song list leaves the file intact and takes you back to the SONG LIST page Note If a song you delete here is assigned to a Play List an error message File not found is displayed during playback of that Play List and playback stops at that step So be careful 1 1 2 3 4 You can also add a musical phrase to y
60. 5 16 fields Indicator icons of parts you need must light the others must be dark By pressing one of these fields you switch off the active preset To save this customized Minus setting in the E 60 E 50 s internal memory press CUSTO MIZE The field lights to indicate that your settings are now being used 5 Press the button to return to the main page Your last preset selection MELODY USER will be used until you select another preset or until you switch off your E 60 E 50 6 Press again to switch off this func tion Note You can also switch the Minus One function on off using the D Beam controller E 60 p 54 or an optional foot switch page 56 Displaying Lyrics and chord information Only available for Standard MIDI File playback Your E 60 E 50 also allows you to view the lyrics if available and even the notes of the songs in the dis play The Lyrics function was provided to allow you to read the words of the songs you play back in a karaoke fash ion the words to sing are highlighted at the right time Note that this function is only available for Standard MIDI Files that contain Lyrics data Ask your dealer for details Apart from the Lyrics the E 60 E 50 also displays the chords which may come in handy for a guitarist or bassist with whom you are playing The chord information is usually not contained in a song as such but that s no problem the E 60 E 50 can calculate it in re
61. 60 Upper 1 UP1 using a piano sound E 50 Upper 1 UP1 using a piano sound Later on you will discover that you do not need to work with a piano sound in this mode The settings affected by the EASY SETTING button are Whole mode with only UP1 active The NaturalPiano Tone is assigned to UP1 Arranger ZONE WHOLE page 67 Press the button to start and stop the Arranger See page 25 for how to select internal Music Styles Arranger TYPE PIANO STYLE page 67 In ORGAN mode the keyboard is again split into two halves LW and UP1 This time however there is no automatic accompaniment As its name implies Organ mode Is primarily intended for playing organ music which is why selecting this mode calls up three organ sounds E 60 Arranger control UP1 LWR E 50 EER EER Arranger control UP1 LWR E 60 E 50 Music Workstation About the Keyboard modes The left half of the keyboard allows you to use one part for chords the LWR part Heavy Traffic and a second one that plays bass notes Just like in Arranger mode there is a simplified chord fingering system for the LWR part Furthermore you could release the LWR notes immediately after play ing them because they will be held until you play new notes The function that takes care of this is called Lower Hold See page 78 for how to switch it on The right half of the keyboard allows you to play one or two Upper parts By deafult UP1 is s
62. 88 See ing User PrograMS es nama oe ah ahe AG Ne De 89 es REED EE EE EE N ds 89 Choosing User Programs manually 90 Selecting User Programs with DOWN UP 90 Working with the User Program Finder 90 Quick location of the User Program you need 91 Selectively loading User Program settings User Program Hold 0 00 cece eee eee 92 Bypassing the AUTO FILL function Fill In On User Program Change GO ABAD AAKALA 92 Automatic functions for User Programs 93 SOMO HUM teeter OE EET 93 Linking a MIDI Set toa User Program os kk Se 94 User Program Recall SS ESE See ee ee 95 Editing User Program Finder information 95 Editing the User Program Finder information 96 Editing an AAP 97 Music Assistant functions Es EE ee ee 99 Creating new Music Assistant registrations 99 Editing Music Assistant registrations 100 Saving a Music Assistant entry 100 Song and Style Makeup Tools 102 Mixing Song or Style parts 102 Using the Makeup OOS ss isi ENE EN EE ces 103 Gener AA oos ED eee 104 PALETT E pecs oece ses sewn nE ath 105 SOUND EDIT for sounds aa 105 SOUND EDIT for DIUMDEIS secretes SE aaaa 106 DRUM INSTR EDI os ee ai ei ii eie bed of see 106 COMMON ss ATENG SERE GEE EER ES id 107 Before saving your settings 107 Saving your modified song or Style
63. 94 DIN aa GN KN EE GERA 50 MINO AA AA 156 Minus One aa 38 54 56 TAK EE a a EET E 133 RECOU kA PAGBABARA ERE AE 155 Style CODY osse RR ae 159 Uie AE EE N EE EE EE ee 81 161 Wiel AE DEEENALL abah abb a 154 KOO AA 133 POMAMCNIO ie ss EER ER SE GED ER 78 Style E 156 Style Converter GERED 150 ModulatION SS SS 48 79 LA asic poe a de N as 78 Move Event SERE RR 142 146 1 4 VCS o a EE re 84 Music Assist Wat ARE OE N 96 Index Music Assistant 33 96 OES EKEN eee ee N 99 185 DE ELE iis AA 100 Eed ike AE EE eee 100 FUNCTIONS 0 eee eee 99 PCMAG RA OE ata 100 DANG wena pasa E OS ASA ED oe 100 Music Style see Style ER RE EE N BANG 102 16 track eee eee 148 Deter seh ae eae cee naked nie tek ne eo 106 VIE Ged is banaman narra 104 ME ao oo Re sens 81 POICUSSION se ee KA AN Ka 106 Ed EIER eee GR ER EE 129 sin CE E AA 157 NI EDE oo eee ee ee eee ee ee 153 N WAM N EE 33 44 178 RE iS ERG EE GR Aahh AA 0 EE ea AA User Progra EE EE N 89 Mea dood N KERE 168 172 De des ede E AA 37 ME ele EAR 39 ble ds Oe Kg 132 133 139 lo OE greene ee eee DE 192 NRPN RE N 132 133 139 bo EE EE N 172 DrUM ee eee ees 161 NAS ete epee EE EE N 192 Num Lock 2 0 005 74 91 111 Numere Pad ER ELE RR RE 57 O OE VE in RS De 21 49 54 105 SCCURNGS EG 126 e ies ee RR Re 192 MS AAS ED AH 154 OE od OE OE EE EE 37 One fouch ees SEER EE SERE ERA ES 27 65 Options el isdie 68 Guiar Mode sis SE ee
64. ALL This is where you can specify the tracks that should be extracted and turned into a Music Style phrase In most instances you will probably select ALL You could however also extract each track separately Mode Allows you to select the mode of your pattern Major major m minor or 7th seventh Choose the mode that matches the chord being used in the excerpt You can also decide to use the same phrase for all three modes The E 60 E 50 then attempts to trans form them in a musically useful way for the chords you play in realtime By selecting an option indicated by you create several patterns at once see also p 154 Division Allows you to specify the pattern type that should be created Main 1 Main 2 Main 3 Main 4 Main ALL Fill Up1 Fill Up2 Fill Up3 Fill Up ALL Fill Dw1 Fill Dw 2 Fill Dw 3 Fill Dw ALL Intro 1 Intro 2 Intro 3 Intro 4 Intro ALL End 1 End 2 End 3 End 4 or Ending ALL WE EXECUTE 15 After setting everything to your liking press this field to launch the conversion If you don t want to convert the Standard MIDI File phrases into a Music Style press the field to return to the 16 track Sequencer s main page 16 Now save your Music Style e Press the button The display changes to DISK amp MEDIA E STYLE MIDI SET USER 9 BAKA IMPORT USER PROGRAM ISA Format g TSO e Press SAVE followed by STYLE cscs
65. Always connect the E 60 E 50 directly to your com puter or to a powered USB hub 5 Press the button T34 The display changes to MENU earn SETTING p ee USE DATA CON aaa STORAGE mofo DF paran BEAM PAG 6 Press the USB DATA STORAGE field USB DATA STORAGE CONNECTION MODE CJinternal Memory o 1 CIJExternal Memory A Py Now you need to specify which memory area should appear on the computer s desktop 7 Press Internal Memory or External Memory mem ory card to activate the connection with your computer Depending on the area you choose the display now looks as follows USB DATA FLONASE PC INTERNAL MEMORY Bay a np f qum IT ide CONNECTED 8 lag DISCONNECT Or like this USF Devi STORAGE OHS dd EXTERNAL MEMORY mn Bg Vis CONNECTED aye DISCONNECT Note In this state all of the E 60 E 50 s panel functions are blocked You can however keep playing the last Keyboard part s you selected But you cannot select other sounds or parts 8 Open the My Computer window Windows 9 Check whether your computer found a E50 E60 SSD E50 E60_CARD or just Remov able Disk drive 10 Open that drive by double clicking on its icon 11 Open the folder you need This depends on whether you want to copy add songs Music Styles User Programs or text files 3 Chain
66. Bank Select MSB j i Pi PLACE EVENT 3 TO od GNG f BAR BEAT OPT 4 5 eas Tee foil load gt Qexecurep 01 060 Note 70 Bb4 33 02 000 Note 37 C 2 111 Specify the position where the first event you copied should be inserted by pressing the BAR and fields and entering the desired value for each unit using the dial or the DEC INC buttons Press the field to confirm your settings and add the new event s Press to close the pop up window without applying your changes Note Events inserted with PLACE EVENT are added to any events that may already exist in that area Existing events are thus not pushed towards the end of the song Disk Media functions The E 60 E 50 s DISK amp MEDIA functions allow you to save edited data and settings to the internal memory a memory card or floppy disk to save and load User Pro gram Sets and MIDI Sets to format various storage media to delete files and to copy data If you re still wondering whether to use a floppy disk or a memory card consider this e Memory cards have a much bigger capacity up to 4GB and are more reliable than floppy disks e Though you can also use 2DD or 2HD floppies the most helpful functions Song Style User Program Finder the PLAY LIST function and automatic song links to User Programs are only available for files on memory card or in the internal memory 2HD disks have twice the capacity of 2DD disks so use 2H
67. CH LIMIT 2ND CH LIMIT CHANNEL W 1ST CHANNEL RX 2ND CHANNEL RX CHANNEL NTA notes can be received on two MIDI channels so that you could control the E 60 E 50 s Arranger using a MIDIfied accordion FR 7 or FR 5 or any other instrument that sends note data on two chan nels Either channel can be switched off using its field Note You cannot assign the same MIDI channel to 1 amp 2 Channel Rx W 1ST CH LIMIT 2ND CH LIMIT C G9 These parameters allow you to set the note range to be received If not all note messages of the selected MIDI channel should be received by the NIA part set the range to the desired values Note The LOW LIMIT value cannot be higher value than HIGH LIMIT and vice versa If you select the V Link part When you select V LINK on the page the display changes to NUE sy ULINK TX LINK CLIP CONTROL TH COLOR CONTROL TH CHANN Here you can only set TX parameters because the E 60 E 50 only sends V LINK messages it does not receive them See page 195 for details about the V LINK functionality CLIP CONTROL TX This parameter allows you to set the MIDI channel CHANNEL to be used for the transmission of these messages Use the field to enable lights or disable dark transmission IDI the MIDI channel CHANNEL to be used for the trans mission of these messages Use the field to enable lights or disable dark transmission PARAM This page conta
68. Chord recognition is not deactivated during Ending playback so that the ending of a song may jump from one key to another in a rather unnatural way Chord recognition during Ending and Intro playback can be switched off however see p 67 e The E 60 E 50 also provides a SYNC STOP option which is combined with Sync Start press twice so that the button starts to flash This will cause the Arranger to stop playback as soon as you release all keys in the chord recognition area This is great for songs where you need breaks i e one or several beats of silence There is no need to restart Style playback manually because the flashing pattern means that Sync Start is also active So if you repress one or several keys Arranger playback resumes Press the button yet again to switch off this function About Sync Start amp Stop If you ve never used an arranger keyboard before the status of the button is the single most impor tant function to look out for after switching on your instrument If it is on playing just one note on the key board may cause the Arranger to start playing when you don t want it to STYLE CONTROL R VARIATION LIEILIL Once you get to know the E 60 E 50 a little better you will appreciate this function though SYNC START means that the Arranger starts as soon as you play a note or chord in the chord recognition area of the keyboard If the EASY SETTING button lights this area is the left hal
69. Delay 0 0 100 0ms Adjusts the delay time from when the direct sound begins until the flanger sound is heard Flanger Rate 0 05 10 0Hz Frequency i e modulation speed Flanger Depth 0 127 Modulation intensity Flanger Feedback 9800 0 98 Adjusts the propor tion of the flanger sound that is fed back into the effect Negative settings will invert the phase Flanger Balance D100 0W D50 50W DO 100W Volume balance between the direct sound D and the flanger sound W Level 0 127 Output level 35 EH gt Delay This effect connects an enhancer and a delay in series Enhancer Sens 0 127 Sensitivity of the enhancer Enhancer Mix Level 0 127 Level of the overtones gen erated by the enhancer Delay Time 0 0 500 0ms Adjusts the time until the delay is heard 205 E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Appendix Delay Feedback 98 0 98 Adjusts the amount of the delay sound that s fed back into the effect Negative settings invert the phase Delay HF Damp 200 8000Hz Bypass Adjusts the fre quency above which sound fed back to the effect is filtered out If you don t want to filter out any high frequencies set this parameter to BYPASS Delay Balance D100 0W D50 50W D0 100W Adjusts the volume balance between the sound that is sent through the delay W and the sound that is not sent through the delay D Level 0 127 Output level 36 Chorus gt DLY
70. F7 01 031 Sys Ex FO H 10 42 12 40 00 7F 00 41 F7 erase 01 037 Sys Ex FO 41 10 42 12 40 01 38 06 01 F7 EVENT ES 01 043 Sys Ex FO 41 10 42 12 40 01 33 5432 F7 01 050 Sys Ex FO H 10 42 12 40 01 34 5431 F7 01 056 Sys Ex FO 41 10 42 12 40 01 00 20 28 EVERT 01 099 Sys Ex FO 41 10 42 12 40 01 00 20 28 04 060 Tempo Change COPY 02 000 Tempo Change 52 EVENT 02 060 Tempo Change 46 03 000 T Ch 140 empo Change PLACE DE BIE Press to return to the 16 track Sequencer s main page or bear with us Other edit operations You probably noticed the fields in the right half of the MASTER TRACK EDIT page They allow you to reduce or expand the number of events of the MAS TER track BIVIEW Press this button icon if the list of MASTER track events has become so long that finding the events becomes a little difficult The following pop up appears ES VIEW SELECT JJ GEE OES x ia Em aj 12 wa o Triace A Switch on the button icons of the events you want to see in the list the indicator in question must light refers to tempo events to time sig nature changes and to SysEx messages Press to switch on all button icons or to switch them all off in which case the MASTER TRACK EDIT list only contains the End of Data message Press to close the pop up window without applying your changes Press to close the pop up window and use your changes 147 E 60 E 50 Music Workstatio
71. Keyboard parts UP1 2 LWR MBS MELODY INT and the Style parts ADrum ABass Acc1 6 The most important and practical use for this field is resetting the MIDI transmit receive channels of the Keyboard and Style parts and to switch off MIDI trans mission reception of the Song parts Note This field applies to both reception RX and transmission TX The E 60 E 50 indeed allows you to set separate TX and RX channels for each part Song Parts This field restores the factory settings for the E 60 E 50 s Song parts and switches off the MIDI transmission and reception of the Keyboard and Style parts MODE Local On Local Off These settings allow you to establish or remove the connection between the E 60 E 50 s keyboard Arranger Recorder and the internal tone generator If you select default playing on the E 60 E 50 s keyboard or playing back a song Style causes the corresponding notes to sound If you select Local Off the corresponding MIDI messages are no longer sent to T33 the internal tone generator but they are still trans mitted to the MIDI OUT socket or USB port and hence to external MIDI instruments MPL CHT MIP ET op S LOCAL OFF mnd When you press one of these fields the number of the currently selected MIDI Set is indicated with an asterisk to signal that the current settings no longer corre spond to the written settings See p 193 for details about the MIDI Sets Editi
72. Music Workstation Appendix TERTE ER AA KAI F M7 GM7 AbM7 AM7 Bb M7 ATA EN ET HI F 7 G7 Ab7 A7 Bb 7 B7 E UR LY ELE D TEE LA HITS F m Gm Abm Am Bb m Bm HER EDIK OP MWU HEID OH YI F m7 Gm7 Abm7 Bb m7 EEY TEN EV NATE 10 EE WER F mM7 GmM7 AbmM7 AmM7 Bb mM7 BmM7 AN EI LET EN PAY BILLY LOBE tL EBL F dim Gdim Abdim Adim Bb dim Bdim HEER PIEL CPE PREETI ELE OK OILY F m7 b5 Gm7 b5 Abm7 b5 Am7 Bb m7 b5 Bm7 b5 ET EE EE 00 OE n EE RED DEE EE ee F aug Gaug Ab aug Aaug Bb aug Baug POPUP Et bad bob CELL PPE ae bad badk kid bed LA YY F sus4 Gsus4 Absus4 Asus4 Bb sus4 Bsus4 POPPA COEDS LAMP Ur CEE ls bed bad ad LPA F 7sus4 G7sus4 Ab7sus4 A7sus4 Bb 7sus4 B7sus4 HEL ALAN ELETT ETD HITS OUE F 7 13 G7 13 Ab7 13 A7 13 Bb 7 13 B7 13 HR LE ATA ANA EI AA AB GE IA 2 1 O yee Index Numerics 1 Ch LMIE a 192 1 STAFF RE OE OE 40 1 2 Bar eee eee eee eee eee 59 12 MEIS AO 156 16 track Sequencer 42 123 Ist Channel RX 0 eee 192 2 Ch Limit aaa 192 AE a a eg teat ea 40 2nd Channel RX aaa 192 2nd KONG EERS E EER E EER EER ooie 62 ii EE N 156 A ee AA OE EE EE 61 Oi EE eames 53 EO PP PP 44 129 PD act dd NA EE UN 60 61 ABs amp ADr On Off 005 53 ADSOIUTE sesse wes wes ee esti 192 ES EE ER N N N 69 SG odie oid oe oe eb BANANA GA ween 60 Acc amp ABs On Off aaa 53 Accomp Minus One 0 00 eee eee ee 38 OnOff 00 cece eee ee eeeee 53 ACCOMPANIMENT nannan Ka
73. Note If the song already contains Lyrics they will follow the measures indicated in the upper right hand corner when you press or FWD 10 Press the RECORDER button its indicator lights Press to go to another measure without caus ing the text to follow E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Roland Adding Lyrics to a song 11 Press the PLAY STOP m s button if Playback and Lyric synchronization recording starts and the button lights 12 On the beat where the first text line should be dis played press the button Gis OE Ba Lyrics Synchronization oo M0012 Aw baby gt Yeah ooh Yeak huh listen to this Spy on me baby use Back Back PRESS PLAY TO START THE INTERNAL SONG ig PRESS TAP TO SYNCHRONIZE EACH LYRICS LINE 13 Repeat this at the quarter note where the second line should be displayed C Gis Giz Lyrics Synchronization 3918 M0016 Yeah ooh Yeak gt huh listen to this Spy on me baby use satellite Back Back PRESS PLAY TO START THE INTERNAL SONG ig PRESS TAP TO SYNCHRONIZE EACH LYRICS LINE 14 Press on all beats where the subsequent text lines should appear In places where there are no lyrics to synchronize e g the bridge or the solo you can press to quickly jump to the next measures to which you wish to link a line of text 15 Press the button when all Lyrics data have been synchronized 16 If you m
74. ONO MEE diN 80 PEE EE EO 74 Music Assistant ee 34 SELA 35 110 PERA OE ON 73 User Program RR ee 90 Fine TONE AA EE EN 77 ds e eee 77 FUG Sao de SE weno 50 PINE suicccr2ccscdceeedes 84 86 107 Flashing BE ses ee eee tae es 197 WETFONOME sakada hbd kadala 197 Foot KOLA 56 sA 55 ie BMEUDIDIRIPID ee 134 166 KOMA aaa da 181 Heeze Di PP PP PP PR N 64 107 s EO ET 159 ARST NO SS i 37 SECOND BAR OROS REDS AG 37 Front Panels EE kp BAR REEKSE EG BOONG 13 si OE OE eee eee 40 PUD ceaaneccccecececcecsecasesvec 159 Fete GEE GEE ewes 37 G CEO OTENE REEERE EEIE E 182 Ca EE DE 33 35 91 95 110 KEER PB 75 6 elf RE 71 94 159 GOO A ME EK 93 196 CONG ABR EES SE EE 137 168 Ese OE AA 49 GUIDE aanse EE 29 125 155 in O EEEE 32 H Hali BEP EEEE 55 70 si RR EE 83 86 107 Bed APA PD OE OE N 62 OL APP AA 190 Ka kele RR EE EE NN 50 HIGHER ses ee se ss ie 131 132 164 Field EE RR RR PARN 54 172 Arranger 0 2 0 cc cece ee 55 67 PSSM se So cae 54 LONC peepee PEPAY 56 78 One TOUCH sd Ge ad quia 65 ko AA 30 DO WINGS cent teeta eee 92 User Program 0 0 00 cee aee 92 Importing User Programs 182 RCS SE eee AA BAR BAGA NLA 138 168 Hs SEE A ALA BA AGANG 35 73 110 COO EEEE EEEE EEEE 98 114 POIC aa P PP DAE 97 98 113 NENG EEE EEEE E 98 User diesel EE N des 91 Vie EE OR EE EE NT 197 Init EVER EN Ee 79 Single Valul EER DS 79 189 ENE son AA AA AE 137 168 Initialize onnu eee eee 197 Mee cian
75. Play a few notes on the keyboard Every key is assigned to a different drum percussion sound Press the second C key from the left C2 to sound a bass drum Kick and the white key to its right D2 to play a snare sound Then try out the other keys this is only an example pon38st opGstS39st IPopCStk37st Pop5n38 IPopCym12 52 IPopTomH50 IPopKik36 a a IPopTomHF148 ME MEE EE O N 5 Press the button to return to the main page Playing realistic guitar parts Guitar mode Your E 60 E 50 provides a Guitar mode that allows you to play extremely realistic guitar parts via the keyboard As you will see this mode relies on a special approach which is nevertheless very musical and surprisingly log ical once you have come to grips with the underlying principle When you activate the Guitar mode the UP1 part acts as main guitar while the UP2 part is used as additional guitar that doubles the notes of the main guitar part This means that while the Guitar mode is active UP1 and UP2 cannot be used for other melodic purposes Though with a little practice you can also use it in realtime the Guitar mode will prove invaluable for song and Style recording 1 Press the EASY SETTING button Note You can also select this page by pressing button gt GUITAR MODE In that case you may need to switch the Guitar mode on using the switch icon see below The in
76. SETTING a EE JE zN UP2 DOL OO JCICIE MBS LWR TU PAR ON OFF DATA ENTRY section The dial can be used to set the value of the parameter field that is currently highlighted Turn it to scroll through the available settings You can also press it to call up a numeric key pad that allows you to enter the desired value by pressing the corresponding fields in the display To change the selected value in small steps press lower value or higher value The al v gt lt buttons are used to select a parameter for editing Something you can also do by pressing the corresponding display field While the main page is displayed the dial and DECJ INC buttons also allow you to set the tempo FINDER section Press one of these buttons to quickly locate songs SONG Music Styles STYLE or User Programs USER PRG in the internal memory on floppy disk or an external memory card See pages 35 73 and 90 TONE section The TONE buttons allow you to select one of 8 inter nal Tone families You can then use the display to specify the desired sound within that family USER PROGRAM section These buttons allow you to select the desired User Program registration memory Press the but ton to call up the display page where you can select the desired User Program and save your current panel settings to a User Program You can also select the previous DOW N or next UP User Program By pressing these two but
77. SLSWNG1 68 NG FOUND 553 NO e See Style Finder quickly locating Styles on p 73 for the complete procedure e Press the field of the Style you need it appears on an orange background e Press the field to return to the STYLE TRACK EDIT COPY page 60 64 4 Press the field and use the 5 dial or the DEC INC buttons to select the track to be copied You can also select ALL to copy all tracks of a given Mode Division In that case DESTINATION TRACK is also set to ALL Repeat this operation with the and fields to select the Mode Major Minor 7th ALL and Division Int 1 4 Int ALL Main 1 4 Main ALL FDw 1 3 FDw ALL FUp 1 3 FUp ALL End 1 4 End ALL E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Roland Using existing Styles 6 Press the field to listen to the pattern you are about to copy Note LISTEN is not available when you select ALL for the MODE or DIVISION field E FROM Start by specifying the position of the first event or note to be copied 7 Press the BAR and fields in the FROM row and use the dial or the DEC buttons to set the position of the starting point By default the FROM parameters are set to Bar 1 Beat 1 CPT 0 ETO The TO position indicates the end of the excerpt to be copied By default the TO values are set to include the entire track 8 Press the BAR and fields and use the dial or the DEC INC buttons to set the desired position To copy an ent
78. This effect connects a chorus and a delay in series Chorus Pre Delay 0 0 100 0ms Adjusts the delay between the incoming direct signal and the moment when the chorus starts working Chorus Rate 0 05 10 0Hz Frequency i e modulation speed Chorus Depth 0 127 Modulation intensity Chorus Balance D100 0W D50 50W DO 100W Vol ume balance between the direct sound D and the chorus sound W Delay Time 0 0 500 0ms Adjusts the time until the delay is heard Delay Feedback 98 0 98 Adjusts the amount of the delay sound that s fed back into the effect Negative settings invert the phase Delay HF Damp 200 8000Hz Bypass Adjusts the fre quency above which sound fed back to the effect is filtered out If you don t want to filter out any high frequencies set this parameter to BYPASS Delay Balance D100 0W D50 50W DO 100W Adjusts the volume balance between the sound that is sent through the delay W and the sound that is not sent through the delay D Level 0 127 Output level 37 Flanger gt DLY This effect connects a flanger and a delay in series Flanger Pre Delay 0 0 100 0ms Adjusts the delay time from when the direct sound begins until the flanger sound is heard Flanger Rate 0 05 10 0Hz Frequency i e modulation speed Flanger Depth 0 127 Modulation intensity Flanger Feedback 98 0 98 Adjusts the propor tion of the flanger sound that
79. We 175 Loading data nnna EA DA ED EE DA 176 SAVING Ee EE AE RO N EER 176 Rename functions a 178 Be oi EE ER oe ey onsen ee ce 179 OY EE EE TE ETE ee 180 PO ER E OO NA case 181 Import User Program function 182 Archiving data using a computer USB 184 Backing up all of the E 60 E 50 s data 186 JUS ESE Es ia ey eee ey eee eed 186 MP SEE EE APR 187 The NOWO PR PART TPP OPPA OPAPP 187 Accessing the MIDI functions ss ss mamana EE RR ER 187 Working With Presets aaa KAKANAN NAN EE N 188 Editino OF GESE KG EE EG RE EE 188 Editing MIDI parameters a naaa ESE OS NG 189 keyboard Style SOMO NENG cccecternecncecenenacs 189 MIDI System parameters sesse EE ED ES DS Ee 190 MIDI N AA EE N 193 Nia a MIDI GEU N N N IE ddoi aaa 193 Using MIDI El EE SE DISSE 193 MIDI Set selection at DOWET ON EE ee ee 194 TO WVNSCON ANC OUS 25 vy cee RENEE ES DER ae EE 195 Using V LINK RR EL GE OR home ena 195 General setings serri oes trace id DE Ae en 196 Song Arranger Start Priority aa 196 Osi AA 197 Hashing M IrONOMCs ss ese EE DE ees 197 GEE EE OE AE EE PP 197 Initializing the E 60 E 50 Factory Reset 197 19 eie ei ex cece ma KREW GMA 198 20 MFX types and parameters 200 21 MIDI Implementation Chart 208 22 Chord Intelligence aa 209 EN AE EE ness ed een N 211 Important notes E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Roland I
80. a COVER alteration As stated above you can decide to change any Style on a more or less permanent basis by saving it with the selected COVER preset or STYLE MAKEUP TOOLS set tings p 102 1 On the STYLE COVER page select the desired COVER preset see above 2 Press the field GT Cers Th a EI BAND rey Poi oi El OE GI RSS ED EH Ga 3 4 5 The display changes to Bee Bie eli EX Eer rose T This page allows you to save the current Style to the internal memory a memory card or a floppy disk It will be saved along with the COVER settings you selected Press the EXTERNAL MEMORY FLOPPY INTERNAL MEMORY field to ma ee you want to save the Style Enter the name for the file See page 44 Note The E 60 E 50 supports both upper and lower case let ters for file names Choose whichever is more convenient or clearer Press the field to save the data If the selected memory area already contains a Style of that name you are asked whether it is OK to over write It A file GE nde already exists Overwrite Press the field to overwrite the file Press the field to return to the SAVE STYLE page change the name then press again The data are saved and a Operation Successful mes sage confirms the end of the operation Note To return to the Style s original version select it press the field on the STYLE COVER page then save it agai
81. and edit the data COPY The COPY function allows you to copy one track to another or excerpts of one or all tracks to a different location The latter is useful if you need to repeat the chorus several times at the end of the song but do not feel like recording all those notes RAGE SUIT ma AT iil ace cm EIE net Gomer etoc FROM boor or loog TO ESRC TRACK ALL 1 16 Allows you to select the track whose data you wish to copy FROM BAR 1 last measure of the track or song Refers to the first measure to be edited By default the FROM value is set to the beginning of the selected track s BEAT 1 number of beats per bar Specifies the beat position The number of available beats depends on the time signature in the selected area CPT 1 119 This is where you specify the CPT position of the beginning of the track excerpt to be copied Unless you do not need all notes of the first bar you should keep the default setting WTO By default the TO position is set to the last event of the selected track or the last event of the longest track when you select ALL BAR 1 last measure of the track or song This is where you specify the bar position of the last measure to be edited BEAT 1 number of beats per bar Specifies the beat position The number of available beats depends on the time signature in the selected area CPT 1 119 Refers to the last clock that sho
82. and time let us agree to use the word song when referring to Standard MIDI Files Before using this instrument carefully read the Important notes on p 11 They provide information concerning the proper operation of the E 60 E 50 Be sure to keep this manual in a safe place for future reference Copyright 2006 ROLAND EUROPE All rights reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced in any form without the written permission of Roland Europe S p a E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Features Features Roland s most comprehensive arranger instru ment ever The E 60 E 50 is quite simply a superlative instrument with the most advanced and best sound generation technology Roland has to offer It contains a superb internal sound source based on the acclaimed Fan tom X series New interface concept The E 60 E 50 was designed from the ground up to put its massive array of functions at your fingertips The touch sensitive screen and the large number of front panel buttons usually provide direct access to the avail able functions thus doing away with the need to wade through countless menus Parameters that belong together from a musician s point of view are usually located on the same or adja cent display pages while setting them has been greatly simplified with respect to earlier arranger instruments Cover functions and Makeup Tools for Standard MIDI Files and Music Styles Reorchestrating existing Standard MID
83. at the current posi tion All characters behind this position move one position further to the right 5 Press the field and enter the file name Here you can only enter 18 characters All characters will be capitals 6 Press the field to save your song The display tells you that the data are being saved after which it returns to the SAVE SONG page 7 Press the button to return to the main page or the RECORDER button to add even more tracks 4 About the Keyboard modes E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Roland Arranger Piano Organ and Guitar modes The KBD MODE setting is the singlemost important parameter of your E 60 E 50 because it determines which parts or Tones and sections are available Though the EASY SETTING buttons set these parameters automatically you should familiarize yourself with the KBD MODE concept Arranger Piano Organ and Guitar modes The E 60 E 50 has four major keyboard modes ARRANGER PIANO ORGAN and GUITAR They can be selected using the EASY SETTING ARR ORGAN and buttons The second mode ORGAN configures the E 60 E 50 for organ music The Guitar mode transforms the E 60 E 50 into a vir tual guitar see p 29 In many instances pressing ARR GUITAR or provides a nice starting point for further fine tuning Select ARR or ORG when you need the automatic accompaniment function and wish to activate its chord recognition in the left half see page 67 for details S
84. be difficult to view after turning on your E 60 E 50 or after extended use Your viewing angle or the current lighting conditions can also affect the appearance of the display In such cases use the knob to the left of the display to adjust the contrast Switching off the E 60 E 50 1 Switch off all external devices 2 Use the E 60 E 50 s POWER ON button to switch it off Note If you need to turn off the power completely first turn off the POWER switch then unplug the power cord from the power outlet Be sure to wait 2 3 seconds before switching the E 60 E 50 back on 19 Interactive demo of the E 60 E 50 Your E 60 E 50 contains an interactive demo that introduces all of its highlights It might be a good idea to try it out now The demo is self explanatory so we ll just show you how to start and stop it 1 Press the button 4 If you can barely hear the music set the knob far left MASTER section to a higher level pa 5 To stop the demo and leave the E 60 E 50 s Demo function press the DEMO RECORDER or the button 2 If necessary press the field and select the language for this interactive demo function ANG PENA 3 nai h U enh Me aN il pana Pag Nederlands dIE Press if you didn t mean to select this page The current language selection will not change 3 Press the field that provides access to the desired demo function There are 8 sound and 8 Style demo s
85. bee EE EE IE N 181 Style SESSE SS EE ee ee eee 152 SEL eee EG EG EG ee 44 129 UIE ESE os Eg 134 Style COMPOSE ne ee EE 166 EDE RS RD 131 132 164 ASU AR EE EE N 52 OWEN PA 38 INSTRUMENTS aaa 51 aai APARADOR 192 Intelligence Threshold 62 Ea aa a 67 chit dai AA 191 192 MEMO MEE EE EE IG 197 Interval transposition 48 AUG PP 134 160 Os os deed EE 24 55 60 EO ERNS SEE SEG GER GE DE 65 AlteratioN SEE See eae 67 MES OE AA 61 Jump To 1st Note 104 148 K KBD Mode esse ei ge oe 45 gie AE EE EE 65 AE EE EEN N 154 Score OOS EER RR SE 40 Style CONVENE 2 naaa naaa ma karakas 150 TOUCH AE 50 Keyboard amp Style PANG osse EDE ES sig 188 Exchange UP T naaawa REEDE DS 56 FUNCTIONS ee eee 77 MOdES ER Ee De ee 45 AT EE S ET 77 Pd oo NE SE N EE EE AA 26 PES EE RE EN EE 22 20 79 Sound selection eT 27 GUGM EE EE EE 50 Jare Ese AAR EA 48 L PANU io ulin ig linen da elector 20 LCD Contrast 0 0 eee eee 19 Len ooo OE OE RE OER A 66 EER oe ie 155 169 Level Chorus a 86 ReverD a 83 86 See also Volume AE HE EE ASANG pauund 192 FOV LOW ER N 190 ii EE EE RE EO Oe 93 94 Melody Intelligence 63 EE EE EE N 85 HA N 88 E MAAR EE Ed 159 hei AE EE EE EE EE EO 176 Ub es GEE 176 User Program Sel nanana paan 176 LOCA EE EE EE 189 ON OFF 0 cece eee 188 Ve MEER EE EE Ee ee 69 FOOD hee AAR RARARIII III 149 ko EE AE EE N EE as 190 t
86. can be irretrievably lost as a result of a malfunction or the improper operation of the instrument Use a reasonable amount of care when using the E 60 E 50 s but tons other controls and jacks connectors Rough handling can lead to malfunctions e Never strike or apply strong pressure to the display e When connecting disconnecting cables grasp the connector itself never pull on the cable This way you will avoid causing shorts or damage to the cable s internal elements e A small amount of heat will radiate from the E 60 E 50 during normal operation This is perfectly normal e To avoid disturbing your neighbors try to keep the E 60 E 50 s volume at reasonable levels You may prefer to use headphones so you do not need to be concerned about those around you espe cially late at night e When you need to transport the E 60 E 50 package it in the box including padding that it came in Otherwise you will need to use equivalent packaging materials or a flightcase e Use only the specified expression pedal EV 5 EV 7 sold sepa rately By connecting any other expression pedals you risk caus ing malfunction and or damage to the E 60 E 50 About the touch screen e Wipe off stains on the touch screen using ethanol but do not allow the ethanol to soak into the joint of the upper fume and the bottom glass for it may cause peeling or malfunction Do not use organic solvents or detergents other than ethyl alcohol ethanol
87. cannot be chosen here already contains a User Program of that name you are asked whether it is OK to overwrite It WR GU Sth PROGRAM ACE Same file on disk 3 Overwrite maa Re e Press the field to overwrite the file This replaces the User Program in question with the new version Be aware that the new version is used by any list that contains a reference to that file e Press the field to return to the WRITE USER PROGRAM page change the name then press again Note See Load User Program Set on p 176 for how to load another User Program List The data are saved and a message confirms the end of the operation Selecting User Programs Cancel For song or Style playback without any customized set tings or whenever you want to start anew you should select the Cancel setting This allows you to leave User Program mode canceling the settings of the last User Program you may have loaded These settings can be recalled any time i e even after selecting a regular User Program Simultaneously press USER PROGRAM and UP Note Unless you specified a User Program for the Startup function page 95 you can also load the Cancel settings by powering off your E 60 E 50 and turning it back on again SY E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Working with User Programs Choosing User Programs manually The procedure for selecting User Programs does not fol low the usual routine for selecting Style
88. capable of responding to velocity messages Use the fields to switch the reception RX or transmis sion TX of velocity messages on or off If you don t select On specify which velocity value to use instead of the continuous flux The value you set will be used for all notes received via MIDI IN USB RX or sent to MIDI OUT USB TX mix SYSEX Use this parameter to specify whether button icon on or not off the E 60 E 50 should send SysEx messages Such messages are not standardized so that each manufacturer can use them ad lib for temporary or permanent changes to the way a part behaves Effects parameters for instance can only be changed via SysEx messages Such messages may slow down playback on external MIDI instruments or yield no effect at all which is why you have the option to switch off their transmission in the first place DATA CHANGES This parameter allows you to specify how the original program changes of the songs you play back are transmitted via MIDI The E 60 E 50 may change sound addresses usually CCOO and CC32 values so as to play back all songs with the best possible quality If you switch this parameter on such real time transfor mations are also transmitted via MIDI in which case the receiving tone generator may drop certain parts if it does not support the requested sound bank If you switch this parameter off the original sound addresses are transmitted to the receiving device But th
89. dial or the DECJ INC buttons You can specify positive and negative sensitivity val ues Positive values mean that the volume of the part in question increases when you strike the chord rec ognition area keys harder while negative values mean that the volume of the selected Arranger part increases as your velocity becomes softer You could use extreme positive negative ACCOMP pairs i e 127 and 127 to alternate between those two lines simply by varying your velocity One part would then only be audible when you strike the keys softly while the other would only be triggered by high velocity values Choose 0 for parts whose volume should not be affected by your velocity values Press the field to return to the ARRANGER CHORD page Press the button to return to the main page Tempo related settings Arranger Options The E 60 E 50 provides two parameters that allow you to play with the Style tempo 1 2 Press the button The display changes to MENU f GUITAR E ao TOUCH Uae AA ARRANGER 7 WE STYLE E function P HAND USB DATA Roem EA Es Press the ARRANGER SETTING field followed by the ARRANGER OPTIONS field ARRANGED Sanri S ETEA TEMPO CHANGE FILL IN TEMPO HALF BAR Style Tempo Let us briefly summarize everything that has already been said about the tempo Each Music Style has a preset tempo that is recalled whene
90. did find one or several matches the FOUND number will be smaller than the GLOBAL number Editing the Style Finder information The Finder information is based on search criteria that need to be added to Style files By default Style files do not contain them Options After pressing the FINDER button the display looks as follows SYE OF STYLE B Tig GENRE TEMPO HE N 2 ll al The field in the lower left corner provides access to a display page where you can add database information This also works for Styles that already contain entries you wish to modify 1 First select the Style whose database information you wish to change or edit by pressing Its field 2 Press the field QQ rime Bie a ze ie KA La mina 3 Now do one of the following Mi Rename This function allows you to change or supply the STYLE NAME COUNTRY and or GENRE information of the selected Style the TEMPO value is fixed but could be changed using a STYLE COMPOSER function p 162 e Press the STYLE NAME or field and enter the desired characters see p 44 Note If you select a Style on floppy disk only the STYLE NAME and FILE NAME can be edited e Press the field N Delete This function allows you to delete the selected Style from the internal memory a memory card or floppy disk You should use this as sparsely as possible and probably never for the internal memory Once a
91. e f necessary use the PAGE 1 PAGE 4 fields to switch pages CUSTOM The number of pages depends on the selected family e Press the field of the Music Style you want to use See pages 25 and 73 for details about selecting Music Styles 1Os E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Song and Style Makeup Tools General procedure 1 2 Press the MAKEUP TOOLS button once or twice This depends on whether you want to change the settings of the selected song or Style The display changes to EER ims JUMP TO Ka EI ki EA EE my Jae ms OF eg FERC Proe ali MUTE Ea ma darwa aae e If this page is not displayed press the field in the upper left corner All modifications on this page and the related pages are SysEx data that alter the actual song data with out replacing them Only the E 60 E 50 can read these data Other SMF players and the 16 track Sequencer ignore these newly added SysEx data There is currently no other instrument capable of reading the MSE Style format the E 60 E 50 uses so compatibility is no issue Use the fields in the lower right corner to select the instrument you want to edit If you select a Drum Set the display changes to Te fe MAGUPI TOOLS K gewe 3 coron gano GTA EDIT LI nG si vis EE Ban ig Solo B MUTE FI MUTE re TO KIT KY See page 106 for an explanation of the and fields
92. existing files on the destination TO media should not be copied only files with original names will be copied in that case The data are copied and a message confirms the end of the operation Note Never remove the floppy disk or memory card while the operation is in progress Wait for the confirmation to appear before returning to business as usual 13 Press the button to return to the main page Note If the remaining storage capacity is smaller than the size of the files you wish to copy the E 60 E 50 automatically Stops the operation without displaying a message as soon as the media is full Always check the contents of the destination media immediately after the copy operation to make sure that all required files have been copied Format This function allows you to format the inserted floppy disk or memory card For safety reasons you cannot format the internal memory because it also contains the E 60 E 50 s operating system It would be a good idea to also format floppy disks for matted for MS DOS because that speeds up data access Memory cards must always be formatted on the E 60 E 50 during formatting the E 60 E 50 indeed also creates a number of folders where your var ious files will be stored 1 Defeat the disk s or memory card s write protection if available Floppy disk Close the little window page 11 Memory card See its owner s manual this depends on the kind of card yo
93. field that corre sponds to the instrument whose User Programs you want to import refers to the VA series while represents the G 1000 and EM 2000 This selection specifies the algorithm the E 60 E 50 will use for the conversion User Program set files contain no clue about the instrument that generated them Note The User Programs you want to import must reside on a floppy disk and be bundled as a set You can transfer that file to your PC via USB See page 184 for how to establish the required connection and transferring the file to your computer Note that the information has no effect on the imported User Programs it is merely intended as a log that may help you find a given User Program more quickly 1 Tells you not to modify or delete the file in the E 60 E 50 s Text folder if you want the conversion report to be updated at every import session l l 5 Select the target media for the imported User Pro grams using the field INT MEMORY or EXT MEMORY memory card T32 6 7 8 Press the field of the file whose User Programs you want to import Check again whether you really selected the file you want to import then press the field to start the import operation This may take a while because the conversion requires quite a few calculations Furthermore the User Program Finder database needs to be updated Be sure to wait until the Operation Successful mes Sage appears Note Th
94. files are sorted alphabetically according to User Program name STYLE LINK The files are sorted alphabetically according to Style name all User Programs refer to a Style GENRE The files are sorted alphabetically according to genre kind of music SONG LINK User Program files with an active link to a song file are sorted alphabetically according to song name The right column now contains the selected entry only one of them can be displayed along with the User Program name Continue with step 3 to select the User Program you want to use W Using the Index function The highest hierarchical level of the User Program Finder database is called Index All search opera tions apply to the selected Index and therefore not necessarily to all files in the internal memory or on a memory card E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Roland Selecting User Programs e After performing step 2 press the field in the upper left corner e Either press the field that corresponds to the desired User Program category or if you re not sure which category the User Program belongs to press ALL e Now return to the previous page by pressing Back The display returns to the page shown under step 1 above This time however only the User Programs belonging to the selected Index are displayed Continue with step 3 to select the User Program you want to use Milo directly locate the desired User Program 4 P
95. for intuitive song and Style playback control and additional DJ like effects via movements over an invisible beam of infrared light And of course the BENDER MODULATION lever is also there as are sockets for optional footswitches and an expression pedal D Beam technology licensed from Interactive Light Inc and so much more Listing all of the E 60 E 50 s advantages and functions would take another ten pages while you must be dying to put it through its paces That is why we would like to ask you to read this manual from cover to cover You ll find that the E 60 E 50 is quite unlike any other instru ment you know Have fun E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Features USING THE UNIT SAFELY INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE PREVENTION OF FIRE ELECTRIC SHOCK OR INJURY TO PERSONS About Z WARNING and N CAUTION Notices About the Symbols Used for instructions intended to alert The A symbol alerts the user to important instructions the user to the risk of death or severe or warnings The specific meaning of the symbol is ANWARNING injury should the unit be used determined by the design contained within the triangle In the case of the symbol at left it is used for general cautions warnings or alerts to danger improperly Used for instructions intended to alert the user to the risk of injury or material damage should the unit be used improperly The symbol alerts the user to items that must never be carried out
96. hand Arranger play back is muted for the remainder of the current measure This is great for rock n roll songs Pitch Up By moving your hand over the D Beam you can generate a value between 64 no Pitch Bend and 127 maximum upward bend As soon as you move your hand outside the D Beam s reach higher than 40cm above the eyes or further to the left or right the value returns to 64 no Pitch Bend The maximum bend interval is two semi tones Pitch Down By moving your hand over the D Beam you can generate a value between 64 no Pitch Bend and 0 maximum downward bend As soon as you move your hand outside the D Beam s reach the value returns to 64 no Pitch Bend D Modulations Select this function if you want the D Beam to duplicate the modulation function of the Bender Modulation lever Cut amp Reso Up Only for Upper1 and or 2 By moving your hand over the D Beam you can vary the current TVF Cutoff value see also p 105 of the Upper1 2 part The Resonance parameter will be set to 63 maximum while the Cutoff frequency can be controlled between O no change and 63 maximum increase This allows you to create some nifty filter effects that are particularly useful for Dance Techno music When you move your hand outside the D Beam s range both Reso nance and IVF Cutoff return to their original values O no change Note If TVF Cutoff is already set to 63 you cannot incre
97. in a very quiet envi ronment while the Digital Bass Enhancer is set to On That noise is too faint to be audible once you start playing In any case it is not transmitted to external speakers or headphones Note You may hear a clicking noise from the internal speak ers when you switch the Digital Bass Enhancer function from On to Off or from Off to On This is not a malfunction This clicking noise is not transmitted to external speakers or headphones E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Roland Digital Bass Enhancer function a 7 E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Working with User Programs ER Working with User Programs The E 60 E 50 also provides User Program memories that allow you to store almost all settings or registra tions you make on the front panel and the various dis play pages Additional registrations can be loaded directly from the internal memory or a memory card Before taking a closer look at the User Programs there is one thing we have to point out all settings related to MIDI must be written to a MIDI Set page 193 MIDI settings are not saved to a User Program Note You can link a MIDI Set to each User Program so that the User Program in question automatically loads the required MIDI settings About the User Program memory structure Unlike previous Roland instruments the E 60 E 50 no longer has a fixed area where it stores User Program settings so that the number of User Programs is in fact
98. is PP EE 56 Sound Ed SS EA a a ek ts to 105 106 EF des SE OE EE N 51 52 Set MODE onaaanssceassnsaaananes 28 Source patte RO ANN wees 133 Eo e ee EE 44 111 129 SPEIKET ANA 171 SPCCIICAN ONS EE 198 od RE ee ere 46 diete TEER EE EER ORR EE EG 50 Arranger 46 Keyboard Mode 05 46 ke age 78 PO EE EE PEP RP PP EN N 46 Standard aaa 55 67 MID Hle RE Re N 35 44 nee 22 190 PNO EE Ne 196 SICK AA 23 55 60 OLGA 53 DOC EE ER N EN ees 53 EG oi EE EE 28 95 194 ie EE RR OE OE NE 173 E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Roland Index Stereo placement 102 105 106 Time User Proe sede ee ee ie ee ee ee 88 Stereo WIG EE OE hhhg 33 OE Ee EE EE EE GE Ee 169 Coc MAREE eee ee 89 HOP rr 190 Signature 008 125 152 OY reses EE ee 97 Storing see Save WIGS EE APA 160 Delete MAA 96 STRENGTH KG e Ee 159 Edit INGE EE ED 95 StummUB 33 TONE a 27 160 Filter Strumming 29 sl ER 79 saaan a Sa AE EE 22 Map nanana 1a FOG ii is Sound Edit ee 105 EE EE 92 OWS AA 107 Stile 99 Composer 151 Top OE aa aa Ma MM Ad AM MM d AR MA MM AE N MR Ma AM MA N ME 37 y OE EE a CC etc EMO eo AA kk kk Re NG Control Be EE 151 154 AA eet ee Tone seleetlOr ee RAAR RR RE UZ Converter 147 ETA ORE EE sent 129 162 3 ee IKANSPOSE settings ee 92 Cover 63 INStrUMEnt ss a cen a a aes 153 154 160 ipa SA a a Transposition 92 Custom programming 70 Length EE EE ata ab
99. is fed back into the effect Negative settings will invert the phase Flanger Balance D100 0W D50 50W DO 100W Volume balance between the direct sound D and the flanger sound W Delay Time 0 0 500 0ms Adjusts the time until the delay is heard Delay Feedback 98 0 98 Adjusts the amount of the delay sound that s fed back into the effect Negative settings invert the phase Delay HF Damp 200 8000Hz Bypass Adjusts the fre quency above which sound fed back to the effect is filtered out If you don t want to filter out any high frequencies set this parameter to BYPASS 2 O 6G Delay Balance D100 0W D50 50W D0 100W Adjusts the volume balance between the sound that is sent through the delay W and the sound that is not sent through the delay D Level 0 127 Output level 38 CHO Flanger This effect connects a chorus and a flanger in series Chorus Pre Delay 0 0 100 0ms Adjusts the delay between the incoming direct signal and the moment when the chorus starts working Chorus Rate 0 05 10 0Hz Modulation frequency of the chorus effect Chorus Depth 0 127 Modulation intensity of the cho rus effect Chorus Balance D100 0W D50 50W D0 100W Vol ume balance between the direct sound D and the chorus sound W Flanger Pre Delay 0 0 100 0ms Adjusts the delay time from when the direct sound begins until the flanger sound is heard Flanger Rate
100. loaded from card or the internal memory DISK a USER This memory contains the Music Style data The Style can be played back When you unpack the E 60 E 50 the CUSTOM mem ories are empty So you first need to program your own references to Styles Programming CUSTOM assignments The E 60 E 50 comes with several Style examples in internal memory you could use to try out the following Once you start working with your E 60 E 50 you will probably copy external Music Styles to the internal memory and establish CUSTOM links to those Note Use the Copy function see p 75 to copy all Styles to the same card or the internal memory 1 Press a button of the STYLE pad to select a Music Style family STYLE 8 BEAT LIVE Disco BALL Jazz MATIN 16 BEAT BAND DANCE ROOM BLUES WARLD tt fee DISK EB USER SteamtrainCountr Blue Boogie Posaunenpolka Posaunenwalzer Slow Country Country Ballad Country Beat CUSTOM bd CO EI 2 Press the field 3 Press the field of the memory you wish to assign a Style to 4 Press the field STYLE LIST Country1 1152 My GLOBAL 553 68 5 Press the or field This is necessary to specify whether you want to link a Style in the internal memory or on a card in the PCMCIA slot 6 Press the field that contains the name of the Style you want to assign to the selected CUSTOM mem ory
101. manufacturers like Roland use a byte that allows the user to check whether the SysEx message is correct That byte is called the checksum If you don t know how to calculate that value press the button icon to have the E 60 E 50 insert it for you This is a very important step for Roland tone genera tors If the checksum is wrong or missing the entire string will be ignored Note The checksum is only calculated for SysEx strings of a certain length more than 7 bytes Use the 0 9 and A F fields to enter the value for the selected white on black byte A stands for 10 B for 11 C for 12 D for 13 E for 14 and F for 15 Press the field to remove the selected byte All subsequent bytes will move one position to the left Press the field to insert 00 at the current position The originally selected byte and all subse quent bytes move one position to the right You can then replace the inserted OO with the value you need Press the field to transmit the SysEx string in its current state to the tone generator This allows you to check the result before confirming it E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Roland Editing 16 track songs e Press the field to confirm your settings Press if you don t want to use the SysEx mes sage after all By pressing or CLOSE you return to the MASTER TRACK EDIT page MEI ETIES IG SU ge b CREATE EVENT 0 0 Sys Ex FO 7E 7F 09 01
102. many settings in realtime Because you can trigger the LWR part and the Arranger simultaneously selecting another Music Style pattern usually means that you have to lift your left hand from the keyboard If the LOWER HOLD function is not active in ARR mode the LWR part stops sounding as soon as you release all keys in the left area If you press the field however the notes of that Lower part go on sounding until you play other notes in the left keyboard area Note The LOWER HOLD functions are only available in SPLIT mode 1 Press the button 2 Press the field followed by the KEYBOARD OPTIONS field ae amp TOUCH Cai GEE LOWER UPPER 2 UPPER 1 HOLD 3 Switch on the LWR part its PART ON OFF button must light 4 Press the field to switch it on 5 Play a short note in the left half of the keyboard and release the key This note goes on sounding until you press another note or chord in the left half of the keyboard Note This setting can also be switched on and off with an optional footswitch see p 56 6 Press the button to return to the main page Tone Edit editing Keyboard parts Your E 60 E 50 allows you to edit certain parameters that affect the way a Keyboard part sounds by adjust ing their brilliance their modulation speed Vibrato Rate and so on The parameters discussed here only apply to the fol lowing Keyboard parts Upper1 Upper2 Lower Bass
103. measure to be edited By default the FROM value is set to the beginning of the selected track s BEAT 1 number of beats per bar Specifies the beat position The number of available beats depends on the time signature in the selected area CPT 1 119 Refers to the starting CPT position CPT is short for Clock Pulse Time the smallest unit used by the E 60 E 50 There are 120 CPTs to every beat of a 4 4 bar Change this setting only if your edit operation should start after the selected beat WTO By default the TO position is set to the last event of the selected track or the last event of the longest track when you select ALL BAR 1 last measure of the track or song This is where you specify the bar position of the last measure to be edited BEAT 1 number of beats per bar Specifies the beat position The number of available beats depends on the time signature in the selected area CPT 1 119 Refers to the last clock that should be affected by the edit operation Change this setting only if your edit operation should not end exactly on the selected beat IBIAS 99 99 The BIAS parameter allows you to specify by how much the velocity values should change Select a positive value to increase the velocity the value is added to the velocity value of the affected notes or a negative value to decrease the velocity values that value is subtracted Select O if you prefer to work with
104. names of the songs that contain the mel ody you played Press the field of the song you want to play back Note If no songs were found the following message appears and no file names are displayed in which case you need to press the SONG NAME ARTIST GENRE or FILE NAME field to display all songs again ER No Match Found OPTIONS A OUND O Daces e i GLOBA T If the E 60 E 50 did find one or several matches the FOUND number will be smaller than the GLOBAL number Starting playback 7 To return to the main page press EXIT hrm oe KO reer Dae EL Ge al New Song Strummlin Pop SER Free Panel ale BEE Sit TEN EER cass XV Ac Bass The main page is the E 60 E 50 s display page that provides a maximum of relevant information and allows you to select and change items you may need during normal operation 3G 8 9 It also displays the name of the selected song the tempo and the current measure You can press the button icon in the upper right hand corner to see the song s tempo This value is automatically dis played when you start song playback Note If the message Too many events is displayed the selected song contains more data than can be handled and is therefore not played back Press the button Playback of the selected song starts Note See Song Arranger Start Priority on p 196 if playback does not start If necessa
105. need to enter characters again e Press the field to start your search If the following message appears the E 60 E 50 was unable to locate files that match the search criteria E NR _ No Match Found _ OPTIONS FOUND Q Pace l ER mm gt In that case all song names are listed the xx of yy entry lists twice the same number of files If the E 60 E 50 did find one or several matches the xx number will be smaller than the yy number e Press the field of the song you need and do your thing Editing the Song Finder information The Finder information is based on search criteria that need to be supplied for Standard MIDI Files Normal Standard MIDI Files do not contain them Note Some of the following information cannot be entered for or read from files on floppy disk Song Options After pressing the FINDER button the display looks as follows SONG LIST O at SONG f E ARTIST 7 ay GENRE E ABE IE FEVER FEVER MID 3 DP FIRSTDAY MID KAU RH OPTIONS FOUND 47 PAGE The field in the lower left corner provides access to a display page where you can add database information This also works for songs that already contain entries First select the song whose database information you wish to edit by pressing its field 11 E 60 E 50 Music Workstation More refined song functions 2 Press the field MP amp S Input EE EE EE Lee bu de je d ve pese se der
106. of the operation 7 Press the button to return to the main page Editing an Index All User Programs in the E 60 E 50 s internal memory are already assigned to one of eight categories You can change those assignments and even edit the Index names Furthermore you can copy an Index entry along with all its User Program assignments to a dif ferent entry 1 Press the FINDER button The display changes to One Qr Qr Bia 6_8 Pop OPTIONS 4 OUND 70 I J GLOBAL TO I7 E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Working with User Programs 2 Specify the memory area or INTERNAL MEMORY 3 Press the field in the top left corner If the field is currently selected the display looks as follows LIE PROGRAM DER EE Rename Tapat The Index Edit functions are only available for real Index categories so 4 Press the field of the Index category you wish to edit USE PrOGKAMINDEX LE pag F EDIT 2 fe EDED 5 Select the edit function you need by pressing its field Bl Rename This function allows you to change the name of the selected Index e Press the field ETE PROGRAM VIDE GIE MEE e Enter the new name 16 characters See Entering names on p 44 Note The field allows you to switch between uppercase and lowercase characters e Press the EXECUTE field to confirm the new name E Edit This function allows yo
107. old version _or e Press the field if you do not want to overwrite this file and return to the SAVE page instead Then enter a different name or select a different media Note Never remove the floppy disk or memory card while the operation is in progress Wait for the confirmation to appear before returning to business as usual W Save User Program Set This function allows you to save the Set List cur rently assigned to the USER PROGRAM buttons This also includes all GLOBAL parameters see the list in the Parameter Reference booklet You can also use this function to copy the Set along with all User Programs i e the registration data it refers to from one media to another 1 Press the button 2 Press the field followed by the USER PROGRAM SET field SAVE USE AROG AW SST Le Je e ee 6 aa tte sae 0 nen 3 Select the target media or EXTERNAL MEMORY memory card Note User Program Sets cannot be saved to floppy disk 4 Enter the name for the file e Use the and fields to select the position for which you wish to enter a new character e Use the alohanumeric keypad to enter the desired characters This keypad works exactly like the keypad of a cellphone you may have to press an alphanu meric field several times to select the desired charac ter or number The field allows you to switch between upper case and lowercase characters e The field allows you to d
108. on this page 1 Select and load a different Style This is not necessary if you want to edit the Style you have just recorded See Selecting Music Styles on p 25 and Style Finder quickly locating Styles on p 73 for how to load a Style 2 Press the button The display changes to MENU K TUNING le gei a 3 Press the STYLE COMPOSER field STYLE COMPOSER TIER O CHA des ABASS d ASS SLID de ACCOMP ag piam 4 Press the field T 7O 5 6 7 The display changes to JRALS yllar ser A a Uk 0 CC 0 Bank Select MSB 0 000 CC 32 Bank Select LSB 4 4 Program Change CC 10 Fan CC 11 Expression CC 391 Reverb 93 Chorus Press the field and use the dial or the DECJ INC buttons to select the track you want to edit Press the field and use the dial or the DEC IINC buttons to select the Mode you want to edit Major minor 7th Press the field and use the dial or the DEC INC buttons to select the Division you want to edit MAIN 1 4 Fill Up 13 Fill Dwn 1 3 Intro 154 Ending 14 General notes about STYLE MICRO EDIT W Graphic representation of your data piano roll To getter a better idea of where your data are located and how they are distributed press the field The display then changes to Ed Hd Ed Oo Except for a perhaps clearer representation of the data on the selected track all other operations are the same as in standard
109. only contains the sound assignments you have Just made SHES GOMEOSEI ER MUTE ADRUMS V P0P1 PALING SA AN lead as SASS SLID Getting ready for the first track 7 On the STYLE COMPOSER page press the DIVISION field and use the dial to select the Division you want to record Intro Main Fill or Ending 8 Press the RECORDER button The display changes to STL COMEOSER REG STANDBY TRACK morena Neton Gt 15353 E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Programming Styles Style Composer Selecting the track the Mode and the Division To keep things easy let s start with the drums of the MAIN 1 Division 9 Press the field and use the dial to select the track you wish to record to Select AccDrums This causes the display to change as follows because there are more options for drum tracks STL COMPOSER REC STANDBY TRACK INSTRUMENT Now select a pattern Let s start with MAIN 1 10 Press the field and use the dial to select Main 1 N Working with clones On this page you can use two clone functions that allow you to record one part and copy it to up to four Divisions and three Modes each The sign means that more than one pattern will be recorded 11 Use the field to select the models This parameter allows you to specify whether you are about to record the accompaniment for major minor or seventh chords If you listen to the Styles prepared by Roland
110. or FLOPPY DISK disk for TO disable the card s disk s write protection and insert it into the PCMCIA slot or disk drive To disable the write protection of a floppy disk close the little window see p 11 See the owner s man ual of the memory card for how to disable its write protection Press the field Press if you do not want to proceed or to select other files JD You are asked whether it is OK to overwrite all files on the destination media TO that have the same file names as the files you are about to copy 6 Press the field if it is OK to overwrite files with the same names on the destination media Press the field if files on the source FROM media that have the same name as existing files on the destination TO media should not be copied only files with original names will be copied in that case The data are copied and a Successful message con firms the end of the operation 7 Press the button to return to the main page E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Roland Tuning Upper2 Coarse Tune and Fine Tune Advanced Keyboard part functions Tuning Upper2 Coarse Tune and Fine Tune The UP2 part can be used as full fledged solo or melody sound or to fatten the sound of UPI To layer the UP1 and UP2 parts you need to switch them both on See page 26 for details The following parameters allow you to transpose Coarse or to detune Fine the Upper2 part relative
111. outside the range you decide to keep are discarded The various fields display the settings that are cur rently in effect Obviously you only need to change the settings of the Mode whose length you want to modify The white part of the window shows the cur rent length settings for the selected TRACK ADrums in the example above and DIVISION Main4 The three columns MAJOR MINOR 7TH refer to the modes There are only three lines 1 3 for Fill Ins Note There is no way to recall the previous version so be sure to save your Style before continuing see p 157 MTRACK ADrums Acc6 ALL Allows you to select the track whose length you wish to change BI DIVISION Use this parameter to select the Division you want to edit Intro 1 4 Main 1 4 Fill Dwn 1 3 Fill Up 153 End 154 MLENGTH BAR Press this field and use the dial or the DEC INC buttons to set the length of the selected pattern s in steps of one bar You can also make an existing track longer by specifying a BAR value that lies beyond the last notes Note To change the BAR length of all three Modes switch on all three BAR fields then set the desired value BEAT 1 number of beats per bar Specifies the beat position The number of selectable beats depends on the selected time signature Note To change the BEAT length of all three Modes switch on all three BEAT fields then set the value MAJOR MINOR 7TH O 0001 00 000
112. parameters for the AccDrums track you may want to set them before performing step 6 6 Press to start recording 7 Press again after the first or second beat but wait until the count in if any is fin ished This completes sound selection The new sound address replaces the old one N Drum Instrument amp Pitch STL COMPOSER REC STANDBY TRACK INSTRUMENT a NRPN DRUM Cl After selecting the AccDrums track you can change the pitch of certain sounds of the selected Drum Set The eligible sounds and corresponding note numbers are C 2 37 Side Stick D2 38 Stand 2 Snare 1 E2 40 Stand 2 Snare 2 F2 41 Low Tom 2 E3 52 Chinese Cymbal G 3 56 Cowbell A3 57 Crash Cymbal 2 F4 65 High Timbale Note The names of the drum percussion sounds depend on the currently selected Drum Set The sounds are usually similar in nature however e On the above display page select the AccDrums track e Select the Division whose settings you wish to change and possibly also all clones page 154 e Press the field and use the DEC INC buttons to select Mix Let us assume that your track already contains data e Press the field and select the drum sound whose pitch you want to change with the dial or the DEC INC buttons e Press the field and use the dial to set the desired pitch 64 63 You can play on the keyboard to listen to the result e Press the button to start recording e Press ag
113. parts must be on These settings allow you to trigger the Bandoneon sound with velocity values between 1 and 105 low to relatively high velocity while velocity values above 106 only trigger the vio lin There are countless other possibilities such as using MIN 80 MAX 127 for the MELODY INTELL part page 62 so that the automatic harmonies are only added when you really want to hear them 5 Press the button to return to the main page Master Tune This is not really a performance function but it allows you to tune your E 60 E 50 to acoustic instruments that cannot be tuned 1 Press the button 2 Press the field followed by the field GLOBAL TRANSPOSE 3 Use the dial to set the desired tun ing The default value is 440 0 You can return to this value by pressing the field 4 Press the button to return to the main page See page 49 for the Global Transpose parameter E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Roland Master Tune Using the D Beam Controller E 60 The D Beam controller allows you to control various aspects of your performance or to add something to the music by moving your hand head etc in the arr You only need to make sure that you do so over the two eyes and within a 40cm 16 range Your movements are translated into musical expression The E 50 has no D Beam controller Let s first try out the DJ GEAR functions 1 Press the D BEAM button
114. press the button If you want to stop Style playback before the end of the song press either the or the button This will stop the Arranger while recording goes on This allows you to improvise without accompani ment ad 2 9 Press the button to stop record ing 10 See Listening to your song Adding more parts Here is how to redo part of your recording one part you do not like or to add additional parts to what has already been recorded Let us first have a look at what has been recorded so far and where We started out with the Arranger which means that the following tracks may now contain data not all Styles use all 8 tracks the Arranger can play back simul taneously Arranger part Recorder track ADR 10 ABS 2 ACC1 1 ACC2 3 ACC3 5 ACC4 7 ACC5 8 ACC6 9 If you also recorded one or several Keyboard parts their data reside on the following tracks Keyboard part Recorder track UP1 4 UP2 6 LWR 11 MBS 12 MELODY INT 15 UP1 2 and LWR can also be used as additional drum part if you assign them a Drum Set TONE button For the following we will assume that you recorded the melody using the UP1 part track 4 and that you now want to add some chords using the LWR part 1 Start by taking note of the track you wish to re record See the tables above For our example we will use track 11 LWR 2 Press the RECORDER button EA Bas es PEI AUN You have just sel
115. s 32 SODA EE RE RR RR 111 Sle NAE ae BR 74 User Program ee ee 96 Oriental Scales ss aas EER RR RR 57 O OO 107 COVEI AA 38 E eR 187 MO AA HE N 187 OUTSIDE asses eres 131 132 164 P P amp S INPUL ees ae N Ee 112 PAGE VA er EE SE AP 25 Piel use N AE Ee 105 195 Makeup foolS aa OH 104 Pan RE AE 107 Sif RR OE eee 33 MIKE EE EE N 81 Panel descriptions 13 E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Index Pale DEE aksie as 81 102 105 Drum listruien iss ses sesde ske 106 Style COMDOSEP ks ee ee ee Ee ES 161 Faber cl AA 94 Parai EE EE N 192 Part ONJOFF 0 02 eee ee 26 32 47 SCN EE ON 191 192 Patterns 151 PBend PAA 132 133 139 OPPO PP PP sees 138 168 Kab AA 56 PERC Mute aaa 106 Percussion AE N N ie 28 Performance Memory see User Program Piano Roll aaa 144 170 PI AA 55 67 Pitch PCC DUNS PARA 161 BERE ee GE GE EE Ee 48 Down D Beam ii 53 Drum Instrument 107 161 Up D Beam os oes esse ER EE AR EE 53 Place EYE anan na nA 143 147 174 Plate RE OE N 83 86 107 Play A SEIC AE 36 112 EE AA AA 55 di RE EE EE NAN Ka 115 Metronome AA AA 59 POW PP PP PP PP PP PP PAO NE 78 Portamento ses sesse ss BED SE iS 56 Upper 12 sesse EE BEA 77 PRES AA 69 POON GEES EE EES EE EES DE EE 196 Punch In Out naana 126 Footswitch aaa 56 Q Quantize SECU NCC AA AA 130 Style Composer amak 155 163 Quarter TONG REDE SR RS ORR OR 57 Bied i N N N 37 R Rate VB n on 00 a
116. select the memory area Be aware that all songs you wish to assign to a Play List must reside in the selected memory area Play Lists can only access the memory area where they are saved 3 Press the field in the upper right cor ner You have just created a new Play List which is still empty and therefore looks like this Ab of LIST YN TANTIYA GER Play Lists consist of steps up to 99 to which you can assign one song each 4 Press the field or the dial to jump to the SONG LIST page 115 E 60 E 50 Music Workstation More refined song functions The display looks more or less as follows SONG LIST Ca FEYER iFEVER MID Ed FIRSTDAY iFIRSTDAY MID EA FORCA FORCA MID 5 Locate the song you wish to assign to step 01 e f it is already displayed continue with step 6 below e f it is not yet displayed use the PAGE fields in the lower right of the display to change pages You can also use the dial or the DECJ INC buttons You can also use the following fields for narrowing down your search if you are overwhelmed by the number of songs and pages you need to scroll and FINDER See page 110 6 Select the song you wish to assign by pressing its field Press the field This takes you to the following page The song is assigned to step 01 and step 02 becomes the last one of your list End Poe DIST Eby MET MEMORY NG 7 Nam OT FIRSIDAY can pan
117. sequencer s etc manual to find out whether it accepts Song Position Pointer messages SYNC RX The SYNC RX parameters allow you to specify whether and how the Arranger STYLE and or Recorder sequencer SONG should be synchronized to external sequencers drum machines etc The available options are Auto Ihis is a good setting for remote control of song or Style playback using a PK 5A dynamic MIDI pedal board for example If the E 60 E 50 receives a MIDI Start message FA it waits for Clock messages that specify the tempo If those Clock messages are not received a PK 5A for instance doesn t send them the E 60 E 50 starts playback using its internal tempo If however Clock messages F8 follow after the Start mes sage the E 60 E 50 uses the external tempo You can nevertheless go on using the Recorder sequencer or Arranger without MIDI Start Clock messages which is not possible when you select MIDI Internal The Recorder seguencer SONG or Arranger STYLE uses its internal tempo MIDI Song or Style playback can be started or stopped with MIDI real time messages Start Stop Clock received from an external clock source Remote The Recorder sequencer SONG or Arranger STYLE waits for a start message to start playback at its own tempo When it receives a stop message playback Stops External clock messages are ignored BASIC parameters The Basic channel is used to receive and
118. take advan tage of the E 60 E 50 s new sounds e Global changes to the Reverb and or Chorus Send values which is very convenient when you suddenly notice that the effect is too prominent or not strong enough BTRACK ALL 1 16 Allows you to select the track you wish to edit You can also select ALL here in which case the operation applies to all tracks MINIT VALUE Press this field to reset all values on this page to their initial state if you want to start again You will notice that there are two kinds of changes that can be performed on this page FROM TO and INC DEC MFROM TO Enter the original data value i e the value that is being used right now by the selected track s in the FROM col umn For TO specify the new value that should replace the FROM value These are what we call absolute changes you don t add or subtract values you replace them with other values This system is only available for messages that allow you to select sounds or sound banks namely CCOO 0 127 ALL This control change is the so called MSB bank select message It allows you to select the Capital Tone select O of a sound address if you don t want to use variations or to select another varia tion level The TO value CCOO 0 can be useful for ensuring GM compatibility because that standard unlike GM2 or GS does not support tone variations Select if the current setting must not change In the Ton
119. the desired TRACK EDIT function If after selecting one of these functions and setting parameter values you decide not to execute the transformation do not press the field 6 Select the track s you wish to modify 7 Select the range FROM and TO for the edit operation The FROM and TO parameters allow you to specify the positions measure beat clock of the track excerpt you want to change Example to change measures 1 4 of the selected track enter the following values FROM BAR 0001 TO BAR 0005 BEAT 01 BEAT 01 CPT 000 CPT 000 8 Specify what you want to change and how it Should change press one of the parameter fields to the right of the FROM TO section and use the dial or the DEC INC buttons 9 Confirm the operation by pressing the field 10 Press the field to return to the 16 track Sequencer s main page 11 Save your song T 3 O QUANTIZE Use this function if you chose not to quantize your music during recording page 126 and now realize that the timing is not quite what you expected it to be Quantizing after recording has the advantage that you can first listen to the original and then cor rect only those notes whose timing is definitely off BTRACK ALL 1 16 Allows you to select the track you wish to edit You can also select ALL here in which case the operation applies to all tracks FROM BAR 1 last measure of the track or song Refers to
120. the Intro pattern you want to use STYLE CONTROL VARIATION AUTO START 7 FILL IN STOP Lk Press the button to start Arranger playback The Arranger plays the introduction of the currently selected Music Style The MEASURE field on the main page now counts backwards 4 3 etc to indicate the Intro s duration If you like you can now try out the remaining three Intro patterns by pressing and 1 4 The number refers to the degree of complexity Note Do not play while the Intro is running Most Intro pat terns indeed contain chord changes so that playing different chords may lead to highly annoying results During Arranger playback the button flashes red on the downbeat and green on the remaining beats of the bars to indicate the tempo While the Arranger is stopped this visual tempo indication is provided by the button that only flashes in red though Press one of the VARIATION 1 4 buttons to select the pattern that should be played after the Intro is finished the button flashes By pressing at this stage you leave the Intro pattern on the next downbeat i e before the Intro phrase is finished Wait until the selected MAIN pattern is playing then press the button STYLE CONTROL VARIATION At the end of the current pattern cycle the Arranger starts playing the Ending pattern and then stops While the Ending phrase is playing the MEASURE field on the main page c
121. the MAGNIFY parameter see below 13 E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Using the 16 track sequencer This parameter can be particularly useful for velocity switched sounds slightly reducing or increasing the overall velocity allows you to shift all notes to the other sound Note Even the highest positive or negative VALUE doesn t allow you to go beyond 1 or 127 There is a reason why O is impossible that value is used to indicate the end of a note note off 127 on the other hand is the highest velocity value the MIDI standard can muster Adding a high positive velocity value may thus lead to all notes being played at 127 E MAGNIFY 0 200 This parameter works like a Compander effect a dynam ics processor that simultaneously acts as compressor and expander although it processes MIDI data by selecting a value above 100 you increase the differences between high and low velocity values in the selected range Values below 64 are lowered while values above 64 are increased The result is therefore that the difference between pianissimo and fortissimo becomes far more pro nounced MAGNIFY values below 100 have the opposite effect they push all velocity towards the imaginary center of 64 thus reducing differences in playing dynamics MFROM NOTE 0 C 127 G9 This parameter allows you to set the note or lower limit of the note range to be modified within the specified FROM TO tim
122. the Music Style sound a major minor or seventh chord you only need to play three notes by the way Other more complex chords require that you press four keys PIANO STYLE This mode works as follows the Arranger decodes every chord you play no matter where you play it Causing the Arranger to play another chord requires that you play at least a triad i e the three notes that make up a major or minor chord You can play more than three chord notes but remember that two notes won t cause the Arranger to change the key Note You can also select PIANO STYLE by pressing the EASY SETTING button INTELLIGENT Select INTELLIGENT when you want the Arranger to supply the missing notes of the chords you play See p 209 for a chart of intelligent chords and the way to play them This is probably the mode you will select most of the time EASY This is another intelligent chord fingering sys tem used on instruments by other manufacturers It works as follows Major chords Press the key that corresponds to the chord s fundamental Minor chords Fundamental any black key to the left of the fundamental Seventh chords Fundamental any white key to the left of the fundamental Minor seventh Fundamental any black key to the chords left any white key to the left 5 Press the button to return to the main page Note The choice you make here also affects the Arpeggio Oct and Chord Oct options of the D Beam Contr
123. the Song Cover function The COVER function provides masks that change the instrumentation of the selected song or Music Style Simply by selecting another preset you can cause a Viennese waltz to be played back by a heavy metal band etc Even though the arrangement rhythm riffs does not change the songs character can be modified beyond recognition 1 Press the button once or twice to select the display page shown below 5 17 g Y j de FIL Da PH t 3 SC d sre pee AA pit Ate oe bi os a Pa v PO EER AE a d Red MAA pagpag es wo mm arn Esl jam ga GEI Fe Gi EES o 2 Select the parts whose instrumentation you want to change Press the field if all instruments should be replaced Press the field if only the drum and percus sion instruments should change Press the field if you re happy with everything but the bass line s sound 3 Press one of the six fields in the lower half of the display to select another preset After selecting a preset you can press page 1 to return to the original orchestration 4 If none of the displayed presets appeal to you use the PAGE fields at the right to jump to another page with more presets 5 Try out various presets to see how fast this con cept works 6 If you like the new version better than the original one you can press the field to save the song to the internal memory a memory card or floppy disk with this information page 10
124. the first measure to be edited By default the FROM value is set to the beginning of the selected track s BEAT 1 number of beats per bar Specifies the beat position The number of available beats depends on the time signature in the selected area CPT 1 119 Refers to the starting CPT position CPT is short for Clock Pulse Time the smallest unit used by the E 60 E 50 There are 120 CPTs to every beat of a 4 4 bar Change this setting only if your edit operation Should start after the selected beat WTO By default the TO position is set to the last event of the selected track or the last event of the longest track when you select ALL BAR 1 last measure of the track or song This is where you specify the bar position of the last measure to be edited BEAT 1 number of beats per bar Specifies the beat position The number of available beats depends on the time signature in the selected area CPT 1 119 Refers to the last clock that should be affected by the edit operation Change this setting only if your edit operation should not end exactly on the selected beat MFROM NOTE 0 C 127 G9 This parameter allows you to set the note or lower limit of the note range to be modified within the specified FROM TO time range This parameter is not displayed when you select EQUAL UNEQUAL HIGHER or LOWER ETO NOTE 0 C 127 G9 This parameter allows you to set the upper limit of the note
125. the program change numbers General notes about MICRO EDIT N Position indications The E 60 E 50 s sequencer translates all known musi cal techniques and physical effects into MIDI mes sages to precisely reproduce the natural behavior of the instrument that is being simulated Each event is executed at a given point in time which that can be filtered separately e Press to switch on all button icons or NONE to switch them all off in which case the MICRO EDIT list only contains the End of Data message e Press to close the pop up window N General procedure To change information already available on the selected track proceed as follows Use the A Y buttons or the dial to select the list entry you want to edit The name of the selected parameter appears in the upper right hand corner of the display is why they all have a position indication 1 01 119 for example The first figure refers to the bar the second to the beat within that bar and the third to the clock CPT between the current beat and the next For a 4 4 time signature each beat comprises 120 clocks The example cited earlier actu 1 ally means that the event is located immediately before the second beat W Graphic representation of your data piano roll To get a better idea of where your data are located and how they are distributed press the field The display then changes to LEi aller 91 Reverb 11 Expression 7 Vo
126. thus repeats the sounds PAN DELAY This is a stereo version of the above delay effect It creates repetitions that alternate between the left and right channels REVERB LEVEL allows you to set the output level of the Reverb processor Setting this parameter to O means that you no longer hear the effect in question Press to return to the display page with the modules or Press the button to return to the main page Note Do not forget to save your settings to a User Program if you want to keep them 33 E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Using the mixer functions amp effects Chorus for Keyboard parts Chorus broadens the spatial image of the sound and creates a stereo impression You can choose from 8 types of Chorus 1 Press the button The display changes to MENU On this page you can switch the CHORUS processor on and off by pressing the button icon to the right of its display If you only need another chorus type press the CHORUS display and use the dial or the DEC INC buttons to select it If you also need to change certain aspects of that effect 3 Press the KEYBOARD CHORUS field to access the Chorus parameters The display changes to KBD STYLE SONG CHORUS CHORUS LEVEL CHOREY SEND 4 Press the or OFF field to switch the proces sor on icon lights or off icon goes dark You can also do so on the EFFECTS page see above 5 Press the field of the effe
127. time around you could add the snare drum the third time the HiHat and so on When recording another part ABass Acc6 do everything you would do during a live performance add modulation Pitch Bend and to use an optional hold pedal connected to the SUSTAIN jack 21 Press again to stop recording The display changes to SHES EO lees are i 1 TI 53G Auditioning your Style and adding more tracks 1 Press the button again to listen to your track The STYLE COMPOSER page contains two fields that allow you to select the pattern you want to audition Here s how to select it SHALES OWAYTEH 2 Press the field and use the dial or the DECJ INC buttons to select Major minor or 7th Only one mode can be selected for playback Press the field and use the dial or the DECJ INC buttons to select one of the Divisions Intro 1 4 Main 14 Intro 1 4 Fill Dwn 1 3 Fill Up 153 End 1 4 Only one Division can be selected for playback 3 Nam If you like your drum part continue with Saving your Style If not record a new version 4 Press the button to jump to the following page tot ea a TRACK INSTRUMENT GUITAR MODE setting v J 5 Select the Mode and Division you want to redo 6 Press the field and select Replace To replace the previous recording with new data Mix To add notes you forgot to record the first time 7 Continue with st
128. to the Upper1 part You could use COARSE to program an interval of a fifth 7 semitones for UP2 which is especially effective for brass sounds and guitar power chords Do not forget to activate both the UP1 and UP parts when you want to take advantage of the COARSE and FINE parameters If only the UP2 part is active your solos may sound flat 1 Press the button 2 Press the field followed by the field SPLIT amp TOUCH ee Oe EE LOWER UPPER 2 UPPER 1 LOWER PORTAMENTO TIME HOLD 0 3 Press the field if you want to change the UP2 part s pitch in semitone steps That field now lights 4 Set the desired value with the dial or the DECJ INC buttons means that UP2 s pitch is lowered while values without a sign mean that UP2 s pitch is shifted up Avery popular setting for UP1 UP2 layers is 12 for UP2 so that it sounds one octave above Upper1 or any other active Keyboard part The setting range for this parameter is 24 24 5 Press the field to change UP2 s pitch in small steps cents 6 Set the desired value with the dial or the DECJ INC buttons FINE TUNE can be set between 99 almost a semi tone down and 99 almost a semi tone up 7 Press the button to return to the main page Portamento for UP1 and UP2 Here are two functions that may come in handy for even more impressive solos involving the UP1 and UP2 parts Portamento Time 1 Press
129. to their saved settings To save your changes at this stage press the field and see page 108 You can also press another field in the top row to change yet other parameters before saving your modified song or Style PALETTE Pressing the field on any of the MAKEUP TOOLS pages takes you to the following page where you can set the most fundamental parameters of the instruments used by the selected song or Style mng H FREEZE Press the field of the parameter you want to edit and use the dial or the DEC INC buttons to set the desired value You can also press the dial and use the numeric pad VOLUME The volume of the selected instrument Nega tive values decrease the current volume positive values increase It PANPOT Use this parameter to change the stereo placement of the selected instrument Note In the case of Drum Sets this setting applies to all drum percussion instruments There is also a parameter that can be set for certain drum instruments See page 106 REVERB Use this parameter to set the Reverb Send Level The send level refers to the amount of the signal transmitted to the reverb effect and hence to the strength intensity with which the instrument is pro cessed CHORUS Use this parameter to set the Chorus Send Level The send level refers to the amount of the signal transmitted to the chorus effect and hence to the strength intensity with which the instrument is pro
130. track and the ABass part to the second is that most programmers and recording artists start by laying down the rhythm section of a song There are exceptions to this rule however so feel free to start with any other part if that is easier for the Style you are programming Note Though there are six melodic ACC tracks most Styles only contain two or three melodic accompaniment lines In most cases less means more i e do not program six melodic accompa niments just because the E 60 E 50 provides that facility If you listen very carefully to a CD you will discover that it is not the number of instruments you use that makes a song sound big but rather the right notes at the right time Looped vs one shot patterns The E 60 E 50 uses two kinds of patterns looped divi sions and one shot divisions Mi Looped divisions Looped divisions are accompaniments that are repeated until you select another division or press to stop Arranger playback The E 60 E 50 provides four programmable looped divisions MAIN 1 4 Looped divisions do not select other divisions when they are finished because they never end they keep playing until you select another division by hand or by foot N One shot divisions One shot patterns or Divisions are only played once and then select a looped division or stop the Arranger The E 60 E 50 uses the following one shot divisions INTRO 1 4 FILL UP 1 3 FILL DOWN j and ENDING 1 4
131. values Values below 100 decrease the duration while any thing above 100 increases it Select 100 if you pre fer to work with the BIAS CPT parameter see above W EXECUTE Press this field to confirm your settings and edit the data MERGE Use this parameter to combine the data of two tracks i e of all data the two tracks contain from start to finish The combined version can be found on the destination track DST Be aware that all data will use the same MIDI channel The SRC track could therefore be used for recording a new part TAGCKEDIT AE Ed ES Mad EIE SES ESRC TRACK 1 16 Allows you to select the track whose data should be added to those of the DST track MIDST TRACK 1 16 except the track selected as SRC Use this parameter to specify the track that should contain a combination of its original data and those of the selected source track WE EXECUTE Press this field to confirm your settings and edit the data E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Roland Editing 16 track songs GLOBAL CHANGE EES ero EIE NES paan ea n gt om INC DEC JOLUME REVERE This function allows you to make quick changes to certain settings The changes always apply to entire tracks you cannot use GLOBAL CHANGE for just a few measures Designed to help you enhance Stan dard MIDI Files it is a wonderful tool for the follow ing applications e Upgrading older Standard MIDI Files to
132. view Press again to see more values again Use the dial and 4 v buttons to scroll through the available events W Position indications Sequencers only register events whose positions and distances specify when the notes are to be sounded or when they should change i e their sequence Each event is executed at a given point in time which is why they all have a position indication 1 01 119 for example The first figure refers to the bar the second to the beat within that bar and the third to the clock CPT between the current beat and the next Each beat of a 4 4 bar comprises 120 clocks W Monitoring note events The Style Composer can play back the note events you select This may help you identify the occurrence you want to edit Switch on the speaker icon and move the cursor to a note event to hear that note BIVIEW Press this button icon if the list of track events has become so long that finding the events you wish to edit takes too long The following pop up appears N na e VIEW SELECT e Switch on the button icons of events you want to see in the list the button icons in question must light The names of most available options are probably clear to you so we won t explain them Just one note also includes the bank select messages CCOO and CC32 that are used for selecting sounds See page 172 for the message Press to switch on all button icons or to switch
133. you save the edited version of your song We therefore recommend saving such songs under a dif ferent name unless you used FREEZE DATA before you started editing your song See Before saving your settings on page 107 Press to save your changes and the entire song This will take you to the following display page a 3 rr Press to return to the main page without saving the song If you don t want to wait until the above warning Song has been changed is displayed automati cally proceed as follows Using this manual save function has the advantage that you can save your song whenever you are happy with your latest recording or edits Bear in mind that a power failure is all it takes to lose your song Don t wait until it is too late Press the field on the 16 track Seguencer s main page The display now responds with Br Bie Blew oe ee Ee 6 You can also select this page by pressing the button field field 2 Specify where you want to save your song Press the field to select the E 60 E 50 s internal memory as target this isa 16MB storage area similar to a hard disk Insert a floppy disk into the drive and press the field Press the field This option is only available if you connected a memory card to the E 60 E 50 s PCMCIA slot You need to give your song two names a SONG NAME and a FILE NAME The FILE NAME is the one that allows the E 60 E 50 to reco
134. you will notice that there are slight differ ences in the looped patterns and sometimes strik ing differences for Intros and Endings with com pletely different phrases Such variations can be pre pared using the REC DIVISION MODE parameter Let us use the following settings which mean record the major pattern and copy it to all MAIN Divisions Thus with one recording you will obtain 3 Major minor 7th x 4 MAIN 1 2 3 4 12 identical drum patterns 154 Tone selection Another important aspect is sound selection because the addresses of the sounds and Drum Set you select are recorded at the beginning of each division 12 Press the field and select a Drum Set rums ER i Standard 1 New Pop Standard 2 New Folk New BrushPop New PBrush Perc Standard LZR Room LZR New Pop Perc e Press a TONE button on the front panel and press the field of the desired sound If you don t like it press another field If you are still not happy with the Tone use the PAGE 1 PAGE 4 and fields to select the corre sponding page if available Note The AccDrums track can only use Drum Sets so that only the button of the TONE pad is available Play a few notes on the keyboard to check whether the sounds of the selected Drum Set are suitable for the accompaniment you are going to record Try other Drum Sets until you find the one that sounds right Note See Drum Instrument amp Pitch o
135. 0 recognizes and allows you to edit all control change numbers the Arranger uses CCO1 10 11 91 93 and displays their official name 1 7 E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Programming Styles Style Composer Note CC64 Hold events generated by a footswitch con nected to the HOLD FOOTSWITCH socket are converted into the equivalent GATE TIME values at the time of recording You may therefore have to change the duration of the notes themselves Program Change These messages are used to select sounds within the current bank As there are only 128 possibilities these messages are usually preceded by control changes CCOO and CC32 That s why the E 60 E 50 inserts all three when you use the CREATE EVENT function Note The CCOO value of ADrums tracks cannot be edited Pitch Bend These messages are used for temporary changes to the pitch of the notes being played at that time Pitch Bend messages can be positive higher or negative lower Setting range 128 128 Alteration Mode This is a new event that allows you to specify how the notes recorded for a Style track will be used during Arranger playback See below for details Note This parameter is not available for ADrums tracks NRPN Dr This NRPN command is only available for ADrums tracks It inserts CC99 with the value 24 CC98 37 as well as CCO6 64 While the CC99 value cannot be changed the CC98 value can be set to 37 38 40 41 52 56 57
136. 0 05 10 0Hz Modulation frequency of the flanger effect Flanger Depth 0 127 Modulation intensity of the flanger effect Flanger Feedback 98 o 0 98 Adjusts the propor tion of the flanger sound that is fed back into the effect Negative settings will invert the phase Flanger Balance D100 0W D50 50W D0 100W Volume balance between the direct sound D and the flanger sound W Level 0 127 Output level 39 CHO Delay This effect connects a chorus and a delay in parallel Paral lel means that the input signal is processed by two effects that do not interact Chorus Pre Delay 0 0 100 0ms Adjusts the delay between the incoming direct signal and the moment when the chorus starts working Chorus Rate 0 05 10 0Hz Frequency i e modulation speed Chorus Depth 0 127 Modulation intensity Chorus Balance D100 0W D50 50W D0 100W Vol ume balance between the direct sound D and the chorus sound W Delay Time 0 0 500 0ms Adjusts the time until the delay is heard Delay Feedback 9800 0 98 Adjusts the amount of the delay sound that s fed back into the effect Negative settings invert the phase Delay HF Damp 200 8000Hz Bypass Adjusts the fre quency above which sound fed back to the effect is filtered out If you don t want to filter out any high frequencies set this parameter to BYPASS Delay Balance D100 0W D50 50W DO 100W Adjusts the v
137. 0 0Hz Slow speed SLOW of the high or low frequency rotor Tweeter Fast Rate 0 05 10 0Hz Woofer Fast Rate 0 05 10 0Hz Fast speed FAST of the high or low frequency rotor Rotary Speed Slow Fast Simultaneously switches the rotational speed of the low frequency and high frequency rotors SLOW Slows down the rotation to the Slow Rate FAST Speeds up the rotation to the Fast Rate Tweeter Acceleration 0 15 Woofer Acceleration 0 15 Adjusts the time it takes the rotor in question to reach the newly selected speed Fast or Slow Lower values correspond to slower transitions Tweeter Level 0 127 Woofer Level 0 127 Volume of the rotor in question Separation 0 127 Spatial dispersion of the sound Level 0 127 Output level 10 Compressor Reduces high levels peaks and boosts low levels smoothing out fluctuations in volume Compressor Sustain 0 127 Allows you to specify how strongly incoming signals should be compressed which results in a longer sustain Compressor Attack 0 127 Sets the speed at which compression starts Panpot L64 0 63R Stereo location of the output sound This is a mono effect that combines incoming sig nals You can however place the processed signal any where between the left and right channels Compressor Post Gain 0 6 12 18dB Adjusts the output gain Use this parameter to make up for a signifi cant volume loss d
138. 0 127 Output level 17 Step Flanger A Step Flanger is a flanger effect with clearly noticeable steps rather than continuous pitch changes Flanger Pre Delay 0 0 100 0ms Adjusts the delay time from when the direct sound begins until the flanger sound is heard Flanger Rate 0 05 10 0Hz Frequency i e modulation speed Flanger Depth 0 127 Modulation intensity Flanger Feedback 98 o 0 98 Adjusts the propor tion of the flanger sound that is fed back into the effect Negative settings will invert the phase Step Rate 0 10 20 0Hz note Rate period of pitch change Flanger Phase 0 180deg Spatial spread of the sound FO Low Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the low range FO High Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the high range Balance D100 0W D50 50W DO 100W Volume bal ance between the direct D and the effect sound W Level 0 127 Output level 18 St Delay Delay is an effect that allows you repeat the input signal thus creating echoes repetition Delay FBK Mode Normal Cross Select the way in which delay sound is fed back into the effect NORMAL The left delay sound will be fed back into the left delay and the right delay sound into the right delay CROSS The left delay sound will be fed back into the right delay and the right delay sound into the left delay Delay Left 0 0 500 0ms Adjust the time from the direct sound until when the left delay sound i
139. 0ms Adjusts the time until the delay is heard Delay Feedback 98 0 98 Adjusts the amount of the delay sound that s fed back into the effect Negative settings invert the phase Delay HF Damp 200 8000Hz Bypass Adjusts the fre quency above which sound fed back to the effect is filtered out If you don t want to filter out any high frequencies set this parameter to BYPASS Delay Balance D100 0W D50 50W DO 100W Adjusts the volume balance between the sound that is sent through the delay W and the sound that is not sent through the delay D Level 0 127 Output level 33 EH Chorus This effect connects an enhancer and a chorus in series Enhancer Sens 0 127 Sensitivity of the enhancer Enhancer Mix Level 0 127 Level of the overtones gen erated by the enhancer Chorus Pre Delay 0 0 100 0ms Adjusts the delay between the incoming direct signal and the moment when the chorus starts working Chorus Rate 0 05 10 0Hz Frequency i e modulation speed Chorus Depth 0 127 Modulation intensity Chorus Balance D100 0W D50 50W DO 100W Vol ume balance between the direct sound D and the chorus sound W Level 0 127 Output level 34 EH gt Flanger This effect connects an enhancer and a flanger in series Enhancer Sens 0 127 Sensitivity of the enhancer Enhancer Mix Level 0 127 Level of the overtones gen erated by the enhancer Flanger Pre
140. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 060 Note 1 1 Alena She ole S f o o gt ad ad cab ak ak 2 000 Note 38 D2 12 Modify the value Rotate the dial or Set the value using the DECJ INC buttons or Press the dial and enter the value using the numeric pad that appears in the display If you choose to work with the numeric pad proceed as follows Press the numeric button icons to enter the desired value Use to delete the last figure you entered ku rae EE PAD Press the or field to increase or decrease the current value by 10 Press to confirm the value Press to close the numeric pad window with out changing the value Press the DATA ENTRY gt button to select the next value and change it When you re done press the field to return to the STYLE COMPOSER page then save your Style The parameters you can change are Note and velocity messages These messages always come in pairs The first value Note Number 127 G9 refers to the note itself and the second On Velocity 127 to the velocity playing dynamics The MICRO EDIT page adds a third message to that pair It describes the duration of the note in question You may remember this value from the TRACK EDIT environ ment where it is called Gate Time Control Change These messages usually add some thing to the notes being played like modulation a dif ferent volume a new stereo position The E 60 E 5
141. 1 4 130 4 4 ACC e mure did z ccd 4 ORCHESTRAHIT ACCS 3 4 CLEAN GT ACCE 104 STANDARD 1 ADRMS 114 DISTORTIONGT 12d STRINGS o 15 te FIAMO 1 Ma Back You may also have to press the button icon to select the page shown above if CONVERT is currently active This page allows you to select the song tracks that should become Style tracks Remember that a song may contain up to 16 tracks while a Music Style only provides eight The default assignments of song tracks to the Style tracks see the illustration above last column in the list are made automatically Though based on com mon sense they may not yield the desired accompa niment pattern As a rule you should always listen carefully To correct one or several of the default assign ments proceed as follows Press one of the display fields to select the Style track Those are the tracks that make up your Music style to be Next use the dial or the DEC INC buttons to select a song track in the list to the left Note See Arranger parts on p 60 if you re not sure what the abbreviations in the Trk fields stand for Note If you assign several song tracks to the same Style track a bullet appears next to the Style track name in the table to indicate that the Style track in question is already assigned to another song track Though this is perfectly possible the result is usually not convincing If necessary press the field
142. 7 Modulation intensity Flanger Feedback 98 0 98 Adjusts the propor tion of the flanger sound that is fed back into the effect Negative settings will invert the phase Flanger Balance D100 0W D50 50W DO 100W Volume balance between the direct sound D and the flanger sound W Level 0 127 Output level 29 OD Delay This effect connects an overdrive and a delay in series Overdrive Drive 0 127 Degree of distortion Also changes the volume Overdrive Panpot L64 0 63R Stereo location of the overdrive sound Delay Time 0 0 500 0ms Adjusts the time until the delay is heard Delay Feedback 9800 0 980 Adjusts the amount of the delay sound that s fed back into the effect Negative settings invert the phase Delay HF Damp 200 8000Hz Bypass Adjusts the fre quency above which sound fed back to the effect is filtered out If you don t want to filter out any high frequencies set this parameter to BYPASS Delay Balance D100 0W D50 50W DO 100W Adjusts the volume balance between the sound that is sent through the delay W and the sound that is not sent through the delay D Level 0 127 Output level 30 DST Chorus This effect connects distortion and a chorus In series Distortion Drive 0 127 Degree of distortion Also changes the volume Distortion Panpot L64 0 63R Stereo location of the distortion sound Chorus Pre Delay 0 0 100 0ms
143. 7th ALL and the Division Intro 14 Main 1 4 Fill Dwn 143 Fill Up 1 3 End 1 4 ALL Note If you selected ALL for SOURCE MODE DIVISION this MO DE DIVISION parameter is also set to ALL 14 Press the field and use the dial or the DEC INC buttons to specify the number of copies to be made Select 1 to copy the excerpt only once 15 Press the field to listen to the destination track The INTO position indicates where the beginning of the source excerpt will be after the copy operation To copy the source data to the beginning of the des tination track select BAR 1 BEAT 1 and CPT o 16 Press the BAR or field and use the dial or the DEC INC buttons to set the target INTO position 17 Press the field to copy the data Editing Styles on the fly via additional recordings Adding notes in realtime To add notes to an existing part proceed as follows e On the STYLE COMPOSER page select the Division you wish to change page 154 e Press the RECORDER button the field and use the dial or the DEC INC buttons to select Mix e Select the track and start recording by pressing the button Play the notes where you want them to sound Adding controller data in realtime To add controller data modulation Pitch Bend Hold expression to an existing part select REC MODE Mix Operate the performance function BENDER MODULATION lever optional footswitch for Hold data optional f
144. 8 Note The COVER information is part of the data only the E 60 E 50 E 80 or G 70 understands You can still play back the newly saved version of this song on another sequencer or SMF player but the COVER information will be ignored Note You can also modify the COVER settings yourself see p 103 Minus One Minus One means that at least one part of a song is not played back There are at least two applications for this function e it allows you to play the muted parts yourself on the keyboard e it allows you to sing without doubling by the song which may sound odd 1 Press the button The button s indicator lights and the melody part track 4 is muted If you want to mute other parts or use another preset proceed as follows 2 Press and hold the button The display changes to FUNTION 3 Press one of the three preset fields to mute the corresponding song parts Press to mute the melody you will notice that the 4 field also lights Press the field to mute everything except the bass and drums Press the field to mute the bass and drum parts 2 and 19 Note Even the preset fields can be used simultaneously And the part fields 1 16 can be added too 4 To mute other parts ad lib i e without taking advantage of the presets Press the field This mutes only 4 the mel ody Switch off all parts you don t want to hear by press ing the 1 3 and
145. ANO ACCORD R to assign a different sound to Prang manna EE New Song Strummlin Pop Free Panel St Slow Stri NaturalPiano XY Ac_Bass Vintage EP1 In this case the E 60 E 50 directly jumps to the TONE page that contains the currently selected sound The arrow indicates which part is active for Tone selection its TONE ASSIGN button also lights Note It is also possible to select sounds for Keyboard parts that are currently switched off This allows you to prepare the next sound s while still playing another Keyboard part Press a TONE button to select a family and its best sound the sound already changes at this stage TONE SS ee GUITAR SAX The display shows a list of Tones available in that family Warm Yoices Syn Yox Pad Fem Mm Srt Rich Choir2 St ChoirAahs Press the field of the desired sound If you don t like it press another field The last sound you select in each family is memorized temporarily and will be recalled every time you press the corresponding TONE button That selection can then be changed by pressing another field If you are still not happy with the Tone use the PAGE 1 PAGE 5 and gt fields to select the corre sponding page if available The field is only displayed if there are more than five pages Other Tone families have fewer than five pages This depends entirely on the Tone family you select Press the field of the desired sound
146. BEY Gai nl If the position for which you create a new event already contains other events the new event is added at the end of that group e Press the button icon that corresponds to the kind of event you want to add The meaning of the available message types should be clear by now Here are the default values of the events you create Note Note Number 60 C4 On Velocity 100 Gate Time 60 Program Change CCOO Bank Select MSB value 0 CC32 Bank Select LSB value 4 Program Change Number 1 The bank select messages are added automatically you don t have to worry about that Pitch Bend 0 Alteration Mode Nearest Limit Low Std Limit High Std E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Roland Editing individual Style events Style Micro Edit Specify the position where your new event should be inserted by pressing the BAR and fields and entering the desired value for each unit using the dial or the DEC INC buttons Press the field to confirm your settings and add the new event Press to close the pop up window without applying your changes Adding notes If you press the field the display changes to SHALES MINERO EY NT CREATE E EVENT NOTE TO er ME Citi CPC EI EI sm a This pop up window allows you to enter up to 10 notes for each position see the BAR fields The velocity values of the keys you press are also adopted To enter chords press and hold the key of at least one constituent
147. BOSS FS 5U footswitch connected to the socket allows you to control the volume of all parts by foot You can reverse the expression pedal s effect and specify that certain parts are not to be controlled by the expression pedal Note The settings below are only used if you connect an expres sion pedal to the FOOTSWITCH EXPRESSION socket If you choose to connect a footswitch instead see Foot Switch on p 55 HOLD socket Hold Lower The footswitch does the same as the LOWER HOLD function see also p 78 el gir se use vara Minus One The footswitch allows you to switch the Minus One function on and off See page 38 for how to select the option that will be used when the Minus One ie 2 Press the field followed by Keyboard Ex UP2 1 Allows you to switch off the UP1 the field part and activate the UP2 part and vice versa l Note If neither UP1 nor UP2 are on when you first press n FOOT CONTROLLERS the footswitch one of them is activated Ge MEE Break Mute This function can only be accessed via the ARR PART O50 O KBD PART footswitch When you press it Arranger playback is muted for the remainder of the current measure This is great for rock n roll songs Arranger ACC Tempo Allows you to start the Arranger s ACC function page 69 Arranger RIT Tempo Allows you to start the Arranger s RIT function page 69 3 Use the ARR PART and KBD PART fields to select the Arra
148. Be sure to select the part you wish to change before actually editing It Assigning another Tone to a Keyboard part resets the TONE EDIT parameters Note All TONE EDIT parameters are relative parameters whose values are added to or subtracted from the preset sound parame ter values That is why you can specify both positive more and negative less values Note The TONE EDIT settings can be saved to a User Program 1 Press the button The display changes to EER ae VEER O RATE Wack Decay N RELEASE RESO CUTOFF TAA a p paa 3 Press the field of the Keyboard part you wish to edit Note Rather than performing steps 1 3 you could also press and hold the corresponding TONE ASSIGN button 4 To quickly reset all parameters press the Field 5 To reset only the selected parameter press the Field 6 To edit one of the displayed parameters press its field Its display is now surrounded by a frame 7 Set the desired value with the dial or the DEC INC buttons Here are the parameters you can edit E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Roland Tone Edit editing Keyboard parts mci The function of this parameter depends on the sound you assigned to the selected part It may influence the filter and resonance setting switch between organ samples with fast and slow Rotary modulation TONE sounds etc Here s an example select the B3 Sermon sound on page 1 of the ORGAN ACC
149. By default the TO position is set to the last event of the selected track or the last event of the longest track when you select ALL BAR 1 last measure of the track or song This is where you specify the bar position of the last measure to be edited BEAT 1 number of beats per bar Specifies the beat position The number of available beats depends on the time signature in the selected area CPT 1 119 Refers to the last clock that should be affected by the edit operation Change this setting only If your edit operation should not end exactly on the selected beat BIVALUE 127 0 127 This is where you can set the transposition interval in semi tone steps If you wish to transpose a C part to D enter 2 AS you see you can transpose the highest possible MIDI note all the way down to the lowest and vice versa Warning 0 represents the lowest note the MIDI standard and the 16 track sequencer can handle while 127 is the highest note If you select 127 for note number 74 D5 for example the resulting note number would be 201 which is impossible Therefore the sequencer will subtract 12 from 201 until the result is less than or equal to 127 and therefore use the value 117 in our example This happens to all notes that would otherwise lie below 0 or above 127 Note Be careful when applying TRANSPOSE to a drum track track 10 or any other track that uses a Drum Set This resu
150. CE type to each Style you select 4 Press the button to return to the main page E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Roland Using the Style Cover function Using the Style Cover function The COVER function provides masks that change the instrumentation of the selected Style Simply by select ing another preset you can cause a Viennese waltz to be played back by a heavy metal band etc Even though the arrangement rhythm riffs does not change the Style s character can be modified beyond recognition 1 Press the button once or twice to select the display page shown below ase Le 2 Select the parts whose instrumentation you want to change e Press the field if all instruments should be replaced e Press the field if only the drum and percus sion instruments should change e Press the field if you re happy with everything but the bass line s sound 3 Press one of the six fields in the lower half of the display to select another preset Press page 1 to return to the original orchestration 4 If none of the displayed presets appeal to you use the PAGE fields at the right to jump to another page with different presets 5 If you like the new version better than the original one press the field to save the Style to the internal memory a memory card or floppy disk see p 64 Note The COVER information is part of the data only the E 60 E 50 E 80 or G 70 understands Note You can also modify t
151. Control Control change messages Change Prog C Program change messages NRPN Non registered parameter number messages These are parameter control functions of the GS GM2 format that are easier to use than SysEx messages but basically have the same function RPN Registered parameter number messages They work like NRPN messages and are understood by many GM and GM2 compatible tone genera tors CAF Channel Aftertouch messages If you don t really need them these messages should definitely be erased because they use a lot of memory Mi FROM NOTE O C 127 G9 This parameter is only displayed if DATA TYPE see above is set to Note It allows you to set the note or lower limit of the note range to be modified within the specified FROM TO time range It is not displayed when you select EQUAL UNEQUAL HIGHER or LOWER See also Fine tuning the setting range WTO NOTE 0 C 127 G9 This parameter allows you to set the upper limit of the note range to be modified within the specified FROM TO time range MFROM CC 05127 This parameter is only displayed if DATA TYPE see above is set to something else than Note It allows you to set the lower limit of the control change numbers or values to be modified within the specified FROM TO time range It is not displayed when you select EQUAL UNEQUAL HIGHER or LOWER ETO CC 0 127 This parameter allows you to set the upper limit of the con trol change numbers or
152. Ds whenever you can The how to s 1 Press the button The display changes to DISKE MED Le MIDISET USER kad 1188 aa SET rs IMPORT EP FORMAT USER PROGRAM b ee 2 If you intend to work with a floppy disk or memory card insert it into the drive or slot 3 Select the function you need by pressing the cor responding field in the right column 4 Select the data type you want to save load rename or delete by pressing one of the big fields Jae 5 On the display page that appears now a the media INTERNAL MEMORY FLOPPY EXTERNAL MEMORY memory mr G E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Roland The how to s 6 Do one of the following if necessary e For operations press the field that contains the name of the file you wish to load Use the fields if the desired file is not currently displayed e For operations enter a name for the file you are about to save e For operations select the file you wish to dispose of e For operations select the file you wish to copy e For other operations see page 181 7 If available press the field 8 Press the button to return to the main page ru In the following we will use the word media to refer to the three memory areas available to the E 60 E 50 internal memory area floppy disk memory card 17S E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Disk Media functions Loading data The LOAD functions allow you to
153. EXECUTE This page allows you to save the current Style to the internal memory a memory card or a floppy disk e Press the INTERNAL MEMORY EXTERNAL MEMORY or field to select the area where you want to save the Music Style e Enter the name for the file See page 44 If necessary you can also supply the required COUNTRY and GENRE information for use with the STYLE FINDER function Note The E 60 E 50 supports both upper and lower case let ters for file names Choose whichever is more convenient or clearer 17 Press the field to save the data If the selected memory area already contains a Music Style of that name you are asked whether it is OK to overwrite It A file KE this n name already exists _ Overwrite e Press the field to overwrite the file This replaces the Music Style in question with the new version e Press the field to return to the SAVE STYLE page change the name then press again 18 Press the button to return to the main page E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Roland Concept 14 Programming Styles Style Composer Concept New Styles can be created in three ways e By converting portions of a Standard MIDI File into an accompaniment to be played by the Arranger page 147 e By creating new accompaniments from scratch page 152 e By editing existing Styles which requires that you copy them and then alter the settings or notes you do not like page 158 Patterns Divi
154. G Landstrasse 5 Postfach CH 4452 Itingen SWITZERLAND TEL 061 927 8383 UKRAINE TIC TAC Mira Str 19 108 P O Box 180 295400 Munkachevo UKRAINE TEL 03131 414 40 UNITED KINGDOM Roland U K Ltd Atlantic Close Swansea Enterprise Park SWANSEA SA7 9FJ UNITED KINGDOM TEL 01792 702701 BAHRAIN Moon Stores No 16 Bab Al Bahrain Avenue P O Box 247 Manama 304 State of BAHRAIN TEL 17 211 005 IRAN MOCO INC No 41 Nike St Dr Shariyati Ave Roberoye Cerahe Mirdamad Tehran IRAN TEL 021 285 4169 ISRAEL Halilit P Greenspoon amp Sons Ltd 8 Retzif Ha aliya Hashnya St Tel Aviv Yafo ISRAEL TEL 03 6823666 JORDAN MUSIC HOUSE CO LTD FREDDY FOR MUSIC P O Box 922846 Amman 11192 JORDAN TEL 06 5692696 KUWAIT EASA HUSAIN AL YOUSIFI amp SONS CO Abdullah Salem Street Safat KUWAIT TEL 243 6399 LEBANON Chahine S A L Gerge Zeidan St Chahine Bldg Achrafieh P O Box 16 5857 Beirut LEBANON TEL 01 20 1441 OMAN TALENTZ CENTRE L L C Malatan House No 1 Al Noor Street Ruwi SULTANATE OF OMAN TEL 2478 3443 QATAR Al Emadi Co Badie Studio amp Stores P O Box 62 Doha QATAR TEL 4423 554 SAUDI ARABIA aDawliah Universal Electronics APL Corniche Road Aldossary Bldg 1st Floor Alkhobar SAUDI ARABIA P O Box 2154 Alkhobar 31952 SAUDI ARABIA TEL 03 898 2081 SYRIA Technical Light amp Sound Center Rawda Abdul Q
155. Here are the default values of the events you create Note Note Number 60 C4 On Velocity 100 Gate Time 60 Control Change CCO1 Modulation value O Program Change Program Change Number 1 Pitch Bend 0 Poly Aftertouch Note Number 60 C4 Poly Aftertouch Value O Channel Aftertouch 0 Control Change also allows you to insert Bank Select mes sages CCOO and CC32 Such messages must be located BEFORE the program change to which they apply The correct order is CC00 CC32 PC Also it is usually wiser to assign these three values to consecutive CPT positions e Specify the position where your new event should be inserted by pressing the BAR and fields and entering the desired value for each unit using the dial or the DEC INC buttons Press the field to confirm your settings and add the new event Press to close the pop up window without applying your changes 146G Adding notes If you press the field the display changes to Mar Ej CREATE EVENT NOTE PE ri L NOTE CATET 7 69A4 123 60 A 72C5 123 60 GATE TIME 77F5 124 60 Citta mens This pop up window allows you to enter up to 10 notes for each position see the BAR fields The velocity values of the keys you press are also adopted To enter chords press and hold the key of at least one constituent note then press the remaining keys Any key you press after releasing the keys of notes already entered in the
156. I Files and Music Styles has become a breeze thanks to high quality Song and Style Cover presets and an intuitive instrument based set of MAKEUP TOOLS parameters that allow you to revoice your songs and Styles without spending hours editing single events The structure of Standard MIDI Files can be changed in real time thanks to four programmable MARK amp JUMP memories which allows you to play extended versions of prerecorded songs Adaptive Chord Voicing technology The E 60 E 50 s Arranger not only boasts a new struc ture with 4 accompaniment levels 4 Intros and 4 End ing phrases but also relies on a more musical real time conversion of the chords you play into meaningful accompaniment phrases Roland s patent applied for ACV technology can indeed transpose Music Style parts in such a way as to eliminate unnatural jumps of Strings lines plano chords etc Guitar mode The E 60 E 50 features a Guitar mode that allows you to play super realistic electric and acoustic guitar parts Those parts can be used both alongside the Arranger live applications and recorded using the E 60 E 50 s 16 track Sequencer Recorder and the Style Composer Superfast Recorder and comprehensive 16 track sequencer The E 60 E 50 provides two approaches for recording new song material a Recorder function with a straight forward REC START STOP approach and a fully fea tured 16 track sequencer with track based and detailed microscope editing
157. If you don t need that flashing pattern switch off the button icon 3 Press the field to initialize the E 60 E 50 or the field to return to the menu if you Info have changed your mind You can also press the There may be times when you need to check the button to return to the main page remaining capacity of the internal memory and con The message Operation Successful informs you that nected memory card the E 60 E 50 has been initialized 1 pace ihe button Note This operation does not affect the data in the E 60 E 50 s internal memory they are not erased the E 60 E 50 just doesn t use them anymore WEE spLITE aaa je Ws TOUCH EFFECTS UTILITY z v za ARRANGER 7 STYLE SETTING COMPOSER MIDI FP Wrunction Ae HAND e USBDATA 2 Press the field followed by the field SISTA AT Our GED Free Space Internal Memory 2156 Kb Free Space Memory Card 49998 Kb Version 10 0 2006May12 15 12 12 Free Space Internal Memory Informs you about the remaining storage capacity of the internal memory Free Space Memory Card Informs you about the remaining storage capacity of the connected memory card Version Displays the version number of the E 60 E 50 s operating system along with its creation date and time 3 Press the field to return to the menu or the button to return to the main page Initializing the E 60 E 50 Factory Reset After working extens
158. LERS STORAGE TONE df FOOT WF D BEAM A EDIT CONTROLLERS 2 Press the field EASY SETTING SELECT OUTPUT J MODE EET oss Local Off 1 E 60 E 50 Music Workstation MIDI 3 Press the 1 8 field that corresponds to the MIDI Set you want to use the two SELECT button icons go dark You can also select a preset SELECT and work with those settings in which case all eight MIDI Set icons go dark 4 Press the button to return to the main page MIDI Set selection at power on When you switch on the E 60 E 50 it automatically selects default MIDI settings If they do not match the settings required for your setup you can tell the E 60 E 50 which MIDI Set it should recall when you switch it on 1 Press the button The display changes to 2 Press the field followed by the field UTILITY ar USER PROGRAM RECALL LE ie f MIDI SET RECALL l SOUND SET MODE lara C 3 Press the field and use the dial or the DEC IINC buttons to select the MIDI Set to be recalled when the E 60 E 50 is switched on 4 Switch on the field Switch off this button icon if no MIDI Set should be recalled when the E 60 E 50 is switched on Note If the E 60 E 50 is also set to recall a User Program that contains a MIDI link that selection is ignored if the MIDI SET button icon is on 5 Press the button to return to the main page T94 18 Miscellaneous Using V LINK
159. LL you can use these fields to set the time signature of the new measures 1432 4 2 4 8 16 W EXECUTE Press this field to confirm your settings and edit the data T34 TRANSPOSE RAGED This function allows you to transpose the notes of the selected track non note data obviously cannot be transposed BTRACK ALL 1 16 Allows you to select the track you wish to transpose You can also select ALL here in which case the operation applies to all tracks When used with the option TRANSPOSE is also useful for drum tracks It allows you to select another snare or kick sound for example Most Drum Sets provide at least two snares one assigned to note num ber 38 D2 and a second assigned to note number 40 E2 By entering FROM NOTE 38 pressing the field and selecting 2 you can change your D2 snare to the E2 snare FROM BAR 1 last measure of the track or song Refers to the first measure to be edited By default the FROM value is set to the beginning of the selected track s BEAT 1 number of beats per bar Specifies the beat position The number of available beats depends on the time signature in the selected area CPT 1 119 Refers to the starting CPT position CPT is short for Clock Pulse Time the smallest unit used by the E 60 E 50 There are 120 CPTs to every beat of a 4 4 bar Change this setting only if your edit operation Should start after the selected beat WTO
160. LOPP DISK IERT MEMORY EINT MEMORY EF LOFF Y DISK CERT MEMORY IU UNKNOWN Ge e Start by specifying the source that contains the 4 5 Stylels you wish to copy Press the button icon once or twice to select the memory area INT MEMORY The E 60 E 50 s internal memory area FLOPPY DISK The floppy disk in the E 60 E 50 s drive Do not forget to insert it before selecting this option EXT MEMORY The memory card in the E 60 E 50 s PCMCIA slot Do not forget to insert it into the slot before selecting this option Now specify the target you wish to copy the selected Style s to Press the button icon once or twice to select the memory area If the name of the Style you want to copy to Is already displayed press its line You can also select several Styles In our example Shuffle and Slow Rock 2 have been selected To display the next 5 files press the field in the lower right corner or use the dial You can press the field as many times as necessary or until it is no longer displayed To return to a pre vious group of 5 Styles press or use the dial To copy all Styles that are currently displayed on all available pages from the FROM to the TO area press the field Note If the target media memory card or floppy disk is not formatted a message will be displayed that allows you to for mat it before the Styles are copied If you chose EXT MEMORY
161. MARK amp JUMP locations e Press the field to confirm your set 4 5 6 7 ting The message disappears Repeat steps 2 3 to program new locations for the remaining MARK JUMP buttons Press the field to clear the measure indication of the selected MARK JUMP button The indicators of MARK amp JUMP buttons for which a location has been programmed light Pressing a MARK JUMP button for which no measure location has been entered and whose indicator therefore does not light has no effect Want to save time Here s the quickest way to program MARK JUMP locations e Select the song you want to program MARK locations for Select the MARK amp JUMP page see above Press to return to the beginning of the song then to start playback Press the 1 field to select it Press the field where you want the first marker to be This position is memorized Press the field where you want the sec ond marker to be e Repeat the previous two steps for memories 3 and 4 e Continue with step 5 The MARK JUMP locations are additional information for song files that need to be saved Press the field aes EE oes se vs Press the INTERNAL MEMORY FLOPPY or EXTERNAL MEMORY field to keer the save desti nation If you choose FLOPPY or EXTERNAL MEMORY do not forget to Insert floppy disk or card If necessary change the song s name You only need to do this if you want to preserve the origi
162. N E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Appendix Balance D100 0W D50 50W DO 100W Volume bal ance between the direct D and the effect sound W Level 0 127 Output level 14 Space D This is a multiple chorus that applies two phase modulation in stereo It gives no impression of modulation but produces a transparent chorus effect Chorus Pre Delay 0 0 100 0ms Adjusts the delay between the incoming direct signal and the moment when the chorus starts working Chorus Rate 0 05 10 0Hz Frequency i e modulation speed Chorus Depth 0 127 Modulation intensity Chorus Phase 0 180deg Spatial spread of the sound FO Low Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the low range FO High Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the high range Balance D100 0W D50 50W DO 100W Volume bal ance between the direct D and the effect sound W Level 0 127 Output level 15 St Chorus This is a stereo chorus A filter is provided so that you can adjust the timbre of the chorus sound Filter Type OFF LPF HPF Type of filter OFF no filter is used LPF cuts the frequency range above the Cutoff value HPF cuts the frequency range below the Cutoff value Cutoff Frequency 200 8000Hz Basic frequency of the filter Chorus Pre Delay 0 0 100 0ms Adjusts the delay between the incoming direct signal and the moment when the chorus starts working Chorus Rate 0 05 10 0Hz Frequency i e modu
163. NAL MEMORY TO INTERNAL MEM ORY for example If the name of the file you want to copy is already displayed press its line You can also select several files To display the next 5 files press the field in the lower right corner You can press this field as many times as necessary or until it is no longer displayed To return to a pre vious group of 5 files press If you need to copy all files on all available pages press the field Note If the memory card or floppy disk is not formatted a message will be displayed that allows you to format it before the files are copied 10 If you chose EXT MEMORY for TO disable the card s write protection if available and insert it into the PCMCIA slot See the owner s manual of the memory card for how to disable its write pro tection If you chose FLOPPY DISK for TO disable its write protection see p 11 and insert it into the drive 11 Press the field You are asked whether it is OK to overwrite all files on the destination media TO that have the same file names as the files you are about to copy COPY STYLE CINT MEMORY EINT MEMORY EFLOPPY DISK CCOFLOPPY DISK BE KT MEMORY BEE KT MEMORY Replace files of the same name __Goovyfock ho De dig Bo 12 Press the field if it is OK to overwrite files with the same names on the destination media Press the field if files on the source FROM media that have the same name as
164. No 15J 150 Jakarta Pusat INDONESIA TEL 021 6324170 KOREA Cosmos Corporation 1461 9 Seocho Dong Seocho Ku Seoul KOREA TEL 02 3486 8855 MALAYSIA Roland Asia Pacific Sdn Bhd 45 1 Block C2 Jalan PJU 1 39 Dataran Prima 47301 Petaling Jaya Selangor MALAYSIA TEL 03 7805 3263 When you need repair service call your nearest Roland Service Center or authorized Roland distributor in your country as shown below PHILIPPINES G A Yupangco amp Co Inc 339 Gil J Puyat Avenue Makati Metro Manila 1200 PHILIPPINES TEL 02 899 9801 SINGAPORE SWEE LEE MUSIC COMPANY PTE LTD 150 Sims Drive SINGAPORE 387381 TEL 6846 3676 TAIWAN ROLAND TAIWAN ENTERPRISE CO LTD Room 5 9fl No 112 Chung Shan N Road Sec 2 Taipei TAIWAN R O C TEL 02 2561 3339 THAILAND Theera Music Co Ltd 330 Soi Verng NakornKasem New Road Sumpantawongse Bangkok 10100 THAILAND TEL 02 224 8821 AUSTRALIA NEW ZEALAND AUSTRALIA NEW ZEALAND Roland Corporation Australia Pty Ltd 38 Campbell Avenue Dee Why West NSW 2099 AUSTRALIA For Australia Tel 02 9982 8266 For New Zealand Tel 09 3098 715 CENTRAL LATIN AMERICA ARGENTINA Instrumentos Musicales S A Av Santa Fe 2055 1123 Buenos Aires ARGENTINA TEL 011 4508 2700 BARBADOS A amp B Music Supplies LTD 12 Webster Industrial Park Wildey St Michael Barbados TEL 246 430 1100 BRAZIL Roland Brasil Ltda
165. OE N OR N 13 ME eie MERE N OE EE N EIE 17 Setting up and demo songs 18 COMMCCTIONGs i siel AGA banka houses ot Cowes ate 18 Switching the E 60 E 50 on off 19 Internal Memory Protect a 19 Setting the display contrast 19 Switching off the E 60 E 50 ios on og RE RE ESE 19 Interactive demo of the E 60 E 50 20 WE mdai A Cit darned ene AA 21 General note about the E 50 s menu 21 gt Quick Start ae AA oe en cela SEE OE Di bodies gen 22 IMG general idea 2 2 2scceedeoceneeudedcndessen 22 Playing to an automatic accompaniment 22 Professional transitions FI IN Ese eee 23 TRO A ENN essensen esse aes 24 Selecting MUSIC SIES sn ss ER EE EE EE EE EG GE 25 Changing ThE TEMPO sapanaaa paano aaa rd 25 Using the Keyboard parts sis ama da hha sie He wA 26 Playing with an Upper and or the Lower part 26 Alternating between sounds 0 000 eee 26 Selecting sounds for the Keyboard parts 27 Drumming on the keyboard ien EE ER AR dd aaa 28 Playing realistic guitar parts Guitar mode 29 Fi SLEG EE EG EE eee eee RE 29 Additional ARPEGGIO functions 08 30 Leaving the E 60 E 50 s Guitar mode 30 ieee guitar SOME ts i i see 31 About the chord indications cc eee eee 31 Using the available STRUMM techniques 31 Playing QUESTION and answer Dhrases ss se
166. ORD bank and use this function Note The C1 parameter is only available for Tones that are flagged with a tick in the Parameter Reference booklet N Modulation Vibrato Vibrato is an effect created by modulating the pitch Pitch modulation adds a pleasant wobble to the notes you play Use the following three parameters if you think the part in question has too much or could use a little more vibrato Note Some sounds already contain natural sampled vibrato whose depth or speed cannot be changed DELAY 64 63 This parameter adjusts the time required for the vibrato effect to begin Positive set tings increase the time before vibrato will begin and negative settings shorten the time DEPTH 64 63 This parameter adjusts the intensity of the pitch modulation Positive settings mean that the wobble becomes more prominent while negative settings make it shallower RATE 64 63 This parameter adjusts the speed of the pitch modulation Positive settings make the preset pitch modulation faster and negative settings make it slower BI TVF TVA ENV envelope The volume of an instrument changes over time from the moment the note begins to sound to when it disappears This change can be indicated on a graph as shown in the display The envelope shape is unique to each instrument and is an important ele ment in how we distinguish the sounds we hear The envelopes of musical instrument sou
167. On the 16 track Sequencer page press the field The display now responds with oa 6 GU Lels ava tae se Orr 2 Specify where you want to save your song e Press the field to select the E 60 E 50 s internal memory as target this isa 16MB storage area similar to a hard disk Insert a floppy disk into the drive and press the field Press the field This option is only available if you insert a memory card into the E 60 E 50 s PCMCIA slot If your floppy disk or memory card does not seem to work try formatting it then try again See Format on p 181 Note If you want to save the song under its current name or the name assigned by default New Song you can skip steps 4 5 You need to give your song two names a SONG NAME and a FILE NAME The FILE NAME is the name the E 60 E 50 uses for locating the song The SONG NAME on the other hand is displayed in the Song Finder Ga ee KIES ar poe Bp re Entering names e Move the cursor to the desired position using and gt e Enter the character for that position using the alpha numeric keypad In many instances you will have to press a field several times to select the desired char acter e Use the field to alternate between capitals and small letters e Press the field to delete the character indi cated by the cursor Press and hold it to clear all characters e Press to insert a space e Press to insert a character
168. Orear 60 VB Li AA 107 155 U EE GE EE es 162 UNDO CHANGES ee ee 104 a SA a SOU aadd RAR AN WG AA AA AA 22 UNEQUAL oL 131 132 164 A OF Volume ee 82 107 191 Se rae i irc ace tees ee eae VEE EI EE 61 90 Veloeit OE ER PORN 33 54 Up 26 a aaa aaa Drum Instrument 106 Lower aa EE RE EE ME ME ME ME MA MA MA MM MR 78 Update 37 Switch onJoff a 19 Melody Intell 0 essere 62 s S Upper M FX LINK ee ee esse sesse 85 MIDI 0 0 cece cece ee 192 SN ee ei OT USB aasa 184 186 Rg 192 ynchro Lyrics aman ue MID 0 0 c cece cece ec ec cece ee 187 Sensitivity cece ee 50 synchronization ee EE i User boi Je AA in EERS EERS DEI EE 135 SysEX ROSES eye Se RS Tes 37 192 Minus One a 38 Sa AA 167 des eee 189 Pg g5 i77 O AE EN 197 SC 190 POE RC EE NAAN ANA AA ANA AA ER GAGO GO GG N 79 T AA I GNG a ANA 52 ik EE 25 SE eee 192 195 TEMPO ee ESE aaa 25 155 AE DOER EE AA NAGA 68 EG GR represses eeenaaee ene 69 SOMAR EE 107 125 sA ee eee 107 155 Style COMPOSE srir eresse 162 Se COVER EE AR RR 150 SVNCHFONIZANON sesse ee SERE kira 190 UP DOWN AA 53 LK iss RASSE PARADE DR RD 62 215 Makeup Tools c22222 annnnaaeanes 103 EG N 191 SERE EE OE N stn tn 81 Pedal ccc cee cee eee ee 56 DONC ESE EER RR RE EE Ee 107 SONG MAKEUD si EER E E 102 Style SEE ee ee ee ee 107 Ste MID AA 191 DC dl PA 82 W Wall NOUE sis iss Es ER RE ee Ie ei 156 Whole a 47 66 WIGS seeccceceeeccceceunquncaneass 33 Wor
169. Press this button to access the display where you can select a list of songs to be played back edit existing lists program new ones etc When the indicator of this button lights la 4 gt gt are used to control playback of the current song button You can already load a new song while the current Standard MIDI File is still play ing If you want the Recorder to start playback of the MARK JUMP LA OOOO CJ K dd gt gt gt H e MI 8 BEAT LIVE DISCO BALL JAZZ n TRADIT 6 oMa STYLE CONTROL VARIATION OOOO 6 RECORDER PLAY NEXT LIST SONG 16 TRK SEQ TEMPO DEFAULT EE newly selected song automatically press this button If the button lights this button allows you to select the next song of the selected List button Press this button to switch off the part you want to play or sing yourself The part to be muted is selectable page 38 button Press this button to access the E 60 E 50 s sequencer MIDI recorder This sequencer goes way beyond anything you may know from previous Roland arranger instruments see p 123 I lt lt lt 5 PLAY STOP m s These buttons allow you to return to the beginning of the current song rewind or fast forward in one measure steps and to start and stop playback of the selected song Press the button to record a new song see p 41 STYLE section These buttons allow you to select
170. Put New Music Assistants Here folder That folder is not available on memory cards because Music Assistant entries must always reside in the E 60 E 50 s internal memory e Copy the desired text files from the Text folder to your computer s hard disk and vice versa using drag amp drop Note Never ever remove or rename files via USB use only the E 60 E 50 s functions to this effect E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Roland Import User Program function While data are being transferred the E 60 E 50 s dis play looks as follows and all buttons are locked PC lt gt INTERNAL MEMORY ee si WRITING IE MEN On the E 50 the picture looks slightly different Note Never switch off the E 60 E 50 while this message is displayed because doing so would damage all data in the selected memory area Note Never sever the USB connection while the WRITING message is displayed the message shown on the computer screen may disappear earlier but should not be trusted in this case Doing so would damage all data in the selected memory area Cautions regarding folders and files Only the following types of files may be transferred between the E 60 E 50 and your computer Standard MIDI Files MID Song files with the KAR extension User Program Files UPG Music Styles STL Text files TXT for Lyrics synchronization see p 120 Do not move rename or delete folders of
171. R This parameter allows you to specify whether the arpeggio notes of the key s you are press ing in the ARPEGGIO or STRUMM area are replayed again when you play another chord in the CHORD area This function is on by default CHORD OFF MUTING Switch this function on when you want to mute the virtual guitar strings by releasing all keys in the CHORD area That way your left hand can be used for occasional mute instances whose effect is similar to the one obtained with any of the mute patterns in the STRUMM area V NOISES Guitar parts usually also contain gentle squeaking and sliding noises Use this function to add such noises to your virtual guitar parts or to switch them off if you don t like them 3 ADAPT CHORD Switch this parameter on if your virtual guitar should adapt its chord voicings to the inversions you play in the CHORD area As you know each chord can be played in a variety of ways on a keyboard and a guitar Though the Guitar mode always voices its chord in a typical guitar fashion even when this parameter is off you may need even more flexibility than this basic system can provide In that case switch on this parame ter and try out different inversions to discover how that affects your guitar AUTO SUSTAIN When this function is on default set ting all guitar notes you trigger using the ARPEGGIO keys have a longer decay If you switch it off the notes are a lot short
172. REVERB and CHORUS processors on and off by pressing their button icons to the right of their display If you need another reverb type press the REVERB display and use the dial or the DEC buttons to select it If you also need to change certain aspects of that effect Reverb for Keyboard parts Be aware that any changes you make here also affect the Style and song parts There are only one Reverb and one Chorus processor for all of the E 60 E 50 s parts 1 Press the KEYBOARD REVERB field to access the Reverb parameters The display changes to KBD STYLE SONG REVERB o REVERE LEVEL p REVERB TYPE WAN 2 3 4 E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Roland Editing the Keyboard effects processors Press the or OFF field to switch the proces sor on icon lights or off icon goes dark You can also do so on the EFFECTS page see above Press the field of the effect type you wish to use The options are ROOM1 ROOM2 ROOM3 These types simulate the reverb characteristics of a room The higher the number 1 2 or 3 the bigger the room becomes HALL1 HALL2 These types simulate the reverb of a small 1 or large 2 concert hall and thus sound much bigger than the Room types above PLATE Digital simulation of a metal plate that is some times used for creating reverb effects Works well for percussive sounds DELAY A delay effect no reverb Works a lot like an echo effect and
173. Roland 6U MUSIC WORKSTATION CU MUSIC WORKSTATION Owner s Manual WARNING To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock do not expose this device to rain or moisture For EU Countries This product complies with the requirements of European Directive EMC 89 336 EEC Dieses Produkt entspricht der europaischen Richtlinie EMC 89 336 EEC Ce produit est conforme aux exigences de la directive europ enne EMC 89 336 EEC Questo prodotto e conforme alle esigenze della direttiva europea EMC 89 336 EEC Este producto cumple con la directrice EMC 89 336 EEC de la CE Dit product beantwoordt aan de richtliin EMC 89 336 EEC van de Europese Unie For the USA FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION RADIO FREQUENCY INTERFERENCE STATEMENT This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to tr
174. Rua San Jose 780 Sala B Parque Industrial San Jose Cotia Sao Paulo SP BRAZIL TEL 011 4615 5666 CHILE Comercial Fancy II S A Rut 96 919 420 1 Nataniel Cox 739 4th Floor Santiago Centro CHILE TEL 02 688 9540 COLOMBIA Centro Musical Ltda Cra 43 B No 25 A 41 Bododega 9 Medellin Colombia TEL 574 3812529 COSTA RICA JUAN Bansbach Instrumentos Musicales Ave 1 Calle 11 Apartado 10237 San Jose COSTA RICA TEL 258 0211 CURACAO Zeelandia Music Center Inc Orionweg 30 Curacao Netherland Antilles TEL 305 5926866 DOMINICAN REPUBLIC Instrumentos Fernando Giraldez Calle Proyecto Central No 3 Ens La Esperilla Santo Domingo Dominican Republic TEL 809 683 0305 ECUADOR Mas Musika Rumichaca 822 y Zaruma Guayaquil Ecuador TEL 593 4 2302364 EL SALVADOR OMNI MUSIC 75 Avenida Norte y Final Alameda Juan Pablo II Edificio No 4010 San Salvador EL SALVADOR TEL 262 0788 GUATEMALA Casa Instrumental Calzada Roosevelt 34 01 zona 11 Ciudad de Guatemala Guatemala TEL 502 599 2888 HONDURAS Almacen Pajaro Azul S A de C V BO Paz Barahona 3 Ave 11 Calle S O San Pedro Sula Honduras TEL 504 553 2029 MARTINIQUE Musique amp Son Z I Les Mangle 97232 Le Lamantin Martinique F W I TEL 596 596 426860 Gigamusic SARL 10 Rte De La Folie 97200 Fort De France Martinique F W I TEL 596 596 715222 MEXICO Casa Veerkamp s a de c v Av Toluca No 323 C
175. SysEx messages but basically have the same function RPN Registered parameter number messages They work like NRPN messages and are understood by many GM and GM2 compatible tone genera tors CAF Channel Aftertouch messages When you select Note a FROM NOTE and TO NOTE field appear that allow you to set the upper and lower limit of the notes to be copied See also Fine tuning the setting range on p 132 MVALUE CPT 4800 4800 This parameter sets the amount by which the notes are shifted The value refers to CPT units one CPT 1 120 J Notes on the first beat of the first bar cannot be shifted further to the left because that would mean shifting them to the O measure which doesn t exist W EXECUTE Press this field to confirm your settings and edit the data E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Roland Editing 16 track songs TRACK XCHANGE TRACK EXCHANGE allows you to move the data of the source track left to the destination track right and at the same time the data of the destination track to the source track PRASCE _ CHANGE CHANGE MERGE GLOBAL cf YELO GATETIME CHANGE BTRACK 1 16 This is where you select the first track to be exchanged Obviously there is no ALL option here MTRACK 1 16 This is where you select the second track to be exchanged Obviously there is no ALL option here This track cannot be set to the same number as the above Note Be careful when exchan
176. T LINK i ory is always available insert the proper card and select that User Program again If you don t the E 60 E 50 will start playback of the previously loaded song when you press again 1 Press the USER PROGRAM button SONGPARRANGR 2TAET PRIORITY 3 Press the FILL IN ON USER PROGRAM CHANGE field to switch this function on or off FILL IN ON lights If the button lights a fill in is played when you recall a User Program that selects a Style pattern which is different from the one FILL IN ON dark No fill in is played when you recall a User Program that selets a differ ent pattern even if the The display changes to button lights mractory set USER PROGRAM SSS main ZA KA E wae This setting has no effect on situations where the 4 LE AUTO FILL IN button doesn t light in which case no Es Pass fill in is played 3 4 Boston 4 Press the field to return to the menu or the Living a dream 7 60 s Rock N EXIT button to return to the main page Funny Rap 6 8 Ballad pa p5 ET NI 2 Press the field SUNG DIK 1 Song Name FIRSTDAY Author En FileName FIRSTDAY ieee Ay sam DELETE An wes SONG LINK AI SONGLINK Oo E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Working with User Programs If the User Program already contains a link to another song which you no longer need press the DELETE SONG LINK field This is n
177. The field disappears because transposing the drum part in octave steps doesn t make sense T O4 3 4 5 6 7 _ 8 9 Press the field to jump to the location where the instrument you are about to change Is used Playback starts automatically from that point If you can barely hear the Tone Drum Set press the field indicator icon must light then use to jump to the first note of that instrument Press again to switch this func tion off Use the field to switch the selected instru ment off The corresponding part is no longer played back Just as a reminder this setting only applies to the selected instrument and thus not necessarily to the entire track Note In the case of the drums you can mute two Instrument groups separately Press the long sound name field next to the instrument icon and use the TONE buttons and the display to select another sound or Drum Set Piano aw Tone E Press the button to return to the SONG MAKEUP TOOLS or STYLE MAKEUP TOOLS PALETTE page Press the field of another parameter you want to edit and use the dial or the DEC buttons to set the desired value You can also press the dial and enter the value via the on screen numeric pad Feti r ie NUMERIC PAD ID sau k Af j te 5 3 uos Most parameter values can be positive or negative so remember to also use the field Press to reset all parameters on this page
178. To return to a previous group of 5 User Programs press If you need to copy all User Programs that are cur rently displayed on all available pages press the ALL FILES field Note If the memory card or floppy disk is not formatted a message will be displayed that allows you to format it before the User Programs are copied E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Roland Editing User Program Finder information 4 If you chose EXT MEMORY or FLOPPY DISK for TO disable the card s disk s write protection and insert it into the PCMCIA slot or disk drive See the owner s manual of the memory card for how to disable its write protection Note Not all cards have a write protection function 5 Press the field Press if you do not want to proceed or to select other files You are asked whether it is OK to overwrite all files on the destination media TO that have the same file names as the files you are about to copy IN Replace files TA of the same name ko A non Corrida i UNKNOWN Ab zum Sueden UNKNOWN 6 Press the field if it is OK to overwrite files with the same names on the destination media Press the field if files on the source FROM media that have the same name as existing files on the destination TO media should not be copied only files with original names will be copied in that case The data are copied and a Function Complete mes sage confirms the end
179. UME page your E 60 E 50 sends an NRPN message that describes your action You can keep the E 60 E 50 from responding to such messages to avoid that external instruments mute its parts USER PRG PC This parameter is used to enable the reception of program change and bank select messages relative to User Program selection E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Roland Editing MIDI parameters MASTER VOLUME This parameter allows you to enable or disable the reception of Master Volume messages that would change the E 60 E 50 s overall volume This is an exclusive message common to all newer MIDI devices STYLE parameters The STYLE channel is used for receiving program change and bank select messages that select Styles and volume messages that change the Style s vol ume These two message types can only be filtered in the RX column i e you can specify whether or not to receive them WUYL EEN seer lem J EERS Style MIDI TX MIDI RX CHANNEL Ee The MIDI address of a Music Style consists of three elements a CCOO number a CC32 number and a pro gram change number The values assigned to CCOO and CC32 define the Style whereas the program change number defines the Division Intro Ending etc See also the Parameter Reference booklet sup plied with your E 60 E 50 Sending only a program change number selects another Division of the currently active Style Be aware however that only sending CCOO and CC32 messages without a p
180. Use the a lv buttons or the dial to select the list entry you want to edit The name of the selected parameter appears in the upper right hand corner of the display MASSERIA ne as Tempo Change b 01 000 Beat Change 4 01 020 Sys Ex FO 7E 7F 09 01 F7 01 031 Sys Ex FO 41 10 42 12 40 00 7F 00 41 F7 01 037 Sys Ex FO H 10 42 12 40 01 38 06 01 F7 EVENT ES 0 0 0 0 01 043 Sys Ex FO H 10 42 12 40 01 33 5432 F7 0 0 0 0 01 050 Sys Ex FO 41 10 42 12 40 01 345431 F7 01 056 Sys Ex FO 41 10 42 12 40 01 00 20 28 EVENT 04 060 Tempo Change COPY EVENT 01 099 Sys Ex FO H 10 42 12 40 01 00 20 28 02 000 Tempo Change 52 02 060 Tempo Change 46 03 000 Tempo Change 140 Fer 9 EVENT amp TAO 2 Press the DATA ENTRY gt button to select the first value MEI ETIES SUN Tempo Change Value 1 01 000 Tempo Change 01 000 Beat Change 4 4 EVENT 01 020 Sys Ex FO 7E 7F 09 01 F 01 031 Sys Ex FO 41 10 42 12 40 00 7F 00 41 F7 01 037 Sys Ex FO 41 10 42 12 40 01 38 06 01 F7 gee Xx 01 043 Sys Ex FOH 10 42 12 40 01 33 BA 32 F 01 050 Sys Ex FOH 10 4212 40 01 34 5A31 F7 0 0 0 01 056 Sys Ex FO H 10 42 12 40 01 00 20 28 01 099 Sys Ex FO 41 10 42 12 40 01 00 20 28 04 060 Tempo Change 60 02 000 Tempo Change 52 EVENT 02 060 Tempo Change 46 03 000 Tempo Change 140 Qe 3 Modify the value e Rotate the dial or e Set the value u
181. X p Only to computer and only copy JDE X bp Please ignore Demo y gt Please ignore J Midiset X ps Please ignore Put New MusicAssistants Here To and from computer Put New Songs Here To and from computer Put New Styles Here t To and from computer Put New UserPrograms Here To and from computer J ROMStyle X bp Please ignore 3 50ng X gt Only to computer and only copy 3 Style XP Only to computer and only copy Text pp To and from computer A Update X gt Please ignore 3 Userprg Only to computer and only copy 12 Do one of the following e Copy the desired Music Styles from the Styles folder to your computer s hard disk using drag amp drop To copy Styles from your computer to the E 60 E 50 drag amp drop them over the Put New Styles Here folder Copy the desired songs from the Song folder to your computer s hard disk using drag amp drop To copy songs from your computer to the E 60 E 50 drag amp drop them over the Put New Songs Here folder Copy the desired User Programs from the Userprg folder to your computer s hard disk using drag amp drop To copy User Programs from your computer to the E 60 E 50 drag amp drop them over the Put New UserPrograms Here folder To copy User Programs from your computer to the E 60 E 50 and immediately create associated Music Assistant entries drag amp drop them over the
182. YLE MAKEUP TOOLS after programming your Style the Style Composer does not recognize the MAKEUP TOOLS settings and discards them when you save your Style You can create interesting panning effects by slowly shifting the selected track from left to right or vice versa in the course of a pattern This is especially effective for synthesizer or guitar riffs Continuous changes mean that you have to keep recording until the end of the pattern 8 Press the RECORDER button 9 Press the button to start recording If you are changing a static setting you can stop recording on the second beat 10 Press again to stop recording 11 Press the field to return to the STYLE COMPOSER page About the Mixer The STYLE MIXER functions can be used in three ways to try out settings during playback without recording them to record the events available on this page or to change some i e not all of them at a later stage For the first approach start playback of your Style then select the STYLE MIXER page then change the settings They are not recorded and reset when the loop returns to the beginning 161 E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Programming Styles Style Composer For the second approach stop Style playback select the STYLE MIXER page then proceed with step 3 above For the third approach a kind of punch in select the STYLE MIXER page press RECORDER REC e then press to start recording When you reach the pl
183. You can change the assignments of songs to a category and even edit the Index names Furthermore you can copy an Index entry along with all its song assign ments to a different entry 1 Press the FINDER button You can also press the field on the main page Co al The display changes to SONG LIST EXTERNAL F INTERNAL FORCA FORCA MID FRIDAYNI IFRIDAYNI MID JE HEREWEGO HEREWEGO MI 2 Specify the memory area Or INTERNAL MEMORY 3 Press the field in the top left corner 1 N E 60 E 50 Music Workstation More refined song functions If the field is currently selected the display looks as follows aa The Index Edit functions are only available for real Index categories SO 4 Press the field of the Index category you wish to edit SONG ives 5 Select the edit function you need by pressing its field Bl Rename This function allows you to change the name of the selected Index e Press the field SORIS jy ise Pao HAI AAP TAE arn EE ET ees oo o Qer e Enter the new name 12 characters See Entering characters on p 111 Note The field allows you to switch between uppercase and lowercase characters e Press the EXECUTE field to confirm the new name TA W Edit This function allows you to assign the desired songs to the selected Index or to remove existing song assignments e After performing st
184. a 106 REC Mode Style a sen EE 155 li reeeaeeeeererd anaes 125 128 Recall 0 ccc cee eee eee 194 User NOGA ite NE EE EE 95 Record o AY SA 127 DUG EEE 155 NG PAA 155 RECOMIE 2a naaa ei KANA AA NAG 41 ROCOROING 220225222225 55sannacananee 41 Seleli ieke EE xd ee ee 126 REGISMAUONS 2iecetceesodanaaaaaamas 88 kabi APP 192 alan GA 80 105 RE MO RAAS AARD OR EE EE ED KA 191 2 14 Remove eee eee 117 Rename Diskk amp Media 0 0 000 178 alala coe pede debe Er 98 114 Play LISE iss SERE EES REDES hd 119 Sno EINDE ons ee oe 75 112 User Prg Genre a 96 Ka AG 133 COO PA PEP 133 Mel AREA EE OE 155 User Style ba dada dad da ad Se pe 159 RESET baa GAS ANA KAKA 36 112 197 SE AA 56 Start TeEMpO AA Da He AA 105 106 RESOLUTION es EE EE DE 164 ReESONGNCe ESE EEEEETEDEEDD EIS SS NG 80 Pie MA ET eee 53 ss olie EE EE 32 kali CA aaa ake 81 105 Drum Instrument 106 Keyboard parts 005 83 Ka o es ee ees nae 86 107 SAGIE EE EES SEER ER 102 107 style COMPOSE ses R EER RR 161 Style Song EE ee 86 ee Ed POSS AANO 55 61 ON GA vette eee ene 37 ie AA 66 RE ee 69 Fill value 69 WOO aes seas s A 69 NAG decd deck dco doh doh ER SE GEE 69 Ritetaande EE EER EE Bae eae ars 69 ROOM iss ese AAS AS ie 83 86 107 EE cau Ses RS EE ER DE ies 54 55 EE EE ss 189 190 EVER dos old old ode dd dd Se 190 eg EE N ON 190 NOVOCI AE ON 192 S Save MIDI EERS ER SESSE RE E 177 Music Ass
185. a RE ET 169 Se EE SA ee ee eS Bale ed ES REELE EE 90 Database 00 a 73 SIG 6e te eeraa eaen 150 Hold 99 Definition BO NANANG E EE 139 ao DOELE casa aaa3G444444444444a 182 Delete 7G AO cager EES SS EES SESSE 21 48 ea ee MIDI R 189 od ees ee ees ee eee aro 176 eae uli Rasse Io Oct kaa aaa 19 KA 89 Editing aan aaa eer 160 ane NO FIM me ON 92 Effects ee ANG 102 a or ie ME ca pron 96 ii SERE ETIESE IAN 91 95 aa ER EE Re ER ER RR EE Re ee ee Ha Program change 191 Makeup Tools AGE DEER LEE D EN NO ME BEREGREDAGARORAGE Sie dee us MR EE N 91 Melody Intell Link 63 Style Composer aaa 166 TT Mot 59 Mel EE EE EE N 95 Micro EO ie kaaa see Dk 170 OO ss EDE EE RE DIE hh eka ees N LIL 96 MIDI parameters nann RE EE RE 191 bung EE N N 51 77 Seleeting 89 90 Ml Ef oe ER asaan 82 Tuning eee ee MA a EE ee DE 49 51 Set save KA 177 Part aa 26 Upper2 KA 77 Song MIDI Set link 93 94 Parts oe MR AM MA AM ME ma AM Ad AM ganan 58 TVF Style Volume AA 89 EE N eer 79 Write 88 PC Le 191 Cutoff eee 80 User Style see Style POGI sees IE 151 RESONANCE AA 80 Quick location manas CG CA 189 V Record Mode ETE T 155 Event cee ee 189 V NOES EE AE eee AG 32 Recording Bs RR ND N N N N a N N N N EN N RE EE En 41 OEUVRE ESE ESSEN 192 RE EE SEE EE REEN 182 a N EN O Vasa 134 166 169 EREGAS Oe di Hi Velocity cceceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 192 Variat ISA eee ee eeeee seen eee 55 o nada a N 67 VariatiON eee eee ee eee 23 AS
186. a REVERB parameter on the mixer page for Styles to O means that only the selected instrument is no longer processed by the effect while the remaining instruments are Note See Mixing Song or Style parts on p 102 for details Press to return to the display page with the modules or Press the button to return to the main page Chorus for Style Song parts KBDV STYLE SONG CHORUS CHORUS LEVEL CHOREY SEND CHORUS TYPE Chorus broadens the spatial image of the sound and creates a stereo impression There are also other effect types you can choose here Press the field of the effect type you wish to use CHORUS1 CHORUS4 These are conventional Chorus effects that add spaciousness and depth to the sound FEEDBACK This is a chorus with a flanger like effect and a soft sound FLANGER This is an effect that sounds somewhat like a jet airplane taking off and landing SHORT DELAY This is a delay echo effect with a short delay time SHORT DLY FBK This is a short delay with many repeats Press the field and set the desired value with the dial or the DECJ INC buttons This parameter specifies the output level of the Cho rus processor Setting it to O means that your no longer hear the effect in question By contrast set ting a CHORUS parameter on the mixer page for Music Styles to 0 means that only the selected instrument is no longer processed by the effect while
187. a dle GA 50 LOWEF a 132 164 LWR Hold RE sae aie ws 56 78 Ride AE EE N dees 39 CNO APP PREP PP DOE A 39 Bi N N oes 120 M eee re 96 100 VEC eee nee ee 136 167 ENG OE EE 23 60 61 159 e r E EE N 65 Main page GAAR ESS SEER EE ee es 21 Ee RE EE EE EE dese 156 Make New Song LINK 94 Makeup TOUR sees 102 Mareli DUS asses n AE SA RE ee 26 MARK amp JUMP nananana 36 109 Mark A OE IN 149 E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Roland Master e e EN 124 139 OOR EE EEEE 49 51 MERE APP YY DY POE 23 26 191 aNG E oben 50 MEASURE LENGTH 155 EA AN AA KA A E 62 MEL GR EE EE EE AA aa 38 WEL eens OE UG EG 26 Melody Intelligence 62 Menu E BO aaa 21 Merge oa AA 126 CODY EE DEI EE 133 MEtonomME sees sesse Ee EE Ee oie 59 Hashing BAUER EER EED 197 Mode 0 00 e eee ee eee 59 Style oo cece cece cence sence ees 158 WI EERSTE EE SR EN 81 84 200 di ARE EE EE 63 85 DO er bot 85 Micro Edos oe ESE EE ESE ae 143 170 a N ee 50 6 RE EE a 187 Basic channel EE ER EER SS 191 OES ARR GEE EE 189 190 Ki sir PAY PT PU YEY 189 190 FUNCTIONS a 187 Kk Flat AA 189 192 EE EE ON 189 190 ERROR N DELE EET 193 Set Automatic selection 194 Set Link to User Program 94 Set load 176 Set SAVING 0 cece eee eee 177 SOCKET ICON SESSE EERS EEEEE DERE Ng 94 NG EER ROER EE SE 190 I NENFONZA l0 ase EE 190 EE EE EEKEERTT 189 User Program WK 22eeccceenneees a
188. a to be copied ALL All parameters listed below Note Only note messages P Bender Pitch Bend data Control Control change messages Change Prog C Program change messages NRPN Non registered parameter number messages These are parameter control functions of the GS GM2 format that are easier to use than SysEx messages but basically have the same function RPN Registered parameter number messages They work like NRPN messages and are understood by many GM and GM2 compatible tone genera tors CAF Channel Aftertouch messages When you select Note a FROM NOTE and TO NOTE field appear that allow you to set the upper and lower limit of the notes to be copied See also Fine tuning the setting range on p 132 BI DST TRACK This is where you select the track to which you want to copy the selected data If you set SRC TRACK to ALL the DST TRACK setting cannot be changed 133 E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Using the 16 track sequencer MINTO The bar beat and CPI values of the position the first data of the source track will be copied to W EXECUTE Press this field to confirm your settings and copy the data Note Though you can also copy data from track 10 the offi cial Drum track to a melodic track and vice versa this is only useful if you assign a Drum Set to the selected destination DST track A drum track indeed sounds odd when played by a pia
189. ace where you want to change an already recorded setting press the associated field and modify the value Recording will be deactivated at the end of the pattern even though playback goes on Changing the preset tempo Here is how to change the preset tempo of your Style 1 While on the STYLE COMPOSER page press the RECORDER button STL COMPOSER REC STANDBY Accomp 1 mei ser ad hea el Car TRACK INSTRUMENT There is no need to select a Mode Division or track because the tempo value is shared by all tracks and patterns 2 Press the field and set the value 20 250 using the dial or the DEC INC but tons 3 Press the button to record one or two beats then press it again to stop recording Do not play on the keyboard or use any controllers connected to the E 60 E 50 though Note The last tempo value you record becomes the Style s preset tempo T G2 Style Track Edit functions All display pages of the Style Track Edit mode have a field that allows you to jump to the STYLE COM POSER page The STYLE TRACK EDIT functions are very similar to those of the 16 track sequencer If you know how to use those you will have little trouble understanding how the STYLE TRACK EDIT functions work Here are a few guidelines for editing your Style EE a Save your Style before continuing That way you can always return to the original if your changes do not work out as expected See Savi
190. ack while a song is being played back the Arranger does not respond The same is true when you try to start song playback while the Arranger is running That s because the func tion is on and gives priority to the section that is already running You can however switch this system off In that case starting Arranger playback while a song is running will stop the song and launch Style playback If the Arranger is running while you press PLAY STOP m s the song starts and the Arranger stops Note This switch does not apply when you record using Arranger backing see p 41 there both sections can work simultaneously TIG E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Roland General settings Note START PRIORITY also applies to situations where you try 1 Press the MENU button to start Arranger playback using the SYNC START function 2 Press the UTILITY field followed sie Flashing Exit FACTORY RESET field Whenever you jump to a different page than the main FIRE page the starts flashing to signal that you can press it to return to the main page If you don t need z that flashing pattern and want the button to remain ALL the original FACTORY DATA lit switch off the button icon will be restored ALL Global Parameters will be initialized and 144 Factory User Programs 8 MIDI Set Flashing Metronome will be loaded While the Arranger is stopped the but ton flashes in red to indicate the current tempo
191. ack of the E 60 E 50 this lever will add modulation to the notes of the Key board parts you are playing at that time Move it to the left or right to temporarily lower or increase the pitch of the Keyboard part notes you are playing For the sounds of the TONE family you can use the Modulation axis to alternate between the fast and slow Rotary speeds PHONES 1 amp 2 sockets This is where you can connect two pairs of optional headphones Roland RH 25 RH 50 RH 200 or RH 300 Floppy disk drive This is where you can insert 2DD or 2HD floppy disks for external storage of your Music Styles Recorder songs User Programs and MIDI Sets Press the eject button to remove the disk from the drive Note Do not remove the floppy disk while the E 60 E 50 accesses the disk to load save data etc Doing so may dam age both the floppy disk and the drive s head Rear panel PCMCIA oe CMC USB OUT___MIDI____IN PCMCIA slot This is where you can insert a memory card PCMCIA CompactFlash SmartMedia or Microdrive Memory cards that are not PCMCIA cards can only be con nected if you use an appropriate adapter available at your computer store See also the precautions on p 12 Internal memory protect switch This switch allows you to lock protect and unlock f the internal memory See page 19 DC IN connector This where you need to connect the supplied PSB 4U adapter If it is damaged or out of order be s
192. ade a mistake somewhere you can return to that measure using and start anew from that position In that case you will need to synchronize all remain ing text even text you already synchronized until the end of the song 17 Press the button 128 E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Editing Lyrics The display changes to DISK amp MEDIA ed IMPORT USER PROGRAM e Press SAVE followed by SONG SAYS TONIO d SONG NAME f ARTIST a GENRE a FILE NAME EY eda ET EIE EXECUTE GETEEL romar gp This page allows you to save the current song to the internal memory a memory card or a floppy disk It will be saved along with the Lyrics data you synchro nized 18 Press the EXTERNAL MEMORY FLOPPY INTERNAL MEMORY field to leni the area ee you want to save the song 19 To save the song under a different name press and enter the desired name Repeat this with the entry See page 111 If necessary you can also supply the required ARTIST and GENRE information for use with the SONG FINDER function Note The E 60 E 50 supports both upper and lower case let ters for file names Choose whichever is more convenient or clearer Note ARTIST and GENRE are not available for files you save to floppy disk 20 Press the field to save the song If the selected memory area already contains a song of that name you are asked whether it is OK to over write It e Pr
193. ader Jazairi St Bldg No 21 P O BOX 13520 Damascus SYRIA TEL 011 223 5384 TURKEY ZUHAL DIS TICARET A S Galip Dede Cad No 37 Beyoglu Istanbul TURKEY TEL 0212 249 85 10 U A E Zak Electronics amp Musical Instruments Co L L C Zabeel Road Al Sheroog Bldg No 14 Grand Floor Dubai U A E TEL 04 3360715 NORTH AMERICA CANADA Roland Canada Ltd Head Office 5480 Parkwood Way Richmond B C V6V 2M4 CANADA TEL 604 270 6626 Roland Canada Ltd Toronto Office 170 Admiral Boulevard Mississauga On L5T 2N6 CANADA TEL 905 362 9707 U S A Roland Corporation U S 5100 S Eastern Avenue Los Angeles CA 90040 2938 U S A TEL 323 890 3700 As of August 1 2006 ROLAND For EU Countries This product complies with the requirements of European Directives EMC 89 336 EEC and LVD 73 23 EEC For the USA FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION RADIO FREQUENCY INTERFERENCE STATEMENT This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will n
194. ain after the first or second beat but wait until the count in if any finished Expression Panpot Reverb Chorus Setting or modifying the Expression Panpot Reverb Send and Chorus Send parameters is similar to assigning sounds to existing tracks 1 Stop playback of your Style if it is running 2 Press the field on the STYLE COMPOSER page Cool Live Band SOLO MUTE ADRUMS 4 4 POP1 ABASS J BASS SLIDE E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Roland Editing Styles on the fly via additional recordings The display changes to STYLE MIXER o ABASS d FRETLESS 651 Te nea z PANPOT CHORUS SEND 3 Select the track by pressing its line in the table The name of that track appears on a light back ground 4 Select the MODE and DIVISION whose settings you want to change 5 Press the field of the parameters whose set tings you want to record Only switch this on for settings you want to change For safety reasons you might consider recording one change ata time 6 Press the EXPRESSION PANPOT REVERB SEND or CHORUS SEND field depending on the parameter you want to set 7 Use the dial or the DEC INC but tons to set the desired value The REVERB SEND and CHORUS SEND settings repre sent Send values and indicate how strongly the track in question should be processed by the reverb or cho rus effect The settings of the effects processors themselves need to be changed using the ST
195. aintained If the new chord does not contain that note the Style part in question uses the closest Nearest note In the exam ple above the G is closer to the A sounded by the strings part than the C This produces a more musical behavior than any other system on the market Both Degree and Nearest allow you to specify the note range Limit Low and Limit High the selected part may play Notes that would fall outside that range during Arranger playback are automatically transposed to values inside the selected range Rather than specifying two note values you can also choose Std which means that the E 60 E 50 decides automatically when extremely high or low notes need to be shifted down or up by one or sev eral octaves Other edit operations The fields in the right half of the STYLE MICRO EDIT page allow you to reduce or expand the number of events of the track you selected SHALES MIE eN b CREATE Jj 1 ode Nearest 1 01 cc 0 Bank Select MSB EVENT 1 0 CC 32 Bank Select LSB 4 1 01 000 Program Change 26 1 01 000 CC 10 Pan 64 1 01 000 CC 11 Expression 80 1 01 000 CC 391 Reverb 0 1 01 000 CC 93 Chorus 0 1 02 000 Note 67 G4 127 1 1 02 000 Note 55G3 107 1 1 02 000 Note 60C 4 123 1 1 02 000 Note 6204 127 1 1 0 Note 55 G 3 1 E CREATE EVENT Press this button icon to add a new event to the selected track The following pop up appears
196. allow you to navigate in your play list The added display shows the name of the currently selected play list Autumn leave Strummlin Pop Free Panel Use the lt lt field to select the previous step and gt gt to select the next step If you do so while playback is running the previous or next song will be played back as soon as the current song Is finished Note The MARK JUMP buttons are also available during Play List playback so feel free to use them see p 36 Press again to continue with the next step To switch off the Play List function press the button it goes dark Selecting another single song via the Song Finder or a User Program with a song link will temporarily deactivate Play List function This is signaled by the flashing indicator When the external song is finished the Play List function resumes and the indicator of the button lights steadily Note If Play List playback is stopped at an entry for which NEXT SONG is not active and if you then select a User Program with a song link the Play List function is switched off Pressing then starts playback of the song recalled by the User Program Managing Play Lists Play Lists can be renamed and deleted e f necessary insert the memory card that contains the list you wish to rename or delete into the slot 1 Press the button The display looks more or less as follows PLAYLIST J EXTERNAL FP INTERNAL Saturday Li
197. also select ALL here in which case the operation applies to all tracks N MODE Allows you to select the Mode to be edited Major minor 7th or ALL BI DIVISION Use this parameter to select the Division you want to edit Intro 14 Main 1 4 Fill Dwn 1 3 Fill Up 153 End 154 ALL MINIT VALUE Press this field to reset all values on this page to their initial state if you want to start again There are two kinds of changes that can be performed on this page FROM TO and INC DEC BI FROM TO Enter the original data value i e the value that is being used right now by the selected track s in the FROM col umn For TO specify the new value that should replace the FROM value These are what we call absolute changes you don t add or subtract values you replace them with other values This system is only available for messages that allow you to select sounds or sound banks namely CCOO 04127 ALL This control change is the so called MSB bank select message It allows you to select the Capital Tone select 0 of a sound address if you don t want to use variations or to select another varia tion level Select if the current setting must not change CC32 04127 ALL This control change is the so called LSB bank select message Select if the cur rent setting must not change PC 1 128 Use this parameter to change the address a k a program change nu
198. altime and even display it a little ahead of the changes This also applies to the notes proper that can be displayed in realtime 1 Select a song page 35 2 Press the button LYRICS amp SCORE The display changes to Song SORRYSEE M 008 1 4 109 4 4 What have I got to do to make you love me What have I got to do to make you care What do I do when lightning strikes sonia 3 Start song playback The chord information appears at the bottom of the screen Note The chord information is calculated in real time and may not always be accurate Also with chords where the third has been omitted no information will be displayed because it is impossible to tell whether those are minor or major chords Note You can also add Lyrics data to songs that do not yet contain them See page 120 for details 4 Press the button if the lyrics are difficult to read Press ZOOM to select the normal size again E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Roland Playing back songs Standard MIDI Files N Changing background color of the lyrics window Apart from enlarging the lyrics see above the E 60 E 50 also allows you to set the background color If you don t feel comfortable with the black on white system that is used by default 1 Press the field on the page shown above LYRICS OPTIONS LYRICS COLOUR PRESET 2 Press the COLOR PRESET 1 dark characters on white background 2 field whi
199. altogether different purpose This is useful for the following suppose you started out with a Music Assistant registration and then switched on the UP2 part changed the mixer settings and selected a different Music Style If you like the new ver sion better you probably want to update the old ver sion Hence the SAVE function 1 On the MUSIC ASSISTANT LIST page press the F PE Ee Imma This function allows you to change or supply the NAME ARTIST and GENRE information for the selected Music Assistant registration ARTIST refers to the person that made the song famous while GENRE describes the kind of music e Press the NAME or field and enter field the desired characters See Entering names on p 44 The field allows you to switch between uppercase and lowercase BE characters Ue BOC CC The NAME you enter here only refers to the Music EEN ER EE HE Assistant entry and has no effect on the underlying Le lahi 4Jl 5 mno 6 User Program whose name does not change pars 7 tuv_ wxyz 9 e Press the field to confirm the new name Ara Detete Space 9 insert 2 Press the NAME or field and enter the desired characters TOO 3 4 5 See Entering names on p 44 The field allows you to switch between uppercase and lowercase characters Enter names for the remaining entries if you like Press the field to save the settings If you are sav
200. alue J 120CPT or use the note icons to avoid lengthy calculations The maximum duration a note event can have is 65 535 clocks Drum parts usually use the Gate Time value 1 for all notes Increasing it to 20 for example has no audi ble effect on the sound durations 145 E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Using the 16 track sequencer Other edit operations The fields in the right half of the MICRO EDIT page allow you to reduce or expand the number of events of the track you selected MINE Soy Note Number 1 0 CC 121 Reset All Ctrl CREATE 1 02 035 CC 10 Pan 72 Sven J 1 02 036 CC 93 Chorus 20 1 02 037 CC 91 Reverb 74 1 02 0238 CC 11 Expression 127 FUN AS 1 02 040 CC 7 volume 80 1 02 041 Pitch Bend 0 1 MOVE gt EVENT 02 042 CC 0 Bank Select MSB 0 7 1 02 043 Program Change 4 19 02 077 Note 65 F4 100 11 19 02 115 Note 83 18 EVENT 19 03 030 Note 67 G 4 at 73 19 04 010 Note 63 A 4 65 E CREATE EVENT Press this button icon to add a new event to the selected track The following pop up appears CREATE EVENT AFTERTOUCH CONTROL CHANNEL j CHANGE AFTERTOUCH PROGRAM W CHANGE a PITCH BEND 100 019 Gam ca If the position for which you create a new event already contains other events the new event is added at the end of that group e Press the button icon that corresponds to the kind of event you want to add
201. ame or part of it e Press the field to locate a specific genre Rock n Roll 16 Beat etc then enter the desired characters e Press the field if you happen to know the usually cryptic name of the song file then enter the desired characters Entering characters Enter only as many characters as you think are nec essary to find the song you are after The character string you enter can be used in two ways see below e Use the and fields to select the position for which you wish to enter a new character e Use the alphanumeric keypad to enter the desired characters This keypad works exactly like the keypad of a cellphone you may have to press an alphanu meric field several times to select the desired charac ter or number Note There is no field here because the Finder makes no distinction between upper and lower case letters e The field allows you to delete the character indicated by the cursor Press and hold it to clear all characters e Press to insert a blank or the number 0 1 E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Roland Working with the Song Finder e f you forgot to insert a character use or to select the position where the missing character should be inserted Then press Insert followed by the character you wish to insert e To enter numbers without cycling through the char acters press the field so that its indica tor icon lights After entering the numbers switch it off if you
202. ameter that is currently selected whose display field lights TX ON RX ON These two button icons allow you to specify whether lights or not dark the part whose name appears in the upper left corner should transmit TX or receive RX MIDI data MIDI TX Mi CHANNEL 1 16 Allows you to assign a MIDI transmit channel to the Selected part Unless you have a very good reason to do otherwise we suggest using the same IX and RX channel numbers for a part Note Assigning the same channel to two or more parts is usu ally not a very good idea E LOCAL This is where you can disconnect the part from the internal sound source OFF or re establish that connection ON You can also change the LOCAL setting of all parts simultaneously using MODE Local On Local Off on the first MIDI page E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Roland Editing MIDI parameters MSHIFT 48 48 This parameter allows you to transpose the note messages before they are transmitted to an external MIDI instrument or computer The maximum possible transposition is four octaves up 48 or down 48 Each step represents a semi tone TX EVENT The IX section provides a number of filters that allow you to specify whether the messages in question should be transmitted ON or not OFF Press the field to open the following pop up window o MIDI EDIT UU TE VN GN TX EVENTS FROGRAM CHANGE Press the field to switch a
203. ameters are ignored VA 76 VA 7 3 Press the field G 1000 EM 2000 Any other differences are either VA 76 VA 7 DISK S MEDIA adapted or ignored G 1000 EM 2000 sone me Note User Programs created on or imported into the E 60 E 50 cannot be exported in the VA G EM series format na Iran DELETE i SO He E3 FORMAT EA During the conversion the E 60 E 50 creates a text file called Import_UPG_Report that allows you to keep track of the conversions This file can be found in the Text folder of the E 60 E 50 s internal memory The information it contains is structured as follows om IMPORT CS USER PROGRAM bj kk The display changes to D gt Do not delete nor edit this File P y g 2 y G70 User Program conversion number 01 from VA VA7 Set VA7upg UVA user USS YS Sey O Goa Free pnl_o1 oor wp D es H ETE Ng Free Prl gt Free Pol 01 002 upg amest MEMORY Free Pnl gt Free Pnl 01 003 upg EER Free Pnl gt Free Pnl 01 004 upg My UPrg A 7I A 76 Dae Han Han pa Free Pal gt Free Pal 01 127 4pa Free Pnl Free Pil 01 128 upag USER PROGRAM 2 gt G70 User Program conversion number 02 G 1000 from G1000 Set G1000upg UPS anial Ga lt YOUMENEE gt YOUMENEE 02 002 upg MYBABYJU MYBABYJU 02 191 upg MYBABYJU MYBABYJU 02 192 upg 4 In the right column press the
204. anDisk Corporation and licensed by CompactFlash association Roland Corporation is an authorized licensee of the CompactFlash and CF logo trade marks e All product names mentioned in this document are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Roland Front panel ER Panel descriptions Front panel Note You can press and hold most buttons to jump to an associated display page O D BEAM DJ GEAR SFX INST CTRL OOOO MASTER VOLUME BALANCE T MAX ACCOMP KI MASTER VOLUME knob Use this knob to set the E 60 E 50 s global output volume all sections The setting of this knob also determines the volume in the headphones you may have connected MASTER BALANCE knob This knob allows you to set the balance between the Arranger or song parts ACCOMP and the solo sounds KEYBOARD D Beam controller E 60 This controller allows you to influence the timbre of the notes you play to control song playback and to create some unique effects All you need to do Is move your hand up down or left right above the two eyes The buttons below it allow you to assign the desired function to the D Beam controller See p 51 MARK JUMP section These buttons 1 4 allow you to jump to one of four stored locations inside the currently selected song You can program the desired locations for songs that do not yet contain them RECORDER section button
205. anger METRO INOME STYLE MELODY INT LINK Ng 3 Press the field to switch it on or off If it is on the E 60 E 50 selects a suitable MFX type for each sound you assign to the UP1 part 4 Press the button to return to the main page 3D E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Using the mixer functions amp effects Effects for Songs and Styles The Reverb and Chorus processors are shared by the Arranger Recorder 16 track sequencer and the Key board parts Here is how to select different effects for the selected song or Style 1 Press the MENU button 2 Press the EFFECTS field pa REVERE CHORUS OE OE s o ol KEYBOARD Em EE SPEAKERS Mrx Digital Bass ENHANCER Ee a EDIT Ea I MFX PART ASSIGN gt UPPER1 UPPER2Z LOWER M BASS M INTEL lo Ed Ed Ed Ed On this page you can switch the REVERB and or CHORUS processor off by pressing the but ton icon to the right of its display If you need to select another effect type press the REVERB or CHORUS display and use the dial or the DECJ INC buttons to select it If you also need to change certain aspects of that effect 3 Press the button icon next to the REVERB or CHORUS display Important remark The effects settings discussed below are primarily intended for real time changes of the selected Style or song They are not saved not even to a User Pro gram When you select a different Music Style or song the
206. another Style the new Style starts on the next downbeat 4 Press the button to return to the main page E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Roland Playing to an automatic accompaniment Changing the tempo If the accompaniment is too fast or too slow here is how to change the Music Style tempo DEFAULT r3 1 Press to decrease the tempo in steps of one unit 2 Press to increase the tempo in steps of one unit On most pages where the tempo is not already dis played the following popup window appears to con firm the value you have set You can also press the button several times to specify the desired tempo The new tempo is dis played in the upper right hand corner of the display New Song Strummlin Pop Free Panel CG St Slow Sn Natucaiono sass KW Ac Bass Vintage EP1 The button flashes to indicate the tempo while Arranger playback is stopped If Arranger playback is running the but ton flashes red on the first and green on the other beats of a bar 3 To quickly return to the default tempo hold down and simultaneously press FAST gt 2 gt E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Quick Start Using the Keyboard parts Your E 60 E 50 provides 4 parts that allow you to play different sounds on the keyboard Those parts are called Keyboard parts Lets add a live melody to the accompaniment Playing with an Upper and or the Lower part At power on the UP1 part
207. arameter is not available for ADrums and ABass tracks Intro3 amp 4 and End3 amp 4 patterns W EXECUTE Press this field to confirm your settings and edit the data SHIFT CLOCK SHIFT CLOCK allows you to shift the notes within the selected FROM TO range See page 138 for details MTRACK ADrums Acc6 ALL Allows you to select the track you wish to edit You can also select ALL here in which case the operation applies to all tracks EMODE Allows you to select the Mode to be edited Major minor or 7th BI DIVISION Use this parameter to select the Division you want to edit Intro 14 Main 1 4 Fill Dwn 1 3 Fill Up 153 End 154 BI DATA TYPE Allows you to select the data to be edited See the list on page 165 MIVALUE 1920 1920 This parameter sets the amount by which the notes are shifted The value refers to CPT units one CPT 1 120 J Note Notes on the first beat of the first bar cannot be shifted further to the left because that would mean shifting them to the O measure which doesn t exist W EXECUTE Press this field to confirm your settings and edit the data TRACK LENGTH EEGIES ESE NEK SE N E 0002 00 000 0002 00 000 0002 00 000 B 0004 00 000 0004 00 00 0004 00 00 MODE a E 0004 00 000 0004 00 000 0004 00 000 ED EA ER oos Tne TRACK LENGTH function allows you to modify the length number of bars beats and clocks of a pattern after recording Data that lie
208. arge any static electricity from your own body before handling the cards e Do not touch or allow metal to come into contact with the con tact portion of the cards e Do not bend drop or subject cards to strong shock or vibration e Do not keep cards in direct sunlight in closed vehicles or other such locations storage temperature 25 85 C e Do not allow cards to become wet e Do not disassemble or modify the cards 1 2 e Never remove the memory card or turn off the power while an operation such as reading or writing data or formatting is being performed on the memory card Doing so can destroy the data on the memory card and or render the memory card itself unusable e If you affix the write protect label to the write protect area of a SmartMedia card you will not be able to format the card or write data to it If you wish to format the card or write data to it do so without the label affixed For details on the write protect sticker refer to the owner s manual for your memory card e If you attempt to format a card or write data to it when the write protect label is affixed an error message will appear In that case either insert another card or remove the write protect label e At power on do not remove insert a card while the E 60 E 50 is updating its internal data wait until the messages Song database checking and User Program database checking have disap peared e Never turn on the p
209. as you play a chord in the CHORD area however the E 60 E 50 memorizes and uses it until you play a different chord 7 Play a different chord in the CHORD area and again use the string keys in the ARPEGGIO area to sound the constituent notes Additional ARPEGGIO functions The keys indicated in the previous illustration corre spond to the natural behavior of a guitar But there are other things you can do in the ARPEGGIO area most of these functions involve the black keys of the ARPEGGIO area Lowest chord note Strum down slow 6 strings E 60 Strum down slow 4 strings Root of the chord Fifth of the chord Lowest chord note Lowest chord note Strum down slow 6 strings E 50 Strum down slow 4 strings Root of the chord Fifth of the chord Lowest chord note 1 Play a chord in the keyboard area called CHORD in the display 2 Press one of the following keys to use the effect assigned to it Lowest chord note B3 amp F 4 These keys allow you to sound the lowest note of the chords you play in the CHORD area Here s an example if you play a C chord using the C E G keys this function sounds a C If you play that same chord using G C E this function sounds aG Strum down slow 6 strings C 4 This key causes all six strings to sound more or less at the same time Later on you will discover there is also a fast variety where all strings are hit almost simultaneously Down
210. ase it using the D Beam Controller In that case the fol lowing option is probably more useful Also note that some Tones already use the highest possible TVF Cutoff value by default in which case you cannot add more overtones by opening the filter even further Cut amp Reso Down Only for Upper1 and or 2 By mov ing your hand over the D Beam you can vary the current TVF Cutoff value see also p 105 of the Upper1 2 part The Resonance parameter will be set to 63 maxi mum while the Cutoff frequency can be controlled between O no change and 64 lowest possible TVF Cutoff setting When you move your hand outside the D Beam s range both Resonance and IVF Cutoff return to their original values O no change Note The TVF Cutoff frequency cannot be lowered if TVF Cutoff is already set to 64 Arpeggio Oct 1 2 3 By moving your hand over the D Beam you cause the D Beam part to play arpeggios bro ken chords based on the notes extracted from the cur rent song Depending on the setting you select here the notes will be arpeggiated over 1 2 or 3 octaves Note Do not forget to assign a suitable Tone to the LWR part which acts as D Beam part D3 E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Using the performance functions Chord Oct 1 2 3 By holding your hand inside the D Beam s range you cause the D Beam part to sound the notes extracted from the current song You could use this function to add syncopated b
211. at both contain a Style called Reggae even inserting the wrong card would recall a Reggae1 Style but it might be the wrong one and quite a few other CUSTOM memories might not recall any Style at all because the other names only exist on the other card Press a button of the STYLE pad to select a Music Style family STYLE 8 BEAT LIVE Disco BALL ia Pa 16 BEAT BAND DANCE ROOM CI USER amp Baby Rock N SteamtrainCountr Blue Boogie Slow Country Country Ballad Posaunenpolka Posaunenwalzer Country Beat CUSTOM E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Additional Arranger Style functions 3 Press the field of the Music Style you want to use E Tradit Word STE In some cases an error message File not found displayed at this point means that the card does not contain the referenced file Note If you do not want to use the Style after all press EXIT In that case the E 60 E 50 keeps on using the last Style it did find Disk User You can also load one Music Style directly into the E 60 E 50 s Disk User memory and use it You could take advantage of this function whenever none of the CUSTOM memories refer to the Music Style you need for playing a given piece As its name implies you can also use this function for working with Styles on floppy disk Note The Music Style in this memory is only available until you switch off the E 60 E 50 or load another Style Be awar
212. ately selects of the settings of that memory and thus changes the regis tration The display changes to Ignoring certain One Touch settings Hold The E 60 E 50 provides several HOLD options that allow you to filter certain One Touch settings ONE TOUCH HOLD 1 Press and hold a ONE TOUCH 1 4 button ia EE The display changes to 1 2 3 4 JC OC ONE TOUCH HOLD l 1 2 3 4 scx 2 Press the WRITE field it lights 3 Press the 1 4 field that should contain your new One Touch settings BED ar bee G5 E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Additional Arranger Style functions The display now shows the following message ARRAPDIGER SANNE th ETA lo Loreen pi saved The target One Touch memory you chose for writing is automatically selected 4 Press the button to return to the main page More refined Arranger settings Chord recognition area ZONE Telling the E 60 E 50 that you want to use the Arranger is a matter of pressing the EASY SETTING button In that case the key of the Style patterns is controlled by the chords you play in the left half of the keyboard You can also tell the Arranger to scan another part of the keyboard for usable chords Though LEFT is proba bly the most popular setting you can also select RIGHT to have the Arranger scan the right half of the key board Select WHOLE if the Arranger should scan the entire keyboard If you don t want the Arrange
213. ation of the output sound This is a mono effect that combines incoming sig nals You can however place the processed signal any where between the left and right channels Amp Simulator Type Allows you to specify what kind of guitar amp will be simulated SMALL small amp BUILT IN single unit type amp 2 STACK large double stack amp 3 STACK large triple stack amp FO Low Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the low range FO High Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the high range Level 0 127 Output level Use this parameter to com pensate for exaggerated level differences resulting from the settings you made 4 Distortion Produces a more intense distortion than the above The parameters are the same as for 3 Overdrive 5 Phaser Adds phase shifted copy to the original sound and modulates it Phaser Manual 100 8000Hz Adjusts the basic fre quency that is modulated by the effect Phaser Rate 0 05 10 0Hz Frequency i e modulation speed Phaser Depth 0 127 Modulation intensity Phaser Resonance 0 127 Amount of feedback Higher values create a rather more synthetic character Phaser Mix Level 0 127 Level of the phase shifted sound with respect to the original signal Panpot L64 0 63R Stereo location of the output sound This is a mono effect that combines incoming sig nals You can however place the processed signal any where between the left and right channels Level
214. beat of a 4 4 bar Change this setting only if your edit operation Should start after the selected beat WTO By default the TO position is set to the last event of the selected track or the last event of the longest track when you select ALL BAR 1 last measure of the track or pattern This is where you specify the last measure to be edited BEAT 1 number of beats per bar Specifies the beat position The number of selectable beats depends on the selected time signature CPT 1 119 Refers to the last clock that should be affected by the edit operation Change this setting only If your edit operation should not end exactly on the selected beat Note If you only need to edit one event or message we recommend using the STYLE MICRO EDIT page page 170 MODE NYISION ADrums DATATYPE NDATA TYPE Allows you to select the data to be edited ALL All parameters listed below Note Only note messages Modulat CCO1 messages usually used for adding vibrato i e use of the BENDER MODULATION lever PanPot CC10 messages that specify the stereo posi tion Express CC11 messages that used for temporary vol ume changes This parameter can also be edited on the MIXER page see p 161 Reverb Reverb Send messages how strongly the part should be processed by the reverb effect This parameter can also be edited on the MIXER page see p 161 Chorus Chorus Send messages how strongly
215. beginning of the selected track s BEAT 1 number of beats per bar Specifies the beat position The number of selectable beats depends on the selected time signature CPT 1 119 Refers to the starting CPT position CPT is short for Clock Pulse Time the smallest unit used by the E 60 E 50 There are 120 CPTs to every beat of a 4 4 bar Change this setting only if your edit operation should start after the selected beat WTO By default the TO position is set to the last event of the selected track or the last event of the longest track when you select ALL BAR 1 last measure of the track or pattern This is where you specify the last measure to be edited BEAT 1 number of beats per bar Specifies the beat position The number of selectable beats depends on the selected time signature CPT 1 119 Refers to the last clock that should be affected by the edit operation Change this setting only if your edit operation should not end exactly on the selected beat BI FROM NOTE 0 C 127 G9 This parameter allows you to set the note or lower limit of the note range to be modified within the specified FROM TO time range This parameter is not displayed when you select EQUAL UNEQUAL HIGHER or LOWER 4 MODE DIVISION ADrums RESOLUTION Ios E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Programming Styles Style Composer WETO NOTE O C 127 G9 This parameter allows you to set the upper limit of th
216. below the display That key is called the C4 E 60 Arranger control UP1 UP2 Arranger control UP1 UP2 This split point applies both to the chord recognition area of the Arranger and the split between the LWR and UPP1 2 parts There may be situations where the automatically assigned range is not what you need In that case you can change the split point Press the SPLIT field in the display gam The display now looks more or less as follows SPLIT amp TOUCH Med AR LI MAIN SPLIT KI EY Use the SPLIT POINT aI fields to select the new split point The setting range is F1 F 7 E 60 or C 2 B6 E 50 The darker keys in the display refer to the right half As you can see the SPLIT POINT is the lowest note of the right half Note Your settings can be written to a User Program and recalled at a later stage See p 88 Using WHOLE mode Whole means that all keys trigger the same part s There is thus no split You can assign up to 4 parts to the entire keyboard MBS LWR UP2 and UP1 1 Return to the main page and press the WHOLE field me mr ft Es New Song Strummlin Pop Free Panel Switching parts on and off 2 Press the PART ON OFF buttons of the parts MBS LWR etc you want to play via the keyboard and switch off the parts you do not need KEYBOARD PART TONE ASSIGN MBS LWR UP2 UP1 PART ON OFF If a part is on its button
217. ce functions If you now returned to the main page you would notice that the E 60 E 50 alerts you to the fact that the Scale Tuning function has been switched on OFF On Mem 1 3 New Song Strummlin Pop P 1 1 Gospel Love But let us not return to the main page just yet N Changing the pitch of other notes Changing the pitch of other notes than the ones already highlighted is a matter of pressing the desired on screen buttons in question And defeating the pitch change of a note whose button icon lights is as easy as pressing that field again the button icon then goes dark Press all lit on screen button icons to switch the Scale Tuning function off again N Customizing the pitch changes 4 5 6 Nam At first pressing an on screen button means that its pitch is lowered by 50 cents 1 4 tone or 50 There may be situations where you want to raise the pitch of a note or select a different tuning Press the value field of the note key whose pitch you want to change TUNING Ga TRANS Post That field now lights As stated earlier the pitch of all notes is at first set to 50 one quarter tone down You can however select any value between 64 slightly lower than a quarter tone down and 63 slightly higher than a quarter tone up Use the dial or the DEC INC but tons to set the desired pitch You can also press the dial and enter the value using the on sc
218. cessed Note The four parameters discussed so far can also be set on the SONG STYLE MAKEUP TOOLS mixer page see p 102 VELOCITY Ihis parameter allows you to modify the velocity range of the instrument in question O means that the recorded values are left untouched negative values reduce all velocity values by the same amount leaving differences between notes intact while positive settings increase all velocity values OCTAVE Only for sounds Use this parameter to trans pose the selected instrument up or down by up to 4 octaves E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Roland Using the Makeup Tools SOUND EDIT for sounds Pressing the field on any of the MAKEUP TOOLS pages takes you to the following page where you can make more refined changes to the selected sound see SOUND EDIT for Drum Sets on p 106 if you selected a Drum Set Para FLT Kees SEN cr q re Efe a OT _ y dT C raeme CJ EQUND ET W I INSTR EDIT Pc Halo Pad ERF et Fos FREEZE PAGE Press the field of the parameter you want to edit and use the dial or the DEC INC buttons to set the desired value You can also press the dial and use the numeric pad CUTOFF This filter parameter allows you to make the selected sound darker or brighter Positive Cutoff set tings mean that more overtones will be allowed to pass so that the sound becomes brighter The further this value is set in the negative direction
219. ch point and the selected numeric VARIATION button light steadily If you press it on the last beat of the current bar the Fill In will start on the next downbeat and last an entire bar after which the Arranger automatically selects the new pattern If you press the same numeric button 1 4 again the Fill In is played according to the above rules But when it finishes the Arranger returns to the pattern you had been using up to that point 5 Switch off the button if you do not want the next pattern change to be preceded by a Fill In Note The length of a Fill In can be halved See Half Bar on Fill In on p 55 Intro amp Ending Now that we ve got the transitions covered you may Start wondering how to create more professional intros for your songs and how to end them in style That is what the and buttons are for While the MAIN patterns keep repeating the same accompaniment until you select another one or until you stop Arranger playback Fill Ins see above Intros and Endings are played only once Once the INTRO pattern Is finished the Arranger auto matically proceeds with the MAIN 1 4 pattern depending on which button flashes At the end of the Ending pattern however the Arranger stops 1 Stop Arranger playback by pressing the button it goes dark 2 Play a chord in the left half of the keyboard to specify the key of the Intro pattern 4 5 6 that corresponds to
220. changes made here are lost You can how ever save them thus burning them into the Style or song by pressing the button and the field on the page that appears then see p 108 gt Be aware that any changes you make here also affect the Keyboard parts There are only one Reverb and one Chorus processor for all of the E 60 E 50 s parts Reverb for Style Song parts _ KBD STYLE SONG REVERB o REVERB LEVEL REVERB TYPE Press the field of the effect type you wish to use The options are SG ROOM1 ROOM2 ROOM3 These types simulate the reverb characteristics of a room The higher the number 1 2 or 3 the bigger the room becomes HALL1 HALL2 These types simulate the reverb of a small 1 or large 2 concert hall and thus sound much bigger than the Room types above PLATE Digital simulation of a metal plate that is some times used for creating reverb effects Works well for percussive sounds DELAY A delay effect no reverb Works a lot like an echo effect and thus repeats the sounds PAN DELAY This is a stereo version of the above delay effect It creates repetitions that alternate between the left and right channels Press the field and set the desired value with the dial or the DECJ INC buttons This parameter specifies the output level of the Reverb processor Setting this parameter to 0 means that your no longer hear the effect in ques tion By contrast setting
221. cify how much reverb should be applied to the selected Keyboard part The effect parameters themselves can be edited on an Effect page see below The EFFECT LEVEL REVERB knob far left can be used to set the output level of the Reverb processor Set ting this parameter to 0 means that you no longer hear the effect in question By contrast setting the REVERB parameter of a Keyboard part to 0 means that only the part in question is no longer processed by the effect while the remaining Keyboard parts are 9 Press the CHORUS knob of the Keyboard part whose send level you want to change 10 Use the dial the DEC INC buttons or the on screen numeric pad press the dial to specify how much chorus should be applied to the selected part The effect parameters themselves can be edited on an Effect page see below EFFECT LEVEL CHORUS knob far left can be used to set the output level of the Chorus processor Setting this parameter to 0 means that you no longer hear the effect in question By contrast setting the CHO RUS control of a Keyboard part to O means that only the part in question is no longer processed by the effect Volume and status of the Style parts After pressing the button twice the following page appears USER PROGRAM STYLE VOLUME STTLE MAKEUP TOOLS By pressing yet again you jump to the SONG MAKEUP TOOLS page e Start Arranger playback don t forget to select the
222. ck in isolation press the field and the field of the track you want to solo and start playback This mutes all other tracks while the selected track is flagged with an S You can also select the track to be soloed using the 4 v buttons Press the field again to switch off the func tion of the same name Remarks N Working from top to bottom programming hints If you listen carefully to the factory Styles you will notice that most Divisions of a Style are very similar to one another and that the element of evolution or amplification between the various levels is usu ally derived from adding instruments to otherwise identical patterns The MAIN 2 division may for instance add an electric guitar to the drums bass and organ lines of the MAIN 1 level while the foun dation of the MAIN 2 level is still the same Therefore always start by recording the most com plex accompaniment MAIN 4 while cloning all other looped divisions page 154 Then move to the MAIN 3 Division and delete certain tracks page 164 so that this division sounds somewhat simpler The next step would then be to select the MAIN pattern and delete both the bells and whistles and the distorted guitar 157 E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Programming Styles Style Composer Metronome In Style Composer mode the metronome sounds during recording unless you switch it off using the TEMPO button If you also need the metronome wh
223. ct MSB 0 MOVE EVENT TO mm Q eec 1 01 060 Note 70 Bb4 33 1 1 02 000 Note 37 C 2 111 1 PLACE n e Specify the position to which the first event in chro nological order of the selected group should be shifted by pressing the BAR and fields and entering the desired value for each unit using the dial or the DEC INC buttons e Press the field to confirm your settings and move the event Press to close the pop up window without applying your changes N COPY EVENT This function allows you to copy one or several events Use PLACE EVENT to insert a copy of those events at the desired position SHALES WINE HO EYNI 11 Expression 31 Reverb 93 Chorus COPY Eis Me rd sd PLACE 1 7 Note For this function you could take advantage of the VIEW filter to avoid selecting event types that should not be included in the copy See VIEW on p 171 e To select several consecutive events press the dial while turning it towards the left upward direction or the right downward direction All events selected in this way appear on a dark back ground e Press the COPY EVENT button icon Each new selection will replace the previous one BI PLACE EVENT This function is only available if the Style Composer s clipboard already contains events that you copied using COPY EVENT Press the button icon The following pop up appears SHALES MIE sr 1 01 000 CC O
224. ct type you wish to use The options are CHORUS1 CHORUS4 These are conventional Chorus effects that add spaciousness and depth to the sound FEEDBACK This is a chorus with a flanger like effect and a soft sound FLANGER This is an effect that sounds somewhat like a jet airplane taking off and landing 34 6 SHORT DELAY This is a delay echo effect with a short delay time SHORT DLY FBK This is a short delay with many repeats Press to return to the display page with the modules or Press the button to return to the main page Note Do not forget to save your settings to a User Program if you want to keep them Using the multi effects processor Multi FX Your E 60 E 50 contains a multi effects processor that can be used for processing any Keyboard part you like 1 Press the PART ON OFF button it must light 2 Select the Distort Gt1 sound on page 2 of the GUITAR BASS family 3 Play a few notes on the keyboard and switch the button on off to hear the difference The MFX is available for all Keyboard parts 1 Press the button The display changes to AM AFRANGER NT STYLE SETTING COMPOSER EF FUNCTION a HAND lt use DATA EP Frvxcrion CONTROLLERS STORAGE 2 Press the field en 3 Press the MFX PART ASSIGN field s of the Key board part s that should use the selected MFX effect Note There is o
225. ction Song Finder N Sequencer 16 track sequencer with microscope and macro editing functions Style Converter N Display type amp controls Monochrome 1 4 VGA Touch screen with 3D SG 3D simulated graphics 16 grayscale levels Contrast potentiometer E Panel controls DATA ENTRY dial with switching function Cursor 6 switches data entry INC DEC Up Down Right Left PITCH BEND MODULATION lever D Beam controller with macro settings E 60 MASTER VOLUME knob KEYBOARD ACCOMP BALANCE knob Keyboard Part switches Tone Assign Data entry UP1 UP2 LWR MBS UP1 UP2 LWR MBS TO 3 N User Programs 144 Set List references for access via front panel Unlimited access Internal memory memory card floppy disk via FINDER Parameter Hold Song Link MIDI Set Link Additional functions N Music Assistant registrations 300 factory registrations Unlimited number of programmable entries W Data storage Floppy disk drive Internal memory Memory card 3 5 2HD 2DD Solid State Disk PCMCIA Compact Flash Mem ory Stick Smart Media Micro drive Styles Songs SMF User Pro grams MIDI Sets Play Lists txt files Type of files managed E Other functions Keyboard Modes Split adjustable split point Whole Easy Setting Arranger Organ Piano Guitar Mode Chord voicing ACV Adaptive Chord Voicing Melody Intelligence 18 types 6 5 semi tones automatic SMF transposition Tap Tem
226. d The OCTAVE button icons 5 allow you to shift the tuning of the currently selected Keyboard part indi cated by an arrow To select a Keyboard part press its TONE ASSIGN button The remaining fields 6 allow you to select the Key board part you wish to assign another sound to and recalls the TONE SELECT page They duplicate the functions of the KEYBOARD PART TONE ASSIGN buttons The SCALE TUNE field 7 takes you to a page where yo can change the tuning of the E 60 E 50 s notes so as to be able to use Arabic scales for example E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Roland Front panel The TRANSPOSE field 8 finally calls up the display page where you can transpose one several or all sec tions this depends on the mode you select on that page This field duplicates the function of the TRANSPOSE button When the E 60 E 50 s Guitar mode is on the display looks as follows tim me me eee Cn Gm New Song Strummlin Pop a Ee i Lec EA Em Geinz EE Free Panel Pressing the 9 field takes you to the GUITAR MODE page Note that this field can either contain an elec tric guitar or an acoustic one to indicate the kind of instrument you selected This field duplicates the function of the button As you see there is a lot you can control without having to wade through endless menus Note If the main page does not appear automatically you can return to it by pressing the button once or several times
227. d Playing realistic guitar parts Guitar mode Using the available STRUMM techniques While the ARPEGGIO area essentially provides func tions that allow you to compose your own guitar parts in realtime the STRUMM area contains a series of presets for various strumming techniques Strum ming as you may know means that all guitar strings are played more or less simultaneously using a plec trum or one s fingers All functions discussed below use the chords you spec ify in the CHORD area see above Here are the keys that make up the STRUMM section E 60 C5 F6 Play chords here Select strumming patterns here E 50 C5 F6 CHU Select strumming patterns here EF Play chords here Note As stated earlier UP1 and UP2 are not available in Guitar mode because they are used as guitar parts Note The E 60 E 50 s Arranger can also be used and controlled while Guitar mode is active so that the chords you play with your left hand are used both by the E 60 E 50 s Arranger and its Gui tar mode functionality 1 Select the required guitar type ELECTRIC or ACOUSTIC and the desired sound See Selecting guitar sounds 2 Play a chord in the keyboard area called CHORD in the display 3 Press one of the following keys to specify how your virtual guitar should be played The lowest STRUMM key is called C5 the black key next to it C 5 etc Some of the keys mentioned below p
228. d almost instantly Down slow F 5 This key yields the same effect as the C 4 in the ARPEGGIO area Down fast mute knock G5 Here is a more elabo rate technique especially suited for acoustic guitars a downward strum that is muted almost instantly and accompanied by a knocking sound Up slow Ab5 This is a slow upward strum Down slow mute A5 Here s a slightly slower down ward strum that is muted amp Down fast 4 4 up fast mute 4 Bb5 Here again is a two way technique This one however only uses the highest 4 strings Power chords 3 B5 This pattern is intended for elec tric guitar sounds usually also with some distortion Only the lowest 3 strings are played Down fast 4 C6 Here s another downward strum that only uses the highest 4 strings amp Down fast 4 4 up fast 4 C 6 Again a combined strumming pattern Here too only the highest 4 strings are used Up fast 4 D6 An upward strum based on 4 strings amp Down fast mute 4 4 up fast 4 Eb6 Again 4 sim ulated strings that are strummed in two directions The downward strum is muted amp Down fast 4 4 up fast mute 4 E6 This is the opposite of the previous pattern here the fast upward strum is muted Down fast mute F6 And finally a one way pattern that produces a fast downward strum which is muted Playing question and answer phrases It is also possible to temporarily remove the Gu
229. d from the system Click on the OK button THEN e Disconnect the USB cable from your computer and the E 60 E 50 14 Press the field in the E 60 E 50 s display to return to the CONNECTION MODE page 15 Press the button to return to the main page Backing up all of the E 60 E 50 s data You can make a backup copy of all of the E 60 E 50 s internal data or the contents of a memory card by proceeding as follows e Connect the E 60 E 50 to your computer e On your computer create a folder named Backup or any other name e Double click the icon assigned to the E 60 E 50 s internal memory or memory card to open its window Select its entire contents Ctrl A or Command A Drag the selected files to your Backup folder icon and drop them there Wait until all files have been copied To send the files back to the E 60 E 50 or its mem ory card Open the Backup folder on your computer hard disk Open the window of the E 60 E 50 s internal mem ory or memory card Arrange the two windows in such a way that you can drag files from Backup to E50 E60_SSD or E50 E60_CARD Return to the Backup folder and select its entire contents Ctrl A or Command A Drag all selected folders to the E50 E60_SSD or E50 E60_CARD window and release the mouse key Wait until the operation is completed Disconnect the E 60 E 50 from your computer see above 1SG Just in case
230. d to the Multi FX DD E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Using the performance functions Reset Start This function allows you have the Arranger Expression Foot Pedal start on the first beat of the currently selected Music An optional EV 5 EV 7 or BOSS FV 300L expression Style pattern when you press the footswitch Use it pedal connected to the FOOTSWITCH EXPRESSION when you are accompanying a singer or soloist whose timing is a little shaky and suddenly notice that the Arranger lags one or two beats behind the singer soloist Scale Upper Allows you to assign the selected Scale Tune see p 57 setting to the Upper parts Scale Lower Allows you to assign the selected Scale Tune see p 57 setting to the LWR part Arr Chord Off Allows you to switch the Arranger s chord recognition off in which case only the drum per 1 Press the button cussion of the selected Music Style keeps playing or can be used See also page 66 User Prg Up User Prg Down Allows you to select the next Up or previous Down User Program Punch In Out The footswitch can be used to activate and switch off punch in out recording using the E 60 E 50 s sequencer page 126 Portamento Switches the Portamento function page 77 on and off Soft Sostenuto Hold The footswitch can be used as a Soft Sostenuto or Sustain Hold pedal Note that Hold can also be controlled using a dedicated but optional DP 2 DP 6 or
231. d to this socket can be used for holding the Keyboard part notes The Melody Intell part can also be sustained in this way This function is also referred to as Sustain or Damper 9 Cord hook After connecting the adapter cable wind it around the cord hook to the right of the socket to prevent accidental power disruptions 127 E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Setting up and demo songs Setting up and demo songs You must be dying to try out your new E 60 E 50 to see what it is capable of We ll get to that in a minute But first we need to connect it SSS Connections The E 60 E 50 contains internal speakers You therefore don t need to connect it to an external amplifier Roland s KC series for example But you can also use optional headphones Roland RH 25 RH 50 RH 200 or RH 300 for example Be sure to switch off both the E 60 E 50 and the external devices you want to connect before making or breaking audio and or MIDI connections If you do not have access to the sound system of the venue where you are performing ask the local engineer to set the volume to the minimum level Mixing console key board amplifier active Footswitch speakers i a DP 2 DP 6 or OPTIONAL BOSS FS 5U To wall outlet Footswitch DP 2 DP 6 or BOSS FS 5U EXPRESSION FOOTSWITCH
232. desired pattern then press the field of the Style part you want to listen to in isolation Only one Style part can be soloed Pressing another field causes the corresponding part to be played back in isolation This setting cannot be saved it is merely meant to help you find the part whose volume you want to change or that you want to switch off see below Note If the Solo function is on while you save a User Program all tracks except the soloed one are swithed off so that only the soloed track will be audible when you recall the User Pro gram BB DECJ INC buttons or the on screen numeric pad press the dial to set the volume of the Style parts See Arranger parts on p 60 for a description of the Style parts e Use the fields to mute Style parts you do not need These settings can saved to a User Program see p 88 e You can press the field to jump to the MAKEUP TOOLS mixer The parameters there provide more detailed Style mixing functions see p 102 DO Editing the Keyboard effects processors After setting the above parameters you may find that even sensible reverb chorus settings for the Keyboard parts do not yield the expected result In that case you should edit the Reverb and Chorus parameters 1 Press the button The display changes to CONTROLLERS 2 Press the field Ge EES a 7 KEYBOARD STYLE SONG ie REVERE Digital Bass ENHANCER On this page you can switch the
233. dge for example Note If you press a MARK JUMP button almost immediately after starting song playback the Recorder may suddenly stop and the message Song Scanning may appear This can be solved by reducing the playback tempo so that the E 60 E 50 has enough time to process all MIDI data contained in the song N Reset rewind fast forward You can also use the following buttons to jump to different song locations PLAY wo rw Lsror KI dd PP gt H lla TOP allows you to return to the beginning of the current song BWD allows you to rewind one measure at a time You can also press and hold this button to rewind more rapidly gt FWD allows you to fast forward one measure at a time You can also press and hold this button to advance more rapidly These buttons are available both during playback and while playback Is stopped N Next Song While the current song is still running you can already select the next one to be played back If you want it to start automatically proceed as follows e Press the button e Select the desired song using the Song Finder page 35 e As soon as the current song finishes the next one starts automatically There is thus no need to press PLAY STOP m m again You could now already select another song e Press the button again to switch off this function Note Your E 60 E 50 also provides a PLAY LIST function for programming sequences of sev
234. dicators of these two buttons light and the dis play changes to GUITAR MODE KG OPTIONS ALASI 0 Na gc ELECTRIC ACOUSTIC k 3 ERODED ees i CHORD The Off On switch icon allows you switch the Guitar mode on or off If you selected this page by pressing EASY SETTING GUITAR it is already set to on E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Roland Playing realistic guitar parts Guitar mode If you now return to the main page by pressing the button the display changes Bm es mm Dee New Song SteamtrainCountr Free Panel The UPPER 1 field below GUITAR MODE shows the name of the currently selected guitar sound You cannot select other guitar sound for UPPER 1 simply by pressing this field press the GUITAR MODE field to jump to the page shown above then change the settings you don t like UPPER2 s guitar sound is assigned automatically and can never be changed First steps 2 3 Press the ELECTRICI or ACOUSTIC switch icon to specify whether you need an electric or an acoustic guitar Your choice is reflected by the big guitar picture In the upper right part of the display Play a chord in the keyboard area called CHORD in the display EE E 60 Play chords here Pad E 50 Play chords here You can release those keys right away if you like Note The keys in the CHORD area unlike the ones of the ARPEGGIO and STRUMM areas see below also trigger other Keyboard par
235. differences between high and low velocity values in the selected range Values below 64 are lowered while values above 64 are increased The result is therefore that the difference between pianissimo and fortissimo becomes far more pro nounced MAGNIFY values below 100 have the opposite effect they push all velocity towards the imaginary center of 64 thus reducing differences in playing dynamics E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Roland Style Track Edit functions MFROM NOTE TO NOTE 0 C 127 G9 FROM NOTE refers to the lower limit of the note range you want to change TO NOTE represents the upper limit See also Fine tuning the note range on p 164 W EXECUTE Press this field to confirm your settings and edit the data CHANGE GATE TIME aa losma meee ME EE MR Ass ae imee ate This function allows you to modify the duration of the notes in the selected time FROM TO and note FROM TO NOTE ranges See page 136 for details MTRACK ADrums Acc6 ALL Allows you to select the track you wish to edit You can also select ALL here in which case the operation applies to all tracks N MODE Allows you to select the Mode to be edited Major minor or 7th E DIVISION Use this parameter to select the Division you want to edit Intro 1 4 Main 1 4 Fill Dwn 1 3 Fill Up 153 End 154 MBIAS CPT 1920 1920 This parameter sets the amount by which the duration or gate time of the selected note
236. does what its name suggests it allows you to balance the various Keyboard parts of your E 60 E 50 See page 102 and following for how to mix the Song and Style parts About the E 60 E 50 s effects The E 60 E 50 contains the following effects proces sors not all of which are available for all sections Please carefully study the following table Section Effects processors Remarks Keyboard Effects Reverb Chorus Two editable processors also 2 shared by the Style and Song parts MFX Only for the Keyboard parts Style Song Effects Reverb Chorus Shared by these two sections as well as the Keyboard parts 3 The reason why we are talking about processors is that most of them can be used in various ways by selecting a Type The MFX is the most versatile pro cessor because it can use one of 41 types while the other processors provide 8 or 9 possibilities Mixing Keyboard parts Here s how to set the balance and other mix related parameters of the Keyboard parts 4 1 Press the button 5 The display changes to E 60 KEYBOARD PA eon LEVEL E 50 6 7 The MUTE message means that the part in question is currently not available You can mute a part by pressing its instrument icon To switch a muted part on press its instrument icon flagged with a MUTE message again Press the knob icon of the parameter you want to set Lets begin with the VOLUME row which is displayed in lig
237. ds ce ee eee eee 39 120 Write Wl Coeeecsseeeaeebe SOEN 109 DT Se EE N Ee IN 193 One TOUR iis ie EI RE 65 User Proof susse EER EE EE Se 88 Information EGYPT Al Fanny Trading Office 9 EBN Hagar A1 Askalany Street ARD E1 Golf Heliopolis Cairo 11341 EGYPT TEL 20 2 417 1828 REUNION Maison FO YAM Marcel 25 Rue Jules Hermann Chaudron BP79 97 491 Ste Clotilde Cedex REUNION ISLAND TEL 0262 218 429 SOUTH AFRICA T O M S Sound amp Music Pty Ltd 11 Melle St Braamfontein Johannesbourg SOUTH AFRICA TEL 011 403 4105 FAX 011 403 1234 Paul Bothner PTY Ltd Royal Cape Park Unit 24 Londonderry Road Ottery 7800 Cape Town SOUTH AFRICA TEL 021 799 4900 CHINA Roland Shanghai Electronics Co Ltd 5F No 1500 Pingliang Road Shanghai 200090 CHINA TEL 021 5580 0800 Roland Shanghai Electronics Co Ltd BEIJING OFFICE 10F No 18 3 Section Anhuaxili Chaoyang District Beijing 100011 CHINA TEL 010 6426 5050 HONG KONG Tom Lee Music Co Ltd Service Division 22 32 Pun Shan Street Tsuen Wan New Territories HONG KONG TEL 2415 0911 Parsons Music Ltd 8th Floor Railway Plaza 39 Chatham Road South T S T Kowloon HONG KONG TEL 2333 1863 INDIA Rivera Digitec India Pvt Ltd 409 Nirman Kendra Mahalaxmi Flats Compound Off Dr Edwin Moses Road Mumbai 400011 INDIA TEL 022 2493 9051 INDONESIA PT Citra IntiRama J1 Cideng Timur
238. e dial and the DECJ INC buttons To return to a previous group of 5 user Programs press See page 90 for details about locating the desired User Program 95 E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Working with User Programs Editing the User Program Finder information The Finder information is based on search criteria that need to be added to User Program files User Program Options The field in the lower left corner provides access to a display page where you can add database information This also works for User Program files that already contain entries you wish to modify 1 First select the User Program whose database information you wish to change or edit by pressing its field 2 Press the field PT gt As 2 oer 3 Lels pana rw dwaas az pane pwe mo 3 Now do one of the following M Rename This function allows you to change or supply the USER PRG and GENRE information of the selected User Program STYLE LINK and SONG LINK cannot be edited in this way See page 94 for how to do that Note In the case of a floppy disk you can only change the USER PRG entry Press the USER PRG or GENRE field and enter the desired characters The field allows you to switch between upper case and lowercase characters What happens when you execute Before performing the next step we d like to inform you about the possible consequences of renaming a User Program USER PRG From t
239. e field on the SONG LIST page Also bear in mind that the COPY page only lists songs that match the last search criteria you used for the SONG FINDER On the other hand if you only need to copy certain songs on memory card or in the internal memory using the FINDER would be a good idea it helps you to avoid too many presses of the PAGE or field e On the SONG OPTIONS page press the field 5 6 SONS OPTIONS se renane AF KA FROM CSINT MEMORY To f EINT MEMORY geek el FLOPPY DISK arr EOIFLOPFY DISK ERENT MEMORY WERENT MEMORY Start by specifying the source that contains the song s you wish to copy Press the button icon several times to select the memory area INT MEMORY The E 60 E 50 s internal memory FLOPPY DISK The floppy disk in the E 60 E 50 s drive EXT MEMORY The memory card in the E 60 E 50 s PCM CIA slot Now specify the target you wish to copy the selected song s to Press the button icon once or twice to select the memory area If the name of the song you want to copy is already displayed press its line You can also select several SONGS To display the next 5 files press the field in the lower right corner You also use the dial and the DECJ INC buttons You can press this field as many times as necessary or until it is no longer displayed To return to a pre vious group of 5 songs press If you need to copy all songs that are currently dis played on all avai
240. e 100 means that all notes are shifted to the mathematically cor rect positions W EXECUTE Press this field to confirm your settings and edit the data TGA ERASE FROM Ba a bo TO Boos abo ERASE allows you to selectively delete data either within a specified range of measures beats or clocks or from the entire track s When DATA TYPE is set to ALL ERASE substitutes the required number of rests for the data you delete so that you end up with the equivalent number of blank measures If you also want to eliminate the measures themselves use DELETE see below MTRACK ADrums Acc6 ALL Allows you to select the track you wish to edit You can also select ALL here in which case the operation applies to all tracks N MODE Allows you to select the Mode to be edited Major minor or 7th EI DIVISION Use this parameter to select the Division you want to edit Intro 14 Main 1 4 Fill Dwn 1 3 Fill Up 153 End 14 BE FROM BAR 1 last measure of the track or pattern Refers to the first measure to be edited By default the FROM value is set to the beginning of the selected track s BEAT 1 number of beats per bar Specifies the beat position The number of selectable beats depends on the selected time signature CPT 1 119 Refers to the starting CPT position CPT is short for Clock Pulse Time the smallest unit used by the E 60 E 50 There are 120 CPTs to every
241. e see p 125 Note REC TYPE can only be changed for the Keyboard parts UP1 UP2 LWR MBS and the MI part 5 See step 7 and following on page 125 for what to do now Note Select a track that either contains no data or whose data may be overwritten Replace If you select REC MODE Mix the new data are added to the data already present on the selected track 6 Press the button or play the first notes if you selected COUNT IN Wait Note Note The PLAY STOP function can also be assigned to the D Beam controller E 60 or an optional footswitch see Start Stop Song on p 53 Play Stop on p 55 7 Play the new part 8 Press the RECORDER button to stop recording Saving your song The 16 track sequencer uses a special portion of the E 60 E 50 s RAM memory where all editing takes place To ensure that you do not forget to save your song after recording and or editing it you are given the opportunity to do so upon leaving the 16 track Sequencer page by pressing the button SWEETPOT meas 0030 2 Song has been changed Do you wish to save to disk DE JAZZ GT sera sd DE i CONVERTER lies ER LE EE 14 d CLEAN GT EE da 16 Piano 1 im Note The Song RAM memory is erased when you switch off your E 60 E 50 T23 1 Note If you use the 16 track sequencer to edit a song that already contains Cover modifications the Cover settings are ignored and erased when
242. e 38 E ee E 63 OE ee Re Ee 169 Create EERS see OE REDE EE 146 173 Event Note ie EER RE EE 146 173 CUSTOM 2 oe th 70 CUSTOMIZE RR EER AIR IR AA 38 LUPE EE EE ED De EE 53 SU ie ARE EE EE 53 DE oi EE EE 80 Oud BOE ooo ss EE 105 106 EED a EE DEER AK kn oe 52 D D Beam ED habhab 51 Et eee 196 D Modulation 000005 53 Damier ees EE ss 54 189 bie EE ie 186 EE ae DEPT 184 e 132 133 139 165 169 UH dIE daad sed EE es 37 Database SEE eee eee 73 DEE REDE RE RR 138 168 DER ae ee 79 105 NA eae AE KI 168 172 Delay aa 83 86 107 EE EE EE EG 106 211 E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Index NG GARA 129 Disk amp Media a 179 Last Note 00 eee eee 36 112 NEL ae oet AAS ER DOSEER 109 Names cece eee eee 44 129 Play USt AE EE N EE 119 SEQUENCE EE eee 132 SONG HINGED 42 2 2x axe EE EE Ee 112 SEE ES EEN AA EE 75 Style COMPOSEF ee 165 User ie GERT EE EE Ete 96 ke N EE ET TT 20 Depth ME ER N 106 DESUNSLUON AE 159 Digital Bass Enhancer 87 Disk eel ARE EE PEE 175 DEEP RR ien 70 72 159 DE siek RE DE GE 19 Dissolve TIME EERDER aa aa hana 195 DIVISION ad n EE SERE As 150 154 156 KILO PP PSP C EY 51 52 POULIN EE AA 33 DON aT 90 DrUM ee eee eee ee 38 60 Of Dass APAPAP 38 Instrument SS 106 Mute sos ss ss EE aaaea 106 Drum SE ii 160 Note FitMe sos soe ES Ie 161 Sound Edit 0 02 106 RUNG is so oe ee ESE eae de 28 Drums t
243. e E 60 E 50 creates no List file The newly acquired User Programs can be selected via the Finder though or assigned to one of the 144 memory slots of the currently active List Press the button to return to the main page E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Archiving data using a computer USB 16 Archiving data using a computer USB The E 60 E 50 s USB port can be used for exchanging files with a computer or for MIDI communication Here we will look at the archiving functions which are often called Data Storage See page 187 for the MIDI functions You can transfer the following file types from the inter nal memory or a memory card to your computer and vice versa Styles User Programs Songs SMF files txt files These files reside in dedicated folders and should only be put there See step 12 below The following computers and operating systems are Supported IBM PC compatible Windows 98SE Me 2000 XP or later Apple MacOS 9 04 or later Note The E 60 E 50 does not handle or generate audio files Note The USB cable needed for this connection is optional 1 Disconnect the E 60 E 50 s USB port from your computer if it is connected 2 For Windows XP If a message asks you to restart your computer do as directed 3 Switch on the E 60 E 50 4 Use a USB cable to connect the E 60 E 50 to your computer Rd USB OUT MIDI IN io To the a USB port of your computer p Note
244. e E 60 E 50 s tone generator continues to enhance the songs you play back this parameter only affects MIDI transmission to external instruments BI RX SYSEX Use this parameter to specify whether button icon on or not off the E 60 E 50 should receive SysEx messages from other devices See also the explanation above E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Roland MIDI Sets saa MIDI Sets MIDI Sets are memories for MIDI settings The E 60 E 50 provides eight MIDI Set memories that you can use to change your MIDI configuration You can link a MIDI Set to a User Program page 94 and specify which MIDI Set should be loaded when you switch on the E 60 E 50 see below If you need to reset some or all MIDI parameters to their default values select and or rather than a MIDI Set Writing a MIDI Set 1 If you are still on one of the EDIT MIDI pages press the field If not press the button and the field on the MENU display page EASY SETTING SELECT OUTPUT i MODE E Bag aa ma 2 Press the field it lights 3 Press the field that corresponds to the MIDI Set where you wish to save your MIDI settings 1 8 The display returns to the MIDI page 4 Press the button to return to the main page Using MIDI Sets 1 Press the button The display changes to w curan LINK MODE S si ZA ArnANGER Ta s STYLE MIDI SETTING COMPOSER FT FUNCTION sd n egus DATA EFrocron CONTROL
245. e EE 32 Guitar Mode UPUONS ses ase EE EE 32 Working with the Music Assistant 33 If the desired registration is not displayed 33 Je KENA 33 Using the TINIE sees ae EE asa Ee ee ed 34 Playing back songs Standard MIDI Files 35 Quick location of the song you need 35 Starting playback nanunua nnana rrara 36 Other practical playback functions 36 Using the SONG Cover function es ss esse ee de 38 MINUS oo ER RE OE EE N 38 Displaying Lyrics and chord information 39 Displaying sels EO OE EEN 39 Recording your MUSIC 41 Recording With Style backing s napagawa arawan rah 41 Listening to your SOng n n nuanua annann eee ees 41 Recording without accompaniment sessies sees 42 Adding more parts EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE 42 Saving VOUr SONG EO Oe AA About the Keyboard modes 45 Arranger Piano Organ and Guitar modes 45 Split and Whole MODES osse pes aap EE ER HERE 46 Using the SPLIT Keyboard Mode 46 Using WHOLE mode a 47 Switching parts on and ON osse SS AKAAY a 47 Using the performance functions 48 Pitch Bend and Modulation 48 HE eo del AE EE N 48 Elle Th ee EE EE AA 49 OCA evan niu oe Gee be ee cae ER re ean sees 49 Key Touch velocity sensitivity 50 Master URE ss sie vad Ed ER EE EA 51 Using the D Beam Controller E 60
246. e Index function After performing step 2 press the field in the upper left corner The display changes to SONG Iris 9 EDIT 1 RENAME Ph COPY ET Latin up tempo Regional 5 Press one of the displayed field names to narrow down your search to songs that belong to the selected category Index The display now returns to the page shown under step 1 above This time however only the songs belonging to the selected Index are displayed 6 Continue with step 3 to select the song you want to listen to Note Press the field to display all songs in the selected memory W Using Play amp Search If you only know the melody of the desired song press the field under step 1 g E TIETE Le ee Ee 6 35 gt E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Quick Start e Press the PLAY amp SEARCH field so IG FIIF ALPH 4 OR PLAY amp BER S di SEEM MMP SEARCH Play the melody on the keyboard EE e As indicated in the display play the main theme on the keyboard You can play in any key and the rhythm doesn t have to be perfect either this function just looks for intervals If you played a wrong note press DELETE LAST NOTE To enter the entire line again press to erase the previously entered notes then play the phrase again After entering the melody press the field The display now returns to step 1 on page 35 and shows the
247. e Music Style you select ACC1 ACCE6 These are the melodic accompaniment parts Depending on the Music Style you selected only some of them actually play something which can be anything from a piano line a guitar line an organ line etc to synthesizer chords Not all ACC parts play chords though The ABS and ACC1 6 parts rely on the chord or note information you play in the chord recognition area page 66 i e the keyboard zone you assign to the Arranger Playback functions Style Control Starting a Music Style Music Styles can be started in several ways 1 Press the EASY SETTING button its indicator lights e Press the button it flashes to start the Arranger right away ae SI Note See Song Arranger Start Priority on p 196 if Arranger playback does not start If you start the Arranger without playing a chord in the chord recognition area beforehand you will only hear the drums of the selected Style In most cases however the E 60 E 50 has already memorized a chord so that you will hear the full accompaniment or Stop playback of the current Style see below press the button so that it lights one of the VARI ATION 1 4 buttons to select the complexity of the introduction and then the button This starts Style playback with a musical introduction GO The length of the Intro depends on the Style you select At the end of the Intro the Arranger switches to the pattern you
248. e amount of the delay sound that s fed back into the effect Negative settings invert the phase Delay HF Damp 200 8000Hz Bypass Adjusts the fre quency above which sound fed back to the effect is filtered out If you don t want to filter out any high frequencies set this parameter to BYPASS Delay Level Left 0 127 Adjust the volume of the left delay sound Delay Level Right 0 127 Adjust the volume of the right delay sound Delay Level Center 0 127 Adjust the volume of the center delay sound FO Low Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the low range FO High Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the high range Balance D100 0W D50 50W DO 100W Volume bal ance between the direct D and the effect sound W Level 0 127 Output level E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Roland Appendix 21 4 Tap Delay Delay with four repetition lines Delay 1 4 200 1000ms note Adjusts the time until the delay is heard Delay Level 1 4 0 127 Output level of the delay sound Delay Feedback 98 0 98 Adjusts the amount of the delay sound that s fed back into the effect Negative settings invert the phase Delay HF Damp 200 8000Hz Bypass Adjusts the fre quency above which sound fed back to the effect is filtered out If you don t want to filter out any high frequencies set this parameter to BYPASS Balance D100 0W D50 50W DO 100W Volume bal ance between the direct D and the effec
249. e disk If the label comes loose while the disk Is in the drive it may be difficult to remove the disk e Put the disk back into its case for storage amon Backup If the power to this unit is not switched on for an extended period of time the contents of memory will be lost and the unit will revert to its factory defaults To avoid the loss of important data that has been placed in memory a backup of your data should be periodically created see p 184 Before using memory cards Some data cards are equipped with a PROTECT switch which when turned on protects your data from accidental erasure The E 60 E 50 also has such a switch It is recommended that the switch be kept at the ON position and switched to OFF only at the times you wish to write new data onto the card crit _ I a Ss ER LI ET EO On 7 Off This unit s memory card slot accepts CompactFlash and Smart Media 3 3V memory cards Microdrive storage media are com patible You need a commercially available adapter plug for SmartMedia cards Carefully insert the memory Card all the way in until it is firmly in place Never touch the terminals of the memory card Also avoid getting the terminals dirty CompactFlash and SmartMedia 3 3V cards are constructed using precision components Handle the cards carefully paying particu lar note to the following e To prevent damage to the cards from static electricity be sure to disch
250. e for the file See page 177 Note The E 60 E 50 supports both upper and lower case let ters for file names So choose whichever is more convenient or clear 5 Press the field to save the data W Save Style 1 2 3 4 _ Nam This page allows you to save the Style that is cur rently in the E 60 E 50 s RAM memory Even if it is not a newly recorded Style there are other reasons why you may want to use this function to save the changes you made using the MAKEUP TOOLS and or COVER function see page 102 and fol lowing to save a Style under a different name or to a differ ent media Press the button Press the field followed by the field OC Nou sooie os ETIE PIE ce 7 Select the target media INTERNAL MEMORY disk or memory card Select Or if you wish to take advantage of the Style Finder function page 73 Enter the name for the file See page 177 Note The E 60 E 50 supports both upper and lower case let ters for file names So choose whichever is more convenient or clear 5 Press the field to save the data T S m Rename functions Use the Rename functions to change the name of the selected User Program Set Style Song or MIDI Set Styles and Songs can also be renamed via their respec tive Finder User Program Sets and MIDI Set sets however can only be renamed here WARNING Changing the name of a song or St
251. e from when the reverb is heard until it disappears FO Low Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the low range FO High Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the high range Balance D100 0W D50 50W DO 100W Volume bal ance between the direct D and the effect sound W Level 0 127 Output level 27 OD Chorus This effect connects an Overdrive and a Chorus in series Series means that the output signal of the first effect is also processed by the second Overdrive Drive 0 127 Degree of distortion Also changes the volume Overdrive Panpot L64 0 63R Stereo location of the overdrive sound Chorus Pre Delay 0 0 100 Oms Adjusts the delay between the incoming direct signal and the moment when the chorus starts working Chorus Rate 0 05 10 0Hz Frequency i e modulation speed Chorus Depth 0 127 Modulation intensity Chorus Balance D100 0W D50 50W DO 100W Vol ume balance between the direct sound D and the chorus sound W Level 0 127 Output level 28 OD Hanger This effect connects an Overdrive and a Hanger in series Overdrive Drive 0 127 Degree of distortion Also changes the volume Overdrive Panpot L64 0 63R Stereo location of the overdrive sound Flanger Pre Delay 0 0 100 0ms Adjusts the delay time from when the direct sound begins until the flanger sound is heard Flanger Rate 0 05 10 0Hz Frequency i e modulation speed Flanger Depth 0 12
252. e is preserved while the list can must be pro grammed again 117 E 60 E 50 Music Workstation More refined song functions Using Play Lists Here s how Play Lists can be used for your perfor mances e f necessary insert the memory card that contains the list and songs you need into the slot 1 Press the button You can release it as soon as the display looks more or less as follows PLAY LIST pu EXTERNAL FP INTERNAL Saturday Live 2 Use the scrollbar the dial or the DECJ INC buttons to scroll through the Play Lists if available and necessary 3 Press the field that corresponds to the list you want to use 4 Press the button to return to the main page The indicator now lights to indicate that the Play List function is active 5 Press the button to start playback of your play list At the end of the first song step the next song Is selected automatically if the RECORDER button lights If you stop playback halfway into the song then start it again the next step is played back If the button does not light playback Stops at the end of the current step the next step is loaded but playback needs to be started using the button If you stop playback half way into the song then start it again playback con tinues from the place where you stopped it T13 6 7 The two fields lt lt gt gt I that appear on the main page during list playback
253. e list see the Parameter Reference booklet you will see that most sounds are variations The value 8 for CCOO is probably the most popular one as you would discover if you studied the list of 1596 sounds To change any CCOO value to 8 for example enter CCO0 ALL for FROM and CCOO0 8 for TO To change all occurrences of CCOO value 8 to another value e g 16 enter 8 for FROM and 16 for TO CC32 0 127 ALL This control change is the so called LSB bank select message Select if the cur rent setting must not change 137 E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Using the 16 track sequencer PC 1128 ALL Use this parameter to change the address a k a program change number of a sound e g SHIFT CLOCK from 1 to 2 Select if the current setting must not change MINC DEC These are so called relative changes the positive or nega tive value you set here will be added to or subtracted from the original values of the selected track s Use these fields to increase or decrease existing values for the entire selected track s Volume Expression Panpot Reverb Chorus 127 127 These parameters allow you to add or subtract a given value to from the current Volume Expression SHIFT CLOCK allows you to shift the notes within the Pan Reverb Send or Chorus Send values This may come selected FROM TO range It can be used for two in handy if the real time cha
254. e note range to be modified within the specified FROM TO time range Mi Fine tuning the note range Before setting FROM NOTE and possibly TO NOTE you can decide how you want to use the note indications Depending on the option you choose FROM NOTE may not even be available so that setting it beforehand would be a waste of time EQUAL Only the selected note note name note num ber will change The note can be set using the TO NOTE field NOTE will change OUTSID Only the notes below FROM NOTE and above TO NOTE will change All notes except the one you select will change The note can be set using the TO NOTE field Only notes above the selected one will change The note can be set using the THAN NOTE field Only notes below the selected one will change The note can be set using the THAN NOTE field Only the notes between FROM NOTE and TO See Hne tuning the note range on p 131 for an illustra tion WE RESOLUTION 1 4 1 8 1 8T 1 16 1 16T 1 32 1 32T 1 64 This parameter sets the resolution of the Quantize func tion Be sure to always select the value of the shortest note you recorded Otherwise your part no longer sounds the way you played it because shorter notes are shifted to the wrong positions E STRENGTH 00 0 100 Use this parameter to specify how precise the timing cor rection should be 0 means that the selected RESOLU TION value is not applied 0 correction whil
255. e range It is not displayed when you select EQUAL UNEQUAL HIGHER or LOWER See also Fine tuning the setting range on p 132 for details about the six button icons ETO NOTE 0 C 127 G9 This parameter allows you to set the upper limit of the note range to be modified within the specified FROM TO time range WE EXECUTE Press this field to confirm your settings and edit the data T3 G CHANGE GATE TIME This function allows you to modify the duration of the notes in the selected time FROM TO and note FROM TO NOTE ranges We recommend you only use this function to shorten notes that suddenly seem too long when you assign a different sound to the track in question You cannot view the duration of the notes here which makes editing the data en bloc a little bit hazardous Use the MICRO EDIT envi ronment to change the duration of individual notes Ee ST After selecting a sound with a slow release i e a sound that lingers on after all notes have been released however CHANGE GATE TIME will help you cut the notes down to size and thus avoid undesir able overlaps MTRACK ALL 1 16 Allows vou to select the track you wish to edit You can also select ALL here in which case the operation applies to all tracks FROM BAR 1 last measure of the track or song Refers to the first measure to be edited By default the FROM value is set to the beginning of the selected track s BEAT 1 number o
256. e recording mode Replace Everything you record replaces the data of the selected track This mode is automatically selected when you activate the record function for a track that does not yet contain data If you select a track that already contains data this parameter is set to Mix but could be changed to Replace if you wanted to overwrite the previous version Mix The data you record are added to the existing data of the selected track Specifying the pattern length Every Style pattern must have a set length Setting the MEASURE LENGTH value now will help you avoid a lot of confusion once you start recording The Arranger tends to add blank bars at the end of a track which is usually due to the fact that you stopped recording a little late i e after the last bar you played This means that you often record 5 measures instead of 4 for example If you press START STOP after bar 4 BIO CE your Style looks like this 5 bars AA HI Furthermore in STYLE COMPOSER mode all patterns are looped and played back until you press the button A wrong number of measures 5 rather than 4 for example is very likely to put you off so do take the time to set the pattern length before you start recording 18 Press the field and use the dial or the DEC INC buttons to select the desired length The setting range is 1 136 or more depending on the time signature and Off Select Off
257. e that selecting a CUSTOM memory also overwrites the last Disk User Style you selected 1 If necessary insert the memory card or floppy disk with the desired Music Style into the slot or disk drive 2 On the STYLE page see above press the field OO 6 if P 1 USER a Baby Rock N The display changes to STYLE LIST EXTERNAL GENRE TEMPO INTERNAL MEMORY IDANCE10 INK 2 IBLUES2 IBLUES3 IR amp B2 P rnoes ne GLOEAL 16 2_ 3 Press the EXTERNAL MEMORY or field to select the memory area that contains the desired Style Note It is perfectly possible to use older Styles with the E 60 E 50 They are automatically converted to the new VARI ATION 1 lt 4 system Press the field that contains the name of the Style you want to load 4 _ II 5 If the desired Style is not displayed use to 6 7 select another group of 5 Styles You can also use the dial and the DECJ INC buttons for selecting other pages with dif ferent Music Styles Note The E 60 E 50 contains a powerful search engine for quickly locating the desired Music Style on a card or in the internal memory page 73 It is not available for Styles on floppy disk however The display page does not change when you select a Style This was done to allow you to load another Style Start playing with the newly selected Style The selection of the DISK USER S
258. ease RIT the tempo 5 For Ritardandos that apply to Ending patterns pro ceed as follows e Press the button to start Style play back e Press the button twice in succession dou ble click INTRO STYLE CONTROL VARIATION This selects an Ending pattern and slows down the tempo according to the ACCELER RITARD and CPT settings When the Ending phrase is finished and Arranger playback stops the tempo is reset 6 For Fill Ritardando The FILL RIT function is suitable for ballads It causes the next Fill In to slow down ritardando e Switch on the button STYLE CONTROL VARIATION G9 E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Additional Arranger Style functions e Press the ARRANGER SETTING field followed by the ARRANGER OPTIONS field ARRAIS SIMKE Gis TEMPO CHANGE FILL IN TEMPO E LOCK FILL RITARDANDO FE MIT e Start Arranger playback and press the but ton icon to switch it on e Press the and a VARIATION 1 4 button The E 60 E 50 plays a Fill In The tempo slows down while the fill is being played At the end of the fill the Style returns to the previously set tempo this is called a tempo Press the button icon to switch on the Half Bar function Certain pop songs in 4 4 contain bars that only last two beats The usual place for such a bar is between the first and the second verse Another favorite position for halved bars is at the end of a chorus or the brid
259. ecision you could invert UP2 s response to the expression pedal so that UP1 does not sound when UP2 does and vice versa 6 Press the button to return to the main page E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Roland Scale Tuning Scale Tuning Another useful function is called Scale Tuning It allows you to use oriental Asian and other scales in much the same way as on an oriental keyboard The E 60 E 50 contains three memories where you can store your favorite tunings These are three global memories that apply to all User Programs 1 Press the button E EA EET STYLE 0 roi E EA FR EE DATA EP ruwerio AR Em DA eend BEAM Em Press the field followed by the field TONING NI Co Press a MEMORY 1 MEMORY 3 field to select a Scale Tune memory This will change the pitch of the following notes 50 means that the note in question is tuned a quarter tone down Memory 1 Memory 2 Memory 3 E 50 E 50 C 50 B 50 A 50 F 50 The pitch of the other notes is left unchanged The button icons corresponding to the notes whose pitch is changed light for easy identification You will notice that every note can be selected only once That is because the value you specify applies to all notes of the same name If you change the tuning of the C that value is added to or subtracted from all Cs C1 C2 C3 ete DS E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Using the performan
260. ecording 1 Recording everything at once This is the easy approach you press the but ton you set the E 60 E 50 the way you want it to sound with or without Arranger for example and you start playing Recording each track separately This approach means that you first record a drum part for example then a bass line followed by a plano part etc For this approach you need to select the 16 track Sequencer mode see p 123 It is also possible to combine these two approaches by first recording most of the parts using approach and then adding other or replacing existing parts using approach Let us begin with the easier approach Recording with Style backing In this example you will learn how to record your solo playing and the Arranger s accompaniment 1 2 3 4 Press the button it flashes Note Whenever you press the REC button and start recording see below the song RAM memory is erased Be sure to save the current song data before recording a new song see p 44 Press the EASY SETTING button D Ko PP lob Select a Music Style see p 25 and a sound for your right hand see p 27 You can also press a ONE TOUCH button and select a Style In that case there is no need to select a sound for your right hand in step 3 because that is done automatically See also p 27 Switch on additional Keyboard parts by pressing their PART ON OFF buttons i
261. ected the more detailed recording function the sequencer The display changes to MASTER TRACK ds UAC BASS JS drr Ed D Pinna sj Ga AG Ce 1G PA The bars in the right part of the display indicate the tracks that already contain data 3 Press the RECORDER button The display changes to RE Lier Der De EE f RECORDING SELECT Bn s wan a CHANGE i e CONTROL SYSTEM CHANGE EXCLUSIVE F 4 Press the field and use the dial or the DECJ INC buttons to select the track you want to record to For our example select 11 If necessary press the field and use the dial or the DECJ INC buttons to select LWR 5 Assign the desired sound to the track selected for recording See Selecting sounds for the Keyboard parts on p 27 You can play on the keyboard to check whether the sound matches the mood of the part you wish to record 6 Specify what should be recorded by activating the corresponding RECORDING SELECT button icons 7 For this example switch on NOTE CONTROL CHANGE PROGRAM CHANGE and PITCH BEND See page 126 for an explanation 8 Press the RECORDER button 9 E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Roland Recording your music The sequencer returns to the beginning of the song measure 1 Press the button The sequencer now counts in one measure after which recording starts Note See page 59 for setting the Count In f
262. efore you start editing it see p 107 Editing one or several tracks TRACK EDIT The TRACK EDIT environment of the 16 track Sequencer provides 12 functions Quantize Erase Delete Copy Insert Transpose Change Velo Change Gate Time Merge Global Change Shift Clock and Track XChange There is also a MICRO EDIT environment that allows you to add delete or change individual events See page 143 for details Here s some information that may help you decide whether to use a TRACK EDIT or the MICRO EDIT func tion if you don t need to see the events you want to change choose a TRACK EDIT function If the TRACK 1 E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Using the 16 track sequencer EDIT level does not provide the function you need or If you want to see the notes MIDI messages etc choose the MICRO EDIT environment Here is how to select functions 1 Load the song you wish to edit if it does not yet reside in the E 60 E 50 s Song RAM memory See p 35 2 Press the RECORDER button 3 Save your song before continuing by pressing the field That way you can always return to the original if your changes do not work out as expected See Sav ing your song on p 44 for details On the SAVE SONG page press the field to return to the 16 track Sequencer s main page 4 Press the field in the right column of the display TRACK EDIT a am aa FROM wee 5 Press a field in the top two rows to select
263. egistra tion has been selected yet If you select a registration and then change any of its settings like selecting another sound for example pressing the dial recalls the original Music Assis tant settings You can also use the DATA ENTRY 4 r buttons to select a registration among the ones that are cur rently visible in the display the buttons don t allow you to change pages To save time There are other ways of locating the registration you are after As you see there are three button icons NAME and GENRE e Press the field to sort the Music Assistant entries alphabetically by musical genre This reshuf fles the list TI E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Quick Start e Press the field to sort the Music Assistant entries alphabetically by artist name This reshuffles the list The genre names right column disappear and are replaced by the artists names which are displayed in alphabetical order e Press the field of the registration you want to use e Press the button to start playback of the automatically selected Music Style Using the Finder Yet another way of locating the desired registration goes like this 1 On the Music Assistant page press the field GO 8 oe oe Oe eu on nod Fee cee mar 2 Press registration name artist name or musical genre to specify which entry you want to look for 3 Enter only as many characters as you think are necessary to find the registratio
264. eld to return to the GUITAR MODE page or the button to return to the main page Note All GUITAR MODE settings can be written to a User Pro gram and recalled at a later stage See p 88 E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Roland Working with the Music Assistant Working with the Music Assistant The E 60 E 50 s Music Assistant is also related to the Arranger Style section lt is a collection of registrations for given songs that select the most appropriate Music Style and sounds for the Keyboard parts along with a whole bunch of other settings The E 60 E 50 ships with more than 300 pre pro grammed Music Assistant registrations and also allows you to program new ones 1 Press the button cool ss Sk pi s SET TU MOSIE ASSISTAuI LIST Air On G Alex Ragtime Alfie Song All at One Time All But Myself All My Love All OF Myself All Shaken Up Almost Like Love Aloha Hawaii sereeeeee es Alone Once Again m Als Sterrenhemel T 2 If the name of the registration you want to use is already displayed press its field The E 60 E 50 now recalls the settings for this regis tration 3 Press the button to start playback of the automatically selected Style If the desired registration is not displayed e Press the lt gt fields in the display or rotate the dial to scroll through the list Pressing the dial will select the regis tration in the top line This only works if no r
265. elect PIANO to activate PIANO CHORD recognition E es ESE Note Pressing one of these buttons not only selects the desired Keyboard Mode but also sets a series of other parame ters In some cases the parts you may have been using up to that point are suddenly muted Another important aspect is that the split point see below will be set to C4 when you press ARR or ORGAN In ARR mode the keyboard is split into two halves The eft half is used for playing chords that the Arranger uses for transposing the Music Style pat terns in realtime The right half on the other hand can be used for adding a live melody to the Arranger s automatic accompaniment This melody can be played using the Upper1 UP1 part Feel free to add other parts for creating richer sounds See p 47 E 60 EE N EE Arranger control UP1 E 50 EE Arranger control UP1 e The keyboard is divided into two halves with the split point at the C4 Only the UP1 part is active in the right half of the keyboard see page 26 for an explanation of this con cept e ZONE LEFT page 67 e NTELLIGENT chord recognition TYPE page 66 One button here ARR therefore allows you to pre pare the main parameters for working with the auto matic accompaniment called Arranger Except for the addition of the LWR part the EASY SETTING button has the same effect In PIANO mode the Upper1 part UP1 is assigned to the entire keyboard E
266. elete the character indicated by the cursor Press and hold it to clear all characters e Press to insert a blank or the number O e f you forgot to insert a character use or to 5 select the position where the missing character should be inserted Then press Insert followed by the character you wish to insert Note The E 60 E 50 supports both upper and lower case let ters for file names So choose whichever is more convenient or clear Note The E 60 E 50 allows you to use long file names but some windows are relatively short so that only part of the names can be displayed We therefore suggest using short file names maximum 18 characters whenever possible Press the field to save the data Note Saving User Program Sets may take in excess of 10 min utes especially if the target media already contains several sets This is due to the fact that the Database information needs to be updated for User Program Finder use Do not switch off the E 60 E 50 while this operation is in progress E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Roland Saving data Bl Save MIDI Set 1 2 3 4 5 After programming 8 MIDI Sets you may find that you need a few more and that you have to make room for the new MIDI Sets To do so without losing existing MIDI Sets you must save the old set Even if you do not program more than 8 MIDI Sets it is a good idea to make a backup copy of your MIDI Sets This func
267. en listening to what you have just recorded select another metronome mode See Metronome settings on p 59 Playback in Arranger mode Note Save your Style before trying it out with the Arranger If the Style stops unexpectedly during playback in Arranger mode try different chords Chances are that you only programmed the major pattern so that the Arranger selects an empty pattern when you play a minor or seventh chord Remember to set the Mode parameter to M m 7 until you have come to grips with the possibilities of the E 60 E 50 s Arranger That way those three patterns will sound alike but at least you are Sure that the Arranger does not stop when you play a minor or seventh chord TI 53 Using existing Styles Another way of programming Styles is to use parts from other Styles The E 60 E 50 allows you to e Select the desired Style to copy it to the Style RAM memory and edit it e Copy one or all tracks of the selected Division e Copy just a few notes of an existing part e Copy tracks or notes between Divisions This allows you to create new Styles by assembling tracks from different existing Styles Note You cannot copy an AccDrums track to another track AccBass Acc6 Likewise the bass part can only be copied to an ABass track Accomp tracks however can be copied to whichever Accomp track you like Note If the Style RAM memory already contains new data save it before copying The E 60 E 50 has no Und
268. ep 16 on page 155 Saving your Style Make it a habit to save your Styles as frequently as pos sible After all if someone decided to switch off your E 60 E 50 now you would lose everything you have programmed so far 1 Press the field on the STYLE COMPOSER page The display changes to f f Y arve NAME f COUNTRY GENRE Cool Live Band png KIA a7 oe po This page allows you to save the current Style to the internal memory a memory card or a floppy disk Press the EXTERNAL MEMORY or field to select the area where you want to save the Style e Enter the name for the file See page 44 If necessary you can also supply the required COUNTRY and GENRE information for use with the STYLE FINDER function only available if you select the internal memory or a memory card Note The E 60 E 50 supports both upper and lower case let ters for file names Choose whichever is more convenient or clearer 2 Press the field to save the data The E 60 E 50 returns to the STYLE COMPOSER page Recording other tracks and divisions You can now record the second track probably the bass If you d like to do the guided tour again return to page 153 Do not forget to set the key for the bass part see Specifying the key for melodic parts on p 154 Once the first Division is finished you can record other Divisions Use the clone function page 154 to record several patterns in one go Do not
269. ep 4 above press the field a on KANE E ARTIST TE GENRE E id e Use the FINDER SONG NAME ARTIST GENRE and FILE NAME fields to locate the desired file See page 110 Press the fields of all songs you wish to assign to the selected Index category Selected songs are displayed on a light background To remove a song from the selected category press its field so that it turns dark e f necessary use the PAGE fields to go to previ ous or subsequent list pages Note When you change pages new assignments or removals are automatically updated which means that the contents of the selected category changes e Press to return to the SONG LIST page Press to return to the main page Mi Index Copy This function allows you to copy one Index category along with all its song assignments to a another category You could take advantage of this for merg ing two categories to free up one category for new assignments Note There are eight Index categories in all You cannot cre ate additional categories e After performing step 4 above press the field SONS ie e In the left column SOURCE press the field whose assignments you wish to copy to another Index cate gory You can also use the a fields e In the right column DESTINATION press the field of the index category you wish to copy the assignments to You can also use the 4 v fields e Now specify how the song assignments
270. er HOLD PEDAL This function only works if you connect an optional DP 2 DP 6 or BOSS FS 5U footswitch to the HOLD FOOTSWITCH socket The pedal s behavior depends on whether is on or off When is on while is also on pressing the Hold pedal temporarily bypasses the setting and thus causes the guitar notes to have a short decay If AUTO SUSTAIN is off while is on pressing the Hold pedal temporarily produces a normal Hold damper effect Note This Hold function is added to the one that allows you to hold notes played by the active Keyboard parts MBS LWR if they have been assigned to that footswitch see p 54 DOUBLING This section allows you to add a second guitar to the main guitar part That added guitar uses the same sound as your main guitar The purpose of this added guitar is to create the impression that the guitar part is played by two musicians STEREO WIDTH 0 50 This parameter allows you to specify the distance between the two guitars in the ste reo sound field The higher the value the further they are panned to the left and right sides respectively SIRUMM UP These button fields are mutually exclu sive and only apply to the two D notes of the STRUM MING section NOTE ON means that the strum is played when you press one of the two D keys NOTE OFF means that the strum sounds when you release one of the D keys This selection does not apply to the remain ing SIRUMMING keys Press the fi
271. eral songs page 115 E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Roland Playing back songs Standard MIDI Files MPlayer Data Update and Quick Start 1 Press the button sl AS vu ki STYLE O MIDI COMPOSER a ol eeuse DATA ed EE STORAGE Em D BEAM UPPER1 MF LINK FLASHING METRONOME STYLE MELODY INT LINK I 3 Use the button icon next to the field to specify whether on or not off SysEx messages contained in the song you play back are updated while you fast forward rewind or use the MARK JUMP buttons 4 Press the field and use the dial to specify where and how song playback should begin FROM SECOND BAR This function causes playback to start from measure 2 of the selected Standard MIDI File This is often useful because the first bar of most Stan dard MIDI Files contain SysEx and control change data that configure the E 60 E 50 s sound source Playing back that measure on stage may lead to a rather long blank which you probably want to avoid FROM FIRST NOTE This is basically the same as the above except that playback is started on the first note of the selected song OFF Playback starts at the very beginning of the song file and may thus contain a few silent bars SONG ARRANGER START PRIORITY Allows you to specify whether starting a song can or cannot interrupt Arranger playback and vice versa See page 196 for details 37 E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Quick Start Using
272. es thereby turning them into regular song or Style data MAKEUP TOOLS settings are SysEx data only the E 60 E 50 understands This may come in handy for two reasons e To be able to edit the final version of your song or Style with the 16 track Sequencer Style Converter or Style Composer Those functions ignore the cos metic SysEx data you add using the MAKEUP TOOLS e To play back your new song version on another sequencer or your computer The Styles can be read by the E 60 E 50 the E 80 and the G 70 To commit your changes press the FREEZE DATA field on any of the pages discussed so far FAUNDO FREEZE CHANGES DATA gt The display responds with Operation Complete when the data have been converted Careful this operation cannot be undone TOT E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Song and Style Makeup Tools Note This operation is unnecessary for files you only want to use with the E 60 E 50 ME Saving your modified song or Style The changes saved with the following procedure affect the selected song or Style file directly They are not part of the settings that are saved to a User Program 1 If you are happy with your changes and wish to 2 7 _ preserve them press the field The display changes to a Toae HEr MAMA prang mga dera s0 JAY mt O TE If necessary change the song s or Style s name You only need to do thi
273. es Low Pass Filters LPF that allow only frequencies below the specified frequency to pass The frequency where the filter starts cutting off harmonics or overtones is called the Cutoff Frequency The cutoff frequency can change over time controlled by the envelope RESO 64 63 This is a parameter one invariably associates with a synthesizer When the Resonance value is increased the overtones in the area of the cutoff fre quency will be emphasized creating a sound with a strong character Note For some sounds negative RESO settings may pro duce no noticeable change because the Resonance is already set to the minimum value CUTOFF 64 63 This filter parameter allows you to make the selected sound darker or brighter Positive Cut off settings mean that more overtones will be allowed to pass so that the sound becomes brighter The further this value Is set in the negative direction the fewer over tones will be allowed to pass and the sound will become softer darker Characteristics of a low pass filter Setting Frequency Cutoff frequency Note For some sounds positive Cutoff settings will cause no noticeable change because the preprogrammed Cutoff parameter is already set to its maximum value 8 Press the button to return to the main page SO E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Roland Mixing Keyboard parts ER Using the mixer functions amp effects The MIXER environment
274. es that produce a strong mag netic field e g loudspeakers e Install the E 60 E 50 on a solid level surface e Do not move the unit or subject it to vibration while the drive is operating Do not expose the E 60 E 50 to direct sunlight place it near devices that radiate heat leave it inside an enclosed vehicle or otherwise subject it to temperature extremes Excessive heat can deform or discolor the E 60 E 50 To avoid possible breakdown do not use the E 60 E 50 in a wet area Such as an area exposed to rain or other moisture Do not allow objects to remain on the keyboard This can be the cause of malfunction such as keys ceasing to produce sound Maintenance For everyday cleaning wipe the E 60 E 50 with a soft dry cloth or one that has been slightly dampened with water To remove stub born dirt use a mild non abrasive detergent Afterwards be sure to wipe the instrument thoroughly with a soft dry cloth Never use benzene thinner alcohol or solvents of any kind to avoid the possibility of discoloration and or deformation Repairs and data Please be aware that all data contained in the instrument s mem ory may be lost when it is sent for repairs In certain cases such as when circuitry related to memory itself is out of order we regret that it may not be possible to restore the data Roland assumes no liability concerning such loss of data Additional precautions Please be aware that the memory contents
275. ess the field to overwrite the file This replaces the song in question with the new version e Press the field to return to the SAVE SONG page change the name then press again The Operation Successful message confirms the end of the operation 21 Press the button to return to the main page T 2 2 You can also use the above procedure to resynchro nize lyrics already contained in the song file if you feel the synchronization isn t perfect See step 4 and following on page 120 Exporting Lyrics data as text file Here s what you need to do to export the Lyrics data contained in a Standard MIDI File as text data This may be useful for editing or printing the lyrics using your computer Note This only works if the Standard MIDI File contains lyrics data 1 Load the song whose Lyrics data you want to export as text file See Playing back songs Standard MIDI Files on p 35 for details about selecting songs 2 Press the button LYRICS amp SCORE If the display is blank at this point the selected song doesn t contain Lyrics data It is therefore impossible to export it as text Press the field followed by the field The display changes to oe Rar Oie THT Sat NAME Gs ET EE CTM 1 xa lobe fluer 3 ol Aa a Baa 3 _ 4 Name the text file This is only necessary if you do not agree with the suggested name i e the one of the song in question See
276. et also contains all GLOBAL parameters see the list in the Parameter Reference booklet So be sure to save the current settings before loading a User Program Set see Save User Program Set Press the field to load the data i 7G Mi Load MIDI Set This is where you can load MIDI Set Sets i e groups of 8 MIDI Sets that overwrite the contents of the internal MIDI Set memories 1 Press the button 2 Press the field followed by the field 3 Select the source media INTERNAL MEMORY EXTERNAL MEMORY memory card or FLOPPY disk 4 Press the field of the MIDI Set whose data you wish to load If the desired name is not displayed use the scroll bar to the right of the list if available to scroll further down Note This function always replaces the contents of all 8 inter nal MIDI Set memories 5 Press the field to load the data Note The E 60 E 50 does not support MIDI Sets of other Roland instruments Saving data Note When saving files to floppy disk whose capacity is too small for the data you wish to save the E 60 E 50 will display a DISK ERROR message That does not necessarily mean that the disk is damaged Important remark If you select the media that contains the original ver sion of the file you are about to save the following message is displayed SAVE SONG A file of this name already exists Overwrite e Press the field to overwrite the
277. eters allow you to specify the positions measure beat clock of the track excerpt you want to change Example to change measures 1 4 of the selected track enter the following values FROM BAR 0001 TO BAR 0005 BEAT 01 BEAT 01 CPT 000 CPT 000 7 Specify what you want to change and how it should change press one of the parameter fields to the right of the FROM TO section and use the dial or the DECJ INC buttons 8 Confirm the operation by pressing the EXECUTE field 9 Save your Style E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Roland Style Track Edit functions QUANTIZE FROM ooi or looo TO oos or loos Use this function if you chose not to quantize your music during recording and now realize that the tim ing is not quite what you expected it to be If only certain notes in a given time range need to be quan tized you should narrow down the edit range using the FROM TO parameters MTRACK ADrums Acc6 ALL Allows you to select the track you wish to edit You can also select ALL here in which case the operation applies to all tracks N MODE Allows you to select the Mode to be edited Major minor or 7th BI DIVISION Use this parameter to select the Division you want to edit Intro 1 4 Main 154 Fill Dwn 153 Fill Up 153 End 154 FROM BAR 1 last measure of the track or pattern Refers to the first measure to be edited By default the FROM value is set to the
278. f beats per bar Specifies the beat position The number of available beats depends on the time signature in the selected area CPT 1 119 Refers to the starting CPT position CPT is short for Clock Pulse Time the smallest unit used by the E 60 E 50 There are 120 CPTs to every beat of a 4 4 bar Change this setting only if your edit operation Should start after the selected beat WTO By default the TO position is set to the last event of the selected track or the last event of the longest track when you select ALL BAR 1 last measure of the track or song This is where you specify the bar position of the last measure to be edited BEAT 1 number of beats per bar Specifies the beat position The number of available beats depends on the time signature in the selected area CPT 1 119 Refers to the last clock that should be affected by the edit operation Change this setting only If your edit operation should not end exactly on the selected beat W BIAS CPT 4800 4800 This parameter sets the amount by which the duration or gate time of the selected notes is to change The shortest possible GATE TIME value is 1 used for all drum notes so that selecting 1000 for notes with a GATE TIME value of 1 in the specified time range still leaves you with the same value BI MAGNIFY 0 200 Use this parameter rather than BIAS to produce propor tional changes to the affected GATE TIME
279. f of the keyboard See p 66 for details Selecting other Style divisions You can professionalize your performance with the Arranger by selecting different accompaniment pat terns Here s a quick overview of how the E 60 E 50 s Music Styles are structured MAIN VARIATION The simplest of the four basic accom paniment patterns This pattern is ideal for the first verse of a song MAIN VARIATION A slightly more complex pattern Con Sider using it for the second and third verses MAIN VARIATION This pattern could be used for the first chorus es MAIN VARIATION This is the most complex accompani ment that could be used for the final choruses and or the bridge The numeric button you press flashes until the new pattern is used after which the button lights steadily E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Roland Selecting other Style divisions You can use fill ins transitions to go from one MAIN VARIATION pattern to the next by switching on the button before pressing another or the lighting MAIN VARIATION 1 4 button STYLE CONTROL INTRO END RIT SYNC VARIATION LIEILIL The fill in that is played between the current and the next VARIATION pattern depends on where you come from Each transition from one VARIATION pattern to another e g from 1 to 2 is different from the others from 2 to 3 from 3 to 4 and from 4 to 1 There are three Fill Ins for the upward direction Up and
280. f you want to double your melody using one or several instruments Note Rather than performing the above steps you could recall a User Program with the desired settings page 89 If you want to start your song with an introduc tion press the button and a VARIATION button 1 4 E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Roland Recording your music 5 Press the button to start recording PUSIO sd ed Me ae ie IE UA The Recorder now counts in one measure after which Arranger playback and recording start Note See page 59 for setting the Count In function 6 Play the Arranger chords with your left hand and the melody with your right Note You can also use the E 60 E 50 s performance functions for your melody playing See page 48 for details 7 To stop recording do one of the following e Press the and a VARIATION 1 4 button The Arranger will play an ending phrase When it is finished Arranger playback and recording stop e Press the button This will stop Arranger playback and recording e Press the button This will stop Arranger playback and recording Listening to your song You probably want to listen to your song now If you like it be sure to save it see Saving your song on p 44 8 Press the RECORDER button This causes the Recorder to return to the beginning of your new song 9 Press the button to start playback Note See Song Arranger Start Priority on p 196
281. facturers Furthermore MIDI allows you to connect your E 60 E 50 to a computer or hardware sequencer You can also use the USB port for MIDI applications Connect your E 60 E 50 as shown below The E 60 E 50 receives data External MIDI instrument computer E 60 E 50 4 MIDI communication via the USB port is also possible MIDI can simultaneously transmit and receive messages T on 16 channels so that up to 16 instruments can be The how to s controlled Nowadays most instruments like your Accessing the MIDI functions E 60 E 50 are multitimbral which means that they Do the following to gain access to the MIDI functions can play several parts simultaneously with different 1 Press the button sounds The display changes to Note All E 60 E 50 parts are set to receive MIDI messages If they do not seem to respond to the messages you send from the external controller check the MIDI connections and the channel settings on the E 60 E 50 The transmit and receive channels of the Keyboard spea BES errects ZS vrum arts are set as follows i ESSELEN Keyboard part Recorder track USB DATA UP2 6 LWR 11 CO MBS i yo 2 Press the field o MELOOYINT OB EE EE EASY SETTING SELECT OUTPUT MODE Keyboard amp Style Parts MIDI BO Tr om Local Off 3 Press the OUTPUT or field to specify which socket s to use for MIDI applications The MIDI and USB options are mutually exclus
282. forget to record the Fills Intros and Endings to complete your Style There are two groups of three fills Up 1 3 and Dwn 1 lt 3 Up fills are used when you switch on the button and then press a VARIATION button of a higher number transition from to 2 for example Dwn fills are used when you switch on the button and then press a VARIATION but ton of a lower number Intros are usually used at the beginning of a song and End patterns provide professional closing sections Note The ABass track is monophonic You can only record sin gle note patterns E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Roland Auditioning your Style and adding more tracks Muting tracks while recording others After programming a few tracks you may find that cer tain parts tend to confuse you That is why the E 60 E 50 allows you to mute tracks that you do not want to hear during recording 1 On the STYLE COMPOSER page which should be displayed now press the field and the lines of the Style tracks you don t want to hear Such tracks are flagged with an M SLES aoj MAar 2 2 4 4 2 Press the field again to switch off the func tion of the same name Note This mute setting only applies to the STYLE COMPOSER page During normal Arranger playback all tracks that contain data are played back Use the ERASE function to remove parts that should not appear in your accompaniments see p 164 BI Solo If you need to listen to a tra
283. functions Like many other functions on the E 60 E 50 the Recorder interacts with other sections you can link a song to each User Program you can cause any Stan dard MIDI File to be transposed automatically to a range that allows you to sing with ease the chords of the songs you play back are recognized automatically and displayed etc Finder functions for songs Music Styles and User Programs Another highlight of the E 60 E 50 is the fact that you can work with an almost unlimited number of songs Music Styles and User Programs in the internal mem ory on memory card or floppy disk Though there are still factory Music Styles you can also work with CUS TOM links to accompaniments in the internal memory or on memory card and even select such external Styles on the fly The same high speed access system is available for Standard MIDI Files songs and User Pro grams Thanks to the clever Finder databases the difference between what s internal and what resides in an exter nal memory has become almost imperceptible Play List function With the E 60 E 50 s Play List function you can pro gram set lists for your performances The advantage of such song chains is that you won t have to look for the desired songs on stage Furthermore you can already prepare the next song while the current one is still running NEXT SONG func tion D Beam controller E 60 The E 60 has the acclaimed D Beam Controller
284. ge Pressing this button icon does not change Style playback right away Only when a Fill In starts will the Half Bar function be activated and play half the number of beats of the fill you selected 7 Press the button to return to the main page 7 O Working with external Styles Using the CUSTOM memories The E 60 E 50 provides 10 memories per family i e 80 in all that refer to Styles in the internal memory INTERNAL MEMORY or on a memory card EXTER NAL MEMORY These memories behave exactly like the factory memories In the case of a memory card however they only work if the card in question has been inserted into the PCMCIA slot Thanks to the E 60 E 50 s powerful soft ware loading a CUSTOM Style is as swift as working with the factory Styles The Style referenced by the CUSTOM memory you select is automatically loaded and copied to the Disk User memory see also p 72 This is a RAM memory whose contents are erased when you switch off the E 60 E 50 and overwritten when you select another CUSTOM memory or use the Disk User function Here s in a nutshell what happens when you select a CUSTOM memory Even though the drawing may sug gest that this takes quite some time the E 60 E 50 per forms these steps in a split second PAGE 1 cusyom You select a CUSTOM memory Mysic Style DATA The E 60 E 50 looks up th e ooks up the Card name of the referenced Style The data are
285. ge 75 N Using the Index function The highest hierarchical level of the Style Finder database is called Index All search operations apply to the selected Index and therefore not necessarily to all files in the internal memory or on a memory card e After performing step 2 press the field in the upper left corner BALE jy ives EET Rename Fi EDIT Ez COPY EZ Listening Latin My Favorite e Either press the field that corresponds to the desired Style category or if you re not sure which category the Style belongs to press ALL e Now return to the previous page by pressing BACK The display returns to the page shown under step 1 above This time however only the Styles belonging to the selected Index are displayed Continue with step 3 to select the Style you want to USE TS E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Additional Arranger Style functions Searching for Music Styles The powerful part starts as soon as you press the FINDER field G 8 EA EA EFFE Decide what you want to look for e Press the field if you want the E 60 E 50 to look for Style names then enter the name or part of it Press the field if you want to look for a country then enter the name or part of it Press the field to locate a specific genre Rock n Roll 16 Beat etc then enter the desired characters Press the field and enter the tempo value you are looking for Note It would be a good
286. ge PROGRAM CHANGE PROGRAM CHANGE First plays a fill STYLE CONTROL STYLE CONTROL VARIATION VARIATION OLB OVB Setting stored in the User Program If AUTO FILL IN doesn t light the change to VARIA TION 3 occurs as soon as you select the User Program in question E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Roland Automatic functions for User Programs Given that it is fairly easy to forget about the maa i f button while playing the E 60 E 50 Automatic functions for User allows you to specify that the Arranger should never Programs play a fill in when a switch to a different Style pattern is triggered by User Programs you select 1 Press the button The display changes to Song Link This function means that by recalling a User Program you also prepare the associated song Such a song must be available when you load the User Program in ques tion for this system to work All you need to do then is hit the button to start playback of that song Your E 60 E 50 only memorizes the song name If at the time you recall such a User Program that song is ARRANGER 5 ff STYLE EN SETTING not available the display will respond with EET H roor RF DBEAM CONTROLLERS 2 Press the field followed by the field UTILITY Ca ala Ca Y Paro PLAYER FEEDBACK SEE ae ER EET a EE GE o GE FILLY on usen Remove the memory card because the internal mem Er MELODY IN
287. ging a drum track and a melodic track The result may not be what you had in mind Editing the Master Track The E 60 E 50 s sequencer uses one track called MAS TER for each song It is used for recording the time sig nature the tempo as well as general SysEx messages that apply to all song tracks Note You can only edit the MASTER track of songs that already exist so be sure to record or load a song beforehand 1 If necessary select a different song This is not necessary if you want to edit the song you have Just recorded or played back See Working with the Song Finder on p 110 or page 35 for how to load a song 2 Press the button MBEB d PUPIOt I The display changes to EEY L1 Ld VINTAGEEPI 2 d PickeD BASS SASS DNA ERAS ETA AAS Pe AE SIM ANETTE ad d SOPRANO EXP ee E A ae MASTER A TRACK d 9 TIE E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Using the 16 track sequencer 3 Press the field in the right col umn SLRS ETIESE SUT i Tempo Change b CREATE 4 EVENT J 01 000 Beat Change 4 01 020 Sys Ex FO 7E 7F 09 01 F7 01 031 Sys Ex FO H 10 4212 40 00 7F 00 41 F7 Erase X 01 037 Sys Ex FO 41 10 42 12 40 01 38 06 01 F7 EVERT 01 043 Sys Ex FO 41 10 42 12 40 01 33 5432 F7 0 Eien GA 0 lt 0 01 050 Sys Ex FO H 10 42 12 40 01 34 5431 F7 01 056 Sys Ex FO H 10 42 12 40 01 00 20 28 01 099 Sys Ex FO H 10 42 12 40 01 00 20 28
288. gnize your song oO Oe es aa Doe snes Ors 3 Press the button icon 4 Enter the name e Move the cursor to the desired position using and gt e Enter the character for that position using the alpha numeric keypad In many instances you will have to press the desired field several times to select the desired character Use the field to alternate between capitals and small letters Press the field to delete the character indi cated by the cursor Press and hold it to clear all characters e Press to insert a space Press to insert a character at the current posi tion All characters behind this position move one position further to the right 5 Press the field and enter the file name See p 73 for details Here you can enter 18 charac ters All characters will be capitals 6 If you want to add more Finder information press the and fields and enter the desired characters See Working with the Song Finder on p 110 for details about the Song Finder Note These two indications are not available for files you save to floppy disk Press the field to save your song The display tells you that the data are being saved after which it returns to the SAVE SONG page Press the or the RECORDER button to return to the main page _ _ E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Roland Editing 16 track songs Editing 16 track songs Easy editing and useful fu
289. h its proper ventilation e This unit for use only with Roland keyboard stand KS 12 Use with other stands may result in instability and cause possible injury gt e Always grasp only the plug on the power supply cord when plugging into or unplugging from an outlet or this unit e Try to prevent cords and cables from becoming entan gled Also all cords and cables should be placed out of the reach of children gt e Never climb on top of nor place heavy objects on the S unit e Never handle the adapter or its plugs with wet hands t when plugging into or unplugging from an outlet or this W unit e fyou need to move the instrument take note of the pre cautions listed below Make sure to have a firm grip to protect yourself from injury and the instrument from damage e Disconnect the power cord e Disconnect all cords coming from external devices e Remove the music stand e Before cleaning the unit turn off the power and unplug the power cord from the outlet e Whenever you suspect the possibility of lightning in your area disconnect the power cord from the outlet e Should you remove screws make sure to put them in a safe place out of children s reach so there is no chance of them being swallowed accidentally E 60 E 50 Music Workstation f Contents KA ARE N DEE EE OE OR OE Ee NN 4 Important notes eee eee eee eee 11 Panel descriptions cece eee 13 FIOM ds lie AR
290. he N that it is level and sure to remain stable Never place it on nearest Roland Service Center or an authorized Roland stands that could wobble or on inclined surfaces distributor as listed on the Information page when EE AA e The adapter s cord or the plug has been damaged or e The E 60 E 50 s adapter should only be connected to a e Objects have fallen into or liquid has been spilled onto power supply of the type described in the operating the E 60 E 50 or instructions or as marked on the adapter s label e The unit has been exposed to rain or otherwise has KAO AA become wet or e The unit does not appear to operate normally or exhibits a marked change in performance E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Roland Features e Do not force the adapter to share an outlet with an unreasonable number of other devices Be especially S careful when using extension cords the total power used by all devices you have connected to the extension cord s outlet must never exceed the power rating watts amperes for the extension cord Excessive loads can cause the insulation on the cord to heat up and eventu ally melt through N WARNING e Before using the E 60 E 50 in a foreign country consult with your retailer the nearest Roland Service Center or N an authorized Roland distributor as listed on the Infor mation page CAUTION e The E 60 E 50 should be located so that its location or position does not interfere wit
291. he COVER settings yourself see p 102 G3 E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Additional Arranger Style functions W Saved Version The STYLE COVER page contains a field that works as follows There can be three different versions of each Style 1 The original Style without COVER settings This version can be selected by pressing the field on page 1 The same Style that uses one of the COVER presets This version can be saved using the field If you save this version the Style will use the COVER settings whenever you select it using the standard procedure see p 25 or the Style Finder see p 73 A Style saved with the field which you recall and then alter by selecting another COVER preset without saving this version In case 3 the field on the STYLE COVER page temporarily restores the original version with no COVER data To return to version 2 after select ing a different COVER preset press the field Note Saving a Style with a COVER preset affects all User Pro grams that refer to this Style 2 Led 3 Le Freeze Data Press this field to commit your orchestration changes and change them to MIDI messages the Style Composer page 151 can read Changes you don t commit are ignored by the Style Composer Note that freezing data is only necessary if you intend to edit a Style using the Style Composer or to ensure that the settings can no longer be modified by accident Saving a Style with
292. he illustration on page 88 you may remember that each User Program is in fact a separate file You can bundle 144 such files into a User Program Set List whose members can be recalled via the dis play or using the USER PROGRAM DOWN UP but tons on the front panel When you select a memory 1 8 on pages P1 18 the E 60 E 50 therefore loads the settings of the file in question So here s what may happen e f you rename a User Program that is referenced by the currently active Set List the Set List is updated and therefore finds the User Program despite its new name e f you rename a User Program that is referenced by other Set Lists which you didn t load those lists no longer find the User Program you renamed Conse quently when you select the memory in question after loading the Set List nothing happens because that ref erence no longer works e Renaming a User Program that doubles as Music Assis tant entry and therefore has a MA label see below also affects the Music Assistant registration s name which changes accordingly e Press the field W Delete This function allows you to delete the selected User Program from the internal memory area or memory card You should use this as sparsely as possible Press the field Deleting a User Program can not be undone which is why the following question is now displayed CA Jusic ASSIST This File will be DELETED from INT Memory
293. he memory with the asterisk once again you restore the original settings of that memory thus cancelling any changes you have made TO Selecting User Programs with The following method is especially useful if you pro grammed two or more User Programs for a song or if the User Program sequence corresponds exactly to the song sequence you are about to play i e settings of the first song or song part in memory 1 on page 1 set tings of the second song or song part in 2 on page 1 etc With or UP you always select the preceding or next User Program 5 Soo EO hs o E Fi IN i Selects the following User Program for example 8 P1 if you selected E 60 P1 before pressing this button Selects the preceding User Program for example 6 P1 if you selected E 60 P1 before press ing this button Note If you press after selecting 8 P18 the E 60 E 50 will call up 1 P1 Likewise if you press after selecting 1 P1 your E 60 E 50 will select 8 P18 and so on Note User Programs can also be selected using an optional footswitch connected to the FOOTSWITCH EXPRESSION socket on the rear panel See User Prg Up User Prg Down on p 56 Working with the User Program Finder Your E 60 E 50 also allows you to load any User Pro gram from the internal memory or a memory card which is as fast as working with a User Program Set List As stated above any registration you write is saved as a sepa
294. he terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED Under no circumstances must either of the above wires be connected to the earth terminal of a three pin plug This product must be disposed of sepa rately at yur local waste recycling centre Do not dispose of in household waste bin R Roland HE Gs SMF 6U MUSIC WORKSTATION CU MUSIC WORKSTATION MEE 7 gt ma Owner s Manual Thank you for purchasing the Roland E 60 E 50 Music Workstation The E 60 E 50 contains all major advantages a Roland instrument can offer perfect accompaniments high class sounds a D Beam controller E 60 professional effects the Cover functions of the acclaimed G 70 a Guitar mode There s simply too much to mention in this intro duction Much care has been taken to facilitate access to all those countless functions which is why the E 60 E 50 comes with a touch screen with 16 gray scale levels and a user interface that walks you through anything you may want to do with your E 60 E 50 To get the most out of the E 60 E 50 and to ensure many years of trouble free service we urge you to read through this Owner s Manual thoroughly To avoid confusion lets agree to use the word button for all keys on the front panel and use key only when refer ring to the E 60 E 50 s keyboard To save space
295. hecking purposes The on off status does not affect the selection that will be converted E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Roland Style Converter Initializing the Style RAM memory The field on this page is usually used only once before converting the first song tracks If you don t use this field the tracks you con vert are added to the Style data already present in the E 60 E 50 s Style RAM area If you need to start from scratch however to create an entirely new Style Press the INITIALIZE STYLE field SHES GOMVEIR TEIR EE The Style RAM area will be EE Are you sure S ETT I NGS TEMPO AND TIME SIGNATURE aan GG BE md gas pi r n Press the and use the dial or the DEC IINC buttons to enter the desired value Press the two TIME SIGNATURE fields one after the other and use the dial or the DEC buttons to enter the desired value Note This is your first and last chance to specify the new Style s time signature The only way you can do this is by ini tializing the Style RAM area So be sure to set this value before your very first conversion The Style s time signature can also be changed using the Style Composer however but that forces you to change modes After setting everything to your liking press the field to initialize the Style RAM area Press to leave this page without initializing the data in RAM This takes you back to the CONVERT page SWEETFOT MERS ET 1
296. her sound for 2ND TONE You can refine Melody Intelligence control by speci fying what velocity value the UP1 notes must have in order to trigger the MELODY INTELL part This allows you to leave the button on at all times while only adding harmonies to your solo play ing during the choruses by hitting the keys a little harder Use the dial or the DEC INC but tons to set the desired Threshold You can also press the dial and enter the value using the on screen numeric pad The Threshold value represents the lowest velocity value between 1 and 127 of the UP1 part that triggers the MELODY INTELL part If you don t need this switching function select Off Press the button to return to the main page Press the button once again to switch off this function Note All MELODY INTELL settings can be written to a User Program and recalled at a later stage See p 88 Linking MELODY INTELL type selection to the Styles Style Melody Intell Link By default the E 60 E 50 automatically loads the MEL ODY INTELL type that is suited for the Styles you select If you don t need this automatic selection here is how to switch it off 1 Press the button Re SETTING PLAYER _ FEEDBACK FLASHING UPPER SONG PLAY QUICK START jee FLA s MF LINK FROM 1st NOTE STYLE MELODY INT LINK NG 3 Press the field to switch it off If it is on the E 60 E 50 assigns a suitable MELODY INTELLIGEN
297. his button lights and the display changes to s ote Q ELITE REUNIE C KEYBOARD ZONE Del OD The switch icon allows you switch the Guitar mode on or off If you selected this page by pressing EASY SETTING GUITAR it is already set to on 2 Press the or switch icon to specify whether you need an electric or an acoustic guitar This is an important choice to make because it deter mines which guitar sounds can be selected electric or acoustic ones 3 Select the desired sound see the upper left corner with the dial or the DEC IINC but tons The possibilities are ELECTRIC ACOUSTIC 01 Jazz Man 01 Nylon 02 OpenHard 1 02 Steel 2 03 Dist FX 03 Steel 3 04 OpenHard 2 04 Steel 4 05 Overd FX 05 Steel 5 06 Strat Clean 06 12 guitars 07 CleanHalf 07 Nyl Steel 08 Distorsion 08 Nyl Steel 2 09 Warm Drv 10 Power 11 Dist Guitar About the chord indications The GUITAR MODE page contains a window that shows you how the chords you play on the keyboard are transformed into guitar chords The small numbers refer to the lowest fret being used An x means that the string in question doesn t sound guitarists sometimes use ony four or three strings for their chords And finally the strings are shown from high E top to low E bottom that s how guitar tablatures are usually printed The guitar neck has therefore been turned upside down E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Rolan
298. ht gray when you press one of the available knobs Use the dial or the DEC INC but tons to enter the desired value You can also press the dial to call up a numeric pad and set the value 0 127 using the on screen numeric buttons The D BEAM part only available on the E 60 refers to the sounds that are generated when you use the D Beam controller after selecting the DJ GEAR SOUND EFX or INSTRUMENT mode scratches sound effects other noises See page 52 for details After setting the levels you can use the BALANCE knob to establish the correct balance between the Keyboard parts and the Recorder Arranger Mixing as you may know entails a lot more than just getting the balances right It also involves speci fying the stereo placement of sounds and the amount of effect that should be applied So here we go Press the PANPOT knob of the keyboard part you wish to set The display page still looks as shown in 2 except that the PANPOT row is now emphasized KEYBOARD PAR Use the dial or the DEC INC but tons to enter the desired value L63 corresponds to hard left 0 to dead center and R63 to hard right Press the REVERB knob of the Keyboard part whose send level you want to change E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Using the mixer functions amp effects 8 Use the dial the DEC INC buttons e Use the knob icons and the dial the or the on screen numeric pad press the dial to spe
299. hts steadily and the Arranger plays a different accompaniment 9 Now try out Variations 3 and 4 STYLE CONTROL Professional transitions Fill In So far we have only used the main accompaniment patterns i e the phrases that are repeated over and over until you stop the Arranger The various variations can be used for verses 1 second verses 2 choruses 3 amp 4 and other song parts Switching between these patterns is a matter of press ing the VARIATION 1 4 buttons Yet that produces instant changes of the accompaniment while real musicians tend to announce new song parts by means of roll in the drums or slightly different accompaniment notes The E 60 E 50 allows you to make such announce ments in the following way 1 Start playback of the MAIN 1 pattern see above 2 Play a chord in the left half of the keyboard 2 E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Quick Start 3 Press the and the numeric button 1 4 STYLE CONTROL 3 Press the button it lights VARIATION C CI 4 Press a VARIATION 1 4 button to select another MAIN pattern The button and the selected VARIATION 1 4 button flash What happens now depends on when you press this button If you press it on any beat before the last of the cur rent bar the Arranger plays a Fill In pattern that lasts until the end of the current bar It then changes to the newly selected pattern at whi
300. ic Assistant entry N Copy This function allows you to copy the selected User Program to another memory area Be sure to select a User Program before pressing the field on the USER PROGRAM LIST page Bear in mind that the COPY page only lists User Programs that match the last search criteria you used for the USER PROGRAM FINDER On the other hand if you only need to copy certain User Programs on memory card or in the internal memory using the FINDER is actually a good idea it helps you to avoid too many presses of the PAGE or gt field On the USER PROGRAM OPTIONS page press the field From Sint MEMORY Mala EEEFLOFFYDISK EP ERT MEMORY EDERT MEMORY 4 Boston 60 o ck Rock N Start by specifying the source that contains the User Program s you wish to copy Press the but ton icon to select the memory area INT MEMORY The E 60 E 50 s internal memory EXT MEMORY The memory card in the E 60 E 50 s PCM CIA slot Do not forget to insert it before selecting this option FLOPPY The floppy disk in the E 60 E 50 s drive Now specify the target you wish to copy the selected User Program s to Press the button icon to select the memory area If the name of the User Program you want to copy Is already displayed press its line You can also select several User Programs To display the next 5 files press the field in the lower right corner You also use the dial and the DECJ INC buttons
301. ic pad CUTOFF Allows you to make the Drum Set all instru ments brighter positive values or darker negative val ues The further this value is set in the negative direc tion the fewer overtones will be allowed to pass and the sound will become softer darker RESO This parameter allows you to add a synthetic character to your Drum Sets choose a positive value or to make it sound more natural Use the field to suppress or add the drum sounds Use the field to suppress or add the percussion sounds If necessary press the field to save your set tings page 108 TOG DRUM INSTR EDIT If the instrument icon to the left of the sound name depicts a drum kit you can also press the field Doing so takes you to the following page where you can make more refined changes for certain instruments of the selected Drum Set SONG MAKEUP TOOLS Fs ioe nb gt EEN JUMP TO ll aay KY This page effectively allows you to reconfigure your Drum Set but you cannot select sounds from another Set Note The names of the drum percussion sounds depend on the currently selected Drum Set The sounds are usually similar in nature however Use PAGE to select the drum instrument you want to replace with a different sound watch the icon that appears to the left of this field Use the dial or the DECJ INC buttons to select another sound The first sounds you can select for a given instrument are
302. idea to enter at least 2 characters possibly even 3 so as to narrow down your search to a work able size Search the database The next step is to decide how the Style Finder should look for files Press the field to search for all entries that start with the characters you entered BEA for example Files that match the specified criteria will be displayed at the top of the list The order depends on the button icon you activated STYLE NAME COUNTRY GENRE or TEMPO Press the Search Only field to have the E 60 E 50 search the selected entry for files that contain the supplied information This would allow you to also locate a file called Raggabeat if you entered BEA See page 44 for how to enter characters The field allows you to delete the character indicated by the cursor Press and hold it to clear all characters To enter numbers without cycling through the char acters first press the field After enter ing the numbers switch it off if you need to enter characters again Press the field to start your search L A Note If no Styles were found the following message appears and no file names are displayed in which case you need to press the STYLE NAME COUNTRY GENRE or TEMPO field to display all entries again an r No Match Found options FOUND O f ad T KE ese ER FT e Press the field of the Style you need and do your thing If the E 60 E 50
303. if playback does not start 10 Press again to stop playback and to return to beginning of the song E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Quick Start 1 2 3 Recording without accompaniment Let us now look at how to start recording without automatic accompaniment You can nevertheless start the Arranger at a later stage after your ad lib introduc tion for example it will play in sync with the song tempo Press the button its indicator flashes ow BLOEI TUT Note Whenever you press the REC e button and start recording see below the song RAM memory is erased Be sure to save the current song data before recording a new song see p 44 Press the EASY SETTING button ae _ To record a guitar part activate the E 60 E 50 s Gui tar mode by pressing the EASY SETTING button Use the buttons the button or if the main page is displayed the dial to set the desired tempo 4 If you want to start Style playback at a later stage select a Style see p 25 Also select a sound for your solo playing see p 27 Note Rather than performing the above steps you could recall a User Program with the desired settings page 89 5 Press the button to start record ing The Recorder now counts in one measure after which recording starts Note See page 59 for setting the Count In function 6 Start playing 7 8 To start Arranger playback
304. if you haven t decided how long the pattern should be In that case the length is set when you stop recording lt is perfectly possible to specify a different length value for each track and Division Note Even one shot patterns are looped in STYLE COMPOSER mode 155 E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Programming Styles Style Composer There is one last thing we need to set 19 Specify how long the count in should be before recording starts by pressing the field and using the dial or the DEC INC buttons to select one of the following options Off No count in Recording starts as soon as you press the button while flashes 1 Meas Recording starts after a 1 bar count in 2 Meas Recording starts after a 2 bar count in Wait Note Recording starts as soon as you play a note on the keyboard There will be no count in Recording 20 Press the button Depending on the count in setting the metronome now counts down then recording starts SALES aoj AoE BEST PEP EN AL EDIT BOUTS R 4 POP1 FEES ABAS J SLIDE f Ka JAZZ 5 Note You can also start recording using an optional foot switch connected to the FOOTSWITCH EXPRESSION jack See Start Stop on p 55 You could start by playing only the bass drum part If you specified the track length see above before recording the Style Composer jumps back to the beginning of the pattern after the set number of measures The second
305. ignments you wish to copy to another Index cate gory You can also use the a fields e n the right column DESTINATION press the field of the index category you wish to copy the assignments to You can also use the 4 v fields e Now specify how the User Program assignments 6 should be copied Press the field if the assignments of the DESTINATION Index should be erased and replaced by the entries of the selected SOURCE field Press if the User Program assignments of the SOURCE category should be added to the assign ments of the DESTINATION Index the DESTINATION category will contain more assignments than before Your command is briefly confirmed by the display Note No User Program files are copied during this operation Press the field to return to the USER PRO GRAM LIST page Note Press the button to return to the main page and cancel your changes E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Roland Music Assistant functions Music Assistant functions The Music Assistant environment provides several functions for editing existing and creating new regis trations Creating new Music Assistant registrations Music Assistant registrations are always based on a User Program They are only references to data that reside elsewhere 1 Press the FINDER button The display changes to USER PROGRAM LIST OF EG sy i _4 Boston Ballroom 60 R k N Rock 2 Select the internal memory by pressi
306. in No Match Found Fes af roer FOUND OD aid Eea GLOBAL 538 OE If the E 60 E 50 did find one or several matches the FOUND number will be smaller than the GLOBAL number Note See also Editing User Program Finder information on p 95 for how to make the Finder functionality even more pow erful Selectively loading User Program settings User Program Hold Your E 60 E 50 allows you to filter certain User Pro gram settings when new User Programs are loaded 1 If you need a different User Program whose set tings should be used first select it 2 Press the button and the field _or Press and hold the button The display changes to _ HOLD SETTING a MIDI Set KBD Mode a 3 Press the fields of the settings you do not want to recall Style Press this field if the settings related to the Arranger Style and Division should be ignored Song Press this field if the song see Song Link on page 93 should no longer be loaded MIDI Set Press this field if the linked MIDI Set page 94 should not be recalled The current MIDI chan nels filter settings etc page 187 therefore remain as they are Tempo Press this field if the tempo setting contained in every User Program should be ignored Tone Press this field to ignore sound selection for the Keyboard parts when a different User Program is recalled Transpose Press this field to ig
307. ing your Music Assistant registration under a new name the operation is confirmed and the E 60 E 50 returns to the MUSIC ASSISTANT LIST page A new User Program is created along with your Music Assistant registration If the Music Assistant database already contains a registration of the name displayed for NAME the fol lowing warning appears means that both the original Music Assistant registration and the underlying User Program are overwritten and replaced with the new versions leaves the entry intact and takes you back to the SAVE page where you can enter a different name Continue with step 2 above Press the button to return to the main page E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Song and Style Makeup Tools 10 Song and Style Makeup Tools Mixing Song or Style parts Though accessible via the MIXER button press it twice To mix the Style parts you need to press the or three times the Style and Song mixers are in fact field on the USER PRO part of the MAKEUP TOOLS functions In this entire GRAM STYLE VOLUME page chapter we never refer to tracks or parts only instru Camia ments The parameters discussed below are indeed related to individual sounds some tracks may use two or more sounds if you think the bass is too loud turn it down If the piano needs more reverb just add it It doesn t get any easier than that Important remark The parameters discussed in this section are prima
308. ins several parameters that are not related to one another the other MIDI pages always concentrate on one aspect OW Bye EES Param PARAMETER OCTAVE TH TRANSPOSE Rk TH VELOCITY RH DATA CHANGES WE PARAMETER OCTAVE TX The OCTAVE IX parameter can be set to Absolute or Relative You may have noticed that if you assign a bass sound to the UP1 2 part in SPLIT mode the notes are transposed to allow you to play meaningful bass lines using the UP1 2 part Relative means that this internal and automatic transposition is translated into MIDI note numbers In Absolute mode however the MIDI note numbers sent to other instruments will be the ones of the keys you actually press PART SWITCH This parameter allows you to specify whether or not a muted part should go on sending MIDI messages Internal A muted part can no longer be played via the E 60 E 50 s keyboard or Arranger Recorder but continues to send MIDI messages Selecting Internal and muting a part thus has the same effect as selecting Local Off see p 189 Int Mid A muted part can no longer be played via the E 60 E 50 s keyboard or Arranger Recorder and no longer sends MIDI messages TRANSPOSE RX On Off Use this parameter to spec ify whether note messages received via MIDI should be transposed MVELOCITY VELO TX VELO RX On 1 127 Your E 60 E 50 is equipped with a velocity sensitive keyboard and a tone generator
309. into the disk drive Never insert any other type of disk Avoid getting paper clips coins or any other foreign objects inside the drive Handling floppy disks e Floppy disks contain a plastic disk with a thin magnetic coating Microscopic precision is required to enable storage of large amounts of data on such a small surface area To preserve their integrity please observe the following when handling floppy disks e Never touch the magnetic medium inside the disk e Do not use or store floppy disks in dirty or dusty areas e Do not subject floppy disks to temperature extremes e g direct sunlight in an enclosed vehicle Recommended temperature range 10 50 C 50 122 F 1 E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Important notes e Do not expose floppy disks to strong magnetic fields such as those generated by loudspeakers e Floppy disks have a WRITE tab which can protect the disk from accidental erasure It is recommended that the tab be kept in the PROTECT position and moved to the WRITE position only when you wish to write new data onto the disk Rear side of the disk WRITE you can save data to the disk Protect tab J PROTECT you cannot save data e Disks containing important performance data for this instru ment should always be locked have their write protect tab slid to the PROTECT position before you insert them into the drive of another device e The identification label should be firmly affixed to th
310. ions Melody Intelligence The Arranger can add a counter melody to the notes you play Those automatic harmonies are based on the chords you play in the chord recognition area This counter melody is played by the MELODY INTELL part There are 18 harmony types to choose from 1 Press the button so that it lights GE y Sood mn eet Ti ET OE AE This adds a harmony to the notes you play Do not forget to switch on the UP1 part page 47 2 To select another harmony type press and hold the button until the following page appears ARRANGER SETTING ARRANGER ARRANGER MELOD Ng one CHORD OPTIONS NTEL TYP TOUCH INTELLIGENCE THRESHOLD VALUE 2ND TONE Traditional Romance 3 Press the field of the desired harmony type TYPE Selecting a Harmony Type also means that the E 60 E 50 automatically assigns a suitable sound to the MELODY INTELL part e g a trumpet and sax sounds for Big Band etc More specifically the following sounds are added to the UP1 part which also plays certain intelligent melody notes Type UP1 sound MEL INT sound DUET Trumpet Brass 1 ORGAN Chorus Or Chorus Or COMBO Clarinet Trombone STRINGS Strings St Slow Str CHOIR St Choir Aahs St Choir Aahs BLOCK Vibraphone w Piano 1w BIG BAND Trumpet St Tenor Sax COUNTRY Jazz Gt JC Chorus Gt TRADITIONAL The Grand X BROADWAY Celesta Theater Org GOSPEL Trem Organ St Choir Aahs ROMANCE Strings Nylon StrGt
311. ip to switch the corresponding instrument on no MUTE message or off a MUTE message appears BI REVERB and CHORUS effect balance The CHORUS and REVERB parameters allow you to specify how strongly the instruments should be pro cessed by the Reverb and or Chorus processors The effects parameters kind of reverb and chorus etc can be set on the COMMON see p 107 and STYLE SONG REVERB 8 CHORUS pages see p 86 BE PANPOT stereo placement Allows you to change the stereo placement of the instrument you are using OP TO MVOLUME Allows you to set the volume of the corresponding instrument Note Please bear in mind that these changes apply to the instruments Tones Drum Set in question not to the entire track they belong to 5 Press the button to return to the main page I Using the Makeup Tools In addition to the Cover functions for songs and Styles see pages 38 and 63 that allow you to change song or Style playback by selecting presets the E 60 E 50 also boasts a mode where you can customize playback of the currently selected song or Style Changes you per form here must be saved if you want them to be per manent Important remark The MAKEUP TOOLS settings are ignored by the E 60 E 50 s 16 track Sequencer or Style Composer unless you burn those settings into your song or Style see Before saving your settings on page 107 Before you begin There are two sets of MAKEUP func
312. ire bar select the beginning of the fol lowing bar Example to copy bars 1 4 specify FROM 1 1 0 TO 5 1 0 9 Press to listen to the selected excerpt 10 Press the field dy hamams kaman bannenan N ames ANNER NESIESIESSIE SIE SIE N INTO Style Cool Live Band Qc N COPY MODE Copying can be carried out in one of two modes Replace The data in the selected range of the source track overwrite the destination track Mix The data in the selected range of the source track are added to the data on the destination track In either case the length of the destination track may change to include all data of the source track Note If the Style RAM memory already contains new data save it before copying The E 60 E 50 has no Undo function Saving a Style before copying allows you to revert to the previ ous version if something goes wrong See Saving your Style on page 157 11 Press the field and use the DEC INC buttons to select Replace or Mix 12 Press the field and use the dial to select the track you wish to copy the data to Note AccDrums data can only be copied to AccDrums tracks Likewise you can only copy ABass data to other ABass tracks If you selected ALL for SOURCE TRACK this parame ter is also set to ALL 1 DY E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Programming Styles Style Composer 13 Repeat this operation with the and fields to select the Mode Major Minor
313. is automatically switched on and assigned to the entire keyboard That is because the E 60 E 50 starts up in EASY SETTING PIANO mode 1 Press the PART ON OFF button if it does not DOE TEF TONE ASSIGN UP2 PART ON OFF 2 Play a few notes on the keyboard The UP1 part s sound Is assigned to the entire key board You could also press the TONE EFFECTS button to add an appropriate effect to the Keyboard parts you are using here UP1 See page 84 for details 3 Use the MASTER knob to set the E 60 E 50 s output volume 4 Use the knob to set the balance between the accompaniment and your live playing ACCOMP KEYBOARD Turn it towards KEYBOARD if the notes you play yourself are too soft Turn it towards ACCOMP if your playing is too loud with respect to the Arranger or song Note See page 81 for how to set the balance between the Keyboard parts 5 Press the PART ON OFF buttons of other Keyboard Parts you want to add by layering them Alternating between sounds The E 60 E 50 allows you to play several sounds simul taneously using the Keyboard parts Other parts are played by the Arranger Styles and are called Style parts And finally there are the Song parts that are controlled by the Recorder function The Keyboard parts can be used together or to quickly alternate between sounds Use the PART ON OFF buttons to select the part s you want to play You can play several sou
314. istant 100 Play UGE AA 116 so Re 128 177 Style a 178 le od oe E EERS SESSE AE 108 User Program Set 177 Saved VERSION EERS EER SS aaua 64 Saving MIDI SOEs RE OE EO Ed 193 Orie TOUCH ii EER EE SEERDE ER RS ag 65 Dede UMNG EET EE EE 57 EE ESE EERS SERE GELE DEE EEEN 39 Se IE EE EE de ee 52 Search Only 34 74 91 111 SELECT MIDE AA EG 188 SEOUENCEF a 43 123 Setup Electric ACOUSLIG a ri ae Re 31 Sil cad ee esse de kha 190 die PP PP ee re eee ee 138 ODE sees se EE EE EE Ee 168 VI EE EE 189 Short PRE RE EE OOR added oe 107 DLY FBK 0 aaa 84 86 107 Single Finger esse ese se de Ee N 65 SOW EERS SEG GES ER EE SE 25 EE OR EE ER rere eee ON 35 44 NG EE amr anes Oe 56 DO Oise PEL EE 104 129 157 16 track eee eee 149 Style parts 82 OUE ee ee NANANG ANAN 35 36 Arranger Start Priority 196 DIES AA APA PAA PAPA 102 CI E 107 Converting TO SIVIC cecccccadcsess 147 SR EE N 38 Data CANON oen EE EE 193 UPC Cl Sas eae EE 102 INNIGE so SO SS RS SS kana 110 Vale AO AA EE 35 HE ee in DIIN AA AAS ADS 93 d5 Link to User Program 93 EES AA 120 VIE reses AE Ed 102 DE ii EA N OE 35 44 DULONG EE OE RR RE N 111 Parts MIDI scu sees RE ER R ERENS 188 POSITION POLE see es SE 190 Kai A E ee eae ee 107 NE soe 44 108 128 177 Scanning RA AN IE SAAN 37 Nana FESES SETETE E TTET 190 Tempo 107 LO 129 GE oe RO EP 48 107 YOUNG oe ROGER DER SNR NA 107 eie dle
315. it is linked to The important thing to remember is that whenever you assign a different sound to the connected Keyboard part the track in question automatically switches to that sound as well 9 To record a guitar part onto the selected track not available for track 10 e Press the display and use the dial to select Acoustic or Electric Select Off if you want to use the track for some thing else e Press the field to jump to the GUITAR MODE page and set up your guitar See page 29 for details e Press the button to return to the REALTIME REC STANDBY page e Skip to step 11 Note The DOUBLING function Guitar Mode Options is not available here because only one track can be recorded at any one time 10 Assign the desired sound to the recording track you selected See Selecting sounds for the Keyboard parts on p 27 You can play on the keyboard to check whether the sound matches the mood of the part you wish to record 11 Specify how the data will be added to the track during recording REC MODE 125 E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Using the 16 track sequencer Select Replace if the track contains data you wish to replace with new data This erases all data of the selected track from the place where you start record ing until the end Replace is selected by default for empty tracks Select Mix to add new notes to the ones already recorded on the selected track This rec
316. itar function from the keyboard and to play the UP2 in the entire right half i e to temporarily deactivate the ARPEGGIO and STRUMM areas After some practice this should allow you to alternate between a guitar and another melodic instrument part 1 Use the PART ON OFF buttons to switch on the part you want to play instead of the Guitar section 2 While the Guitar mode is active switch off the PART ON OFF button KEYBOARD PART LILILEO TONE ASSIGN MBS LWR UP2 UP1 UOL PART ON OFF The EASY SETTING indicator flashes to signal that the Guitar mode is being bypassed Ss the E 60 E 50 s Guitar mode and play the next guitar bit To leave the Guitar mode press any EASY SETTING ARR or PIANO or button or the switch icon on the GUITAR MODE page to select OFF Alternatively you can select a User Program that doesn t use the Guitar mode see p 89 Guitar Mode Options There are additional functions you can set to fine tune your virtual guitar s behavior Using the DOUBLING sec tion you can even add a second guitar sound 1 On the GUITAR MODE page press the field GUITAR MODE nG 3 ELECTRIC ACOUSTIC KEYBOARD ZONE lt C DOUBLING K STEREO WIDTH STRUMM UP 2 Press the switch icon of the parameter you want to switch on or off Use the dial or DECJ INC buttons to set the STEREO WIDTH parameter Here is what the parameters mean and do RETRIGGE
317. ith external Styles 70 Using the CUSTOM memories 0005 70 Programming CUSTOM assignments 70 DISUSE atta PAA 72 Style Finder quickly locating Styles 73 Qulek location oi the Style you need EP Ee 73 Editing the Style Finder information as 14 Advanced Keyboard part functions 11 Tuning Upper2 Coarse Tune and Fine Tune 77 Portamento for UP1 and UP2 sets ese KERE See 77 Portamento TE seke eek SES Ka BAAL BALA nA Bhd 77 Portamento Mode Mono Poly 000 78 OWED Hood si onse te hey GER DE ee Be kat 78 Tone Edit editing Keyboard parts 79 10 11 12 Using the mixer functions amp effects 81 Mixing Keyboard DERS ees EN EE nea dees 81 Volume and status of the Style parts 82 Editing the Keyboard effects processors 83 Reverb for Keyboard parts aa 83 Chorus tor keybord DEE AA AA 84 Using the multi effects processor Multi FX 84 Selecting another MFX type and editing it 85 Linking Multi FX type selection to the Upper1 part Upper 1 MEES link naam kwan ED DEE EE Di 85 Effects for Songs and Styles anakan RR 86 Reverb for Style Song parts EE SE Se ee 86 Chorus for Style Song parts SESSE See 86 Digital Bass Enhancer function 87 Working with User Programs 88 Saving your settings to a User Program
318. ive if you select USB the MIDI sockets are not used while MIDI communication via USB is impossible when you select MIDI 137 E 60 E 50 Music Workstation MIDI e The E 60 E 50 is supplied with a CD ROM that con tains the driver files you may need to install on your computer for USB MIDI applications Before pressing the field you must install the required drivers on your computer See the operating instructions on the CD ROM 4 Do one of the following Press a MIDI SET 1 8 field to select a MIDI Set Press the SELECT field that corresponds to the section whose default settings you want to load These two fields can be used instead of a MIDI Set If you press Keyboard amp Style Parts the Song parts no longer receive transmit MIDI messages If you press Song Parts the Keyboard and Style parts no longer transmit MIDI messages Press the field to gain access to the MIDI parameters Next use the PAGE fields to select the part or section whose settings you want to change 5 After changing MIDI parameter settings press the field to write them to a MIDI Set page 193 6 Press the button to return to the main page Working with presets The opening MIDI page contains two big fields with preset settings All you need to do Is press them to restore the default settings for the sections or aspects in question Keyboard amp Style Parts This field recalls the factory MIDI settings for the
319. ively with your E 60 E 50 you may want to recall the original factory settings Before doing so however it would be a good idea to save your own settings to a memory card see p 176 or to archive them via USB see p 184 Here is how to initialize your E 60 E 50 197 E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Specifications 19 Specifications N Keyboard 76 note synthesizer action keyboard E 60 61 note synthesizer action keyboard E 50 Mi Sound source Max polyphony 64 voices Sounds 1050 tones in 8 families 34 Drum Sets Multitimbral parts 32 Effects processors 3 programmable units 8x Reverb 8x Chorus 41x Multi FX for Keyboard parts Compatibility GM2 GS N Styles 136 Styles in 8 families 80 programmable links to additional Styles CUSTOM Unlimited access Internal memory memory card floppy disk via FINDER 26 ALL Covers 16 Drum Covers 24 Bass Covers Instrument oriented editing 8 tracks with microscope and macro editing Style Cover Style Makeup Tools User Style Composer One Touch 4 programmable registrations per Style E Songs Real time SMF player 4 programmable MARK amp JUMP locations Song Cover 26 ALL Covers 16 Drum Covers 24 Bass Covers Song Makeup Tools Instrument oriented editing Lyrics amp chord display score display Other functions PLAY LIST function 99 steps NEXT SONG function Text Import Export amp lyrics syn chronization Manages up to 99 999 songs Play amp Search fun
320. knowing it 1 Press the USER PROGRAM button The display changes to FROM Wi Factory Set USER PROGRAM bose ea liter E TI Eg U fr WRITE SETTING LINK i Love s Dance 5 f DJ Techno Early Wake Up a a 3 4 Boston P Living a dream i i 60 s Rock N i Funny Rap 6_8 Ballad P4 p5 2 3 4 Press the MIDI LINK field MIDI LINK MIDI SET Press a MIDI Set 1 lt 8 field to select the desired MIDI Set To break the link to this MIDI Set press its field again all indicator icons must be dark Press to return to the User Program selection page or the button to return to the main page The selection field on the USER PROGRAM SET LIST page now contains a small MIDI message On the main page User Programs with a link to a MIDI Set are indicated by means of a MIDI socket icon User Program Recall When you switch on the E 60 E 50 it automatically selects the Cancel mode i e no User Program page 89 But maybe you prefer to be operational right away In that case tell the E 60 E 50 which User Pro gram it should recall whenever you switch it on 1 Press the button SETTING endi FOOT af D BEAM 2 Press the field followed by the field UTILITY Ca G USER PROGRAM RECALL oe DSD i sounp SET MODE 10 Sees EXTENDED 4 A rai SET RECALL im Back 3 Press the field and use the dial to select the User Program to be recal
321. l also fall according to this setting Use the following three parameters if you think the instrument in question has too much or could use a little more vibrato 1 OS E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Song and Style Makeup Tools Note Some sounds already contain natural sampled vibrato whose depth or speed cannot be changed VB RATE This parameter adjusts the speed of the pitch modulation Positive settings make the preset pitch modulation faster and negative settings make it Slower VB DEPTH This parameter adjusts the intensity of the pitch modulation Positive settings mean that the wobble becomes more prominent while negative settings make it shallower VB DELAY This parameter adjusts the time required for the vibrato effect to begin Positive settings increase the time before vibrato will begin and negative settings shorten the time If necessary press the field to save your set tings page 108 SOUND EDIT for Drum Sets If the Instrument icon to the left of the sound name depicts a drum kit the page selected with looks as follows Here you can edit the Drum Set as a whole lt SONG MAKEUP TOOLS f pare PRO iM a niya na 2 Fara CUTOFF JUMP TO Kian paki Ka istuote SHZ KI KY Press the field of the parameter you want to edit and use the dial or the DEC INC buttons to set the desired value You can also press the dial and use the numer
322. l chorus effects that 1 4 add spaciousness and depth to the sound Feedback This is a chorus with a flanger like effect and a soft sound Fanger This is an effect that sounds somewhat like a jet airplane taking off and landing Short This is a full fledged delay effect that can Delay be used instead of a chorus or flanger As you will see there are a lot of parameters you can program Short DLY This is a short delay with many repeats FBK The Original setting means that the song uses its own programmed chorus settings The User Prog setting for Styles means that the Style uses the chorus settings of the currently active User Program REVERB LEVEL amp CHORUS LEVEL These parameters allow you to modify the output level of the Reverb or Chorus processor SONG VOLUME or STYLE VOLUME This parameter allows you to set the overall volume of the selected song or Style if you think it is too loud soft compared with other songs or Styles TEMPO Allows you to change the song s or Style s tempo J 20 250 TRANSPOSE only for songs This parameter allows you to transpose all song parts except the drums up to 12 semitones 1 octave up or down This value is written to the song data and used every time you play back this song Before saving your settings Before saving your made up song or Style to the internal memory a card or a floppy disk you can but you don t have to commit your chang
323. lable pages press the field Note If the target media memory card or floppy disk is not formatted a message will be displayed that allows you to for mat it before the songs are copied If you chose EXT MEMORY or FLOPPY DISK for TO disable the card s disk s write protection and insert it into the PCMCIA slot or disk drive To disable the write protection of a floppy disk close the little window see p 11 See the owner s man ual of the memory card for how to disable its write protection Note Not all cards have a write protection function Press the field Press if you do not want to proceed or to select other files E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Roland Working with the Song Finder You are asked whether it is OK to overwrite all files on the destination media TO that have the same file names as the files you are about to copy Cr TON Replace files TA z of the same name E Qa Quo R UNKNOWN sd 7 Press the field if it is OK to overwrite files with the same names on the destination media Press the field if files on the source FROM media that have the same name as existing files on the destination TO media should not be copied only files with original names will be copied in that case The data are copied and a Operation Successful message confirms the end of the operation 8 Press the button to return to the main page Editing an Index
324. lation speed Chorus Depth 0 127 Modulation intensity Chorus Phase 0 180 deg Spatial spread of the sound FO Low Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the low range FO High Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the high range Balance D100 0W D50 50W DO 100W Volume bal ance between the direct D and the effect sound W Level 0 127 Output level 16 St Flanger This is a stereo flanger It produces a metallic resonance that rises and falls like a jet airplane taking off or landing Filter Type OFF LPF HPF Type of filter OFF no filter is used LPF cuts the frequency range above the Cutoff value HPF cuts the frequency range below the Cutoff value Cutoff Frequency 200 8000Hz Basic frequency of the filter Flanger Pre Delay 0 0 100 Oms Adjusts the delay time from when the direct sound begins until the flanger sound is heard Flanger Rate 0 05 10 0Hz Frequency i e modulation speed Flanger Depth 0 127 Modulation intensity Flanger Phase 0 180 deg Spatial spread of the sound Flanger Feedback 9800 0 98 Adjusts the propor tion of the flanger sound that is fed back into the effect Negative settings will invert the phase FO Low Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the low range FO High Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the high range 2 O 2 Balance D100 0W D50 50W D0 100W Volume bal ance between the direct D and the effect sound W Level
325. layed you press the RECORDER button track 1 which is currently selected will be flagged with an R for Record You can only record one track at any one time The button icons in the right most column are TRACK EDIT MICRO EDIT see page 143 MASTER TRACK see page 139 INITIALIZE SONG see page 125 STYLE CONVERTER see page 147 see page 129 General considerations The 16 track sequencer can be used to record sequen tially onto 16 tracks one track after the other Since the 16 track sequencer and the Recorder share the same RAM memory they are in fact different incarna tions of the same concept you can lay down your first tracks using the Recorder with or without Arranger and then select the 16 track sequencer to add new tracks or change existing ones The Recorder allows for simultaneous multitrack recording which is not possi ble with the 16 track Sequencer While you are working with the 16 track Sequencer the Arranger is not avail able Tracks and MIDI channels Tracks are assigned to MIDI channels on a 1 1 basis i e Track 1 MIDI channel 1 Track 12 MIDI channel 12 etc Since the Keyboard parts have been assigned to the MIDI channels in such a way as to allow for easy Minus One playback using the Recorder page 35 you Should take a minute to study the table below 1 E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Using the 16 track sequencer Obviously if you record a song with Arranger backing the respec
326. led when the E 60 E 50 is switched on 4 Switch on the field Switch off this button icon if no User Program should be recalled when the E 60 E 50 is switched on If the User Program contains a song and or MIDI link the paper clip and or MIDI socket icon are displayed 5 Press the button to return to the main page E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Roland Editing User Program Finder information Editing User Program Finder information The User Program Finder is used for quickly locating the User Programs you need in a given situation Some information is added automatically to User Programs you save while other information needs to be supplied by hand Here we will concentrate on how to prepare that infor mation for real life use 1 Press the FINDER button The display changes to USEI mang sa 2 Specify the memory area that contains the User Program whose information you want to change or expand EXTERNAL MEMORY Or FLOPPY The display shows a list of 5 User Programs in the selected memory area The USER PRG STYLE LINK GENRE and SONG LINK fields allow you to sort User Programs in alphabetical order 3 If the name of the User Program you want to use to is already displayed press its line 4 To display the next 5 User Programs press the field in the lower right corner You can press this field as many times as necessary until it is no longer displayed You also use th
327. lied songs in the internal memory come with four locations already memorized that can be selected by pressing MARK amp JUMP 1 4 page 36 When you select a song that contains such markers the indica tors of the MARK amp JUMP buttons light For songs that do not contain these indications the indicators remain dark Editing and programming MARK JUMP locations can be carried out as follows 1 Press and hold a MARK JUMP button 1 4 MARK JUMP DODDO Press whichever button you like The display changes to 2 Press the field that corresponds to the MARK JUMP button for which you wish to program a different location 1 4 The following can be done both during playback and while it is stopped 3 Do one of the following e Start song playback and press the field This inserts the number of the current measure in the field that lights or e Stop playback Press the dial and use the on screen numeric keypad to enter the desired bar number Press the field of the numeric pad to dispose of the last number you entered Example if you wanted to enter 14 and then notice that you pressed the 4 field twice 144 press to get rid of the second 4 You can also use the DATA ENTRY dial or the DEC buttons As soon as you enter a new value an EDIT message appears next to the memory number e Press the field to return to the previous page E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Roland Programming
328. lights Note If none of the PART ON OFF buttons lights the notes you play on the keyboard will not be audible It would how ever be possible to go on controlling the Arranger By the way not splitting the keyboard does not mean that the Arranger is automatically switched off or can no longer be used See Arranger Type chord mode on p 67 for details Note Your settings can be written to a User Program and recalled at a later stage See p 88 E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Roland Split and Whole modes E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Using the performance functions Using the performance functions Let us now have a look at the E 60 E 50 s performance functions Also called controllers they allow you to add expression to your playing which is a very important aspect for simulating glissando s bendings and other changes that will make your melodies even more con vincing Pitch Bend and Modulation The BENDER MODULATION lever to the left of the E 60 E 50 s keyboard can be used to add two kinds of effects to the Keyboard part notes Upper Lower M Bass You can even use these effects simultaneously if you like 1 Press the lever towards the rear of the E 60 E 50 to add a vibrato effect wobble to the notes you are playing MODULATION Lowers the pitch Raises the pitch a BENDER a The Modulation axis can also be used for switching between the slow and fast Rotary speeds for certain sounds
329. ll Divisions and Modes use this time signature You could however edit the patterns at a later stage see TIME SIGNAT on p 169 and specify that MAIN 1 should use 4 4 MAIN 2 6 8 etc 5 Set the time signature e Press the first field the numerator and enter the desired number of beats using the dial or the DEC INC buttons e Press the second field the denominator and enter the duration of each beat using the dial or the DECJ INC buttons You can also already set the tempo 20 250 here or leave that for later gt Continue with step 6 below N Preparing your own settings If none of the templates matches the settings you need press the field 8 possibilities MY SETUP EDIT TRACK INSTRUMENT saag TEMPO AND TIME Ga Can be set for all 8 tracks e GEE Here you can prepare the STYLE COMPOSER for the work at hand by selecting the desired sounds and setting additional parameters Please proceed in the order given here until you have a firm grasp of the flexibility a Press the field and use the dial or the DECJ INC buttons to select the track whose settings you want to change With the exception of the tempo all parameters shown here only apply to the selected track There are 8 tracks ADrum the drums ABass the bass and Acc1 6 melodic accompaniment parts b Press the field to jump to the TONE SELECT page You can also press a TONE button to assign
330. ll button icons on the corresponding messages are then transmitted Press to switch all button icons off Press to return to the page where you came from You can also switch the following button icons on off individ ually PROGRAM CHANGE Program change and bank select CCOO CC32 messages These messages are used to select sounds and Drum Sets as well as User Programs see below Bank Select messages are control change mes sages which were added when it became clear that the number of sounds that can be selected using program change messages 128 was no longer sufficient to access all sounds of a given instrument The E 60 E 50 boasts over 1590 sounds PITCH BENDER Pitch Bend messages MODUL Modulation messages CCO1 VOLUME Volume messages CCO7 PANPOT Pan pot messages CC10 EXPRESSION Expression messages CC1 1 HOLD Hold Sustain Damper messages CC64 SOSTENUTO Sostenuto messages CC66 SOFT Soft messages CC67 REVERB Reverb Send messages CC9 1 CHORUS Chorus Send messages CC93 RPN Registered parameter number CC100 101 NRPN Non registered parameter number CC98 99 SysEx SysEX messages system exclusive CC16 General purpose controller that allows you to influence the C1 parameter see p 79 Note TX EVENT parameters with a symbol are not available for Style parts 1 BY E 60 E 50 Music Workstation MIDI MIDI RX
331. ll other tracks The selected track is highlighted To select another track simply press its row in the left column of the display You can also use the 4 v buttons to select a track The button icon allows you to temporarily switch off the selected track which may be useful when you want to record or edit additional parts with out being distracted by already existing parts SOLO and MUTE need to be set as follows First press the Or field then press the fields of the tracks you want to solo or mute you can mute several tracks Note The MUTE function is not available while the SOLO func tion is on You can however select another track at that time which is then played back in isolation The SOLO function on the other hand can be activated while the MUTE function is on Soloed tracks are flagged with an S while muted tracks use the letter M The remaining indications in the second column from the left are J note symbol The track is currently playing If you look at the example above you will notice a vertical line on top of several horizontal bars The vertical line refers to the current position within the song which is also indicated in the MEAS field The horizontal bars indi cate that a track contains musical data in that position Now look again at the illustration only the tracks that contain note data at the current position and that are not muted have the J symbol If while the page above is disp
332. load Songs Music Styles User Program Sets and MIDI Sets Songs and Styles can also be loaded via dedicated functions which are explained elsewhere page 110 73 The behavior of those pages is identical to that of the LOAD function so we won t explain those operations again Note Never remove the floppy disk or memory card while the operation is in progress Wait for the confirmation to appear before returning to business as usual Mi Load User Program Set This is where you can load User Program Sets As stated on page 88 such Sets or Lists do not contain the registration data but only references to them Please bear in mind that a User Program Set can only refer to User Programs that reside on the same media as the List itself The name of the selected Set is dis played next to a folder icon on the USER PROGRAM page that appears when you press the button All User Programs as well as the songs they refer to need to be on line That explains why the field is not available here 1 Press the button 2 Press the field followed by the 3 4 5 USER PROGRAM SET field Loer USE PMO AY Say Live 2004 My User Program Select the source media INTERNAL MEMORY or EXTERNAL MEMORY memory card Press the field of the User Program Set file you wish to load If the desired name is not displayed use the scroll bar to the right of the list if available to scroll further down Note A User Program S
333. ls about selecting songs 4 Press the button The display changes to Song ORDINARY M 001 3 d 160 474 5 Press the field followed by the field T 2 O I S amp 0123456789 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP QRSTUVWXYZ abcdefghijklmnopgrs tuvwxyz 0 f t BeEDEODO 1 uo ME PN sy i gnylS Os g0 704237 1OYUUHE INTERNAL MEMORY EXTERNAL 4 MEMORY Importing a text file for Lyrics synchronization or editing Lyrics data Is only possible while song play back is stopped If you forget to stop playback by pressing RECORDER PLAY STOP r s a Can t exe cute Song is running error message is displayed Let s import the text file you created earlier 6 Select the memory area that contains the text file you wish to associate with the Standard MIDI File in the E 60 E 50 s RAM memory press INTERNAL MEMORY Or EXTERNAL MEMORY If you press FLOPPY or EXTERNAL MEMORY insert the memory card or floppy disk with the desired song into the slot or drive 7 Press the line that contains the name of the text file you want to use If you don t see the desired file name use the scroll bar the dial or the DEC INC buttons to select another group of 8 files If you still can t find the file it may not end in TXT or not be a text ASCII file 8 Press the field to load the text file you selected The current Lyrics Text will be lost Do you want to co
334. lts in a dramatic change of your rhythm section with a triangle playing the kick notes for example MFROM NOTE 0 C 127 G9 This parameter allows you to set the note or lower limit of the note range to be modified within the specified FROM TO time range It is not displayed when you select EQUAL UNEQUAL HIGHER or LOWER See also Fine tuning the setting range on p 132 for details about the six button icons WTO NOTE 0 C 127 G9 This parameter allows you to set the upper limit of the note range to be modified within the specified FROM TO time range WE EXECUTE Press this field to confirm your settings and edit the data E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Roland Editing 16 track songs CHANGE VELO Tne CHANGE VELO function allows you to modify the dynamics called velocity of a track or excerpt Increasing the velocity values means that the notes in question will be louder and brighter than before while reducing the velocity values means the oppo site Use this function when you are happy with the timing of the notes but would like the sound to be brighter louder or rounder softer You can decide to add subtract a fixed velocity value BIAS or to change them proportionally MAGNIFY MTRACK ALL 1 16 Allows you to select the track you wish to edit You can also select ALL here in which case the operation applies to all tracks FROM BAR 1 last measure of the track or song Refers to the first
335. lume 02 041 Pitch Bend 0 02 042 CC 0 Bank Select MSB 0 1 02 043 Program Change 74 19 02 077 Note 65 F 4 100 11 19 02 115 Note 65 F 4 83 18 MILE ar 22 01 027 CC 64 Hold 1 22 01 030 CC 64 Hold 1 19 03 030 Note 67 G 4 95 79 19 04 010 Note 69 4 4 91 65 PLACE gt 22 03 000 Note 22 03 057 Note After selecting the entire line of a note event you can press and hold the dial to play the note it will be held until you release the dial If you press the dial after selecting another kind of event control change aftertouch pro gram change etc that value is buffered by the E 60 E 50 s tone generator and used for the following note event you play back To change that information select another occurrence with a different value and press the dial yet again 2 Press the DATA ENTRY gt button to select the first value MINERO Shy Control Change Number Except for a perhaps clearer representation of the data on the selected track all other operations are the same as in standard view Press again to see more values again N Monitoring note events The 16 track Sequencer can play back note events you select This may help you identify the occurrence you want to edit Press the speaker icon to switch this monitor function on and move the cursor to a note event to sound that note Note See also the remark after step 1 on the next page
336. mber of a sound e g from 1 to TI 63 MINC DEC These are so called relative changes the positive or nega tive value you set here will be added to or subtracted from the original values of the selected track s Use these fields to increase or decrease the existing values for the entire selected track s Expression Panpot Reverb Chorus 127 127 These parameters allow you to add or subtract a given value to from the current Expression Pan Reverb Send or Chorus Send values This may come in handy if the realtime changes you recorded turn out to be too high or too low Alteration Mode Nearest Degree This message type is only available for melodic Style tracks i e not for ADrums or ABass tracks Style tracks you only just recorded do not contain it It allows you to use a revolu tionary system for adapting the recorded notes to a more natural behavior also known as voicing There are two options Degree This setting refers to the old system for real time conversion of track information during Style play back Based on the fundamentals of the chords you play during Arranger playback it often leads to odd jumps of certain parts Nearest Refers to a new more musical system for real time shifts of the recorded Style notes during Arranger playback See also page 172 for an explanation of this concept Select if the selected pattern should ignore this set ting Note This p
337. mn DIBA Z3 Spyte TEMPLATES SETTINGS TEMPO AND TIME SIGNATURE En 3 E 120 Fi MY cy 8 y The internal Style will be deleted 4 Are you sure The warning alerts you to the fact that pressing EXECUTE see below may have disastrous conse quences See Saving your Style on p 157 if you still need to save your previous Style 4 Nam If you want the E 60 E 50 to select suitable sounds for you press one of the TEMPLATES fields Here is what the options mean ORCHESTR Selects orchestral sounds suitable for classi cal music and film scores BAROOUE Selects instrument sounds suitable for chamber music ROCK Selects sounds suitable for rock music FOLK Selects sounds suitable for folk music COUNTRY Selects sounds suitable for country music ELECTRONIC Selects sounds suitable for dance music POP Selects sounds often used in pop arrange ments JAZZ Selects sounds suitable for jazz combos ETHNIC Selects sounds suitable for world music gt f you want to set everything yourself jump to Preparing your own settings below Mi Time signature Before recording your first track you must specify the time signature of your accompaniment Select 4 4 for 8 or 16 beat patterns 3 4 for waltzes 2 4 for polkas and 6 8 or 4 4 for marches You can also select more complex time signatures 5 4 7 4 etc This value needs to be set when you Initialize the Style RAM memory i e now A
338. mpaniment parts ACC1 6 on and off using the D Beam Controller ABs ADr On Off This setting allows you to use the D Beam for switching on and off the ABass and ADrums parts ABs Acc On Off This setting allows you to use the D Beam for switching on and off the ABass and ACC1 6 parts ADr Acc On Off This setting allows you to use the D Beam for switching on and off the ADrums and ACC1 6 parts Tempo Up Select this option to increase the current Arranger or Recorder tempo By moving your hand out side the D Beam s range you return to the previous tempo value Tempo Down Select this option to decrease the cur rent Arranger or Recorder tempo By moving your hand outside the D Beam s range you return to the previous tempo value Note Options marked with a only apply to the currently active Keyboard parts E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Roland Using the D Beam Controller E 60 Arranger RIT Tempo Allows you to start the Arranger s RIT function page 69 Arranger ACC Tempo Allows you to start the Arranger s ACC function page 69 Reset Start Tempo This function allows you have the Arranger start on the first beat of the currently selected Music Style pattern when you use the D Beam controller Use it when you are accompanying a singer or soloist whose timing is a little shaky and suddenly notice that the Arranger lags one or two beats behind the singer soloist Break Mute When you move your
339. musical genre Rock Pop Dance Waltz etc The Arranger allows you to transpose the melodic accompaniment parts bass piano guitar etc simply by playing chords In most instances you will probably do so with your left hand Each Music Style comprises several patterns so that you can vary the accompani ment by starting with an introduction using a simple accompaniment for the verses a more elaborate one for the choruses and by ending your songs with an Ending pattern Let us first look at the most important aspects for oper ating the Arranger 1 Connect and switch on the E 60 E 50 see pages 18 and 19 2 Press the EASY SETTING button The button lights and the keyboard is split into two halves The left half can be used to play chords while you can play melodies in the right half 3 If the button lights which is probably the case press it to switch it off 4 Set the MASTER knob to a reasonable level e g about 1 4 5 Press the button it lights STYLE CONTROL 6 Play a chord in the left half of the keyboard then press the STYLE CONTROL button The button lights and the Arranger starts playing the accompaniment of the currently selected Music Style called Strummlin Pop The accompaniment pattern is sounded in the key that corresponds to the note you played C The name of the corresponding chord is displayed in the upper left hand c
340. n Using the 16 track sequencer E CREATE EVENT Press this button icon to add a new event to the MASTER track The following pop up appears LAST SISTA SOT ma CREATE EVENT SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE PLACE EVENT DI e Press the button icon that corresponds to the kind of event you want to add refers to tempo events to time sig nature changes and to SysEx strings e Specify where your new event should be inserted by pressing the field and entering the desired value using the dial or the DEC INC buttons e Press the field to confirm your settings Press to close the pop up window without applying your changes E ERASE EVENT e Use the dial to select the event you want to delete e Press the field to erase the selected event Note Tempo and time signature events located at 1 01 00 cannot be erased WE MOVE EVENT This function allows you to move one or several events e Select the event you want to move To move several events it would be a good idea to select the first or last event of the series Note For this function you could take advantage of the VIEW filter to avoid selecting event types that should remain where they are See VIEW on p 141 Note Tempo and time signature events located at 1 01 00 cannot be moved e To select several consecutive events press the dial while turning it towards the left upward direction or the right downward direction All even
341. n addition to the items listed under Using the unit safely on p 6 please read and observe the following P ower supply Do not use this instrument on the same power circuit with any device that will generate line noise such as an electric motor or variable lighting system Before connecting the E 60 E 50 to other devices turn off the power to all units This will help prevent malfunctions and or dam age to speakers or other devices Although the LCD and LEDs are switched off when the POWER switch is switched off this does not mean that the unit has been completely disconnected from the source of power If you need to turn off the power completely first turn off the POWER switch then unplug the adapter from the power outlet For this reason the outlet into which you choose to connect the adapter s plug should be one that is within easy reach and readily accessible Placement Using the E 60 E 50 near power amplifiers or other equipment containing large power transformers may induce hum To allevi ate the problem change the orientation of this instrument or move it further away from the source of interference This instrument may interfere with radio and television reception Do not use it in the vicinity of such receivers Observe the following when using the unit s floppy disk drive For further details refer to Before using floppy disks handling the floppy disk drive e Do not place the unit near devic
342. n p 161 for details abut the NRPN DRUM and PITCH parameters These are only available for ADrum tracks Specifying the key for melodic parts If you want to use the accompaniment in a musically meaningful way you need to tell the E 60 E 50 what key you are recording in This is to ensure that the chords you play during everyday use of your Style with the E 60 E 50 s Arranger lead to the correct realtime transpositions of the selected Division The E 60 E 50 allows you to record Styles in any key But do set the KEY parameter to the right value before recording Note The key of AccDrums parts cannot be set because that doesn t make sense 13 Press the field and use the dial or the DEC INC buttons to set the key If you want to record in F set this parameter to FR to record in A you must set this value to A etc N Octave The field next to allows you to transpose the keyboard in octave steps which may be convenient for extremely high or low notes or for using the special noises of certain sounds 14 Press the field and use the dial to transpose the keyboard up or down 4 4 octaves Tempo 15 The current tempo value may be a bit fast for recording so change it by pressing the tempo field and using the dial or the DEC INC buttons The tempo value you set here is recorded and regarded as preset tempo You can change it at any stage in STYLE COMPOSER mode so start by selecting a tempo tha
343. n using the procedure described above Note If you save a factory Style under a different name you can no longer select the new version using the STYLE buttons see p 25 Such customized Styles can be assigned to a CUS TOM memory see p 70 or recalled using the Style Finder see p 73 E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Roland One Touch 2 Press the fields corresponding to the settings that One Touch should not be loaded when you select another One You may find yourself using the One Touch function at Touch memory or Music Style regular intervals because it automates quite a few When you change a setting the field of the last One tasks The E 60 E 50 s One Touch memories are actu Touch memory you selected is indicated by means of ally miniature User Programs that go way beyond an asterisk Button icons in the HOLD column anything you may know from other arranger instru whose indicator lights refer to settings that are not ments updated TEMPO The preset tempo of the selected Music Style 1 Press a ONE TOUCH button KBD PART Ihe current status of the Keyboard parts UP1 2 LWR and MBS The on off status of the Key 3 board parts can be saved to a One Touch memory INTRO ENDING The INTRO or ENDING pattern is no longer activated when you select Styles MAIN VAR When you select another Style the E 60 E 50 no longer loads the memorized MAIN VARIATION 1 4 pattern but goes on using the last pattern you
344. n you are after The character string you enter can be used in two ways see below Use the and fields to select the position for which you wish to enter a new character Use the alphanumeric keypad to enter the desired characters This keypad works exactly like the keypad of a cellphone you may have to press an alphanu meric field several times to select the desired charac ter or number Note The Finder makes no distinction between upper and lower case letters The field allows you to delete the selected character Press and hold it to clear all characters Press to insert a blank or the number O If you forgot to insert a character use or to select the position where the missing character should be inserted Then press Insert followed by the character you wish to insert If you only want to enter numbers activate the field Decide how the Finder should look for the files Press the field to search for all entries that start with the characters you entered BEA for example Names that match the specified criteria will be displayed at the top of the list 4 Nam e Press the field to have the E 60 E 50 search for names that contain the supplied informa tion This would allow you to also locate a file called Raggabeat if you entered BEA 5 Press the field to start your search The display returns to the Music Assistant window and displays the entries that correspond to y
345. nal version of your song The MARK JUMP infor mation can be read by the E 60 E 50 E 80 and G 70 but is of little use to other sequencers or SMF players they simply ignore it So you might as well save the song under its original name Besides you can also save the song to a different memory area card or disk See page 44 for how to change the name 1 OT E 60 E 50 Music Workstation More refined song functions 8 Press the field If you selected the memory area that contains the original version the following message Is displayed A file je itis n name already exists Overwrite e Press the field to overwrite the old version Press the field if you do not want to overwrite this song and return to the main page Then enter a different name or select a different media If the song doesn t exist in the selected memory area the data are saved 9 Press the button to return to the main page Working with the Song Finder The Song Finder allows you to quickly locate the songs you want to play back You will see in a minute that it is far more powerful when you work with the internal memory or memory cards than with floppy disks 1 Press the FINDER button You can also press the field on the main page Wo ve The display changes to SONG EXTERNAL NA FILE Y NAME E HEREWEGO ed OU GLOBA flagged by means of a ful icon The note 4 means that the file in que
346. name of the set tings you changed If you don t want to use that name start by pressing the field See page 44 for how to enter names You only need to do this the first time you save new settings to a User Program You can also name your User Program at a later stage and then save it again Use a name that somehow summarizes the purpose of this User Program The name of the song you will use these settings for is probably the most explicit name you can think of lt is perfectly possible to program several User Pro grams for one song Selecting a User Program is a lot faster than calling up one of the E 60 E 50 s func tions modifying the settings etc while playing You could program one User Program for the first part of a song another one for the bridge and a third one for the closing section Doing so allows you to play with the effect settings of the various processors for example 7 Press the field Important note User Programs are saved on the media that also con tains the list file you are currently using The name of that list is displayed in the upper left corner next to a folder icon The area where your Set List is stored appears in the right corner Factory set VSELEROGHAM EE HOL SONG MIDI NG SETTINGS LINK Y LINK S SEE 1 f DJ Techno 1 Love s Dance You cannot select a different Set List here E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Roland Selecting User Programs If the target memory area which
347. nctions After recording a few tracks you may want to do some touching up Here are some easy things you can do See Editing one or several tracks TRACK EDIT on p 129 for more elaborate functions N Muting tracks When recording rhythmically intricate parts it may be necessary to mute already recorded parts that might distract you To do so return to the 16 track Sequencer s main page press the field and then the tracks you don t want to hear Such tracks are flagged with an M New Song ens 0001 1 J 120 474 SOLD MUTE ET Er EDIT 1 Id lu BOSES JOCCTMA at MASTER N TRACK d 9 STYLE Cia CONVERTER ATURALPIA ll dleLAV 2 16 IMATUFALFIAMG This setting is not saved Press the field again to switch off the function Note The MUTE function is not available while the SOLO func tion is switched on N Solo If you need to listen to a track in isolation press the field and the field of the track you want to solo and start playback This mutes all other tracks while the selected track is flagged with an S You can also select the track to be soloed using the 4 v buttons Press the field again to switch off the func tion of the same name Bl Song Cover and Song Makeup Tools The 16 track Sequencer does not recognize changes made to a song using the Cover and SONG MAKEUP TOOLS functions It only sees the original song data You can however burn such changes into the song file b
348. nder These functions are only available for songs and Styles and only if you select or EXTERNAL MEMORY See also pages 34 and 73 If you like you can select several songs or Styles for deletion by pressing the corresponding lines Use the PAGE lt gt fields to changes pages 17S E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Disk Media functions To delete all songs or Styles on the selected media press the field This disposes of all files on all pages 7 Press the field of the file you want to delete 8 Press the field The display changes to From FROM FLOPPY DIS LH k EES Ta Delete all selected Drar Orec PL Deltas Uses HOSEA SS EXTERNAL ME Delete all selected Ox Or pel ape je Sey INTERNAL MEMORY EXTERNAL ME AN This File will be DELETED from CO Internal Memory e EE Eg If you selected the DELETE page by accident press NO This takes you back to the previously selected page 9 Check again whether you really selected the file you wanted to delete if possible then press the field to delete the selected file Press the field to return to the DELETE list with out deleting the file You can also press to return to the DELETE page 10 Press the DIT button to return to the main page Note The DELETE operation cannot be undone Copy The E 60 E 50 allows you to copy one several or all files from one media to another Files on the selec
349. nds can change depending on how the instrument is played For example if a trumpet is played sharply and strongly the attack will be quick and the sound will be sharp But if a trumpet is played lightly and softly the attack will be softer In order to adjust the attack of a sound you can modify the ATTACK parameter of the envelope The envelope parameters affect both the volume TVA and the filter TVF The cutoff frequency will rise as the envelope rises and fall as the envelope falls ATTACK 64 63 This parameter adjusts the onset of the sound Negative values speed up the attack so that the sound becomes more aggressive DECAY 64 63 This parameter adjusts the time over which the sound s volume and Cutoff frequency fall from the highest point of the attack down to the sustain level Note Percussive sounds usually have a sustain level of 0 Piano and guitar sounds are in this category Holding the keys for a long time will thus have little effect on the dura tion of the notes you are playing even if you select a high value here ID E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Advanced Keyboard part functions RELEASE 64 63 This parameter adjusts the time over which the sound will decay after the note is released until it is no longer heard The cutoff frequency will also fall according to this setting mTVF filter By modifying the filter settings you can control the timbre tone of the sound The E 60 E 50 us
350. nds simultaneously which is called a layer or via separate keyboard zones split Below please find an explanation of the Keyboard parts See p 60 for the Style parts e UP1 Upper1 Upper1 is normally the main solo part and switched on automatically in Piano mode e UP2 The Upper2 part can be used as additional solo part to be layered with the Upper1 part or as an alternative melody sound It provides two tuning parameters Coarse and Fine Upper1 does not have e LWR The Lower part can be assigned to the left half of the keyboard MBS The MBS part supplies a semi automatic bass line to your left hand notes if the LWR parts Is active When the LWR button doesn t light it behaves like any other Keyboard part Note All Keyboard parts can be used to play drum sounds Unlike previous Roland arranger instruments the E 60 E 50 no longer provides a dedicated Manual Drums part e MELODY INTELL Melody Intelligence This part is triggered by the Arranger and plays automatic har monies that are added to the melody you play using the UP1 part You cannot play that part yourself That explains why its button not part of the KEYBOARD PART section it is one of the two TONE EFFECTS but tons You can choose from among 18 harmony types page 62 Selecting sounds for the Keyboard parts N One Touch The easiest way to select suitable Tones for the Key board parts while working with the Arranger is by using
351. ng E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Roland Editing song data using Microscope Edit Editing song data using Microscope Edit Select this mode whenever you only need to change small details of an otherwise perfect Standard MIDI File In this section we will use the word event for any kind of message You can only view and edit one track at a time There fore be sure to check the TRACK setting before editing the events displayed on this page 1 Select and load a different song This is not necessary if you want to edit the song you have just recorded or played back See Working with the Song Finder on p 110 or page 35 for how to load a song 2 Press the button The display changes to J 120 474 SOLO MUTE 1 d VINTAGE EF1 N diPickeD BASSI 3 d CLEAN MUTE mamana MASTER A EE EK TRACK d 0 0 CC 11 Expression 02 040 CC 7 Volume 80 02 041 Pitch Bend 0 02 042 CC 0 Bank Select MSB 0 1 02 043 Program Change 74 19 02 077 Note 65 F 4 100 11 19 02 115 Note 65 F 4 83 18 19 03 030 Note 67 G 4 95 79 Note 4 Press the field and use the dial or the DEC INC buttons to select the track you want to edit 5 Press the white field the event list to be able to select events using the dial and IT buttons 143 E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Using the 16 track sequencer also includes the bank select messages CCOO and CC32 that are used for selecting sounds along with
352. ng Refers to the first measure to be edited By default the FROM value is set to the beginning of the selected track s BEAT 1 number of beats per bar Specifies the beat position The number of available beats depends on the time signature in the selected area CPT 1 119 Refers to the starting CPT position CPT is short for Clock Pulse Time the smallest unit used by the E 60 E 50 There are 120 CPTs to every beat of a 4 4 bar Change this setting only if your edit operation should start after the selected beat Erase NOTE From 2 1 0 To 4 1 0 See Soares EFESE ia WTO By default the TO position is set to the last event of the selected track or the last event of the longest track when you select ALL BAR 1 last measure of the track or song This is where you specify the bar position of the last measure to be edited BEAT 1 number of beats per bar Specifies the beat position The number of available beats depends on the time signature in the selected area CPT 1 119 Refers to the last clock that should be affected by the edit operation Change this setting only if your edit operation should not end exactly on the selected beat 13 E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Using the 16 track sequencer MI DAIA TYPE Allows you to select the data to be erased ALL All parameters listed below Note Only note messages P Bender Pitch Bend data
353. ng INTERNAL MEMORY Music Assistant registrations must reside in the E 60 E 50 s internal memory If necessary first copy User Programs from a memory card to the E 60 E 50 s internal memory see p 97 3 Press the field followed by MUSIC ASSISTANT MARK USER AMOS Sr Gee Cr 4 Use the Finder functions to locate the desired User Program see p 90 5 Press the field of a User Program that should appear in the MUSIC ASSISTANT window lt is flagged with an MA symbol If you pressed the wrong field just press it again to remove the MA symbol 6 If necessary select additional User Programs 7 Press the button to return to the main page 99 E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Working with User Programs Editing Music Assistant registrations W Deleting Music Assistant entries The E 60 E 50 also allows you to edit certain aspects of The DELETE function allows you to dispose of the existing Music Assistant registrations selected Music Assistant registration Again this is a 1 Press the button virtual process because the underlying User Program does not disappear In fact this operation only strips the MA icon from the related User Program fea NA USIC e Select the Music Assistant entry you want to discard LIU I e Press the field This operation cannot be ae undone which is why the following question is now displayed The display now looks as follows MUSIG ASSISTANT LIST
354. ng procedure 7 Press the field on the first MIDI page EASY SETTING SELECT OUTPUT MODE Keyboard amp TI MIDI SET 8 On the page that appears now select the section whose parameters you wish to edit HUE Sey Synchronization general settings Refers to the Recorder sequencer parts Refers to the Style parts Keyboard parts including MELODY INTELL 9 Use the PAGE buttons to select the part you want to edit 10 Press the field of the parameter you wish to edit and set the desired value with the dial or the DECJ INC buttons 11 Press the field and save your MIDI settings to a Set or Press the button to return to the main page Editing MIDI parameters Let us briefly explain where to look for the part you want to edit use PAGE to select it KEYBOARD STYLE SONG SYSTEM UP 2 ADrums Part1 16 Sync LWR ABass Basic Channel MBS Accomp Style Channel MELODY INT Accomp2 NTA Accomp3 V LINK Accomp4 Param Accomp5 Accomp6 Note Always select the part you want to edit before changing the available parameters Keyboard Style Song parts MID Spy Upper MIDI TX MIDI RX E o LOCAL TH EVENT Y Rit EVENT P E Ga Ee The Keyboard Style and Song parts have the same TX transmission and RX reception parameters so we will discuss them only once except where there are sig nificant differences Note Press the field to recall the default setting for the par
355. ng your Style on p 157 for details b Select the track s and pattern s you wish to mod ify c Select the range FROM and TO for the edit opera tion d Enter what should be changed and how it should be changed Press the desired field and use the dial or the DECJ INC buttons e Confirm the operation by pressing the field f Save your Style again The STYLE TRACK EDIT level of the STYLE COMPOSER provides 12 functions Quantize Erase Delete Copy Insert Transpose Change Velo Change Gate Time Glo bal Change Shift Clock Track Length and Time Signat There is also a MICRO EDIT environment that allows you to add delete or change individual events See page 170 for details To select one of the STYLE TRACK EDIT functions pro ceed as follows 1 Load the Style you want to edit if it does not yet reside in the E 60 E 50 s Style RAM memory 2 Press the button then the STYLE COMPOSER field STYLE COMPOSER 3 Press the field SHALES RAGE EDIT 06 sau Laman Laman bawa aas ca a HIGHER LOW INSIDE 4 Press a field in the top two rows to select the desired STYLE TRACK EDIT function If after selecting one of these functions and setting parameter values you decide not to execute the transformation do not press the field 5 Select the tracks Modes and Divisions you wish to modify 6 Select the range FROM and TO for the edit operation The FROM and TO param
356. ngan a song to it right away Repeat steps 4 7 above to assign a song to this step 9 After compiling your play list press the field PLAY LIST SAVE Re KAHOY NG 8 _ 10 Enter a name up to 18 characters See p 44 for how to enter names 11 Press the field to save your list to the indicated memory area TIG Note This only saves the Play List i e the references to exist ing song files The songs themselves are not saved because that is unnecessary On the other hand if you delete a song see p 112 that is referenced by a Play List step playback stops at that empty step during playback and the File not found message appears The display shows a confirmation message and then returns to the PLAY LIST page PLAYLIST Saturday Live ED 12 Press the button to return to the main page That page now looks as follows HELLO DOLLY3 Strummlin Pop P 1 7 Gospel Love See Using Play Lists on p 118 for how work with your list If you need to return to the Play List either press the PLAY LIST field in the upper left corner or press and hold the button Editing Play Lists If while programming or using a Play List you notice that one song is missing from the list or if you decide not to use a given song after all you need to edit your Play List Steps 1 3 below are only necessary if you want to edit a different list than the one you have just programmed 1 Pre
357. nger or Keyboard part whose setting you want to change 4 Press the field and use the dial or the DEC INC buttons to select Expression Select Off if the part in question should not respond to movements of the expression pedal 5 Press the or field and use the dial or the DEC INC buttons to set the value 4 Press the button to return to the main page You can also press the dial to call up the on screen NUMERIC PAD HAHA Enter the value you want to use then press the ENTER field If necessary you can use the field to correct erroneous entries before pressing ENTER and refer to the volume that is used when the expression pedal is depressed UP highest volume or in the upright position Do w N lowest volume UP DOWN 0 127 You do not need to specify 0 for the DOWN position Selecting any other value will reduce the volume of the selected parts up to the DOWN value Likewise you do not need to specify 127 as maximum value for UP Note If you select Expression the DOWN and UP values represent MIDI Expression CC11 values It is perfectly possible to set the DOWN value to 127 and the UP value to 0 so that the selected part only sounds when the Expression pedal is in the upright position This can be used for some clever effects instead of alternating between UP1 and UP2 by vary ing your velocity page 50 which requires a consid erable striking pr
358. nges you recorded turn out things to be too high or too low e To correct slow notes due to a slow er attack W EXECUTE You may want to use SHIFT CLOCK after assigning a sound Press this field to confirm your settings and edit the data to a track that has a considerably slower attack than the sound you used for recording the part in question This technique is frequently used in pop music to time 1 16 note string arpeggios played with a slow pad sound Rather than have the notes begin at the mathematically correct time e g 2 1 0 you could shift them to the left e g to 1 4 115 so that the peak volume of the attack is reached on the next beat Original positions slow attack tim Shifts 5 ing seems off timing sounds OK ETER RR HEER e To correct the timing of notes recorded via MIDI without quantizing them You can use external sequences as raw material for your songs Recording such excerpts via MIDI may cause a slight delay e g 5 CPT If that is not acceptable use SHIFT CLOCK to push the recorded data to the left select 5 That allows you preserve any irregularities the original may con tain because it was not quantized MTRACK ALL 1 16 Allows you to select the track you wish to edit You can also select ALL here in which case the operation applies to all tracks E FROM BAR 1 last measure of the track or song Refers to the first measure to be edited By default the FROM
359. nly one MFX processor that is shared by all Keyboard parts e Press the button to return to the main page Selecting another MFX type and editing it The E 60 E 50 provides 41 different Multi FX types some of which are combinations of two effects for added flexibility Here is how to select another Multi FX type 1 Press and hold the button until the dis 2 3 4 play looks as follows REVERE SEND CHORUS SEND You can also select this page by pressing the button IMEX field and the field But the above method is a lot faster Press the or OFF field to switch the proces sor on icon lights or off icon goes dark You can also do so on the EFFECTS page see above Press the field below MFX where the name of the currently selected type is displayed Select the desired type with the dial or the DECJ INC buttons Note Multi FX type selection can be linked to Tone selection for the Upper1 part See page 85 The available types are E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Roland Using the multi effects processor Multi FX To avoid confusion we decided to explain the avail able parameters elsewhere See page 200 Here s how to edit the parameters 5 Press the field of the parameter you wish to change the number of fields and their functions depend on the selected type If the required parameter is not displayed press the PAGE fields to jump to another page Some effects have only one parameter
360. no for example and a piano part is not necessarily suited for drumming INSERT EAE mma a EIE enot EIE NES TIME SIGNATURE BEAT BEAT INSERT allows you to insert space and shift data that lie behind the FROM position further towards the end of the song this is the exact opposite of DELETE These empty measures can be filled using the COPY function or by recording new phrases in that area using PUNCH IN OUT for example page 133 Note This function provides no TO pointer Instead you have to specify the length of the insert using the FOR values BTRACK ALL 1 16 Allows you to select the track you wish to edit You can also select ALL here in which case the operation applies to all tracks E FROM BAR 1 last measure of the track or song Refers to the first measure to be edited By default the FROM value is set to the beginning of the selected track s BEAT 1 number of beats per bar Specifies the beat position The number of available beats depends on the time signature in the selected area CPT 1 119 Refers to the starting CPT position CPT is short for Clock Pulse Time the smallest unit used by the E 60 E 50 There are 120 CPTs to every beat of a 4 4 bar Change this setting only if your edit operation should start after the selected beat BI FOR Specifies how many bars beats and CPTs are to be inserted BAR BEAT CPT See above TIME SIGNATURE If TRACK A
361. nore the Transpose value and mode contained in every User Program KBD Mode Press this field to ignore the Keyboard Mode Whole Split and Arranger Chord settings Stan dard Piano Style Left Right etc Bass Inversion Press this field to ignore the setting of the button Press to activate all button icons and NONE to Switch them all off Pressing one of the above fields without selecting a User Program afterwards has no effect Only when you select another User Program will the selected data filter start working 4 Press the button to return to the main page 5 Use the USER PROGRAM button to decide whether the filters you selected should be used button lights or not button dark Bypassing the AUTO FILL function Fill In On User Program Change User Programs also contain the address of the Style division pattern to be used when you recall those reg istrations By selecting a User Program you may there fore switch from the VARIATION 1 pattern which you selected by hand to VARIATION 3 stored in the new User Program for example If the button lights any automated changes to another Style pattern are usually preceded by a fill in phrase see the right illustration Current setting on the front panel STYLE CONTROL STYLE CONTROL BASS BASS INTRO END RIT INVERS INTRO END RIT INVERS VARIATION VARIATION HOOF BOO e FILL IN ON USER FILL IN ON USER Direct chan
362. note then press the remaining keys Any key you press after releasing the keys of notes already entered in the table replaces the old notes Press one of the note icons to specify the duration of the notels shown in the table This is possible both before and after playing the required notels on the keyboard Press the field to confirm your settings and add the new note s 17353 E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Programming Styles Style Composer W ERASE EVENT e Use the dial or the a buttons to select the event you want to delete e To select several consecutive events press the dial while turning it towards the left upward direction or the right downward direction e Press the ERASE EVENT button icon to remove the event you selected M MOVE EVENT This function allows you to move one or several events Note If the position to which you move the selected event already contains other events the moved event is added at the end of that group e Select the event you want to move Note Events located at 1 01 00 cannot be moved further to the left e To select several consecutive events press the dial while turning it towards the left upward direction or the right downward direction All events selected in this way appear on a dark back ground e Press the button icon The following pop up appears THES WINE EO ar Alteration Mode 1 01 000 CC 0 Bank Sele
363. ns ESE See eee eee 147 sing ihe Style CONVEIE sorer GR Ne 148 Auditioning the tracks uses EE EER Ed RR EE ee 148 Programming Styles Style Composer 151 COCO sos AA ASG AE RE EA ER DO D cae 151 Recording Styles from scratch si wi ae EE EER 152 Staring the Style COMPOSE nagasgas maaasahan 152 Clearing the RAM memory Initialize Style 152 Getting ready for the first track 153 KAO cate sae ER N 156 Auditioning your Style and adding more tracks 156 Saving VOU SWIC ses IE N anne 157 Recording other tracks and divisions 157 Muting tracks while recording others 157 SE EE OON N EE eee eee een 157 Using existing SIES scree as RR ER risik HEER as 158 Starting with all tracks of an existing Style 158 Copying individual Style tracks 159 Editing Styles on the fly via additional recordings 160 Adding notes in realtiMe ss naa PER RR RE 160 Adding controller data in realtime 160 Adding or changing settings of existing parts 160 Expression Panpot Reverb Chorus 161 Changing the preset tempo se EE EER EER SEE RR 162 Style Track Edit functions iss sis whos md wa na SG 162 Editing individual Style events Style Micro Edit 170 General notes about STYLE MICRO EDIT 170 Editing ede RA EE 1 42 Other edit operations PP 173 Disk Media functions ee se ee see 175 TRENON O as a eet ENE GER DE DEE
364. ntinue The message means that the lyrics of the previously selected song will be erased If that s OK with you press the field If not press the field to return to the TXT IMPORT page where the previous lyrics are displayed Now yourre all set for the synchronization work LYRICS OPTIONS 7 EER M0001 M Lyrics Synchronization PEG sai SEX BOMB AW ga JO PRESS REC TO START THE SYNC SESSION This page can also be selected with the field This display page should contain the first line of the text you imported The function can also be used to correct the synchronization of Lyrics data contained in a song you loaded Here s what we re going to do every line of the text you imported can be associated with a given quarter note of the song We ll do this while the song is play ing back Synchronizing text lines is a matter of pressing the TEMPO button on the beats where the currently selected line should appear during nor mal playback of the Standard MIDI File Each press of the button associates the text line below the arrows B with the quarter note where the but ton was pressed The preceding line automatically scrolls above the gt section while the next line appears below the arrows 9 Press to return to the beginning of the song or use Or to jump to a measure that lies a little ahead of the place where the first line should be displayed during normal operation
365. o function Saving a Style before copying allows you to revert to the previ ous version if something goes wrong See Saving your Style on page 157 Starting with all tracks of an existing Style The easiest way to do this Is by selecting a factory Style and edit it 1 Select the Style you want to work with see p 25 2 Press the button o sem o ds COCO oCo sS MENU GUITAR MODE ol ek USB DATA STORAGE CONTROLLERS 3 Press the STYLE COMPOSER field STYLE COMPOSER 4 Change the Style data to your liking Copying individual Style tracks The COPY function can be used to copy individual tracks Modes and Divisions to replace existing parts while keeping the remaining parts of the Style already in the Style RAM memory 1 Press the field on the STYLE COM POSER page followed by the field FROM Disk KEEP CC ara Style SHUFFLE 2 Press the field 3 Select the Style that contains the track s to be copied N Selecting a factory Style Use the STYLE buttons and the fields in the display to select the desired Style The long field shows the name of the Style selected as source N Selecting an external Style You can also work with a Style saved in the internal memory area on a floppy disk or a memory card e Press the field to jump to the STYLE FINDER page STYLE LIST a E3 Dre 8 8 8 SAMBA 118 SLROCK1 SLROCK2
366. ol Olivar de los Padres 01780 Mexico D F MEXICO TEL 55 5668 6699 NICARAGUA Bansbach Instrumentos Musicales Nicaragua Altamira D Este Calle Principal de la Farmacia 5ta Avenida 1 Cuadra al Lago 503 Managua Nicaragua TEL 505 277 2557 PANAMA SUPRO MUNDIAL S A Boulevard Andrews Albrook Panama City REP DE PANAMA TEL 315 0101 PARAGUAY Distribuidora De Instrumentos Musicales J E Olear y ESQ Manduvira Asuncion PARAGUAY TEL 595 21 492147 PERU Audionet Distribuciones Musicales SAC Juan Fanning 530 Miraflores Lima Peru TEL 511 4461388 TRINIDAD AMR Ltd Ground Floor Maritime Plaza Barataria Trinidad W I TEL 868 638 6385 URUGUAY Todo Musica S A Francisco Acuna de Figueroa 1771 C P 11 800 Montevideo URUGUAY TEL 02 924 2335 VENEZUELA Instrumentos Musicales Allegro C A Av las industrias edf Guitar import 7 zona Industrial de Turumo Caracas Venezuela TEL 212 244 1122 AUSTRIA Roland Elektronische Musikinstrumente HmbH Austrian Office Eduard Bodem Gasse 8 A 6020 Innsbruck AUSTRIA TEL 0512 26 44 260 BELGIUM FRANCE HOLLAND LUXEMBOURG Roland Central Europe N V Houtstraat 3 B 2260 Oevel Westerlo BELGIUM TEL 014 575811 CZECH REP K AUDIO Kardasovska 626 CZ 198 00 Praha 9 CZECH REP TEL 2 666 10529 DENMARK Roland Scandinavia A S Nordhavnsvej 7 Postbox 880 DK 2100 Copenhagen DENMARK TEL 3916 6200 FINLAND
367. old Jj Ce Ballads e Either press the field that corresponds to the desired song category or if you re not sure which category the song belongs to ALL Note The remaining options on this page RENAME EDIT and COPY are only available for specific categories e Press Back The display returns to the page shown under step 1 above This time however only songs belonging to the selected Index are displayed b Select the Finder The powerful part starts as soon as you press the FINDER field oe oe maa EE EE KIS EF c Search the database The next step is to decide how the Song Finder should look for the files e Press the field to search for all entries that start with the characters you entered BEA for example Files that match the specified criteria will be displayed at the top of the list The order depends on the button icon you activated SONG NAME ARTIST GENRE or FILE NAME e Press the field to have the E 60 E 50 search the selected column for files that contain the supplied information This would allow you to also locate a file called Raggabeat if you entered BEA Note See p 35 for how to use the Play amp Search function d Decide what you want to look for e Press the field if you want the E 60 E 50 to look for song names then enter the name or part of it e Press the field if you want to look for an art ist s name then enter the n
368. oller See page 53 Arranger Hold The ARRANGER HOLD function sustains the notes you play in the chord recognition area ZONE until you play other notes This function is switched on by default so that you can briefly play the chord for a given bar and then release all keys in the chord recog nition area If the icon indicator is dark the melodic accompaniment bass and other parts stops as soon as you release all keys in the chord recognition area only the drums keep playing E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Roland More refined Arranger settings 1 Select the ARRANGER SETTING page see step 1 of Chord recognition area ZONE on p 66 ARRANGER SETTING EF ARRANGER MELODY ONE ORC 9 OPTIONS La INTEL TYPE TOUCH ZONE TYPE HODE LEFT WIET OS ei RIGHT Em EER Peer 2 Press the button icon to switch the function off dark or on lights 3 Press the button to return to the main page or continue with the next step Intro amp Ending Alteration If the Intro and Ending patterns sound odd when you start a song with a rather unusual chord Csus4 for instance switch off the ALTERATION function In that case the special chord is memorized but the Intro or Ending uses the normal chord progression e g C Am F G If this button icon is on however the chord pro gression of the selected Intro or Ending pattern is adapted to the first chord you play which may lead to odd results
369. olume balance between the sound that is sent through the delay W and the sound that is not sent through the delay D Level 0 127 Output level 40 Flanger DLY This effect connects a flanger and a delay in parallel Flanger Pre Delay 0 0 100 0ms Adjusts the delay time from when the direct sound begins until the flanger sound is heard Flanger Rate 0 05 10 0Hz Frequency i e modulation speed Flanger Depth 0 127 Modulation intensity Flanger Feedback 98 0 98 Adjusts the propor tion of the flanger sound that is fed back into the effect Negative settings will invert the phase Flanger Balance D100 0W D50 50W DO 100W Volume balance between the direct sound D and the flanger sound W Delay Time 0 0 500 0ms Adjusts the time until the delay is heard Delay Feedback 9800 0 980 Adjusts the amount of the delay sound that s fed back into the effect Negative settings invert the phase Delay HF Damp 200 8000Hz Bypass Adjusts the fre quency above which sound fed back to the effect is filtered out If you don t want to filter out any high frequencies set this parameter to BYPASS Delay Balance D100 0W D50 50W DO 100W Adjusts the volume balance between the sound that is sent through the delay W and the sound that is not sent through the delay D Level 0 127 Output level 41 CHO Flanger This effect connects a chorus and a flanger in parallel
370. on applies to all tracks N MODE Allows you to select the Mode to be edited Major minor or 7th W DIVISION Use this parameter to select the Division you want to edit Intro 14 Main 1 4 Fill Dwn 153 Fill Up 153 End 154 FROM BAR 1 last measure of the track or pattern Refers to the first measure to be edited By default the FROM value is set to the beginning of the selected track s BEAT 1 number of beats per bar Specifies the beat position The number of selectable beats depends on the selected time signature CPT 1 119 Refers to the starting CPT position CPT is short for Clock Pulse Time the smallest unit used by the E 60 E 50 There are 120 CPTs to every beat of a 4 4 bar Change this setting only if your edit operation should start after the selected beat BI FOR Specifies how many bars beats and CPTs are to be inserted BAR BEAT CPT See above E EXECUTE Press this field to confirm your settings and insert the requested number of bars beats and clocks T GG TRANSPOSE EE ART a EDELE EIEN ho NN Ma oe fz FROM 5 This function allows you to transpose the notes of the selected track non note data obviously cannot be transposed MTRACK ADrums Acc6 ALL Allows you to select the track you wish to edit You can also select ALL here in which case the operation applies to all tracks When combined with FROM NOTE and TO NOTE see below
371. one of the 8 Music Style families The button of the selected family lights STYLE CONTROL section Use these buttons to select the desired Music Style pattern and to start stop Music Style playback see p 22 TEMPO section button Press this button to switch the internal metronome on or off The remaining buttons TAP SLOW FAST gt allow you to set the tempo of the metronome the Arranger or the recorder sequencer IS E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Panel descriptions MUSIC ASSISTANT LYRICS amp SCORE MIXER ED DISK amp MEDIA MUSIC ASSISTANT button Press this button to access the MUSIC ASSISTANT environment where you can select Music Style regis trations for a given song you want to play You can also program your own Music Assistant registrations LYRICS amp SCORE button Press this button if you want the lyrics contained in the songs to appear in the display At the same time the chords of the notes played by the song parts will also be displayed This however is information that is extracted derived in realtime by the E 60 E 50 This function can even display the notes of the selected part as a score MIXER button This button provides access to display pages where you can set the level pan and effects send levels of the E 60 E 50 s parts KEYBOARD SONG and STYLE DISK amp MEDIA button Press this button if you wish to save load data from the internal memory a floppy disk o
372. ongs The main page When you leave Demo mode or any other display page or if you do not change any of the E 60 E 50 s settings the display looks more or less as follows onc New Song E TYLE Strummlin Pop Free Panel 6 The information shown here depends on the E 60 E 50 s current settings the data you loaded etc but the above illustration should be fairly close to what you see on your instrument Almost all information displayed is assigned to fields you can press to Jump to a different page set a parameter or select a parameter for editing Pressing field 1 for instance takes you to the ARRANGER SETTING page Press if you want to change the split point settings The and buttons 3 look different and therefore also behave differently press one of them to select the section whose tempo should be dis played You can change the tempo value of the selected section using the and buttons after stopping playback They do not allow you to switch from Style to Song mode however because that is handled automatically depending on whether the or button currently lights Note While on the main page you can also set the tempo using the DATA ENTRY dial and the DEC INC buttons The fields indicated by 4 take you to a page where you can select songs SONG Music Styles STYLE or User Programs USER PROG These fields have the same functions as the buttons of the same name in the FINDER pa
373. onverter You may want to edit the song before converting parts of it into a Music Style See Editing one or several tracks TRACK EDIT on p 129 and GLOBAL CHANGE on p 137 for details General considerations Here are a few guidelines for converting song parts to a Music Style e See Concept on p 151 and Looped vs one shot patterns on p 151 for the different pattern types e The Music Style created using the Style Converter can be used in Arranger mode not in 16 track Sequencer mode Music Styles are accompaniment patterns If the new Style should be generally usable i e for any song of a given genre try avoid chord changes in the basic patterns MAIN 1 4 Remember that you can transpose your Styles in realtime by playing different chords in the chord recognition area Also it Is usu ally wiser not to include the melody in your conver sion e Try to isolate the passages and parts that are really typical of the song e Transitions rolls etc should be converted to Fill Ins The intro should be converted to an Intro pattern 147 E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Using the 16 track sequencer For a really professional result you will also have to take advantage of the E 60 E 50 s Style Composer to ensure that your new Style also works for minor and seventh chords See Programming Styles Style Composer on p 151 Though pattern length and memory capacity is no issue try to w
374. oot controller for expression data where needed Adding or changing settings of existing parts The following operations require that you record in Mix mode without touching the keyboard or control lers Unless you want to program continuous value changes Panpot data for example you can stop recording after the first beat Static settings are indeed always written at the beginning of the track in ques tion T GO BE Sound Drum Set selection To select another sound or Drum Set for an existing Style track proceed as follows 1 Press the RECORDER button STL COMPOSER REC STANDBY accomp UU mo e en Da TRACK INSTRUMENT GUITAR MODE S 2 Press the field and use the dial to select the track you wish to assign another sound or Drum Set to If you select the AccDrums track the display looks slightly different STL COMPOSER REC STANDBY TRACK INSTRUMENT i NRPN DRUM vw GG Ka 3 Select the DIVISION and MODE whose settings you wish to change and possibly also all clones page 154 4 Press the field and use the DEC INC buttons to select Mix Let us assume that your track already contains data 5 Select the new sound or Drum Set to be assigned to the selected track and division by pressing the field and using the on screen fields and TONE buttons Finally press to return to the page shown above Note See Drum Instrument amp Pitch for the additional
375. or down in semitone steps using the controls shown in the display You can also specify which parts are to be transposed page 48 ONE TOUCH section These buttons allow you to select the desired One Touch memory There are four memories per internal Music Style and the 80 Custom memories They work a lot like the User Programs because they assign dif ferent sounds and effects settings to the Keyboard parts and carry out some other changes See page 65 V LINK button Press this button to take advantage of the E 60 E 50 s V LINK functionality for controlling video material via certain performance functions and the right most keys on the E 60 E 50 s keyboard By using V LINK compatible video equipment visual effects can be easily linked to and made part of the expressive elements of a performance By connecting the E 60 E 50 to an optional Edirol DV 7PR or V 4 you can switch images in synchronization with music or use the E 60 E 50 s performance functions or right most keys to switch clips control playback speed etc 1 29 o ES EI cB ce es es YE Le L Em a seed EE mo EE EE 2 pal agi Le ae AI POWER ON button Press this button to switch the E 60 E 50 on and off If you need to turn off the power completely first turn off the power switch then unplug the power cord from the wall outlet Refer to Switching the E 60 E 50 on off on p 19 BENDER MODULATION lever When pushed towards the b
376. or 65 these are note numbers of the drum sounds whose pitch can be changed The CC06 value which changes the pitch can be set to 0 127 whereby 64 means that the pitch remains unchanged Editing events Mi Editing Pitch Bend messages Pitch Bend messages can be positive or negative the range is 128 128 The value O means that the pitch of notes being played in that area is not altered If a Pitch Bend occurrence is not reset to 0 at some Stage all notes will keep sounding flat when you no longer want them to Mi Editing control changes These messages CC can be set to the desired value 0 127 when the corresponding effect is needed but they also need to be reset to O to avoid unpleasant surprises N About the Note messages As stated above note messages comprise a note number a velocity value and a Gate Time value The range for note numbers is O C 127 G9 Velocity messages can be set anywhere between 1 extremely soft and 127 The value O cannot be entered because it would effectively switch off the note 172 After selecting a Gate Time entry pressing the dial calls up the following pop up SHALES MINE eN GATE TIME EDIT ES ee ICICI DATE II oe EIS Here you can either set the required length as a CPT value J 120CPT or use the note fields to avoid lengthy calculations Use the numeric pad to enter the desired duration Drum parts usually use the Gate Time value 1 fo
377. orded by activating the corresponding RECORDING SELECT button icons RECORDING SELECT Meaning NOTE Only note messages are recorded Pitch Bend modulation etc data are ignored CONTROL CHANGE Control change messages such as modulation CCO1 expression CC11 etc CCOO and CC32 bank select messages also belong to this group PROGRAM CHANGE Program change messages Only necessary if the track should use different sounds PITCH BEND Left right movements of the BENDER MODULATION lever SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE SysEx messages for the MASTER track 18 Select the desired sound for your new track 19 Select the bar where playback and or recording should start e Press the RECORDER button to return to the beginning of the song measure 1 or e Use the RECORDER gt or e button to select a measure slightly ahead of where you want to start recording 20 Press the button or play the first notes if you selected COUNT IN Wait Note Note The function can also be assigned to the D Beam controller E 60 or an optional footswitch see Start Stop Song on p 53 Play Stop on p 55 21 Play the new part 22 Press the RECORDER button to stop recording E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Roland Example 2 Adding tracks Example 2 Adding tracks Here s how to add a track to a song in the E 60 E 50 s Song RAM memory This is only meaningful after recording at least one part o
378. ording mode is particularly useful for recording the rhythm track 10 because you can first record the bass and snare drums then add a few tom hits here and there and record the HiHat for example Mix is selected by default for tracks that already contain data 12 If you don t want to start and stop recording man ually use the PUNCH fields Press the field and use the dial or the DECJ INC buttons to specify the measure where recording should start If you start playback a few bars before this position the sequencer will activate recording as soon as It reaches this measure Press the field and use the dial or the DEC INC buttons to spec ify the measure where recording should end Recording is deactivated when the sequencer reaches this position Playback will continue however and needs to be stopped using the but ton To take advantage of the PUNCH IN OUT function you need to switch on the and or button icon Note The Punch In Out function can also be assigned to an optional footswitch see p 56 For those applications there is no need to set the PUNCH IN amp OUT positions beforehand But you still need to press the field 13 If necessary press the field and set the required octave transposition 4 4 This allows you to record special noises usually assigned to the lowest notes numbers like the ones of fingers sliding over guitar strings etc if the selected sound provides them
379. ork in small but meaningful units Here s an example most songs rely on a structure based on 4 measure blocks Converting 6 measures is thus a bit odd though perfectly possible Prepare a simple pattern for MAIN 1 and increas ingly complex accompaniments for the remaining patterns Always set the correct KEY page 150 Only then will the Style really work as expected when used with the E 60 E 50 s Arranger Your new Style resides in the E 60 E 50 Style RAM memory Do not forget to save it before selecting another Style in Arranger mode or switching off the E 60 E 50 Commercially available Standard MIDI Files are pro tected by a copyright Please note that the Style Converter should only be used to create Music Styles for private use Roland assumes no responsibility for copyright infringements that may result from the use of the Style Converter Using the Style Converter 1 2 Select and load a different song This is not necessary if you want to use the song you have just recorded or played back Otherwise see Working with the Song Finder on p 110 or page 35 for how to load a song In any case you should listen to it and try to isolate the eight tracks whose parts should be included in your new Music Style Press the RECORDER button The display changes to STYLE CAAA CONVERTER 143 3 4 5 Press the field in the right col umn SLES ao MEE 5021 mens 0001
380. orner of the display KAR hddbbdhaad gt onc New Song TYLE Strummlin Pop Free Panel BEE ET NN eass XV Ac Bass Vintage EP1 Note See Song Arranger Start Priority on p 196 if Arranger playback does not start 7 Play another chord in the left half of the keyboard The same pattern is now played in that key You don t even have to play full chords e For major chords playing just the root note is enough e g C for C major A for A major etc e For minor chords playing the root note and the third Key to its right will do E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Roland Playing to an automatic accompaniment e For seventh chords playing the root and the second key to its left is enough C major C minor Only the key that corresponds to Root note third key to the the chord s name right C7 Root note second key to the left Note The function that takes care of this easy fingering is called INTELLIGENT page 67 See also p 209 for a list of other chords that can be played using this system augmented diminished etc What you hear now is the MAIN 1 pattern the and VARIATION 1 buttons light This is the simplest accompaniment of the selected Music Style Let s listen to the accompaniment you could use for your choruses 8 Press the VARIATION 2 button the and buttons light and 2 flashes VARIATION LIELIL At the end of the VARIATION 1 pattern the VARIA TION 2 button lig
381. orresponding field and use the dial to select the track STAFF 1 is the upper staff STAFF 2 the lower one e f you happen to know the key your song is in press the field and use the dial to select the correct setting This is only necessary to avoid that the score is clut tered up with accidentals sharps and flats e Use the gj and pag fields to specify what clef should be used for displaying the notes Press whichever is more convenient for you this setting has no effect on the octave the notes are actually played in it is only used for display purposes e Use the button icons in the PITCH row to specify how the note names should be displayed next to the note symbols means that the note names are not displayed refers to the Anglo Saxon German Dutch sys tem while corresponds to the French Ital lan system e Use the button icons in the DRUM RANGE row to specify which notes of the drum track usually track 10 should be displayed means that you will only see the notes between note numbers 35 and 59 FULL on the other hand means that you will see all drum notes This setting is only used if you set one of the TRACK field s to 10 or number of a track that plays a drum part Most drum parts only trigger MIDI notes between numbers 35 and 59 AO Recording your music You can record your music as Songs that can be saved internally to a memory card or a floppy disk There are two approaches for r
382. osing only the Key board parts so that you can play to a song in your key but sound in the song s key Note If you also want note messages received via MIDI to be transposed you must set TRANSPOSE RX On Off on p 192 to ON 4 Press the button to return to the main page As long as the interval is different from 0 the button lights to signal that the Trans pose function is active To switch off the transposi tion function press the button or field again then the key that is assigned to the O inter val The transposition interval is indicated on the main page mer DEd com cm New Song Strummlin Pop Free Panel Lower St Slow Stri a NaturalPiano sass XY Ac Bass Vintage EP1 T refers to a semitone decrease of the pitch so that you hear a B each time you play a C It also means that rather than the A you press you will hear G sharp or A flat Global Transpose There is also a master transpose control that alters the pitch of all of the E 60 E 50 s sections Its value is added to the current transposition interval as well as User Program transposition until you reset it to O or until you switch off your E 60 E 50 1 Press the button t s COM de HAND ee USB DATA CONTROLLERS STORAGE PA FOOT D BEAM dies EDIT E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Roland Octave 2 Press the field followed by the MASTER TUNE field
383. ot necessary to establish a new link it is meant to cancel an existing link Press MAKE NEW SONG LINK The display changes to Otte a Qa MES i DONTTELL DONTTELL MI Eel FEVER FE9ERID Eel FEVER FE9ERID MID 3 Nam Ee FORCA FORcAAID Ee FORCA FORcAAID MID iw FRIDAYNE FRIDAYNLMID Ev FRIDAYNE FRIDAYNLMID MID Note Songs that also contain lyrics information are flagged by means of an ET icon The note J means that the file in guestion also contains Play amp Search information See Locating files with the Song Finder on p 110 4 _ Press the field of the song you want to link to the currently selected User Program 5 Press the field to establish the link to the song whose name appears This takes you back to the User Program page The selection field now contains a small SONG message On the main page User Programs with a link to a song are indicated by means of a paper clip icon Linking a MIDI Set to a User Program MIDI Sets are User Programs for MIDI parameters There are eight such memories page 193 If you regularly use the E 60 E 50 in different MIDI environments studio live band preparing three MIDI Sets and linking them to the User Programs you usually use in the studio on stage etc can be a time saver In other situations such a link could be dangerous because it would reconfigure the E 60 E 50 s MIDI parameters without you actually
384. ot occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Unauthorized changes or modification to this system can void the users authority to operate this equipment This equipment requires shielded interface cables in order to meet FCC class B Limit For Canada NOTICE This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference Causing Equipment Regulations AVIS Cet appareil num rique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du R glement sur le materiel brouilleur du Canada
385. ou like simply assign a Drum Set to the desired track and start recording This requires no particular initialization procedure Track 10 however can only play Drum Sets and should therefore be used for your main percussion applications 5 Press the field to really initialize the Song RAM memory which you haven t done so far The E 60 E 50 now initializes the Song RAM memory and jumps to the main 16 track Sequencer page Preparations 6 Press the RECORDER button PUNCH t PUNCH FOOT PUNCH Fa eer EE RECORDING SELECT PROGRAM a Cl WC 2 CONTROL SYSTEM Or J 7 Press the field and use the dial or the DEC INC buttons to select the track you want to record to E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Roland Example 1 Recording a song from scratch 8 Press the field and use the dial or the DEC INC buttons to specify how the track should behave some are always GS tracks KEYBOARD PART MELODY INTELL Sound and tone generator of the selected part Song parts C If you select GS or if If you select the corre there is no sponding part alternative Track REC TYPE 1 3 GS cannot be changed 4 GS UP1 5 GS cannot be changed 6 GS UP2 7 10 GS cannot be changed 11 GS LWR 12 GS MBS 13 GS cannot be changed 14 GS cannot be changed 15 G5 MELODY INTELL 16 GS GS cannot be changed The track uses the same sound as the Keyboard part
386. ou to select the track you wish to edit Select ALL to edit all tracks MM MODE Allows you to select the Mode to be edited Major minor or 7th BI DIVISION Use this parameter to select the Division you want to edit Intro 1 4 Main 1 4 Fill Dwn 1 3 Fill Up 153 End 154 MFROM TO FROM refers to the position where the edit operation is to begin That position is specified as a Bar Beat CPT cluster TO designates the position where the edit operation is to end Bar Beat CPT See page 163 for details WE EXECUTE Press this field to confirm your settings and edit the data COPY SALE TRAGIC EYNI od EL NESIESSE SIE SE GIE N TRACK DIVI N y dr See page 158 for a step by step discussion This function also allows you to copy tracks from other Styles 165 E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Programming Styles Style Composer INSERT ET lilo er pe REL ER URE Lb INSERT allows you to Insert space and shift data that lie behind the FROM position further towards the end of the track this is the exact opposite of DELETE The empty measures you create can be filled using the COPY function or by recording new phrases in that area Note This function provides no TO pointer Instead you have to specify the length of the insert using the FOR values MTRACK ADrums Acc6 ALL Allows you to select the track you wish to edit You can also select ALL here in which case the operati
387. ounts backwards 4 3 etc to indicate the pattern s duration Again there are four Ending phrases to choose from If you don t press a numeric button 1 4 after switching on END RIT the Arranger automatically uses the ENDING phrase that corresponds to the MAIN number you have been using up to that point Note Here again it would be wiser not to play chords while the Ending phrase is running Note See Additional Arranger Style functions on p 60 for more Arranger functions Selecting Music Styles So far we have been using only one Music Style the one that is selected automatically at power on Here is how to select a different accompaniment 1 Press a button of the STYLE pad to select a Music Style family STYLE 8 BEAT LIVE pisco BALL 3422 Latin 16 BEAT BAND DANCE Room BLUES The indicator of that button lights and the display looks as follows Te SME i SteamtrainCountr Posaunenpolka Country Ballad CUSTOM The display shows a list of 10 Music Styles available for the family you selected If the name of the desired Style is not displayed 2 Use the PAGE 1 PAGE 4 fields to switch pages amm m The number of pages depends on the selected family Some families have only one page while others may have two three or four 3 Press the field of the Music Style you want to use Country Beat CUSTOM If the Arranger is running while you select
388. our search criteria Note If no Music Assistant registrations were found the fol lowing message appears and no entries are displayed in which case you need to press the Or field to display all entries again MUSIG ASSISTANT LIST DEI No Match Found 6 Press the field of the Music Assistant registration you need and start playing Note To return to the previous page without searching for registrations press the field Note To once again display all file names after a search which causes only matching entries to be displayed press one of the alphabetical sort icons INAME ARTIST GENRE on the Music Assistant page Note See Music Assistant Mark on p 96 and Music Assis tant functions on p 99 for how to create or edit Music Assis tant data Playing back songs Standard MIDI Files Your E 60 E 50 contains all kinds of functions for cus tomizing the songs you play back via easy to use rou tines Let us first look at the playback functions proper 1 Press the FINDER button o h You can also press the field on the main page to select songs Co ad The display changes to SONG LIST Olea 8 8 Ore Es FEVER FEVER MID 3 ASTDAY FIRSTDAY MID ELY H u FORCA iFORCA MID f FRIDAYNI IFRIDAYNI MID JE HEREWEGO HEREWEGO MI OPTIONS a Fioer FOUND 47 Gabo GLOBAL 47 2 If it isn t already highlighted press the field in the upper right co
389. our songs if you wish to take advantage of the Play amp Search facility See page 35 for how to use that facility in a real life situation Here s how to program the phrase Note This information cannot be entered for files that reside on a floppy disk Be sure to copy your song to the internal memory or a memory card see p 112 and to edit that copy On the SONG OPTIONS page press the field SONG OPTIONS Play the melody on the keyboard to be assigned sPlay amp Search signature d7 auuu RENAME Play the notes of the main theme the one you ll most likely play when using Play amp Search for locating this song The key and rhythm are of little importance you must get the intervals right though The boxes will display a quarter note for every note you played Five note boxes thus mean that you played five notes If you make a mistake proceed as follows to cor rect it Press the field if you only wish to correct the last note you entered Press to erase all notes you have played so far Then play the notes again Press the field to save this information i e the selected song file in the internal memory Or on memory card Songs for which there Is Play amp Search information are flagged with a note symbol 4 to the left of their names N Copy This function allows you to copy the selected song to another memory area _ Be sure to select a song before pressing th
390. ower when a memory card is inserted partway into the slot Doing so will damage the data in internal memory Memory cards usable with the E 60 E 50 e The E 60 E 50 can use commercially available CompactFlash and SmartMedia memory cards You can purchase such cards at a computer shop or digital camera dealer e Memory cards you purchase must meet the following conditions e Power supply voltage 3 3V e Capacity 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512MB 1GB 2GB 4GB 2GB and 4GB only with Microdrive e The E 60 E 50 cannot use cards of types other than the above Electromagnetic radiations e Electromagnetic radiations may cause a deterioration of audio performances Such possible deterioration consists in an audio sig nal being emitted On ceasing the electromagnetic noise the emis sion of the audio signal will simultaneously stop Liability and copyright e Unauthorized recording distribution sale lending public perfor mance broadcasting or the like in whole or in part of a work musical composition video broadcast public performance or the like whose copyright is held by a third party is prohibited by law e Do not use this unit for purposes that could infringe on a copy right held by a third party Roland assumes no responsibility what soever with regard to any infringements of third party copyrights arising through your use of this unit e SmartMedia is a trademark of Toshiba Corp e Compact Flash and are trademarks of S
391. page 6 Set the desired value with the dial or the DECJ INC buttons and upper right cor ner allow you to specify how strongly the multi effects output signal should be processed by the Reverb and or Chorus processor If that is unneces sary set both parameters to O 7 Press the button to return to the main page Linking Multi FX type selection to the Upper1 part Upper 1 M FX Link If you like the E 60 E 50 can automatically load the Multi FX type that is suited for the Tone you assign to the UP1 part 1 Press the button eatin SETTING ni er USB DATA FUNCTION ed ER STORAGE Fi FOOT M D BEAM 2 Press the UTILITY then the field PLAYER FEEDBACK KEYBOARD SONG PLAY QUICK START er Mot LINK FROM 1st NOTE SHING FILL IN ON USER PROGRAM CHNG 1 Thru 15 St Chorus 29 OD gt Delay 2 Stereo EQ 16 St Flanger 30 DST Chorus 3 Overdrive 17 Step Flanger 31 DST gt Flanger 4 Distortion 18 St Delay 32 DST Delay 5 Phaser 19 Mod Delay 33 EH gt Chorus 6 Spectrum 20 3 Tap Delay 34 EH gt Flanger 7 Enhancer 21 4 Tap Delay 35 EH gt Delay 8 Auto Wah 22 Time Delay 36 Chorus gt DLY 9 Rotary 23 2 Pitch Shifter 37 Flanger gt DLY 10 Compressor 24 FBK Pitch 38 CHO gt Flanger 1 Limiter 25 Reverb 39 CHO Delay 1 12 Hexa Chorus 13 Trem Chorus 14 Space D 26 Gate Reverb 27 OD Chorus 28 OD gt Flanger 40 Flanger DLY 41 CHO Fl
392. page 44 for how to enter the desired name 5 Press the EXTERNAL MEMORY FLOPPY INTERNAL MEMORY field to ele the area ace you want to save the text file 6 Press the field to save the file The E 60 E 50 returns to the LYRICS page 7 Press the button to return to the main page E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Roland About the seguencer s main page Using the 16 track sequencer Your E 60 E 50 contains a powerful sequencer with a host of edit functions Even so you will quickly notice that the 16 track Sequencer is as simple to operate as it is powerful When you press the RECORDER button the display changes to oord es Se ToS BAGOT Ta TULI as iui Important notes e f you use the 16 track Sequencer to edit a song that already contains Cover modifications the Cover set tings are ignored and erased when you save the edited version of your song We therefore recom mend freezing the Cover settings before continuing see p 107 e While in this mode the knob does not allow you to set the balance between the Song and Keyboard parts it only affects the volume of the Song parts e While the E 60 E 50 s 16 track Sequencer is selected the notes played on the keyboard are not transmitted via MIDI About the sequencer s main page Let us first look at the information shown on this page The button icon allows you to listen to the selected track in isolation it mutes a
393. pend on the kind of sound or Drum Set you selected te z 45 Pe EE DELER a Loves PP add Pi PALETTE 5S DRUM INSTR EDIT EA ras o Press the field of the parameter you want to edit and use the dial or the DEC INC buttons to set the desired value REVERB TYPE This parameter allows you to specify what kind of reverb effect you need The available reverb types are Room1 These types simulate the reverb characteris Room2 tics of a room The higher the number 1 2 Room3 or 3 the bigger the room becomes Hall1 These types simulate the reverb of a small Hall2 1 or large 2 concert hall and thus sound much bigger than the Room types above Plate This algorithm simulates the acoustics of a concert hall Delay A delay effect no reverb Works a lot like an echo effect and thus repeats the sounds Pan Delay This is a stereo version of the above delay effect It creates repetitions that alternate between the left and right channels The Original setting means that the song uses its own programmed reverb settings The User Prog setting for Styles means that the Style uses the reverb settings of the currently active User Program E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Roland Before saving your settings CHORUS TYPE Chorus broadens the spatial image of the sound and creates a stereo impression You can choose from 8 types of Chorus Chorus These are conventiona
394. po Sync Start Stop V Link interactive demo in sev eral languages System updates Flash memory USB Data transfer amp MIDI communi cation Singer Key Adapter Miscellaneous E Connectors Headphone sockets 2 Pedal amp footswitch sockets HOLD FOOTSWITCH EXPRESSION programmable Audio connections OUTPUT sockets Data exchange PCMCIA slot CompactFlash Memory Stick Smart Media Microdrive USB port data storage amp MIDI communication MIDI IN amp OUT L Mono R 1 4 N General specifications Speaker power Power supply Dimensions mm Weight Supplied accessories Options 10W x2 RMS PSB 4U adapter 12V 3 5A E 60 1260 W x 161 H x 374 D E 50 1020 W x 152 5 H x 355 5 D E 60 13kg E 50 8 5kg Owner s Manual power cord metal music stand CD ROM External AC adapter DATABASE MANAGER software PK 5A Dynamic MIDI Pedal MSA MSD MSE series floppy disks Roland amp third party RH 25 50 200 300 Headphones DP 2 Pedal switch DP 6 Pedal switch piano type BOSS FS 5U Foot switch EV 5 7 Expression pedal BOSS FV 300L Volume Expres sion pedal KC 150 350 550 Keyboard amplifiers Memory cards third party manufacturers Note Specifications are subject to change without prior notice E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Appendix 20 MFX types and parameters 1 Thru The effect processor is bypassed 2 Stereo EQ This is a four band stereo equalizer low mid x 2 high
395. r ner The E 60 E 50 is shipped with a few example songs that can be used here This function is also available for songs you record or save to the internal memory or a memory card The display shows a list of 5 songs Standard MIDI Files in the internal memory If you prefer to listen to one of your own songs on floppy disk insert it into the drive and press the field To listen to a song on memory card insert the card and select EXTERNAL MEMORY then continue with step 3 3 If the name of the song you want to listen to is already displayed press its line 4 To display the next 5 songs press the field in the lower right corner You can press this field as many times as necessary or until it is no longer displayed You can also use the dial or the DEC INC buttons To return to a previous group of 5 songs press or use the dial or the DEC INC buttons E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Roland Playing back songs Standard MIDI Files Quick location of the song you need There are several ways of quickly locating the song you are after W Sorting files Press the SONG NAME ARTIST or field to sort the song files according to artist names kind of music Genre or file name which is usually rather incomprehensible The right column now contains the selected entry only one of them can be displayed along with the song name Continue with step 3 to select the song you want to listen to Mi Using th
396. r PCM CIA card You will also find data management functions here like deleting files formatting floppies or cards etc page 175 LCD CONTRAST knob Use this knob to adjust the display s contrast if it is difficult to read The display itself is a touch screen and therefore needs to be clear at all times so that you know what you are doing Note The display may take some time to warm up That is why you may have to change the contrast several times after pow ering on COVER button This button provides access to pre programmed tem plates that allow you to quickly modify a song s or Music Style s character Press it once or twice to select the Song or Style level See pages 38 and 63 MAKEUP TOOLS button Press this button to modify the settings of the cur rent song or Music Style if the pre programmed Cover settings do not provide what you re looking for See page 102 TA o DISKE MEDIA o Roland COVER Ciro MAKEUP MENU button Press this button to call up a menu that provides access to more in depth E 60 E 50 functions you may only wish to set from time to time EXIT button Press this button to return to the previously selected display page or the E 60 E 50 s main page E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Roland Front panel Note You can press and hold most buttons to jump to an associated display page DATA ENTRY DA NUMERIC PAD PUSH TONE TE DEE a ae W BES EE 4 a ae W BES EE EASY
397. r after playing back an existing song See page 124 for how to start a new song Please bear with us and perform all indicated steps to get a feel for the way the 16 track Sequencer ticks Besides what you learn here will also come in handy for recording your own Music Styles Note See also Easy editing and useful functions on p 129 for some additional functions that are not covered here Note If the song you wish to supplement contains MAKEUP TOOLS settings be sure to freeze those data and to save your new version before changing it See Before saving your settings on page 107 1 Press the button EF G SOLO MUTE N PITTE BASS1 ETES O n d ELOWALTOY T Id TWIN TP The MEAS field at the top of the display informs you about the current measure The tempo and time signature are displayed next to it Use the RECORDER and p5 buttons to jump to another measure or to return to the beginning of the song 2 Press the RECORDER button ma EE EE Ee EE EE zu SU 127 E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Using the 16 track sequencer The display changes to Cte La Cae PB RECORDING SELECT PROGRAM e CONTROL SYSTEM CHANGE EXCLUSIVE 3 Press the field and use the dial or the DEC INC buttons to select the track you want to record to 4 Press the field and use the dial or the DEC INC buttons to specify how the tracks linked to the Keyboard parts should behav
398. r all notes Increasing it to 20 for example has no audible effect on the sound dura tions The maximum duration a note event can have is 99 999 clocks which corresponds to roughly 208 bars ca About Alteration Mode messages This message type is only available for melodic Style tracks i e not for ADrums or ABass tracks and needs to be inserted by hand using CREATE EVENT Style tracks you only just recorded do not contain it It allows you to use a revolutionary system for adapt ing the recorded notes to a more natural behavior also known as voicing There are two options Degree This setting refers to the old system for real time conversion of Style track information for Style playback Based on the fundamentals of the chords you play during Arranger playback it often leads to odd jumps of certain parts Nearest Refers to a new more musical system for real time shifts of the recorded Style notes during Arranger playback Let us first look at an illustration Recorded strings track Result with Degree Chords played in the recognition area This new system is called Adaptive Chord Voicing The notes of the melodic Style tracks are compared against the chords played in the recognition area If the next chord you play contains the note the selected part is already sounding based on the previous chord that note is m
399. r to lis ten to the chords you play choose OFF In that case you will only hear the drum parts of the Music Styles you select The range of the LEFT or RIGHT keyboard area depends on the main split point see Setting the split point on page 46 1 On the main page press the field Strummlin Pop Free Panel son an Tag ass XV Ac_Bass You can also select this page by pressing MENU but ton gt ARRANGER SETTINGS ARRANGER CHORD The display changes to ARRANGER SETTING e C ABRANGER 7 EFTA 5 GT GTA Tipe TOUCH ZONE TYPE HODE LEFT Meg amor EED RIGHT EES Grosird JEFF Gore T ARRANGER 2 Press the ZONE LEFT WHOLE or field to select the chord recognition area 3 Press the button to return to the main page Note When you press the EASY SETTING ARR button the setting is selected Note OFF can also be assigned to an optional footswitch see Arr Chord Off on page 56 Arranger Type chord mode Another important choice is how you want to transmit note information to the Arranger 4 Press the STANDARD or field STANDARD This is the normal chord recognition mode The melodic accompaniment uses the notes you play in the chord recognition area ZONE If you play only one note in that area the accompaniment plays only that note i e it assumes that you deliberately chose to omit the third and fifth of your chord To have
400. rass or guitar hits to your melody The velocity value used for playing these notes is 100 The number 1 2 or 3 bears on the octave of this added chord 7 Ab3 G4 2 Ab4 G5 and 3 Ab5 G6 Move your hand outside the D Beam s range to Stop the D Beam part from sounding the chord Note Do not forget to assign a suitable Tone to the LWR part which acts as D Beam part Minus One By holding your hand inside the D Beam s range you switch off the parts that can be muted with the button at that time page 38 Rotary Slow Fast Allows you to select the slow or fast speed of the Rotary effect This only works if the Rotary effect is currently assigned to the Multi FX 4 Press the button to return to the main page o4 Using optional footswitches Sustain Footswitch HOLD Also called Hold or Damper pedal the footswitch you connect to the HOLD socket allows you to hold the notes you play on the keyboard in much the same way as on an acoustic piano Though you cannot assign other functions to this footswitch you can decide when a given part should respond to these messages The HOLD FOOTSW function which specifies how the Hold pedal should behave is available for the following parts UP1 2 LWR and MBS If the keyboard is not split If the keyboard is split the sustain pedal s Hold function only works for the right most part When UP1 2 are layered the Hold effect applies to those Upper parts
401. rate User Program file in the memory area that contains the currently active Set List There may be times when somebody from the audience asks you to play a given song for which you did prepare a User Program but maybe in a completely different Set List Rather than loading another list you can sim ply use the Finder to load just that specific User Pro gram If necessary a User Program loaded with the Finder can be assigned to the currently active Set List using WRITE The Finder can therefore also be used for creating best of compilations from various User Program Set Lists 1 Press the FINDER button The display changes to USE PROGRAM INST Otte BA 2 Specify which memory area contains the User Pro gram you need EXTERNAL MEMORY or FLOPPY The display shows a list of 5 User Programs of the selected device internal memory card or floppy disk Note The E 60 E 50 does not support User Programs of the old Roland E and KR series 3 Press the field of the User Program you need If the name is not displayed use PAGE to go to a different page then press the field of the settings you are interested in This page lists the names of all individual User Pro grams contained on the selected media Quick location of the User Program you need There are several ways of quickly locating the User Pro gram you are after W Sorting files Press a field to sort the User Program files USER PRG The
402. reen numeric pad If you selected a field the EDIT message is displayed to indicate that the stored settings have changed Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the other notes whose pitch you want to change Note This pitch is only used when the corresponding button icon lights Do not forget to switch it on DS 7 8 Press the and or field to specify which Keyboard parts are affected by the Scale Tune settings Upper 1 2 and or Lower It is perfectly possible to switch on both fields If nei ther of them lights all of the E 60 E 50 s parts will adopt the Scale Tune setting Press the field if the parts played by the Arranger should be affected by your Scale Tune settings Storing your new scale 9 If you think you ll need that scale in the future you should memorize or WRITE Program the scale you wish to save by switching the desired notes on or off see above 10 Press the field in the upper left corner of the display The display now looks as follows 2 MASTER TRANS z ml mm pu 3 11 Press a MEMORY 1J IMEMORY 3 field to save your settings in the corresponding Scale Tune memory 12 Press the button to return to the main page Metronome The E 60 E 50 is equipped with a metronome that can be used in various situations To use the metronome here is what you need to do 1 Press the button so that it lights 2 Start Arranger or song playback and you will hear
403. ress the field vi REEN koes maihi oO ai es En dn sg EET 5 Decide what you want to look for by pressing the USER PRG STYLE LINK or button icon 6 Decide how the Finder should look for files Press the field to search for all entries that start with the characters you entered BEA for example Names that match the specified criteria will be displayed at the top of the list Press the field to have the E 60 E 50 search for names that contain the supplied informa tion This would allow you to also locate a file called Raggabeat if you entered BEA 7 Enter only as many characters as you think are necessary to find the User Program you are after The character string you enter can be used in two ways see below See page 44 for how to enter names Note There s no field here because the Finder makes no distinction between upper and lower case letters To enter numbers without cycling through the char acters first press the button icon After entering the numbers switch it off if you need to enter characters again ST E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Working with User Programs 8 Press the field to start your search 9 Press the field of the User Program you need and start playing Note If no User Programs were found the following message appears and no file names are displayed in which case you need to press the USER PRG STYLE LINK or field to display all User Programs aga
404. rics Your E 60 E 50 contains functions that allow you to add Lyrics to Standard MIDI Files that do not contain them You can also edit the Lyrics data of Standard MIDI Files that conform to the Tune 1000 format as well as other Lyrics formats This may come in handy when you keep forgetting the words of a song you wish to use for your performances and want them to be included in the song file The E 60 E 50 only allows you to link synchronize Lyr ics data to the music data of the loaded Standard MIDI File The text data proper must be entered on a Windows compatible PC or a Mac and saved as TXT data for Win dows See right for the supported characters Adding Lyrics to a song Here s a step by step tour of how to add Lyrics data to a Standard MIDI File 1 Prepare the text file with the lyrics you wish to associate with a given song Use a word processor program on your computer taking care to type a return after every line or word you wish to synchronize separately The synchroniza tion function see below always works with entire lines of text i e until the following return In any case no line should contain more than 28 characters 2 Export the file as TXT file and save it to a floppy disk a memory card the E 60 E 50 can read or transfer it to the E 60 E 50 via USB see p 184 3 On the E 60 E 50 load the song you wish to add Lyrics to See Playing back songs Standard MIDI Files on p 35 for detai
405. rily intended for real time changes to a Style or song They are not saved When you select a different Style or song the changes made here are lost You can how ever save them thus burning them into the Style or The difference between these two pages is that the USER PROGRAM settings can be saved to a User Program and are therefore temporary modifica song by pressing the buttomand the tions a the Style data ld the STYLE MAKEUP field on the page that appears then see p 108 oe settings Ka be burned into the ys itself 1 Press the EE ET 2 If the icon of the instrument whose settings you want to change is not displayed press the PAGE or gt field to go to the previous or next page The number of mixer pages depends on the number of sounds being used in the selected song or Style In certain cases there may be only one page with fewer than nine channel strips 3 Press the row that corresponds to the setting you The display changes to want to change CHORUS REVERB PANPOT VOLUME NI The row of the selected parameter is displayed on a light background 4 use the dial or the DEC INC but tons to set the parameter value The available parameters are relative changes that are added to or subtracted from the settings stored in the song or Style The parameters you can set on this page are N Instrument on off MUTE Press the instrument icon at the top of the channel str
406. roduce two effects one when you press them another when you release 4 them Entries without those symbols are one way and therefore only trigger an effect when you press them Down fast C5 This key causes all six strings to sound at the same time This is the fast version of the strum ming pattern mentioned earlier The slow version can also be played using the F 5 key Down fast 4 up fast C 5 Pressing this key trig gers a fast downward strum Down means that the simulated plectrum or thumb finger moves from the lowest to the highest string i e towards the lower part of the guitar Releasing this key will trigger an upward strum in the opposite direction Up fast D5 This key causes all six strings to sound at the same time this time from the highest to the lowest string E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Quick Start amp Down fast mute 4 up fast Eb5 Here is another downward strum that is muted almost instantly when 3 Play on the keyboard 4 Switch on the PART ON OFF UP 1 button to restore you press this key Guitarists achieve this effect by put ting their hand on all strings When you release this key your virtual guitar plays an upward strum which is not muted amp Down fast up fast mute E5 This is the oppo site of the previous pattern the upward strum is muted while the downward is not Down fast mute F5 This key triggers a downward strum that is mute
407. rogram Sets created on an Name of the converted User Program set file E 80 or G 70 can be opened straight away and don t 3 Original name of the User Program need to be converted 4 Name of the converted User Program Note In the following the word User Program also refers to The first number 01 02 etc refers to the conversion the G 1000 s Performance Memories session This may help you tell User Programs with identi Here is what happens when you import User Program cal names from different conversion sessions apart The second number 001 002 etc refers to the sets from a floppy disk i original User Program memory the VAs have 128 the Action Instrument G 1000 and EM 2000 have 192 The 128 VA or 192 G EM User Pro VA 76 VA 7 Note After 99 conversion sessions the import counter the first grams are imported into the E 60 G 1000 EM 2000 two digits is reset to 01 E 50 s Finder database no List is cre aed 1 Insert the floppy disk with the User Program Per The VariPhrase data are ignored VA 76 VA 7 formance Memory set you wish to convert into the Tone and MFX type selection are VA 76 VA 7 drive adapted to the E 60 E 50 s sounds G 1000 EM 2000 The E 60 E 50 can import User Programs of the fol algorithms lowing instruments VA 76 VA 7 G 1000 Perfor The parameters of the Delay effect are VA 76 VA 7 mance Memories and EM 2000 ignored G 1000 EM 2000 2 Press the button The EQ par
408. rogram change has no effect Note When you select another Style on your E 60 E 50 it transmits a CCOO CC32 PC cluster on the Style channel which you could record using an external sequencer BI MIDI TX CHANNEL Use this parameter to assign a MIDI transmit channel to the STYLE function If you don t want these messages to be transmitted switch off the field MID RX CHANNEL Use this parameter to assign a MIDI receive channel to the STYLE function If you don t want these messages to be received switch off the field STYLE PC Program change and bank select messages for Style selection Switch this button icon off if the E 60 E 50 must not select other Styles and or Divisions STYLE VOLUME Volume messages relating to the Music Styles Switch this button icon off if the E 60 E 50 must not receive them 191 E 60 E 50 Music Workstation MIDI COLOR CONTROL TX This parameter allows you to set NTA Note to Arranger NTA notes are only received from an external MIDI instrument What you play in the chord recognition area of the keyboard to feed the Arranger is auto matically converted to the corresponding MIDI note numbers so that all Style parts transmit their notes to external instruments There is thus no need to transmit the note messages of what you play in the chord recognition area NTA separately HUG Soy a GT NOTE TO ARRANGER RX NTA 15T CHANNEL RE 2ND CHANNEL RE 5 15T
409. ronome should sound ALWAYS The metronome even counts when play back is stopped Press this field if you want to hear the metronome at all times which is probably only useful when practising a new song PLAY Press this field if the metronome should only sound while the Arranger or Recorder is playing REC Press this field if the metronome should only sound during song or Music Style recording see pages 123 and 151 The metronome signal is transmitted to the OUTPUT MAIN and PHONES sockets Press the button to return to the main page 59 E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Additional Arranger Style functions 6 Additional Arranger Style functions Before telling you even more about the Music Styles allow us to explain the difference between Music Styles and the Arranger The Arranger is a kind of sequencer that plays back the accompaniments you select Those accompaniments are always related to a given musical genre or style and are therefore called Styles The E 60 E 50 s accompani ments are a lot more than just one pattern that goes on playing until you stop it they comprise several patterns or divi sions Arranger parts Each accompaniment or Music Style consists of up to eight parts ADR Accompaniment drums This part takes care of the rhythm section It triggers the drum and percussion sounds of the Drum Set assigned to the ADR part ABS Accompaniment bass This part plays the bass line of th
410. ry use and to change the tempo You can also press the button several times in the rhythm of the desired tempo To quickly return to the default tempo simulta neously press 4 SLOW and FAST gt 10 Use the MASTER knob to set the E 60 E 50 s output volume You can also play to the music using the Keyboard parts If necessary use the knob to set the desired balance Other practical playback functions N MARK JUMP The factory loaded songs in the E 60 E 50 s internal memory contain four locations markers you can jump to right away For songs that do not yet contain them you can program these markers yourself You can also edit the locations of existing markers page 109 Use the MARK JUMP 1 4 buttons to select the position you want to jump to without stopping or delaying playback the indicator of the button you pressed flashes Such changes occur at the end of the current measure the indicator stops flashing and lights which makes more musical sense than jump ing when you re halfway into a measure GEES There are four MARK memories For the factory loaded songs they correspond to 1 verse 2 chorus 3 bridge 4 ending The advantage of these markers is that you can return to the chorus for example if you notice that the audience wants the song to last a little longer than originally planned Markers also allow you to change the song structure in realtime by starting with the bri
411. s posed copies to the original sound Pitch Shift Mode 1 5 Higher settings of this parameter will result in slower response but steadier pitch Pitch A Coarse 24 0 12 semitone Adjusts the pitch of Pitch Shift A in semitone steps 2 1 octaves Pitch B Coarse 24 0 12 semitone Adjusts the pitch of Pitch Shift B in semitone steps 2 1 octaves Pitch A Fine 100 0 100 cent Makes fine adjust ments to the pitch of Pitch Shift A in 2 cent steps 100 100 cents One cent is 1 100th of a semitone Pitch B Fine 100 0 100 cent Makes fine adjust ments to the pitch of Pitch Shift B in 2 cent steps 100 100 cents One cent is 1 100th of a semitone Pitch A Pre Delay 0 0 500 0ms Adjust the time delay from when the direct sound begins until the Pitch Shift A sound is heard Os E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Appendix Pitch B Pre Delay 0 0 500 Oms Adjusts the time delay from when the direct sound begins until the Pitch Shift B sound is heard Pitch A Panpot L64 0 63R Adjusts the stereo location of the Pitch Shift A sound L64 is far left O is center and 63R is far right Pitch B Panpot L64 0 63R Adjusts the stereo location of the Pitch Shift B sound L64 is far left 0 is center and 63R is far right Level Balance A100 0B A50 50B A0 100B Adjusts the volume balance between the Pitch Shift A and Pitch Shift B sounds When set to A100 0B only the sound of Pitch Shif
412. s heard Delay Right 0 0 500 0ms Adjust the time from the direct sound until when the right delay sound is heard FBK Phase Left Normal Invert Select the phase of the left delay sound NORMAL Phase is not changed INVERT Phase is inverted FBK Phase Right Normal Invert Select the phase of the right delay sound NORMAL Phase is not changed INVERT Phase is inverted Delay Feedback 98 0 98 Adjusts the amount of the delay sound that s fed back into the effect Negative settings invert the phase Delay HF Damp 200 8000Hz Bypass Adjusts the fre quency above which sound fed back to the effect is filtered out If you don t want to filter out any high frequencies set this parameter to BYPASS FO Low Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the low range FO High Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the high range Balance D100 0W D50 50W DO 100W Volume bal ance between the direct D and the effect sound W Level 0 127 Output level 19 Mod Delay This effect adds modulation to the delayed sound producing an effect similar to a Flanger Delay FBK Mode Normal Cross Select the way in which delay sound is fed back into the effect NORMAL The left delay sound will be fed back into the left delay and the right delay sound into the right delay CROSS The left delay sound will be fed back into the right delay and the right delay sound into the left delay Delay Left 0 0 500 0ms Adj
413. s if you want to preserve the original version and only if you want to save the new version to the same memory area The edits you have just performed can only be read by the E 60 E 50 and so are of little use to other SMF players or arranger instruments Specify the memory area where you want to save the Style or song EXTERNAL MEMORY FLOPPY r INTERNAL MEMORY Press the STYLE NAME or SONG NAME field Enter the name page 44 Next press the following fields if necessary and enter the following information SONG ARTIST GENRE FILE NAME STYLE COUNTRY GENRE Press the field TOS If you selected the drive that contains the original version with the same name the following message is displayed A fi le atten name already exists Overwrite Qres m e Press the field to overwrite the old version Press the field if you don t want to overwrite this song or Style and return to the previous page Then enter a different name or select a different media If the song or Style doesn t yet exist in the selected memory area the data are saved and the following message is displayed O Ee ENE i 9 Operation Successful Pens EXECUTE 11 More refined song functions Let us have a look at additional and more refined func tions you can use for song playback See page 129 for recording and editing sequencer songs Programming MARK amp JUMP locations The supp
414. s is to change The shortest possible GATE TIME value is 1 used for all drum notes so that selecting 1000 for notes with a GATE TIME value of 1 in the specified time range still leaves you with the same value You cannot use CHANGE GATE TIME to erase notes E MAGNIFY 0 200 Use this parameter rather than BIAS to produce propor tional changes to the affected GATE TIME values Values below 100 decrease the duration while anything above 100 increases it Select 100 if you prefer to work with the BIAS CPT parameter see above MFROM NOTE TO NOTE 0 C 127 G9 FROM NOTE refers to the lower limit of the note range you want to change TO NOTE represents the upper limit See also Fine tuning the note range on p 164 WE EXECUTE Press this field to confirm your settings and edit the data 167 E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Programming Styles Style Composer GLOBAL CHANGE This function allows you to make quick changes to certain settings The changes always apply to entire tracks you cannot use GLOBAL CHANGE for just a few measures You can apply global changes to the four editable Style track parameters EXPRESS REVERB PANPOT and CHORUS when you notice that the effect is too prominent or not strong enough You can also use it to upgrade older Styles to ensure that they use the E 60 E 50 s new sounds MTRACK ADrums Acc6 ALL Allows you to select the track you wish to edit You can
415. s manual provides specific S high volume level or at a level that is uncomfortable If instructions directing you to do so Refer all servicing to you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears your retailer the nearest Roland Service Center or an you should immediately stop using the unit and consult authorized Roland distributor as listed on the Informa an audiologist tion N vi aaa a AA AA cea eee e Do not allow any objects e g flammable material coins e Never use or store the E 60 E 50 in places that are pins or liquids of any kind water soft drinks etc to S e Subject to temperature extremes e g direct sunlight penetrate the unit in an enclosed vehicle near a heating duct on top of NT heat generating eduipment or are NE e Damp e g baths washrooms on wet floors or are e Humid or are e In households with small children an adult should pro e Exposed to rain or are vide supervision until the child is capable of following all e Dusty or are rules essential for the safe operation of the E 60 E 50 Subject to high ald TABI 777 rr me rr rr rv rr GE GE GE RE AA AA AA AA AA e Protect the unit from strong impact e This unit should be used only with a rack or stand that Do not drop it is recommended by Roland MAA AA AA EE EE e mmediately turn the power off remove the adapter e Make sure you always have the unit placed in such a way from the outlet and request servicing by your retailer t
416. s or sounds So please carefully read the following 1 Press the field on the main page Mr paa meer DE E New Song T Strummlin Pop SER 4 Free Panel NatuaPano XY Ac Bass Vintage EP1 Note If the currently displayed User Program was loaded with the User Program Finder the E 60 E 50 now displays the USER PROGRAM FINDER page where you can select another regis tration in the internal memory or on a card To work with User Programs of the currently active Set List proceed as follows Press the USER PROGRAM button The display changes to N TES SONG f T MIDI LINE lu WR LINE WRITE HOLD SETTINGS Love s Dance 5 i DJ Techno Early Wake Up 5 f 3 4 Boston i Living a dream v 60 s Rock N Funny Rap i 6_8 Ballad pa ps ET 2 Use the P fields and to select the page 1 18 of the required registration 3 Press a big field 1 8 to select the memory Press the dial and enter the number using the on screen numeric pad Each User Program also has a fixed number right edge of its field that allows you to select it directly Sometimes an asterisk is displayed This happens when you change a parameter setting after recalling a User Program to alert you to the fact that the cur rent settings no longer correspond to the ones you recalled If you like them better than the original set tings you must save them again See page 88 Note By pressing the field of t
417. selected with one of the VARIATION buttons STYLE CONTROL Note The Intro is renewable i e you can press the INTRO button again while the Intro is playing Doing so on the fourth beat of the first Intro bar for instance will retrigger the begin ning of the Intro in the second bar Press the button and play a chord or just one note in INTELLIGENT mode see p 67 In this case the Arranger starts as soon as you play a note or chord in the chord recognition area see p 66 Note Do not play chord changes while the Intro is running Unlike the MAIN patterns INTRO patterns usually contain chord changes Chord recognition is not deactivated during Intro playback so that the beginning of a song may jump from one key to another in a rather unnatural way Chord recogni tion during Intro and Ending playback can be switched off however see Intro amp Ending Alteration on page 67 Note You can also start and stop the Arranger with the D Beam controller page 53 Stopping Style playback There are three ways to stop Style playback e Press to stop playback right away e Press the button so that it lights and one of the VARIATION 1 4 buttons to activate the End ing function The Ending or coda pattern will start at the beginning of the next measure next down beat Note Do not play chord changes while the Ending is running Unlike the MAIN accompaniments ENDING patterns usually contain chord changes
418. should be copied 6 Press the field if the assignments of the DESTINATION Index should be erased and replaced by the entries of the selected SOURCE field Press if the song assignments of the SOURCE category should be added to the assign ments of the DESTINATION Index the DESTINATION category will contain more assignments than before Note No song files are copied during this operation Press the field to return to the SONG LIST page Note Press the button to return to the main page E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Roland Play List function Play List function The Play List function allows you to prepare play lists of all the songs you want to use during a performance The advantage of working with such chains is that you do not need to select files between songs Programming Play Lists e f necessary insert the memory card that contains the desired songs into the slot The Play List function is only available for songs on memory card only one such card at a time and in the internal memory You may therefore have to copy all desired songs to that area before proceeding See page 180 for details 1 Press the button The display looks more or less as follows PLAY LIST Saturday Live The names refer to Play Lists already available in the selected memory area 2 Specify the memory area you want to work with EXTERNAL MEMORY or INTERNAL MEMORY Note This is your last chance to
419. sing the DEC INC buttons or e Press the dial and enter the value using the numeric pad that appears in the display If you choose to work with the numeric pad proceed as follows e Press to clear the currently selected figure e g the 7 of 127 e Press the Or field to increase or decrease the current value by 10 e Press to confirm the value _or Press to close the numeric pad window with out changing the value The parameters you can change are Mi Tempo Change BPM 20 250 Specifies the song tempo If necessary you can insert tempo changes anywhere within the song This could even be done in real time using the TEMPO REC SW parameter See page 126 Beat Change Numerator Denominator SUAS SISTA SUT f Beat Change Numerator era 01 037 Sys Ex FO 41 10 42 12 40 01 38 06 01 F7 EVENT 01 043 Sys Ex FO 41 10 42 12 40 01 33 5432 F7 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 01 050 Sys Ex FO 41 10 42 12 40 01 345431 F7 1 01 056 Sys Ex FO 41 10 42 12 40 01 00 20 28 Fare 1 0 1 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 01 000 Tempo Change 100 01 000 Beat Change 4 01 020 Sys Ex FO 7E 7F 09 01 F7 01 031 Sys Ex FO H 10 42 12 40 00 7F 00 41 F7 E 01 099 Sys Ex FO H 10 42 12 40 01 00 20 28 04 060 Tempo Change 60 02 000 Tempo Change 52 EVENT 02 060 Tempo Change 46 03 000 Tempo Change rx Numerator 1 32 Denominator 2 4 8 16 Specifies the song s time signature If necessary you can insert
420. sions Styles are short sequences or patterns of four or eight measures you can select in realtime If you have ever worked with a drum computer or groove box the pat tern concept may sound familiar Pattern based accompaniments usually consist of the following ele ments e The basic groove i e the rhythm that is the backbone of the song e Several alternatives for the basic groove that keep the accompaniment interesting and suggest some kind of evolution or variation Fill Ins to announce the beginning of new parts e An introduction and a closing section ending Programming four to eight patterns for a three minute song is usually enough Just use them in the right order to make them suitable for your song The E 60 E 50 allows you to program 54 different patterns per Style some of which can be selected via dedicated buttons MAIN 1 4 etc Some Patterns are selected on the basis of the chords you play in the chord recognition area of the keyboard major minor seventh Tracks Unlike a drum machine a Style not only contains the rhythm part drums amp percussion but also a melodic accompaniment such as piano guitar bass and strings lines That is why the Styles work with tracks eight to be precise See also Arranger parts on p 60 The part to track assignment Is fixed You cannot assign the AccDrums part to track 6 for example The reason why the AccDrums part is assigned to the first
421. ss and hold the RECORDER button to jump to the PLAY LIST page 2 Press the field of the list you wish to edit Depending on the number of lists already present in the selected memory area you may have to use the scroll bar or dial or the DEC INC buttons PLAY LIST Saturday Live EED 3 Press the field or the dial PLAY LISTEEDIT De PATI HABAY SORRYSEE HEYMAMA SWEETPOT MISREAD ISITCOSI LADY LOVEISON 4 Proceed as follows to edit your Play List Mi Inserting steps To add a step and assign a song to it select the step that should follow it then press the field Example to insert a step before step 04 press the field This takes you to the following display page SONG LIST ee EER GE T GE GE a Erer O O O o o e E FIRSTDAY FIRSTDRY MID FORCA FORCAMID FRIDAYNI IFRIDAYNILMID w HEREWEGO HEREWEGO MI 5 Locate the song you wish to assign to the inserted step e If it is already displayed continue with step 6 below e If it is not yet displayed use the PAGE fields in the lower right of the display to change pages e You can also use the following fields for narrowing down your search if you are overwhelmed by the number of songs and pages you need to scroll and FINDER See page 110 6 Select the song you wish to assign by pressing its field 7 Press the field W Editing a step You can also decide to assign another song to any
422. stion also contains Play amp Search information 2 Specify the memory area that contains the song you need EXTERNAL MEMORY FLOPPY or INTERNAL MEMORY The display shows a list of 5 songs in the selected memory area T TO Wif you press INTERNAL MEMORY or EXTERNAL MEMORY the display changes to SONG LIST Eea e J FORCA FORCA MID Ee FRIDAYNI iFRIDAYNIMID IR HERE WEGO HEREWEGO MI FOUND found entries GLOBAL total number of songs in that memory area The SONG NAME ARTIST GENRE and fields allow you to sort songs in alphabetical order This sorting order is determined by the selected cate gory 3 If the name of the song you want to use to is already displayed press its line 4 To display the next 5 songs press the field in the lower right corner You can press this field as many times as necessary or until it is no longer displayed To return to a previous group of 5 songs press You can also use the dial and the DECJ INC buttons to change pages Locating files with the Song Finder The following is not available for floppy disks a Choose a category Index The highest hierarchical level of the Song Finder database is called Index All search operations apply to the selected Index and therefore not necessarily to all files in the internal memory or on card e Press the field in the top left corner SONG IE EE Renan 2 EDIT Es pra ALL B uda G
423. t A is output when set to A0 100B only the sound of Pitch Shift B is output Balance D100 0W D50 50W DO 100W Volume bal ance between the direct D and the effect sound W Level 0 127 Output level 24 FBK Pitch Pitch Shifter with several echoes Pitch Shift Mode 1 5 Higher settings of this parameter will result in slower response but steadier pitch Pitch Coarse 24 0 12 semitones Adjust the pitch of the pitch shifted sound in semitone steps 2 1 octaves Pitch Fine 100 0 100 cent Make fine adjustments to the pitch of the pitch shifted sound in 2 cent steps one cent is 1 100th of a semi tone Pitch Pre Delay 0 0 500 0ms Adjust the time delay from when the direct sound begins until the pitch shifted sound is heard Pitch Feedback 98 0 98 Adjust the proportion of the processed sound that is fed back into the effect Negative settings will invert the phase Panpot L64 0 63R Stereo location of the output sound This is a mono effect that combines incoming sig nals You can however place the processed signal any where between the left and right channels FO Low Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the low range FO High Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the high range Balance D100 0W D50 50W DO 100W Volume bal ance between the direct D and the effect sound W Level 0 127 Output level 25 Reverb A nice Reverb effect Reverb Type Room 1
424. t allows you to record the music the way you want it to sound Input Quantize INPUT QUANTIZE is a function that corrects minor timing problems It shifts the notes whose timing Is not exactly right to the nearest correct unit Always select a resolution value that is fine enough to accept all note values you play If the shortest notes of your accompaniment are 1 16th note trip lets set the INPUT QUANTIZE value to 1 16t 16 Press the field and use the dial to specify the quantize value The preset value 1 16 is OK for most situations If you do not want quantize your playing while record ing set this parameter to Off You can also quantize the track after recording it page 163 Recording a guitar part To record a guitar part onto the selected track only available for the Accomp tracks Press the field and use the dial to select Acoustic or Electric Select Off if you want to use the track for some thing else Press the field to jump to the GUITAR MODE page and set up your guitar See page 29 for details e Press the button to return to the STL COMPOSER REC STANDBY page Note The DOUBLING function Guitar Mode Options is not available here because only one track can be recorded at any one time E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Roland Recording Styles from scratch Record mode 17 Press the field in the lower left corner and use the DATA ENTRY DEC INC buttons to select th
425. t sound W Level 0 127 Output level 22 Time Delay This effect controls the delay time and pitch in realtime Lengthening the delay time will lower the pitch and shorten ing it will raise the pitch Delay Time 200 1000ms note Adjusts the time until the delay is heard Delay Feedback 98 0 98 Adjusts the amount of the delay sound that s fed back into the effect Negative settings invert the phase Delay Acceleration 0 15 Adjusts the time over which the Delay Time changes from the current setting to a spec ified new setting The rate of change for the Delay Time directly affects the rate of pitch change Delay HF Damp 200 8000Hz Bypass Adjusts the fre quency above which sound fed back to the effect is filtered out If you don t want to filter out any high frequencies set this parameter to BYPASS Panpot L64 0 63R Stereo location of the output sound This is a mono effect that combines incoming sig nals You can however place the processed signal any where between the left and right channels FO Low Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the low range FO High Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the high range Balance D100 0W D50 50W DO 100W Volume bal ance between the direct D and the effect sound W Level 0 127 Output level 23 2 Pitch Shifter A Pitch Shifter changes the pitch of the original sound This 2 voice effect contains two pitch shifters and adds two tran
426. te text on dark background or 3 dark characters on gray back ground 3 Press the field to return to the LYRICS page Displaying scores Only available for Standard MIDI File playback and only in the E 60 E 50 s display If you don t remember the notes of the song you are about to play you can ask the E 60 E 50 to display them on screen 1 Select a song page 35 2 Press the button seen stl Baas wi VET 3 Press the field if it doesn t light The display changes to Song HEYMAMA M 030 3 4 100 474 e 4 Start song playback and watch the display 5 Press the button if the notes are difficult to read Press to select the normal size again Now maybe the way in which the notes are displayed is not quite right In that case co E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Quick Start 6 Press the button 7 Press to see the notes again If necessary you can return to the OPTIONS page to correct settings you don t like after all J A KEY PITCH There are several things you can decide here e Do you want see the notes of one song part or of two If you only need one activate 1 STAFF To see two parts activate 2 STAVES In the latter case the display changes to STONE DAO SETTINGS STAFF 1 f J f SY STAFF 2 KEY po langya nao PITCH DRUM RANGE e Select the track s whose notes should be displayed Press the c
427. ted source media FROM cannot be copied onto the same destination media TO Consider using the USB func tionality see p 184 when you need to copy from a memory card in the E 60 E 50 to another memory card connected to the computer for example 1 Press the button 2 If you intend to work with a floppy disk or memory card insert it into the drive or slot 3 Press the field 4 Select the data type you want to copy by pressing its field MIDI SET USER E atonal 66 O IT 33O 5 6 7 8 9 The display changes to COR SIALE CINT MEMORY EINT MEMORY FLOPPY DISK CIFLOPPY DISK EET MEMORY EBERT MEMORY Ia PEL Note See page 97 for how to copy individual User Programs Here you can only copy Sets the List file as well as the User Program files it refers to If you selected the wrong file type press and try again Start by specifying the source that contains the files you wish to copy Press the button icon to select the memory area INT MEMORY The E 60 E 50 s internal memory area EXT MEMORY The memory card in the E 60 E 50 s PCM CIA slot Do not forget to insert it before selecting this option FLOPPY DISK The disk in the E 60 E 50 s floppy drive Now specify the target you wish to copy the selected files to Press the button icon to select the destination media Note FROM and TO cannot be set to the same media you cannot copy FROM INTER
428. that is assigned to the function you wish to use here the but ton DJ GEAR SFX This switches on the D Beam controller while the dis play changes to TT Motor Style f TT Motor Song 100 You can also select this page by pressing the buttons field field But the above method is a lot faster 2 Start playback of a Music Style page 22 or song page 35 3 Move your hand towards and away from the D Beam s eyes What you hear now is the VinyIRPM effect Now let s do some scratching 4 Press the field 5 Again move your hand towards and away from the D Beam Now you should hear a scratch sound Try out some other effects by pressing the SOUND EFX INSTRUMENTS and CONTROL fields and selecting one of the available options E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Using the performance functions 6 Press the button to return to the main page D Beam functions The D Beam Controller has two sensors that detect motion such as your hand or body movements in front of it These sensed positions are translated into MIDI messages that can be assigned to a variety of parameters 1 If you want to assign another function to the D BEAM without actually selecting it press and hold the D BEAM button that is assigned to the func tion you wish to use If you also wish to switch this function on briefly press the corresponding button WIBEAN e EE ee E
429. the ONE TOUCH feature The One Touch memo ries are in fact small User Programs See p 65 for details 1 Press the desired ONE TOUCH button There are four One Touch memories per Music Style for the 136 factory Styles and 80 CUSTOM memo ries Note One Touch memories usually switch on the SYNC START function If you don t want the Arranger to start as soon as you play a note or chord switch off the button 2 Select a Music Style page 25 and start Arranger playback by pressing the button Start playing to the accompaniment You will notice that the sounds of all Keyboard parts match the mood of the selected Style 3 Select a different Style and again play a solo line The active Keyboard part probably UP1 now uses a different sound even Keyboard parts that are off change sounds 4 Press another ONE TOUCH button to use that reg istration 5 Press the same button again if you no longer need the One Touch setting N Choosing sounds manually The E 60 E 50 contains 1050 Tones or sounds and 33 Drum Sets divided over 8 families 1 Specify the part you wish to assign another sound or Drum Set to e Press the TONE ASSIGN button of the desired part so that it lights KEYBOARD PART LJCILI TONE ASSIGN MBS LWR UP PART ON OFF E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Roland Using the Keyboard parts e On the main page press the row of the part you wish 2 3 4 5 PIANO ORGAN P E PI
430. the VARIATION 1 4 button icons When you select Fill Up or Fill Dwn for DIVI SION only three TIME SIGN icons are displayed The most commonly used time signatures are 2 4 3 4 4 4 6 8 and 12 8 Other values such as 7 4 13 8 etc are also possible Note When you change the time signature of an already recorded pattern its notes and events are reshuffled so that you may end up with incomplete measures None of your data are deleted however E DIVISION Use this parameter to select the Division you want to edit Intro Main Fill Dwn Fill Up End MVARIATION Use these button icons to select the pattern you want to change If you set DIVISION to Fill Dwn or Fill Up there are only three button icons You can switch on several or all button icons if you like But you cannot switch off all four or three W EXECUTE Press this field to confirm the new time signature and change the selected patterns BEAT VARIATION f f 169 E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Programming Styles Style Composer Editing individual Style events Style Micro Edit Select this mode if you need to change just one aspect of an otherwise perfect Style In this section we will use the word event for any kind of message An event is thus a command or instruction for the Arranger You can only view and edit one track at a time There fore be sure to check the TRACK setting before editing the events displayed
431. the button The display changes to MENU a j VA TUNING des hom EFFECTS Pa el Es STYLE et MIDI SETTING MPOSER ih 2 Press the field followed by the field Portamento means that the pitch doesn t change in clearly defined steps it produces glides from one note to the next Portamento Time 0 Rough pitch changes in semitone steps normal Portamento Time 1 127 Pitch glides from one note to the next LF E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Advanced Keyboard part functions Instead of jumping in semitone steps as you would expect the pitch glides from one note to the next whenever the Portamento time is higher than 0 The higher the value you set the slower the glide This effect is particularly useful for synthesizer sounds 3 Press the field of the Upper UP1 or Upper2 UP2 part to select it 4 Set the desired value with the dial or the DECJ INC buttons Portamento Mode Mono Poly The E 60 E 50 also allows you to set the Upper1 and Upper2 parts to mono phonic mode MONO means that you can only play one note at a time You could select this mode to play a trumpet or woodwind part in a more natural way POLY on the other hand means that you can play chords using the selected part 5 Press the or field of the Upper part whose setting you want to change 6 Press the button to return to the main page Lower Hold The E 60 E 50 is an instrument that allows you to change
432. the con nected memory area using your computer mouse or other commands Never add files to folders flagged with an X in the illustration above Never copy files to the root directory of the E 60 E 50 s internal memory or card and never rename or delete files you see there Never format optimize or scan the E 60 E 50 s mem ory area using your computer s tools The E 60 E 50 can only handle file names consisting of single byte alphanumeric characters i e no Rus sian Chinese Japanese Korean etc names Be sure to only use files whose names do not exceed 32 characters In some cases the new songs Styles or User Pro grams you copied to the corresponding Put New Here folder may not be visible to the corresponding Finder right away If that occurs briefly select the other memory area memory card or internal mem ory then return to the originally selected memory area 13 To disconnect the E 60 E 50 from your computer e Macintosh Drag the E50 E60_SSD E50 E60_CARD or Removable Disk icon to the trash 135 E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Archiving data using a computer USB e Windows Click on the removal icon on the task bar Wait until a drop down menu appears and select the entry that says something to the effect of Stop USB disk E50 E60_SSD or Stop USB disk E50 E60_CARD You should now see a window that Says something to the effect of The USB device XX can now be safely remove
433. the default setting HIGH Select this setting for maximum expressive ness Even small variations of the force with which you strike a key produce audible changes The trade off is however that you have to strike the keys forcefully to achieve the maximum volume FIXED Press this field to switch off the velocity sen sitivity if you don t need it In that case the fixed velocity value 100 if you don t change it will be used You can set another value however Press the display field and use the dial or the DEC INC buttons to set the velocity value that should be used for all notes you play 1 127 1 is very low usually inaudible while 127 corre sponds to maximum striking force loud bright notes Velocity switching Min and Max You can also specify the smallest MIN and highest MAX velocity values with which you can trigger the selected part This is probably only useful when applied to two Keyboard parts Do not change these values if you have no intention of using a complementary part because otherwise you may start wondering why the LWR part for instance only sounds at high or low velocity values MIN and MAX can be used effectively for switching between two Tones simply by striking the keys harder or softer Doing so allows you to alternate between two sounds Consider the following example Part Sound UP1 Bandoneon 2 AXCCORDION P1 UP2 Folk Violin 2 STRINGS P2 Both
434. the desired sound to the track The AccDrums track can only use Drum Sets so that only the button of the TONE pad is available c Play a few notes on the keyboard to audition the sound d If necessary change the CONTROLS settings by pressing their fields and using the dial or the DEC buttons The four fields refer to the following aspects EXPRESS Temporary volume changes CC11 REVERB Reverb Send CC91 i e how strongly the selected track should be processed by the reverb effect PANPOT The track s stereo placement O0 L 64 127 R CHORUS Chorus Send CC93 i e how strongly the selected track should be processed by the cho rus effect These settings may come in handy to ensure that all ACC1 parts for example use the same amount of reverb and are always located in the right half of the stereo image You can also change these settings later see p 161 e Repeat steps a d for the remaining tracks Modes and Divisions f Press the first field the numerator and enter the desired number of beats using the dial or the DECJ INC buttons E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Roland Recording Styles from scratch g Press the second field the denominator and enter the duration of each beat using the dial or the DECJ INC buttons See Time signature above You can already set the tempo 20250 here or leave that for later 6 Press the field The display returns to the STYLE COMPOSER page which
435. the fewer over tones will be allowed to pass and the sound will become softer darker See page 80 for a graphic Note For some sounds positive Cutoff settings will cause no noticeable change because the preprogrammed Cutoff parameter is already set to its maximum value RESO This is a parameter one invariably associates with a synthesizer When the Resonance value is increased the overtones in the area of the cutoff frequency will be emphasized creating a sound with a strong character Note For some sounds negative RESO settings may pro duce no noticeable change because the Resonance is already set to the minimum value The following parameters allow you to set the sound s envelope See page 79 for details ATTACK This parameter adjusts the onset of the sound Negative values speed up the attack so that the sound becomes more aggressive DECAY This parameter adjusts the time over which the sound s volume and Cutoff frequency fall from the high est point of the attack down to the sustain level Note Percussive sounds usually have a sustain level of 0 Piano and guitar sounds are in this category Holding the keys for a long time will thus have little effect on the dura tion of the notes you are playing even if you select a high value here RELEASE This parameter adjusts the time over which the sound will decay after the note is released until it is no longer heard The cutoff frequency wil
436. the high range Level 0 127 Output level Use this parameter to com pensate for exaggerated level differences resulting from the settings you made 8 Auto Wah This effect controls a filter to create cyclic change in timbre an automatic wah effect Auto Wah Filter Type LPF BPF Type of filter LPF the wah effect is applied over a wide frequency range BPF the wah effect is applied over a narrow frequency range Auto Wah Rate 0 05 10 0Hz Frequency i e modula tion speed Auto Wah Depth 0 127 Modulation intensity Auto Wah Sens 0 127 Adjusts the sensitivity with which the filter is controlled Auto Wah Manual 0 127 Adjusts the center fre quency at which the effect is applied Auto Wah Peak 0 127 Adjusts the amount of the wah effect that will occur in the range of the center frequency Set a higher value to narrow the range to be affected Level 0 127 Output level Use this parameter to com pensate for exaggerated level differences resulting from the settings you made 9 Rotary This effect simulates the sound of the rotary speakers often used with the electric organs Since the movement of the high range and low range rotors can be set independently the unique type of modulation characteristic of these speak ers can be simulated quite closely This effect is most suitable for electric organ sounds of the bank Tweeter Slow Rate 0 05 10 0Hz Woofer Slow Rate 0 05 1
437. the metronome 3 Press the button again to switch off the metronome Metronome settings The E 60 E 50 also allows you to specify when and how the metronome should sound 1 Press and hold the button The display now looks as follows EF FUNCTION LEVEL COUNT IN Note When neither the Arranger nor the Recorder 16 track sequencer is running the METRONOME button flashes to indicate the current tempo 2 Set the available parameters to your liking VOLUME LEVEL Press the LOW or field to specify the metronome s basic level The default setting is MEDIUM M COUNT IN This parameter allows you to switch the Count In function on to 1 BAR or 2 BAR or off When on the metronome will count in the specified number of measures bars before the Arranger starts playing Note This count in is also available when you are using the Sync Start function In that case playing a chord means that the Arranger only starts after 1 or 2 measures OFF The count in function is off 1 BAR 2 BAR Whenever you start Arranger play back the metronome counts in 1 or 2 bars before the selected Music Style pattern starts playing Note The Count In function can be used independently of the metronome There is thus no need to activate the metronome In order to hear the count in E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Roland Metronome N MODE 3 Yet another option on the above display page is to specify when the met
438. the part should be processed by the chorus effect This parameter can also be edited on the MIXER page see p 161 Prog C Program change messages used to select sounds or Drum Sets Note by deleting pro gram change messages you also dispose of the related CCOO and CC32 bank select mes sages P Bender Pitch Bend data i e use of the BENDER MOD ULATION lever NRPN Dr Changes to the pitch of certain drum instru ments See page 161 BI FROM NOTE 0 C 127 G9 This parameter is only displayed if DATA TYPE see above is set to Note It allows you to set the note or lower limit of the note range to be modified within the specified FROM TO time range It is not displayed when you select EQUAL UNEQUAL HIGHER or LOWER See also Fine tuning the note range on p 164 WETO NOTE 0 C 127 G9 This parameter allows you to set the upper limit of the note range to be modified within the specified FROM TO time range E EXECUTE Press this field to confirm your settings and edit the data E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Roland Style Track Edit functions DELETE C l nn ka o a earen caner eroek enera senar FROM Unlike the ERASE function DELETE not only erases the data but also the measures beats and or CPT units so that all data that lie behind the TO position are shifted towards the beginning of the track s You cannot choose the data type to be erased MTRACK ADrums Acc6 ALL Allows y
439. them In that case select EXTENDED Press the button K TUNING ao GUITAR LINK Ka MODE OS spite paa EFFECTS AAR UTILITY TOUCH P o AB ARRANGER 7 eff STYLE EES SETTING COMPOSER HEI Am FUNCTION Ar HAND ee USB DATA TONE ff FOOTI Af DBEAM Vi EDIT CONTROLLERS 2 Press the and the field 3 UTILITY MT EED USER PROGRAM RECALL lp 1 1 Gospel Love ve MIDI SET RECALL SOUND SET MODE EXTENDED Press either or to make your choice This setting is memorized and used until you change it again Drumming on the keyboard The E 60 E 50 also allows you to play drums and per cussion on the keyboard If you have ever worked with an older Roland arranger instrument you may remem ber that there used to be a part called M Drums for playing percussion phrases This part no longer exists because any of the following Keyboard parts can be used for drumming UP1 UP2 LWR and MBS 1 Press the TONE ASSIGN button of the part you want to assign a Drum Set to the button lights 2 Press the TONE button TONE IL EE Pg ee ee Ee TE PIANO ORGAN GUITAR STRINGS SAX SYNTH E PIANO ACCORD BASS VOCAL BRASS O Lk 3 Press a field to select another Drum Set 4 New Pop New Folk New BrushPop New PBrush Perc New Pop Perc You may have to use the PAGE 1 PAGE 4 buttons to Jump to the page that contains the desired Drum Set
440. them all off in which case the STYLE MICRO EDIT list only contains the End of Data message Press to close the pop up window without applying your changes N General procedure 1 2 3 To change information already available on the selected track proceed as follows Set TRACK MODE and DIVISION by pressing the corresponding fields and using the dial or the DEC INC buttons ALES INE Sp ip 1 0 CC 0 Bank Select MSB 1 0 CC 32 Bank Select LSB 4 1 01 000 Program Change 4 1 01 000 CC 10 Fan 64 1 01 000 CC 11 Expression 120 1 01 000 CC 391 Reverb 80 1 01 000 CC 93 Chorus 0 1 01 000 Note 1 1 0 1 1 01 000 Note 70 Bb4 37 1 1 01 060 Note 59 B 3 48 1 1 01 060 Note 70 Bb4 33 1 1 02 000 Note 38 D 2 127 1 Press the white field the event list to be able to select events using the DATA ENTRY section Use the 4 v buttons or the dial to select the list entry you want to edit The name of the selected parameter appears in the upper right hand corner of the display 4 5 6 7 E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Roland Editing individual Style events Style Micro Edit Press the DATA ENTRY gt button to select the first value El Ed aa O oo CC 0 Bank Select MSB CC 32 Bank Select LSB 1 000 Program Change 1 000 CC 10 Pan 64 1 000 CC 11 Expression 120 1 000 CC 391 Reverb CC 93 Chorus 1 000 Note 35 B gt ab 55 oo oo 1 1 1 1 1
441. three for downward moves Dw Note You can also press INTRO in the middle of a performance In that case the button flashes until the end of the current bar and then lights on the next downbeat to indicate that the Arranger is playing the introductory pattern Other ways of selecting Arranger patterns You can also switch among Style patterns using a foot switch Here are the pattern selection functions you can assign D Beam E 60 Fill Up Fill Down page 53 Foot Switch Intro Ending Variat 1 4 Half Bar on Fill In page 55 Bass Inversion The button allows you to change the way the Arranger reads the chords you play If this function is off the A BASS part ABS plays the root of the chords that feed the Arranger while the chords of the ACCOMP 146 parts are voiced in such a way as to avoid semitone intervals for complex chords that wouldn t sound very nice Bass Inversion gives you more artistic license because you specify the notes played by the ABS part Switch on Bass Inversion for songs that rely on bass rather than on chord patterns for example C C B C Bb etc 1 Press the button so that it lights to switch this function on STYLE CONTROL VARIATION INTRO AUTO START FILL IN STOP 2 Press it again to switch this function off again Note You can also assign this function to an optional foot switch page 55 E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Additional Arranger Style funct
442. tion allows you to save all 8 MIDI Sets as a set Press the button Press the field followed by the field rel Di EE ETE els a Ba ese vr Select the target media INTERNAL MEMORY FLOPPY disk or EXTERNAL MEMORY memory card Enter the name for the file See Save User Program Set Note The E 60 E 50 supports both upper and lower case let ters for file names So choose whichever is more convenient or clear Press the field to save the data Save Song This page allows you to save the song that Is cur rently in the E 60 E 50 s RAM memory Even if it is not a newly recorded song there are several reasons why you may want to use this function to save the changes you made using the MAKEUP TOOLS and or COVER functions see page 102 and following to save the newly programmed MARK JUMP loca tions see page 109 to save a song under a different name or to a differ ent media Note The SONG MAKEUP COVER and MARK JUMP settings can only be read by the E 60 E 50 and are thus of no use to other sequencers or SMF players Press the button 177 E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Disk Media functions 2 Press the field followed by the field oe oe 8 Jo er fo me rons rw a was 3 Select the target media INTERNAL MEMORY 4 disk or memory card Select or if you wish to take advantage of the Song Finder function page 35 Enter the nam
443. tion applies to all tracks N MODE Allows you to select the Mode to be edited Major minor or 7th BI DIVISION Use this parameter to select the Division you want to edit Intro 1 4 Main 154 Fill Dwn 1 3 Fill Up 153 End 154 BI FROM TO FROM refers to the position where the edit operation is to begin That position is specified as a Bar Beat CPT cluster TO designates the position where the edit operation is to end Bar Beat CPT See page 163 for details IBIAS 99 99 The BIAS parameter allows you to specify by how much the velocity values should change Select a positive value to increase the velocity the value is added to the velocity value of the affected notes or a negative value to decrease the velocity values that value is subtracted Select O if you prefer to work with the MAGNIFY parameter see below Note Even the highest positive or negative VALUE doesn t allow you to go beyond 1 or 127 There is a reason why O is impossible that value is used to indicate the end of a note note off 127 on the other hand is the highest velocity value the MIDI standard can muster Adding a high positive velocity value may thus lead to all notes being played at 127 E MAGNIFY 0 200 This parameter works like a Compander effect a dynam ics processor that simultaneously acts as compressor and expander although it processes MIDI data by selecting a value above 100 you increase the
444. tions one for songs Standard MIDI Files and another for Styles Because of the striking similarities we will discuss each item only once and only point out aspects that behave differ ently Both environments can be selected via the same button on the front panel which is why we recommend you always look at the information in the top line of the display SONG MAKEUP TOOLS or STYLE MAKEUP TOOLS before making any change whatsoever N Before changing the MAKEUP TOOLS settings of a song e Press the FINDER button DT Sy ome Tats MEE ae TU You can also press the field on the main page to select songs Co E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Roland Using the Makeup Tools The display changes to SONG LIST EIEN EE im EE Ed FIRSTDAY iFIRSTDAY MID FIL WEE ET ko HERE WEGO rere ECO l5 HEREWEGO HEREWEGO MI e Select the memory area that contains the song you want to change press INTERNAL MEMORY or EXTERNAL MEMORY If you press or EXTERNAL MEMORY insert the memory card or floppy disk with the desired song into the slot or drive See Playing back songs Stan dard MIDI Files on p 35 for details about selecting songs e Select the song by pressing its field N Before changing the MAKEUP TOOLS settings of a Style e Press a button of the STYLE pad to select a Music Style family STYLE 8 BEAT LIVE Disco BALL JAZZ LATIN TRADIT 6 BEAT BAND DANCE ROOM BLUES WORLD
445. tive Style parts ADR ABS etc are recorded onto the tracks that are assigned to their MIDI chan nels MIDI E 60 E 50 parts channel Arranger 1 Piano EEN MEEN Accomp 1 2 Bass ie oh a A Bass 3 Chords a fF Accomp 2 4 Solo Melody Upper1 5 Harmony N EEN Accomp 3 6 Counter melody 6 Upper2 Upper2 7 Not specified EN zx Accomp 4 8 Not specified a EEN Accomp 5 9 Not specified o a 1 Accomp 6 10 Drums A Drums 11 Not specified Lower 12 Not specified M Bass 13 Not specified a EEN 14 Not specified a 15 Not Specified Melody Intell 16 Not specified Track SMF part There is yet another track called MASTER that is used for recording the time signature the tempo as well as general SysEx data 124 Example 1 Recording a song from scratch Let us first record a song from scratch using the 16 track sequencer If you already played back a song since switching on the E 60 E 50 the song RAM mem ory already contains data we need to erase Even if the E 60 E 50 s song RAM memory is still empty using the INITIALIZE SONG function would be a good idea 1 Press the RECORDER button The display changes to TRACK EDIT MICRO EDIT MASTER TRACK d INITIALIZE SONG STYLE CHAA CONVERTER 2 Press the field The display changes to INITIALIZE SONG TEMPLATES SETTINGS TEMPO AND TIME SIGNATURE
446. to a User Program It is a good idea to memorize your settings frequently even If you still need to do some touching up after wards Those intermediary saves allow you to return to the previous stage whenever you do not like your last mod ifications 1 Change all settings the way you want to save them 2 Press the USER PROGRAM button The display changes to aractoyset APOG a HOLD SONG MIDI TE SETTINGS LINK U LINK EIE 1 i Love s Dance f DJ Techno Early Wake Up i f 3_4 Boston Living a dream 3 60 s Rock N Funny Rap 6_8 Ballad pa p5 3 Press the field it lights PC HOLD EC O MIDI iy SETTINGS LINK LINK O 1 i Love s Dance f DJ Techn LA Early Wake Up i 3 4 Bos Living a dream gt 60 s Rock N f Funny Rap 6_8 Ballad pa ps ET 4 Use the P fields and to select the page 1 18 where you want to save your registration 5 Press a big field 1 8 to select the destination memory The display changes to WEIE USER PEOGEE sd as ETD EE PIE KIES Tear lees ag Decor Bem The topmost field indicates the name of the User Pro gram settings originally assigned to that memory here Rainbow If you do not want to overwrite that memory press the field and continue with step above 3 to select another memory 6 Enter a name for your new User Program in the black field At first the black field contains the
447. to return to the default assignments if that produces the best result after all Auditioning the tracks Press the field to jump to the first note of the selected song track the one that appears on a dark background Playback starts automatically from that point and you will hear all song tracks Press the RECORDER button to stop play back or to start it again Note If the selected track contains no data at all playback is Started from the very first song measure N Muting tracks Sometimes it may be necessary to mute certain parts so as to concentrate on what the other tracks do and to decide which tracks should be converted into a Music Style To do so press the field and then the lines of the song tracks you don t want to hear Such tracks are flagged with an M Press the field again to switch off the func tion of the same name BI Solo 6 7 8 9 To listen to one track in isolation press the field and the field of the track you want to solo then start playback This mutes all other tracks while the selected track is flagged with an S Press the field again to switch off the func tion of the same name Press the field to jump to the following page BALE CO NABA DEL SWEETPOT mees 0001 1 ES 1 4 130 4 4 STANDARD 1 oes Ace KE eo SETUP CONVERT d OVERDRIVE GT n d OVERDRIVE GT 3 FROM E Pn Bio 1 rare ORCHESTRAHIT d at a F d JUMP TO E EXECUTE JUMFTO Jard
448. to the D Beam controller Vinyl RPM Fade to black playback speed Cutting gt Fade to back General settings Here are several functions that apply to the E 60 F 50 as a whole and haven t been covered elsewhere in this owner s manual Harp Marimba Guitars Fade to white Chimes gt Lumin Seashore gt Sepia LoFi Color Sweep Post Scratch gt Color Blue Explosion gt Color Red Gunshot Color Violet Tempo Up amp Down Pitch Up amp Down Playback speed Note The E 60 E 50 does not support the Edirol DV 7PR s i A HAND e dual stream mode Press the field to reset the cur rently selected parameter to its default value Press the field to reset all parame 2 Press the field followed by the ters to their default values field 4 Press again to switch off this function the TIAA Leo button goes dark EEN GED Note V LINK messages are transmitted on MIDI channels 13 1 Press the button The display changes to PLAYER FEEDBACK KEYBOARD and 14 ER D EF Note For details on Clips Palettes Dissolve Time and FG n out 1 PROGRAM CHNG Color Difference signals Cb Cr refer to the Edirol DV 7PR s manual MELODY INT LINK Ng 3 Press the relevant field in the FEEDBACK column to switch that function on or off 4 Press the field to return to the menu or the button to return to the main page Song Arranger Start Priority Normally when you attempt to start Arranger playb
449. to the one connected to the HOLD socket can be used to perform various functions If you do not change the factory setting this footswitch allows you to start and stop Arranger play back Start Stop Note the Soft and Sostenuto options as well as the pos sibility to select one of several Hold functions The foot switch can only perform one function at a time though 1 Press the button KA spLiTa TOUCH EDIT as FOOT Mg D BEAM E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Roland Using optional footswitches 2 Press the field followed by the Field FOOT CONTROLLERS FOOT PEDAL IGN ASS Play Sop Variat 3 Half BarOnFilln 3 Press the field that corresponds to the function you wish to assign to the footswitch If necessary use the PAGE 1 PAGE 3 fields to go to another page Start Stop Starts and stops Arranger playback Same function as the button Play Stop Starts and stops the Recorder and 16 track seguencer Same function as the but ton Intro Selects the Intro of the current Variation level 1 4 during Arranger playback Same function as INTRO Ending Selects the Ending of the current Variation level 1 4 during Arranger playback Variat 1 4 The footswitch can be used to switch to the VARIATION level you select here That Music Style pat tern is used from the next downbeat onward Bass Inversion Same function as the button page 61
450. tons simultaneously you leave the User Program environ ment The button allows you to ignore several set tings of subsequently loaded User Programs see p 92 EASY SETTING section This key pad allows you to reconfigure the E 60 E 50 by pressing just one button use the Arranger in split mode the name says it all select the E 60 E 50 s Guitar Mode and assign a piano sound to the entire key board See also page 45 UP1 23 TONE EFFECTS TRANSPOSE s00 sO ar ONE TOUCH 2OOOO KEYBOARD PART section The TONE ASSIGN buttons are used to specify the Keyboard part you wish to assign a different sound to page 27 Keyboard parts are the parts you can play yourself The E 60 E 50 contains many other parts that are played automatically by the Arranger or Recorder The PART ON OFF buttons allow you to switch the desired Keyboard parts on and off DEMO button Press this button whenever you want to listen to the E 60 E 50 s demo songs see p 20 TONE EFFECTS section Press the button to add a different effect to the Keyboard parts page 84 This processor is also available for the D Beam and the MELODY INTELL parts Note The D Beam controller and part are only available on the E 60 Press the button so that it lights to add an automatic counter melody second and third voice to your solos or melodies see p 62 TRANSPOSE button Press this button to transpose the E 60 E 50 up
451. touch messages which can be received or filtered Press the field and save your settings to a MIDI Set or Press the button to return to the main page TOS O MIDI System parameters The following MIDI parameters usually apply to the E 60 E 50 as a whole even though some of them are rather specific as you will notice Press the field and use PAGE to select the page that contains the parameter you want to edit SYNC parameters The SYNC parameters allow you to specify whether or not the E 60 E 50 should send MIDI real time mes sages when you start the Arranger or Recorder sequencer This allows you to synchronize external instruments or software sequencers with your E 60 E 50 OE a Sync on PA Auto SONG RH mic Pers Just as a reminder TX means transmit and RX stands for receive BI SYNC TX START STOP If you activate this option the E 60 E 50 sends start or stop messages when you start or stop Arranger STYLE or song SONG playback The Recorder sequencer furthermore transmits Continue messages CLOCK This option means that the Arranger STYLE or Recorder sequencer SONG sends MIDI Clock messages that tell the receiving instrument or MIDI device which tempo to choose SONG POSITION only for SONG If you switch this parameter on the Recorder sequencer sends Song Posi tion Pointer SPP messages that indicate the current playback position Note See your external
452. transmit Program Change and Bank Select messages for selecting User Programs as well as for the reception and transmission of other kinds of messages that are not directly related to a specific MIDI channel such as the PART SWITCH function for example Note that if you select another channel messages intended for the BASIC parameters might also cause other parameters to change when you don t want them to UE EDIT MIDI TX MIDI RX CHANNEL ETE Fa W MIDI TX CHANNEL Use this parameter to assign a MIDI transmit channel to the Basic channel If you don t want these messages to be transmitted switch off the field PART SWITCH Whenever you mute or un mute a part on the Mixer pages Keyboard parts or on the STYLE MAKEUP TOOLS VOLUME page your E 60 E 50 sends an NRPN message that describes your action Not sending these messages may be useful to keep your external sequencer from recording them or the receiving GS module from muting the part assigned to that channel USER PRG PC This parameter is used to enable or dis able the transmission of program change and bank select messages related to User Program selection W MIDI RX CHANNEL Use this parameter to assign a MIDI receive channel to the Basic channel If you don t want these messages to be received switch off the field PART SWITCH Whenever you mute or un mute a part on the Mixer pages Keyboard parts or on the STYLE MAKEUP TOOLS VOL
453. ts selected in this way appear on a dark back ground 142 e Press the button icon The following pop up appears ao has Alteration Mode 1 01 000 CC O Bank Select MISB 0 HOVE EVENT TO 1 060 Note 70 Bb4 1 2 000 Note 37 C 2 111 1 PLACE 3 EVENT Bea e Specify the position to which the first event in chro nological order of the selected group should be shifted by pressing the BAR and fields and entering the desired value for each unit using the dial or the DEC INC buttons e Press the field to confirm your settings and move the event s Press to close the pop up window without applying your changes Mi COPY EVENT This function allows you to copy one or several events Use PLACE EVENT to Insert a copy of those events at the desired position SLANT SISTA SOT Tempo Change b 1 01 000 Tempo Change 1 01 000 Beat Change 4 4 EVENT J 1 01 020 Sys Ex FO 7E 7F 09 01 F7 01 031 Sys Ex FO H 10 42 12 40 00 7F 00 41 F7 01 037 Sys Ex FO 41 10 42 12 40 01 38 06 01 F7 EVENT 01 043 Sys Ex FO H 10 42 12 40 01 33 5432 F7 01 050 Sys Ex FO H 10 42 12 40 01 34 5431 F7 01 056 Sys Ex FO H 10 42 12 40 01 00 20 28 01 099 Sys Ex FO H 10 42 12 40 01 00 20 28 04 060 Tempo Change 02 000 Tempo Change 52 02 060 Tempo Change 46 Tempo Change 1 0 1 0 Note For this function you could take advantage of the VIEW filter to avoid selecting event t
454. ts you may have switched on Depending on the Keyboard parts you switch on those keys may play the MBS LWR left half Even the Arranger s chord recognition remains active The notes you play in the CHORD area are not played by the E 60 E 50 s Guitar section They only specify what you will hear when you 2S E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Quick Start 4 Press the first C key to the right of the CHORD area Low E string A string E 60 D string High E string B string G string Low E string A string ma D string High E string B string G string This sounds the note a guitarist would play on the low E string The key you are pressing now belongs to the ARPEGGIO section 5 Now press the D to the right of the C you used above This sounds the note a guitarist would play on the A string 6 Continue with the E F G and A keys to sound the remaining guitar notes for the chord you specified Let us summarize all this the six keys you have pressed so far are assigned to the virtual guitar strings This allows you to play guitar arpeggios that use the chord information you supplied in the CHORD area The exact phrasing of your arpeggios depends on the order in which you press the keys If you start pressing these string keys right after switching on the E 60 E 50 and before specifying a chord the Guitar mode sounds the basic pitches of the six strings i e E A D G B E As soon
455. ttings on the following page ARRAIS Sarre ARRANGER ARRANGER MELODY ONE E CHORD NY BPTIONS ll INTEL TYPE TOUCH TEMPO CHANGE FILL IN TEHPO HALF BAR FILL RITARDANDO i a gg CPT Press the field of the parameter whose value you wish to change Parameter fields can also be selected using the DATA ENTRY lt gt buttons Set the desired value with the dial or the DECJ INC buttons ACCELER RITARD Allows you to set the degree ratio by which the tempo changes when the ACCELER or RITARD function is triggered Example if the tempo is currently J 100 the value 20 means that the tempo drops to J 80 or rises to J 120 Press the first field ACCELER RITARD and use the dial or the DEC INC buttons to select the ratio by which the tempo should increase decrease CPT 15 3825 Use this parameter to specify how long a Ritardando Accelerando should take In most cases 480 CPT i e one measure is probably the most musical choice E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Roland Tempo related settings Arranger Options W Using the Ritardando Accelerando functions 4 For general applications any Style division pro ceed as follows e Assign the RITARD and or ACCELER function D Beam controller page 53 Footswitch page 56 e Press the button to start Style play back e Move your hand over the D Beam controller or press the footswitch By assigning both controls you can increase ACC and decr
456. tyle will be written to a User Program page 88 The User Program in question refers to the name and memory area Next time you recall such a User Program the E 60 E 50 will therefore use the referenced Style If the Style in question cannot be found an error message appears and the E 60 E 50 goes on using the previously selected Style Press the button to return the main page The name of the selected Style appears in the field Style Finder quickly locating Styles The E 60 E 50 allows you to have a great many Music Styles handy in its internal memory on a memory card and on floppy disks For the internal memory and the memory card in the PCMCIA slot there is a powerful Finder function for quickly locating the Style you need Here is how to use this function 1 Press the FINDER button The display changes to STYLE LIST COUNTRY o By sere f Al TEMPO SAMBA i110 SLROCK1 60 SLR0OCK2 64 ASLSWNG1 60 FOUND found entries GLOBAL total number of Styles in that memory area 2 Specify the memory area that contains the Style you need EXTERNAL MEMORY or INTERNAL MEMORY The E 60 E 50 is shipped with several Styles that reside in its internal memory The display shows a list of 5 Styles in the selected memory area internal memory card or floppy disk 3 If the name of the Style you want to use to is already displayed press its line In our example Y Shuffle
457. u are using 2 Insert the floppy disk into the drive or the memory card into the PCMCIA slot 3 Press the button 4 5 6 7 E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Roland Format Press the field YIEE MELA AMIDISET USER E NILA JPROGRAM i BO PAP EI 2 i FUE Ra The display changes to KORMANY HEDIA FORMAT EXTERNAL FLOPPY MEMORY DISK wu b On the display page that appears now press the or Field This obviously depends on whether you inserted a floppy disk or a memory card The display now responds with ORMAJ AIl the Data on the EXTERNAL memory will be lost i Are You Sure In the case of a floppy disk the External Memory message will read Floppy Disk of course Press the field to format your disk card Press or to return to the FORMAT display page without formatting Wait for the confirmation to appear then press the button to return to the main page Note Never remove the floppy disk or memory card while the operation is in progress Wait for the confirmation to appear before returning to business as usual 131 E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Disk Media functions Im port User Progra m function 2 AGUA Ha conversion session since the creation of The E 60 E 50 allows you to import User Programs or Source instrument VA VA7 VA 76 7 G1000 Performance Memories created with a VA 76 VA 7 or G 1000 EM 2000 G 1000 EM 2000 User P
458. u can also select this page by pressing the buttons field Press the slider icon of the paramater you want to set and use the dial or DEC INC buttons or the V LINK keys highest octave to manipulate the video pictures CLIP Allows you to select the Edirol DV 7PR s clips or palettes 1 32 You can also press the keys in the highest octave to switch clips 148 PALETTE Allows you to switch between palettes 1 20 DISSOLVE TIME Allows you to set the transition speed between images The velocity values of the keys in the highest octave can also be used to control the transition speed but only for the eight clips that can be selected via the key board SPEED PLAYBK Moving the fader icon upwards speeds up playback moving it downwards slows down playback At the center position playback speed is normal VFX Allows you to change video effects This func tion is not available if the receiving video processor is set to Off Note VFX2 is not supported by the DV 7 BRIGHTNESS Controls the brightness of the image COLOR CB Allows you to change the color There are five steps that can be selected by pressing the lever several times green violet blue red original clip color COLOR CR Allows you to change the color green violet blue red original clip color 195 E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Miscellaneous D Beam Allows you to control several effects this E 60 depends on the function you assign
459. u to assign the desired User Programs to the selected Index or to remove existing User Program assignments e After performing step 4 above press the field PROGRAM VIDE e Use the FINDER USER PRG STYLE LINK and fields to locate the desired file See page 90 e Press the fields of all User Programs you wish to assign to the selected Index category Selected User Programs are displayed on a light back ground To remove a User Program from the selected cate gory press its field so that it turns dark e f necessary use the PAGE fields to go to previ ous or subsequent list pages e Press to confirm your changes and return to the USER PROGRAM LIST page Press to return to the main page and to cancel your changes which means that the assignments you have just changed will be lost Note After 50 modifications established defeated assign ments the E 60 E 50 performs an automatic confirmation like when you press the field Windex Copy This function allows you to copy one Index category along with all its User Program assignments to a another category You could take advantage of this for merging two categories to free up one category for new assignments Note There are eight Index categories in all You cannot cre ate additional categories e After performing step 4 above press the field sier IE My Favorite e In the left column SOURCE press the field whose ass
460. ue to extreme settings FO Low Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the low range FO High Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the high range Level 0 127 Output level E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Roland Appendix 11 Limiter Compresses signals that exceed the specified level preventing distortion from occurring Unlike a compressor it does not boost the level of weaker signals Limiter Threshold 0 127 Adjusts the volume at which compression begins Limiter Release 0 127 Allows you to specify how long signal compression should remain in effect after the signal volume falls below the Threshold value Limiter Ratio 1 5 1 2 1 4 1 100 1 Allows you to spec ify how strongly volume peaks should be compressed Choose 100 1 if the Threshold level must never be exceeded which is a true Limiter function Panpot L64 0 63R Stereo location of the output sound This is a mono effect that combines incoming sig nals You can however place the processed signal any where between the left and right channels Limiter Post Gain 0 6 12 18dB Adjusts the out put gain Use this parameter to make up for a significant volume loss due to extreme settings FO Low Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the low range FO High Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the high range Level 0 127 Output level 12 Hexa Chorus Uses a six phase chorus six layers of chorused sound to cre ate a dense and spatial effect
461. uld be affected by the edit operation Change this setting only if your edit operation should not end exactly on the selected beat MCOPY MODE Replace Mix Allows you to specify how the data should be copied E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Roland Editing 16 track songs REPLACE The selected FROM TO range overwrites the data of the destination track in the area to which the selected data are copied Copy From 2 1 0 To 3 1 0 Into 4 1 0 SRC TRACK 1 DST TRACK 1 a EEEEEwEE GA PA Ai MIX AA NA MIX The data in the selected range of the source track are added to the data on the destination track In most instances REPLACE is probably a good choice when you set DATA TYPE to ALL or when you wish to substitute a given message cluster modulation data for example for other messages of the same type thus creating a perfect reproduction of a given control effect MIX on the other hand may be useful for adding data to a number of beats or bars that were not there before while keeping the original notes in those places You can choose the kind of data to be copied using DATA TYPE Note The E 60 E 50 has no Undo function Saving your song before copying will allow you to load the previous ver sion if something goes wrong E COPY TIMES 1 999 Sets the number of copies you wish to make The value 3 means that you will end up with 3 contiguous copies DATA TYPE Allows you to select the dat
462. unction 10 Play the new part 11 Press the RECORDER button to stop recording 2 ED EASS1 N 3 d CLEAN MUTE UP dJ SOPRANO EXP 5 a OPENHARD 1 LOWALTOVIE STYLE ETIHAD CONVERTER The track that contains your new part is highlighted left column for easy identification That row also contains a horizontal bar to signal that the track now contains data 12 Listen to your song page 41 If you like it save it if you re not happy with your part go back to Adding more parts on p 42 In step 3 however press the field and use the dial or the DEC INC buttons to select Replace Note See p 129 if you want to change just single notes or other aspects of your song which is called editing 43 E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Quick Start 3 Press the button icon 4 Enter the name Saving your song A song you save to becomes a Standard MIDI File that can be played back with the E 60 E 50 but also with any other SMF compatible sequencer There are two ways of saving new or edited songs e Via the button and the related menu see p 176 e By pressing the field on the 16 track Sequencer page Note Whenever you leave the 16 track Sequencer page by pressing the button the display shows a Song has been changed message that asks you whether you want to save your changes Press the field and proceed Here we will show you how to save your song using the field 1
463. unctions are only available for songs and Styles and only if you select or EXTERNAL MEMORY See also pages 34 and 73 E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Roland Delete Delete Use these functions to delete the selected User Pro gram Set MIDI Set set song or Music Style from the internal memory a memory card or floppy disk Carefully check whether you selected the right file type and the right file before pressing EXECUTE Deleted files cannot be restored Also note that MIDI Sets contain 8 different settings which means that you may lose a lot more than origi nally intended And if you delete a song that Is used ina Play List that list changes loses one step while a User Program whose Link function you activated no longer finds the required song On the other hand deleting a User Program Set only does away with the List and GLOBAL settings the User Programs it refers to remain intact 7 Press the field of the file you want to rename 1 Press the button The display changes to 2 If you intend to work with a floppy disk or memory card insert it into the drive or slot 3 Press the field 4 Select the data type you want to delete by pressing 8 9 _ _ els es ar bone se me az po p9 so If you selected the RENAME page by accident press Back This takes you back to the previously selected page If available and necessary press the STYLE NAME COUNTRY
464. unlimited User Programs can reside in the internal memory or on a memory card You can even load them individually using the User Program Finder To keep this massive amount of information manage able the E 60 E 50 works with User Program Set Lists hence the button Such lists are what their name suggests enumerations of User Program files stored in the same memory area as the list file itself User Program list 8 references x 18 pages G G G G G g G G G G The referenced User f Programs are saved separately Data File Internal Beare metry or Data File Hab sl Data File Same system for pages 2 18 Set Lists are references to User Programs They do not contain those registrations The advantage of User Pro gram Set Lists is that loading a completely different set of registrations takes less than a second loading User Program Sets on an older Roland arranger instrument took much longer This allows you to prepare one set of User Programs for weddings another for corporate events a third for anniversaries etc that may access the same User Pro gram data here and there If you change a User Pro gram e g by selecting another sound for the LW part that change is automatically adopted by all Set Lists that refer to that User Program od Saving your settings
465. ure to replace it with the same PSB 4U model Do not use other adapters as these may damage your E 60 E 50 beyond repair FOOTSWITCH EXPRESSION socket Connecting an optional DP 2 DP 6 or FS 5U to this socket allows you to control an assignable function by foot Alternatively you can connect an optional Roland EV 5 or FV 300L expression pedal to this socket that can be used for setting the volume of the selected parts by foot OUTPUT R L MONO sockets These sockets need to be connected to an external amplifier mixing console etc They transmit the music generated by the Arranger Recorder and Key board parts USB port The USB port can be used for archiving purposes and MIDI data transfer from to a computer 7 MIDI OUT IN sockets These sockets allow you to connect the E 60 E 50 to external MIDI devices for a variety of applications receiving song data in realtime from an external sequencer transmitting your playing and the data of the song you are playing back to an external sequencer using the E 60 E 50 as master keyboard in your MIDI setup etc Note The MIDI functions can be accessed via the E 60 E 50 s Menu page 187 Frequently used MIDI settings can be written and recalled as MIDI Sets E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Roland Front panel DC IN 12V 2 5A fe SO gt ece FOOTSWITCH OUTPUT_____ EXPRESSION R L MONO HOLD socket An optional DP 2 DP 6 or BOSS FS 5U footswitch connecte
466. ust the time from the direct sound until when the left delay sound is heard Delay Right 0 0 500 0ms Adjusts the time until the delay sound is heard Delay Feedback 9800 0 980 Adjusts the amount of the delay sound that s fed back into the effect Negative settings invert the phase Delay HF Damp 200 8000Hz Bypass Adjusts the fre quency above which sound fed back to the effect is filtered out If you don t want to filter out any high frequencies set this parameter to BYPASS Modulation Rate 0 05 10 0Hz Frequency i e modula tion speed Modulation Depth 0 127 Adjust the depth of the modulation Modulation Phase 0 180 deg Adjust the spatial spread of the sound FO Low Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the low range FO High Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the high range Balance D100 0W D50 50W DO 100W Volume bal ance between the direct D and the effect sound W Level 0 127 Output level 20 3 Tap Delay The Triple Tap Delay produces three delay sounds center left and right Delay Left 200 1000ms note Adjust the time from the direct sound until when the left delay sound is heard Delay Right 200 1000ms note Adjust the time from the direct sound until when the right delay sound is heard Delay Center 200 1000ms note Adjust the time delay from the direct sound until when the center delay sound is heard Delay Feedback 9800 0 980 Adjusts th
467. usually variations of the snare bass drum etc But turning the dial long enough you could also select any other sound even a melodic one Press the field of the parameter you want to edit and use the dial or the DEC INC buttons to set the desired value VOLUME Use this parameter to set the volume of the selected drum instrument PANPOT Use this parameter to set the stereo place ment of the selected drum instrument O means no change negative values shift the instrument towards the left and positive values shift it towards the right REVERB amp CHORUS Use these parameters to set the reverb or chorus send level of the selected drum instru ment The effects themselves can be changed on the COMMON page see below VELOCITY This parameter allows you to modify the velocity range of the drum instrument in question O means that the recorded values are left untouched a negative setting reduces all velocity values by the same amount leaving variations intact while a positive set ting shifts all velocity values in a positive direction PITCH Use this parameter to tune the selected drum instrument higher or lower O means that the pitch is left unchanged If necessary press the field to save your set tings page 108 COMMON After pressing the field the display looks as follows The parameters on this page apply to the entire song or Music Style and do therefore not de
468. value is set to the beginning of the selected track s BEAT 1 number of beats per bar Specifies the beat position The number of available beats depends on the time signature in the selected area CPT 1 119 Refers to the starting CPT position CPT is short for Clock Pulse Time the smallest unit used by the E 60 E 50 There are 120 CPTs to every beat of a 4 4 bar Change this setting only if your edit operation should start after the selected beat WTO By default the TO position is set to the last event of the selected track or the last event of the longest track when you select ALL BAR 1 last measure of the track or song This is where you specify the bar position of the last measure to be edited T33 BEAT 1 number of beats per bar Specifies the beat position The number of available beats depends on the time signature in the selected area CPT 1 119 Refers to the last clock that should be affected by the edit operation Change this setting only if your edit operation should not end exactly on the selected beat MI DAIA TYPE Allows you to select the data to be shifted ALL All parameters listed below Note Only note messages P Bender Pitch Bend data Control Control change messages Change Prog C Program change messages NRPN Non registered parameter number messages These are parameter control functions of the GS GM2 format that are easier to use than
469. values to be modified within the specified FROM TO time range W Fine tuning the setting range Before setting TO NOTE and possibly FROM NOTE or TO CC and possibly FROM CC it might be a good idea to decide how you want to use the note or value indica tions Depending on the option you choose FROM NOTE or FROM CC may not even be available so that setting it beforehand would be a waste of time EQUAL Only the selected note or value will change The note value can be set using the TO NOTE TO CC field UNEQUAL All notes or values except the one you select will change The note value can be set using the TO NOTE TO CC field Only notes or values above the selected one will change The note value can be set using the THAN NOTE THAN CC field T 37 LOWER Only notes or values below the selected one will change The note value can be set using the THAN NOTE THAN CC field INSIDE Only the notes or values between FROM NOTE FROM CC and TO NOTE TO CC will change Only the notes or values below FROM NOTE FROM CC and above TO NOTE TO CC will change WE EXECUTE Press this field to confirm your settings and edit the data DELETE Unlike the ERASE function DELETE not only erases the data but also the measures beats and or CPT units so that all data that lie behind the TO position are shifted towards the beginning of the track s For this reason you cannot choose the data type to be erased
470. ve 2 Use the scrollbar or the dial move through the available Play Lists if available and necessary 3 Press the field that corresponds to the list you need E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Roland Play List function M Renaming a Play List To change the name of the selected Play List press the field PLAY LISTERENAME PITA FALERA Enter the desired characters page 44 and press the field After a brief confirmation the dis play returns to the Play List page leaves the list intact and takes you back to the PLAY LIST page where you could select another Play List to be deleted Note You do not need to save a Play List after renaming it W Deleting a Play List See steps 1 3 above and then press the field As this may ruin your work you need to confirm this command Lear LIST yara A EET This File will be DELETED from Internal Memory a Play List Saturday Live T ARE YOU SURE You have three options here Be aware that a deleted Play List cannot be recalled deletes the list file but not the Standard MIDI Files it refers to leaves the list intact and takes you back to the PLAY LIST page Note Even if you delete the selected list this only disposes of the play list proper The songs assigned to the list are not deleted and can thus be used in isolation or assigned to new other Play Lists 119 E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Editing Lyrics Editing Ly
471. ver you select that Style or when you take advantage of the One Touch function page 65 The One Touch function however allows you to filter the tempo setting by activating TEMPO which means that the preset tempo is no longer loaded automati cally On the other hand you are free to change a Music Style s tempo any time See Changing the tempo on p 25 That value can be written to a User Program and will then be set every time you select that User Program e The Style and also song tempo is displayed on the main page PRESET AUTO and LOCK allow you to specify what happens when you select another Style If Arranger playback is stopped when you select another Style If the Arranger is run ning when you select another Style PRESET The Style s preset tempo is loaded AUTO The Arranger loads the preset tempo of the new Style played back at the LOCK The preset tempo of tempo of the previous the new Style isnot Style loaded Instead the Style will be played at the current tempo The new Style is TEMPO CHANGE RITARD and ACCELER 1 2 3 The ACCELER RITARD parameter allows you to speed up or slow down the Style tempo by the amount you set here To use these functions you must assign them to the D Beam controller or an optional foot switch There are three Ritardando functions one for all Style patterns one for Ending patterns and one for Fill Ins They all use the TEMPO CHANGE se
472. ways select the value of the shortest note you recorded Otherwise your part no longer sounds the way you played it because shorter notes are shifted to the wrong positions MSTRENGTH 0 100 Use this parameter to specify how precise the timing cor rection should be 0 means that the selected RESOLU TION value is not applied 0 correction while 100 means that all notes are shifted to the mathematically cor rect positions Maybe first try values between 50 and 85 to pre serve at least part of the original feel If the result is not acceptable repeat the operation with the same or a higher value WE EXECUTE Press this field to confirm your settings and edit the data E 60 E 50 Music Workstation Roland Editing 16 track songs ERASE ERASE allows you to selectively delete data either within a specified range of measures beats or clocks or from the entire track s When DATA TYPE is set to ALL ERASE substitutes the required number of rests for the data you delete so that you end up with the equivalent number of blank measures If you also want to eliminate the measures themselves use DELETE see below MTRACK ALL 1 16 Allows you to select the track you wish to edit You can also select ALL here in which case the operation applies to all tracks except the MASTER track The MASTER track can only be selected and edited in isolation see p 139 FROM BAR 1 last measure of the track or so
473. witched on and uses the sound R amp B B3 You can change the location of the split point originally C4 To select Organ mode press the EASY SETTING button Split and Whole modes Using the SPLIT Keyboard Mode Split means that the keyboard is divided into two halves You can use the LWR and MBS parts in the left half and the UP1 and UP2 parts in the right E 60 LWR MBS UP1 UP2 E 50 LWR MBS UP1 UP2 Here s how to split the keyboard 1 Return to the main page and press the field mr mer a New Song Strummlin Pop Free Panel PAKI Le Lower St Slow Stri a Nature eass XY Ac_Bass i 2 Press the PART ON OFF buttons of the parts MBS LWR etc you want to play via the keyboard and switch off the parts you do not need If a part is on its button lights Note If you like you can activate a Hold function for the LWR part That way briefly pressing the notes to be played by the LWR part is enough The Arranger has a similar function called ARR Hold See Lower Hold on p 78 Note If none of the PART ON OFF buttons lights the notes you play on the keyboard will not be audible It would how ever be possible to go on controlling the Arranger Note Your settings can be written to a User Program and recalled at a later stage See p 88 AG Setting the split point 1 2 When the field lights the keyboard is split in two halves The split point is located at the C key
474. wo tracks 125 DW a 61 Dynamic ar ee AE EI EEEE 67 EG EE Ei 68 DEEG eis Ee aaa nd 50 E Easy Chord Mode aaa GE ER 67 SUN APA 26 Edit Otra AA EE ON 129 Index aa 98 114 MIDI 2 eee 188 EC irs die oh ER ER EE N 81 Keyboard parts 008 83 Molti FA i de tend EE ER eed ont 84 OVENVIEW scccccaconcoenneeneannee 81 SONG Se REED RR Re RR RE 86 EE LAE esse eee eo oe on eee 29 DUE SESSE E ee 31 eelte de AA 29 EMF OOO di ES io na aaa 182 ENDIRIT Ge 24 ENON G2i22e0e2222e00240n0s 24 55 60 Env PCs oe a 79 DEE RR AA 79 Mal OO Eed 80 PUVEICNE sos E ES EE GEE NR RR 79 105 2 1 2 FOUA esse EER ER Ee 131 132 164 Erase Event la 146 174 UU ia ES EE ee 131 Style COMDOSEF ee 164 SAPA AA 146 173 a APAPAP 189 2X AG 139 EXGCUIG ac KKK KKK KE NAB EE ER KERR ei 129 i E AA 197 Expression BR EE N Oo 56 Style COMDOSEF ee 161 dele EER RR PR EE ON EN 28 F FAC Ol AA 197 EES ORE EE EE GE EE SE EE EE ER ID PEE 53 EE EE PAP PI 25 Fast forward See 37 FOV EEE 159 FeedbaCKicciiiriiriiiiiiiii 84 86 107 File Gee EE EI EF 180 NONG SE ERA ER ER AR GE 35 Fill as GEGEE GEE GESE EG EER IG OG 23 61 DOW ER EE ON 53 61 BN oe EE EES EE EE EE EE EG 156 Half Bar ee eee eee eee 55 70 In On User Program Change 92 BESETE ask SA EED deed 69 Fi ed ALO GR sd ne ee 69 UP ccc cece cece neces 53 61 Filter it tee eres 189 190 ee O KEEP TEEPEE PETTY 40 IN
475. y to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Unauthorized changes or modification to this system can void the users authority to operate this equipment This equipment requires shielded interface cables in order to meet FCC class B Limit For Canada NOTICE This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference Causing Equipment Regulations AVIS Cet appareil num rique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du R glement sur le mat riel brouilleur du Canada For the U K IMPORTANT THE WIRES IN THIS MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING CODE BLUE NEUTRAL BROWN LIVE As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug proceed as follows The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to t
476. yle is usually dangerous Song files can be referenced by Play Lists and User Programs Link function If you change their names here such songs are no longer loaded when they should Similarly Music Styles can be assigned to CUSTOM memories By changing their name you also estrange them from the CUSTOM memories that refer to them The procedure is the same for all file types you can rename so we will describe the steps only once 1 Press the button The display changes to BSc amp Mable Hs f Jane LAA Id IN FORMAT NG DELETE FILE PAN cory G3 KU IMPORT PR USER PROGRAM e 2 If you intend to work with a floppy disk or memory card insert it into the drive or slot 3 Press the field 4 Select the data type you want to rename by press ing its field USER oo PEGERAM EE The display changes to One On AE Ot BENAWIZ SAY LE 92 SmilePop tg Pop 100 i New Song NEWSONG MID o Groovy Rock i on eek Ts ORDINARY ORDINARY MID KIKI 5 6 User Program Set and MIDI Set files only have a file name you can change As there is no Finder function ality for such files the display looks a little different Marlee MU ser Ee Factory Live 2004 My User Program Select the media INTERNAL MEMORY disk or memory card If available and necessary use the sorting func tions and or the Finder These f
477. ypes that should not be included in the copy See VIEW on p 141 e To select several consecutive events press the dial while turning it towards the left upward direction or the right downward direction All events selected in this way appear on a dark back ground e Press the COPY EVENT button Icon Each new Selection will replace the previous one See also below W PLACE EVENT This function is only available if the sequencer s clip board already contains events that you copied using COPY EVENT For safety reasons it would be a good idea to use this function immediately after copying events Press the button icon The following pop up appears BRA E3 MINERO ryp Biana o Note Message 1 01 000 CC O Bank Select Meel 0 Te CAE aE PERC ESEUENT SS OG to PAIRS AS ce j gt Tv lt dk BERE Ke i gas ed pay ie Med ed AA SE LG 1 01 060 Note 70 Bb4 33 1 02 000 Note 37 C 2 111 1 ad Ys Pg EP Specify the position where the first event should be inserted by pressing the BAR and fields and entering the desired value for each unit using the dial or the DEC INC buttons Press the field to confirm your settings and paste the new event s Press to close the pop up window without applying your changes Note Events inserted with PLACE EVENT are added to any events that may already exist in that area Existing events are thus not pushed towards the end of the so

Roland E-60 User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents